1
1.1 & 1.2 Properties of the Ism—Status
We stated that the ism has 4 properties: status, number gender, and type. We will be discussing status
in this session.
Status is all about what a word is doing in the sentence. There are three kinds of Statuses:
1. Doer Status ( ‫ رفع‬Raf’)
2. Detail Status (‫ نصب‬Nasb)
3. After “of” status (‫ جر‬Jarr)
1. Doer status is given to the Doer of the Fi’l and answers the question, who did the Fi’l? In the
sentence: He ate his lunch. “He” did the eating, and is considered the doer.
2. Detail Status refers to details of the Fi’l and answers additional questions related to the Fi’l like
who, what, where, when, why, and how. For example:
He ate his lunch quickly outside yesterday.
What did he eat? Lunch
When did he eat? Yesterday
Where did he eat? Outside
How did he eat? Quickly
All of these words are considered details of the Fi’l.
3. After “of” status words don’t answer questions related to the Fi’l itself. It’s easy to spot these
words in cases like: Messenger of Allah SWT . Sometimes, the word “of” isn’t as obvious and the
words need to be rearranged so you can spot it. For example: “his lunch” can be rephrased to say:
lunch of his. The word after “of” is now clear.
2
EXERCISES:
A. In the following sentences, circle the doer of the Fi’l ‫فعل‬, underline the details of the Fi’l ‫فعل‬, and box words
that are after “of” status (the words in bold are Fi’l ‫فعل‬, so they don’t get any of these labels).
1. a. The kids played in the room with a bat.
b. They broke the lamp.
c. Their mother yelled at them.
2. a. The kids opened a lemonade stand in the summer.
b. The grown-ups bought all the lemonade.
c. The teenagers stole their money.
3. a. His alarm clock rang loudly.
b. He hit the “snooze” button repeatedly.
c. He got stuck in traffic.
B. Now, make questions out of the bold following words that reflect the word’s role in the sentence:
1. a. The kids played in the room with a bat.
Kids: ____________________________
In the room: ______________________
Bat: ____________________________
b. They broke the lamp.
They: ___________________________
The lamp: ________________________
c. Their mother yelled at them.
Mother: _________________________
At them: ________________________
3
Their: ___________________________
2. a. The kids opened a lemonade stand in the summer.
Kids: _________________________________
Lemonade stand: _______________________
In the summer: _________________________
b. The grown-ups bought all the lemonade.
Grown-ups: ____________________________
Lemonade: _____________________________
c. The teenagers stole their money.
Teenagers: ____________________________
Money: _______________________________
Their: ________________________________
3. a. The alarm clock rang loudly.
Alarm clock: __________________________
Loudly: ______________________________
b. He hit the “snooze” button repeatedly.
He: _________________________________
“Snooze” button: ______________________
Repeatedly: ___________________________
c. He got stuck in traffic.
He: _________________________________
In traffic: _____________________________
4
ANSWER KEY:
Section A:
1. a. The kids played in the room with a bat.
b. They broke the lamp.
c. Their mother yelled at them.
2. a. The kids opened a lemonade stand in the summer.
b. The grown-ups bought all the lemonade.
c. The teenagers stole their money.
3. His alarm clock rang loudly.
He hit the “snooze” button repeatedly.
He got stuck in traffic.
Section B:
1. Kids: Who played? ; In the room: Where did they play? ; Bat: What did they play with?
They: Who broke the lamp? ; The lamp: What did they break?
Mother: Who yelled? ; At them: Yelled at who? ; Their: Mother of whose?
2. Kids: Who opened a lemonade stand? ; Lemonade stand: What did they open? ; In the summer: When
was it opened?
Grown-ups: Who bought the lemonade? ; Lemonade: What was bought?
Teenagers: Who stole? ; Money: What did the teenagers steal? ; Their: Money of whose?
3. Alarm clock: What rang? ; Loudly: How did it ring?
He: Who hit?; “Snooze” button: What did he hit? ; Repeatedly: How did he hit it?
He: Who got stuck?; In traffic: Where did he get stuck?
1
1.1 & 1.2 Properties of the Ism—Status
Today was our introduction to the ism, beyond the definition. The first thing I gave you was that the ism
has four properties: status, number, gender, and type. I had you write this down, and asked you to
remember them even if you don’t understand them. I’ll be teaching you the properties in this order,
beginning with status:
Status is all about what a word is doing in the sentence. There are three kinds of Statuses:
1. Doer Status ( ‫ رﻓﻊ‬Raf’)
ْ
2. Detail Status (‫ ﻧﺼﺐ‬Nasb)
3. After “of” status (‫ ﺟﺮ‬Jarr)
1. Doer status is given to the Doer of the Fi’l and answers the question, who did the Fi’l? In the
sentence: He ate his lunch. “He” did the eating, so “He” is considered the doer.
2. Detail Status refers to details of the Fi’l and answers additional questions related to the Fi’l like who,
what, where, when, why, and how. For example:
He ate his lunch quickly outside yesterday.
What did he eat? Lunch
When did he eat? Yesterday
Where did he eat? Outside
How did he eat? Quickly
All of these words are considered details of the Fi’l.
3. After “of” status words don’t answer questions related to the Fi’l itself. It’s easy to spot these words
in cases like: Messenger of Allah SWT . Sometimes, the word “of” isn’t as obvious and the words
need to be rearranged so you can spot it. For example: “his lunch” can be rephrased to say: lunch of
his. The word after “of” is now clear.
2
EXERCISES:
A. In the following sentences, circle the doer of the Fi’l ‫ﻓﻌﻞ‬, underline the details of the Fi’l ‫ﻓﻌﻞ‬, and box
words that are after “of” status (the words in bold are Fi’l ‫ﻓﻌﻞ‬, so they don’t get any of these labels).
1. a. The kids played in the room with a bat.
b. They broke the lamp.
c. Their mother yelled at them.
2. a. The kids opened a lemonade stand in the summer.
b. The grown-ups bought all the lemonade.
c. The teenagers stole their money.
3. a. His alarm clock rang loudly.
b. He hit the “Snooze” button repeatedly.
c. He got stuck in traffic.
B. Now, make questions out of the bold following words that reflect the word’s role in the sentence:
1. a. The kids played in the room with a bat.
Kids: ____________________________
In the room: ______________________
Bat: ____________________________
b. They broke the lamp.
They: ___________________________
The lamp: ________________________
c. Their mother yelled at them.
Mother: _________________________
At them: ________________________
3
Their: ___________________________
2. a. The kids opened a lemonade stand in the summer.
Kids: _________________________________
Lemonade stand: _______________________
In the summer: _________________________
b. The grown-ups bought all the lemonade.
Grown-ups: ____________________________
Lemonade: _____________________________
c. The teenagers stole their money.
Teenagers: ____________________________
Money: _______________________________
Their: ________________________________
3. a. The alarm clock rang loudly.
Alarm clock: __________________________
Loudly: ______________________________
b. He hit the “Snooze” button repeatedly.
He: _________________________________
The “Snooze” button: ______________________
Repeatedly: ___________________________
c. He got stuck in traffic.
He: _________________________________
In traffic: _____________________________
4
ANSWER KEY:
Section A:
1. a. The kids played in the room with a bat.
b. They broke the lamp.
c. Their mother yelled at them.
2. a. The kids opened a lemonade stand in the summer.
b. The grown-ups bought all the lemonade.
c. The teenagers stole their money.
3. His alarm clock rang loudly.
He hit the “Snooze” button repeatedly.
He got stuck in traffic.
Section B:
1. Kids: Who played? ; In the room: Where did they play? ; Bat: What did they play with?
They: Who broke the lamp? ; The lamp: What did they break?
Mother: Who yelled? ; At them: Yelled at who? ; Their: Mother of whose?
2. Kids: Who opened a lemonade stand? ; Lemonade stand: What did they open? ; In the summer:
When was it opened?
Grown-ups: Who bought the lemonade? ; Lemonade: What was bought?
Teenagers: Who stole? ; Money: What did the teenagers steal? ; Their: Money of whose?
3. Alarm clock: What rang? ; Loudly: How did it ring?
He: Who hit?; The “Snooze” button: What did he hit? ; Repeatedly: How did he hit it?
He: Who got stuck?; In traffic: Where did he get stuck?
1
1.3 Properties of the Ism—Status (Ending Sounds Practice)
In the previous session, we learned that there are three kinds of Status:
1. Doer Status (which we are now calling Raf’ ‫) رفع‬
ْ )
2. Detail Status (which we are now calling Nasb ‫نصب‬
3. After “of” Status (which we are now calling Jarr ‫) جر‬
We noted that English identifies the doer based on the sentence sequence. In other words, if we say,
‘Bob helped Joe,’ then Bob is the doer. If we say, ‘Joe helped Bob,’ then Joe is the doer. In Arabic, on
the other hand, it isn’t the sequence that tells us who the doer is. Rather, it’s the way a word sounds at
the end that determines whether it’s the doer (R), the detail (N), or after ‘of’ (J).
The following are the ending sounds for each of the statuses we’ve learned:
Raf’ :
ُ(u) or ُ(un) ending
Nasb:
ُ (a) or ُ (an) ending
Jarr:
ُ (i) or ُ (in) ending
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪ by looking at the ending sounds:‬جر ‪ْ or Jarr‬‬
‫‪,‬نصب ‪ , Nasb‬رفع’ ‪State whether each of the red words is either Raf‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ن عي‬
‫هل أتاك حديث الغاشية (‪)١‬وجوه ي ْومئذ خاشعة (‪)٢‬عامل ناصبة (‪)٣‬ت ْصل نارا حامية (‪)٤‬ت ْسقى م‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن ضريع (‪)٦‬ال ي ْسمن وال ي ْغني م ْ‬
‫آنية (‪)٥‬ليْس لهْ طعام إال م ْ‬
‫ن جوع (‪)٧‬وجوه ي ْومئذ ناعمة (‪)٨‬لسعِيا راضية‬
‫(‪)٩‬ف جنة عالية (‪)١١‬ال ت ْسمع فِيا الغية (‪)١١‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن يشاء م ْ‬
‫ن أ ْمره عل م ْ‬
‫ْشكون (‪)١‬ينزل الْمالئكة بالروح م ْ‬
‫ن‬
‫أت أ ْمر الل فال ت ْستعجلوه س ْبحانه وتعال عما ي‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫عباده أ ْن أ ْنذروا أنه ال إل إال أنا فاتقون (‪)٢‬خلق السماوات و ْ‬
‫األرض بالحق تعال عما يْشكون (‪)٣‬خلق‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن نطفة فإذا هو خصي مبي (‪)٤‬واألنعام خلقها لك ْم فِيا دفء ومنافع ومْنا تأكلون (‪)٥‬ولك ْم‬
‫اإلنسان م‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فِيا َجال حي تريحون وحي تْسحون (‪)٦‬وتحمل أثقالك ْم إل بل ل ْم تكونوا بالغيه إال بشق األنفس إن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ربك ْم لرءوف رحي (‪)٧‬والخ ْيل والبغال والحمي لَتكبوها وزينة ويخلق ما ال تعلمون (‪)٨‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أل ْم تر ك ْيف فعل ربك بأ ْصحاب الفيل (‪)١‬أل ْم يجعل ك ْيدهْ ف تضليل (‪)٢‬وأ ْرسل عل ِْي ْم طيا أبابيل (‪)٣‬ت ْرمِي ْم‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بحجارة م ْ‬
‫ن سجيل (‪)٤‬فجعله كع ْصف مأكول (‪)٥‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ن عي‬
‫هل أتاك حديث الغاشية (‪)١‬وجوه ي ْومئذ خاشعة (‪)٢‬عامل ناصبة (‪)٣‬ت ْصل نارا حامية (‪)٤‬ت ْسقى م‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن ضريع (‪)٦‬ال ي ْسمن وال ي ْغني م ْ‬
‫آنية (‪)٥‬ليْس لهْ طعام إال م ْ‬
‫ن جوع (‪)٧‬وجوه ي ْومئذ ناعمة (‪)٨‬لسعِيا راضية‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫(‪)٩‬ف جنة عالية (‪)١١‬ال ت ْسمع فِيا الغية (‪)١١‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن يشاء م ْ‬
‫ن أ ْمره عل م ْ‬
‫ْشكون (‪)١‬ينزل الْمالئكة بالروح م ْ‬
‫ن‬
‫أت أ ْمر الل فال ت ْستعجلوه س ْبحانه وتعال عما ي‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫عباده أ ْن أ ْنذروا أنه ال إل إال أنا فاتقون (‪)٢‬خلق السماوات و ْ‬
‫األرض بالحق تعال عما يْشكون (‪)٣‬خلق‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن نطفة فإذا هو خصي مبي (‪)٤‬واألنعام خلقها لك ْم فِيا دفء ومنافع ومْنا تأكلون (‪)٥‬ولك ْم‬
‫اإلنسان م‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فِيا َجال حي تريحون وحي تْسحون (‪)٦‬وتحمل أثقالك ْم إل بل ل ْم تكونوا بالغيه إال بشق األنفس إن‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ربك ْم لرءوف رحي (‪)٧‬والخ ْيل والبغال والحمي لَتكبوها وزينة ويخلق ما ال تعلمون (‪)٨‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫’‪Raf‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أل ْم تر ك ْيف فعل ربك بأ ْصحاب الفيل (‪)١‬أل ْم يجعل ك ْيدهْ ف تضليل (‪)٢‬وأ ْرسل عل ِْي ْم طيا أبابيل (‪)٣‬ت ْرمِي ْم‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بحجارة م ْ‬
‫ن سجيل (‪)٤‬فجعله كع ْصف مأكول (‪)٥‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Jarr‬‬
‫‪Nasb‬‬
1
1.5 Properties of the Ism—Status (Pair Combinations)
We’ve learned how to tell the status of a word using ending sounds (U/UN for Raf’, A/AN for Nasb, and I/IN for
ٌ
ً
Jarr). So if we looked at the word ‫ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬, we would say that ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬
is Raf’, ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎ‬
is Nasb, and ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬
is Jarr.
ٍ
Now, if we wanted to talk about two Muslims, we would add some letters at the end of the word and wouldn’t
use the U/UN, A/AN, and I/IN sounds we learned before. Look at the column at the left to see what I mean:
(2R) ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎن‬
ْ
(2N) ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ْ
(2J) ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ْ
ٌ ‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺴﻠﻢ‬
Raf’
ً
‫ﺴﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ ﻣ‬Nasb
‫ﺴﻠﻢ‬
ٍ ‫ﻣ‬
Jarr
ْ
When you add one of these endings, ‫ ان‬,‫ ﻳﻦ‬, ‫ ﻳﻦ‬, it means ‘two Muslims’. When you add ‫ان‬, it’s ‘two Muslims’
ْ
ْ
in Raf’ form (or 2R), when you add ‫ﻳﻦ‬, it’s ‘two Muslims’ in Nasb form (2N), and when you add ‫ﻳﻦ‬, it’s ‘two
ْ
Muslims’ in Jarr form (2J). You may have noticed that 2N and 2J look the same and end with ‫ﻳﻦ‬. So how do you
know when the word is Nasb and when it’s Jarr? After learning some more Arabic, you’ll be able to tell the
difference between the two. For now, go through the exercises below to become more familiar with these new
ending combinations.
2
EXERCISES:
A. How would you say the underlined words in Arabic? Think of the job each word is playing to figure out
its status.
1. Pen (‫)ﻗﻠﻢ‬
2. Student (‫)ﻃﺎﻟﺐ‬
a. The pen broke.
________________
a. The two students studied.
________________
b. I found a pen.
________________
b. I met two students.
________________
c. The two pens write well.
________________
c. The book of the student
________________
d. She gave him two pens.
________________
d. The student passed.
________________
e. The two pens’ erasers are new.________________
e. Two students’ grades
________________
3. Messenger (‫)رﺳﻮل‬
4. Muslim (‫)ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬
a. Two messengers came.
________________
a. A Muslim travelled.
________________
b. They followed a messenger.
________________
b. I met a Muslim.
________________
c. The messenger taught.
________________
c. Two Muslims travelled.
________________
d. The call of the messenger
________________
d. I met two Muslims.
________________
e. The call of two messengers
________________
e. The religion of a Muslim is Islam.
________________
B. What is the Status of the following words? Circle all that may apply.
ٌ‫ﺎء‬
R
N
ْ
‫ﺑﲔ‬#‫ﻣ‬
ً
‫ﺷﺠﺮة‬
J
R
N
J
R
N
J
ْ
‫ﻗ ْﺮﻧﲔ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺘﺎن‬
R
N
J
R
N
‫وا( ْﻳﻦ‬
J
R
N
J
‫اﻟﺠﺒﺎل‬
R
N
‫اﻟﺮﻳﺢ‬
J
R
N
J
3
ANSWER KEY:
Section A:
ٌ
1. a) doer status; ‫ﻗﻠﻢ‬
ً
b) detail status; ‫ﻗﻠﻤﺎ‬
ْ
d) detail status (pair); ‫ﻗﻠﻤﲔ‬
2. a) doer status (pair); ‫ﻃﺎﻟﺒﺎن‬
ٌ
d) doer status; ‫ﻃﺎﻟﺐ‬
c) doer status (pair); ‫ﻗﻠﻤﺎن‬
ْ
e) after ‘of’ status (pair); ‫ﻗﻠﻤﲔ‬
ْ
b) detail status (pair); ‫ﻃﺎﻟﺒﲔ‬
ْ
e) after ‘of’ status (pair); ‫ﻃﺎﻟﺒﲔ‬
3. a) doer status (pair); ‫رﺳﻮﻻن‬
d) after ‘of’ status; ‫رﺳﻮل‬
ٍ
ٌ
4. a) doer status; ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬
ْ
d) detail status (pair); ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ً
b) detail status; ‫رﺳﻮﻻ‬
ْ
c) after ‘of’ status; ‫ﺎﻟﺐ‬
َ
ٍ ‫ﻃ‬
ٌ
c) doer status; ‫رﺳﻮل‬
e) after ‘of’ status (pair); ‫رﺳﻮﻟﲔ‬
ً
b) detail status; ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎ‬
c) doer status (pair); ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎن‬
e) after ‘of’ status; ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬
ٍ
Section B:
ٌ‫ﺎء‬
َ
R
ً
‫ﺷﺠﺮة‬
N
ْ
‫ﺑﲔ‬#‫ﻣ‬
َ
N / J
‫ﺟﻨﺘﺎن‬
َ
R
ْ
‫َﻗ ْﺮ َﻧﲔ‬
N / J
‫وا( ْﻳﻦ‬
َ َ
N / J
‫اﻟﺠﺒﺎل‬
R
‫اﻟﺮﻳﺢ‬
َ
N
1
1.6 Properties of the Ism—Status (People Plural Combinations)
In the past, we learned that if we add a single harakah, or one sound, to the end of a singular word, we
can determine if it’s Raf’, Nasb, or Jarr status. These are known as ending sounds. If we add a few letters
to the end of the word (as we did to make words pair in the previous session), that’s called an ending
combination. Today, we will learn another set of ending combinations: the people plural combinations.
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ْ
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ٌ
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬
ً
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬
ٍ
When an ‫ اﺳﻢ‬ism ends with an ‫ ون‬or and ‫ﻳﻦ‬, it’s talking about a group of people. This combination is
never used for anything that doesn’t have a brain. In the Quran, you will see this set of combinations
used for angels and jinn, as well.
Note: Whenever you are trying to determine the status of an ‫ اﺳﻢ‬ism, you have to ask yourself, ‘Is this
an ending sound or an ending combination?’ You should ALWAYS check for ending combinations first.
Once you’ve decided that it’s an ending combination, you can’t judge it as an ending sound. If you can’t
find a combination, then look for ending sounds.
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪In the following list below, see if you can tell the status of each of the red words. Make sure to check for‬‬
‫‪combinations first.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻓﺌﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔ ٍﺲ واﺣﺪ ٍة‬
‫‪ .3‬إذا ﺟﺎءك اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﻘﻮن‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎدﻗﲔ واﻟﻘﺎﻧﺘﲔ واﻟﻤﻨﻔﻘﲔ‬
‫‪ .4‬و *‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .5‬واﻟﺮاﺳﺨﻮن ﰲ اﻟﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫*‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻓﻮق اﺛﻨﺘﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻛﺎﻓﺮة‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .8‬إ *ن ﰲ ذﻟﻚ ﻟﻌﱪ ًة ﻷو‪ 8‬اﻷ ْﺑﺼﺎر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺂر‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﻀ *ٍ‬
‫‪ .10‬واﻟ *‬
‫=ان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﲑ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻋﺬاب ﻳﻮ ٍم ﻛﺒ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻫﺬان ﺧ ْﺼﻤﺎن اﺧﺘﺼﻤﻮا ﰲ ر *‪ْ E‬ﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬و‪ F‬ﻣ‪H‬ﺿﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﲔ‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻣﻦ ﻃ ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .15‬أﺟ ًﻼ و أﺟﻞ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .16‬ﻃﺎ‪M‬ﻔﺘﲔ‬
‫‪ .17‬ﺑﺎﻟﺤ *ﻖ‬
‫‪ .18‬ﺑﺬﻧﻮ‪ْ E‬ﻢ‬
‫‪ .19‬اﻟﻤﻜ *ﺬﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .20‬اﻟﻤﻠ‪Q‬ﲔ‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Ending Combination: Pair, Nasb or Jarr
Ending Sounds: Jarr (first word), Jarr (second word)
Ending Combination: People Plural, Raf’
Ending Combination: People Plural, Nasb or Jarr
Ending Combination: People Plural, Raf’
Ending Combination: Pair, Nasb or Jarr
Ending Sound: Raf’
Ending Sound: Nasb
Ending Sound: Nasb (first word), Jarr (second word)
Ending Combination: Pair, Raf’
Ending Sound: Nasb (first word), Jarr (second word), Jarr (third word)
Ending Combination: Pair, Raf’
Ending Combination: People Plural, Raf’
Ending Sound: Jarr
Ending Sound: Raf’
Ending Combination: Pair, Nasb or Jarr
Ending Sound: Jarr
Ending Sound: Jarr
Ending Combination: People Plural, Nasb or Jarr
Ending Combination: Pair, Nasb or Jarr
1
1.8 Properties of the Ism—Status (Feminine Plural Combinations)
So far, we have learned three ways of telling Status:
ٌ
1. Ending Sounds:ِ َ ُ ٍ ً ◌
ْ
ْ
2. Pair Combinations (AANI AYNI AYNI as in ‫)ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎن ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
3. People Plural Combinations (OONA EENA EENA as in ‫)ﻣﺴﻠﻤﻮن ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
The last set of combinations we learned today is the feminine plural combination. Here’s an example we
covered in class:
ٌ
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤ‬
‫ﺎت‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺘﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
ْ
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
ٌ
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
(Raf’)
ً
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
(Nasb)
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤ ٍﺔ‬
(Jarr)
Here, you haven’t learned anything new (it’s
ْ
just putting on ending sounds or ‫ ان‬and ‫)ﻳﻦ‬
ٌ
The last column has the new combination: the addition of the ‫ ات‬and ‫ات‬
ٍ . You may have noticed that the Nasb
and Jarr versions for all the combinations look the same, and that’s also true here with the feminine plural
combination.
Just a note of caution, though:
ٌ
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
These endings look like ending sounds! A common mistake is to not recognize the ‫ ات‬ending
‫ت‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎ‬
as a combination and label the status of these words as you would an ending sound. If you
‫ت‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎ‬
made this mistake, you would say that ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
is Jarr although, in reality, it could be Nasb
ٍ
or Jarr from the feminine plural chart.
If you see ‫ ال‬at the beginning of a word, you will not see any tanween at the end. When you see
something like ‫ اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬or ‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬, you still have the ‫ ات‬combination going on, so don’t mistaken it
as an ending sound when you’re trying to determine the status.
2
EXERCISES:
A. See if you can tell the status of every red word in the following Quranic passage. Be sure to check for
combinations first.
ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ً ‫(ﻓﺎﻟﻤﻐﲑات ﺻ ْﺒ‬٢) ‫ﺣﺎ‬
ً ‫واﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺎت ﺿ ْﺒ‬
ً‫ْﻌﺎ‬4 ‫(ﻓﻮﺳﻄﻦ ﺑﻪ‬٤) ‫(ﻓﺄﺛ ْﺮن ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘ ًﻌﺎ‬٣) ‫ﺤﺎ‬
ً ‫(ﻓﺎﻟﻤﻮرﻳﺎت ﻗﺪ‬١) ‫ﺤﺎ‬
ْ ْ
ٌ
ٌ
ْ
ٌ ‫ْﺴﺎن ﻟﺮﺑﻪ ﻟ;ﻨ‬8‫(إن اﻹ‬٥)
‫(أﻓﻼ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ إذا‬٨) ‫ﺐ اﻟﺨﲑ ﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻪ‬
‫ﻧ‬
‫إ‬
‫و‬
(
٧
)
‫ﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻬ‬
‫ﺸ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻚ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ذ‬
=
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻪ‬
‫ﻧ‬
‫إ‬
‫و‬
(
٦
)
‫ﻮد‬
6
6
6
6
6
ْ
ٌ
ْ
(١١) ‫ ٍﺬ ﻟﺨﺒﲑ‬S‫ ْﻢ ﻳ ْﻮﻣ‬Q ‫ ْﻢ‬Q6 ‫ن ر‬6 ‫(إ‬١٠) ‫اﻟﺼﺪور‬
‫ﰲ‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻞ‬
‫ﺼ‬
‫ﺣ‬
‫و‬
(
٩
)
‫ﻮر‬
‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻘ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺜﺮ ﻣﺎ ﰲ اﻟ‬
6
6
ٌ
B. Read the ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬
chart on page 6 in the 201 Handout Packet. The first two charts cover all the combinations
we have learned in class. Try to see if you can run through both charts using the following words. The
answer key is attached to this handout.
ٌ ‫ﻣ ْﺆﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ٌ
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ر ٌس‬6 ‫ﻣﺪ‬
ْ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫‪Section A:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺣﺎ )‪(٢‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﻐﲑات ﺻ ْﺒ ً‬
‫واﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺎت ﺿ ْﺒ ً‬
‫ﺤﺎ )‪(١‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﻮرﻳﺎت ﻗﺪ ً‬
‫ﺤﺎ )‪(٣‬ﻓﺄﺛ ْﺮن ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘ ًﻌﺎ )‪(٤‬ﻓﻮﺳﻄﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪ً ْ4‬ﻌﺎ )‪(٥‬إ ‪6‬ن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻹ‪ْ8‬ﺴﺎن ﻟﺮﺑﻪ ﻟ;ﻨ ٌ‬
‫ﺐ اﻟﺨﲑ ﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ )‪(٨‬أﻓﻼ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ إذا ﺑﻌﺜﺮ ﻣﺎ ﰲ‬
‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻪ‬
‫ﻧ‬
‫إ‬
‫و‬
‫(‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻬ‬
‫ﺸ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻚ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ذ‬
‫=‬
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻪ‬
‫ﻧ‬
‫إ‬
‫و‬
‫(‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻮد‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪N/J‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪N/J‬‬
‫‪N/J‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫اﻟﺼﺪور )‪(١٠‬إ ‪6‬ن ر‪ْ Q‬ﻢ ‪ْ Q‬ﻢ ﻳ ْﻮﻣ‪ٍ S‬ﺬ ﻟﺨﺒﲑ )‪(١١‬‬
‫ﰲ‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻞ‬
‫ﺼ‬
‫ﺣ‬
‫و‬
‫(‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻮر‬
‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻘ‬
‫اﻟ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪Section B:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮً ا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٍﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮون‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮات‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳ ٍﺔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪان‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪون‬
‫ﻣ ْﺆﻣ ٌ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑ ًﺪا‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑ ٍﺪ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪة‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪ ًة‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪ ٍة‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻋﺎﺑﺪ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬ر ٌس‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬ر ًﺳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬ر ٍس‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨًﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣ ٍ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨ ًﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺎن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﲔ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﻮن‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺪ ‪6‬رﺳ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺎت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨ ٍ‬
1
1.9 Properties of the Ism—Comprehensive Notes and Introduction to Light & Heavy
Here is what your notes should look like regarding everything we’ve covered so far:
An ‫ اﺳﻢ‬has 4 properties (Status, Number, Gender, and Type)
1. Status
A. Forms of Status
ْ
ٌ
ٌ ‫ﻧﺼ‬
(detail) ‫ﺐ‬
(after ‘of’) ‫ﺟﺮ‬
ْ
(doer) ‫رﻓ ٌﻊ‬
B. How to tell Status
a. By Ending Sounds:
U / UN = R
A / AN = N
I / IN = J
b. By Ending Combinations
i.
Pair Combinations
ii.
iii.
AANI = 2R
AYNI = 2N
AYNI = 2J
People Plural
Combinations
OONA = Pl.R
EENA = Pl.N
EENa = Pl.J
Feminine Plural Combinations
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ٌ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
ْ
‫ﺎت‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺴ ﻠ ﻤ‬
ْ
‫ﺎت‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺴ ﻠ ﻤ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ْ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
ْ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
AATUN = Pl.F.R
AATIN = Pl.F.N
AATIN = Pl.F.J
C. Pronouns are weird (leave this in your notes for now. We’ll come back to this later.)
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ًﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٍﻢ‬
ٌ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ٍﺔ‬
2
All the words in the chart above (pg.6 of the 201 Handout) are considered FAT or HEAVY. When you say the
chart out loud, you’ll notice that all of the words end in an ‘n’ sound, even if they don’t have a ‫ ن‬at the end.
To make a word light, and not HEAVY, the extra ‘n’ sound is taken off. If you see a double accent on words such
ْ ‫ ﻣ‬or ‫ﻣﻬﺎﺟﺮ‬, you can lighten them by reducing them to single accents like ‫ ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻢ‬and ‫ﻣﻬﺎﺟﺮ‬. Another way
as ‫ﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ٍ
َ
َ
ْ ‫ ﻣ‬and
you can lighten a word is by removing the extra ‫ ن‬from its ending combination. In cases like ‫ﺴﻠﻤﻮن‬
َ
ْ ْ
ْ
‫ﻣ" َﻗﲔ‬, the light versions would be ‫ ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﻮ‬and ‫ ﻣ" َﻗ ْﻲ‬, respectively.
َ
َ
Here is light version of the chart on pg.6:
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﻮ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎ‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ْﻲ‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ْﻲ‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﺎ‬
َ َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘ ْﻲ‬
َ َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘ ْﻲ‬
َ َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ َﺔ‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
َ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
For the feminine plural column, I didn’t take the ‫ ت‬off. I’m only concerned about removing the extra ‘n’ sound,
not ‫ت‬.
3
EXERCISES:
A. Try the following exercises to see if you can recognize which words in red are LIGHT and HEAVY. If the
word is HEAVY, how would you make it light?
Note: You don’t ask if a word is LIGHT or HEAVY if the
word has an ‫ ال‬on it.
‫ اﻟﻨَﺎس‬.1
ْ
‫ ﻓﺌﺘﲔ‬.2
‫ اﻟﺼﺎدﻗﲔ‬.3
‫ﲔ‬
ٍ ‫ ﻃ‬.4
‫ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬.5
‫ ﻋﺎﻗﺒﺔ‬.6
‫ ﻣﻘﻴﻤﻲ اﻟﺼﻼة‬.7
‫ اﻟﻤﻜﺬﺑﲔ‬.8
ٌ
‫ آﻳﺎت‬.9
‫ ﻋﻤ ٍﺪ‬.10
‫ان‬9‫ اﻟﻮا‬.11
ْ
‫ اﻟﺤﻤﺪ‬.12
‫ﻳﻦ‬9‫ ﻳ ْﻮم ا‬.13
‫ﺎت‬
ٍ ‫ ﺻﺎﻟﺤ‬.14
‫ رﺳﻮل اﷲ‬.15
‫ اﻟﺴﺪس‬.16
‫ﻳﻦ‬9‫ ﺧﺎ‬.17
ْ
‫ اﻟﻤ"ق‬. 18
ْ
‫ ﻧﻔ ٍﺲ‬.19
‫ واﺣﺪة‬.20
4
ANSWER KEY:
(H = HEAVY ; L = light; if the light/HEAVY question isn’t asked of this word = NA)
1. NA
2. H (L = ‫ﺘ ْﻲ‬C‫) ﻓ‬
3. NA
4. H (L = ‫)ﻃﲔ‬
5. H (L = ‫)آﺧﺮي‬
6. L
7. L
8. NA
9. H (L = ‫)آﻳﺎت‬
10. H (L = ‫)ﻋﻤﺪ‬
11. NA
12. NA
13. L
14. H (L = ‫)ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺎت‬
15. L
16. NA
17. H (L = ‫ي‬9‫)ﺧﺎ‬
18. NA
ْ
19. H (L = ‫) ﻧﻔﺲ‬
20. L
1
1.11 Properties of the Ism—Light and Heavy (Notes and Practice)
Here are a few notes we made in class about light and heavy status that we can refer back to later once we learn
more Arabic:
•
•
ْ ‫ون ﻳﻦ‬, etc).
Normally, a word should have HEAVY status (with ٍ ً ٌ◌, ‫ﻳﻦ ان‬,
Light isms are suspicious…if a word is light, it needs to have a reason to be so. There are four reasons
that a word can be light:
1.
2.
3.
4.
________________
________________
________________
________________
Although we didn’t mention them in class, a word must have one of these four reasons in order to be light. We’ll
learn what these four reasons are later.
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫?‪Are the red words light or heavy‬‬
‫ﻮم )‪ْ ((٢٠‬ﺸﻬﺪه اﻟْﻤﻘﺮﺑﻮن )‪(٢١‬إن ْ‬
‫وﻣﺎ أ ْدراك ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻮن )‪(١٩‬ﻛﺘ ٌ‬
‫ﺎب ﻣ ْﺮﻗ ٌ‬
‫اﻷﺑﺮار ﻟﻔﻲ ﻧﻌ ٍ‪(٢٢) 1‬ﻋ‪ 4‬اﻷرا‪6‬ﻚ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻀﺮة اﻟﻨﻌ‪ْ ((٢٤) 1‬ﺴﻘ ْﻮن ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻮم )‪(٢٥‬ﺧﺘﺎﻣﻪ ﻣ ْﺴﻚ وﰲ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺣ‬
‫ر‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻈﺮون )‪(٢٣‬ﺗ;ف ﰲ وﺟﻮﻫ@ ﻧ‬
‫ﻴﻖ ﻣﺨﺘ ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓ ْﻠﻴﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ اﻟْﻤﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻮن )‪(٢٦‬وﻣﺰاﺟﻪ ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ‪ْ P‬ﺴﻨ ٍ‪(٢٧) 1‬ﻋ ْﻴﻨًﺎ (‪R‬ب ‪S‬ﺎ اﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﻮن )‪(٢٨‬إن ا‪U‬ﻳﻦ أﺟﺮﻣﻮا ﻛﺎﻧﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ا‪U‬ﻳﻦ آﻣﻨﻮا ﻳﻀﺤﻜﻮن )‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺑﺎﷲ ﻓﻘﺪ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻳﻜﻔ ْﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻏﻮت وﻳ ْﺆﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻛﺮاه ﰲ ا‪Z‬ﻳﻦ ﻗ ْﺪ ﺗﺒﲔ اﻟﺮ ْﺷﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟْﻐﻲ ﻓﻤ ْ‬
‫اﺳﺘ ْﻤﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟْ ْ‬
‫;وة‬
‫ﻻإ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻔﺼﺎم ‪h‬ﺎ واﷲ ‪ٌ j‬‬
‫ﻴﻊ ﻋﻠ‪(٢٥٦) ٌ1‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺛﻘﻰ ﻻ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ﻮم )‪ْ ((٢٠‬ﺸﻬﺪه اﻟْﻤﻘﺮﺑﻮن )‪(٢١‬إن ْ‬
‫وﻣﺎ أ ْدراك ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻮن )‪(١٩‬ﻛﺘ ٌ‬
‫ﺎب ﻣ ْﺮﻗ ٌ‬
‫اﻷﺑﺮار ﻟﻔﻲ ﻧﻌ ٍ‪(٢٢) 1‬ﻋ‪ 4‬اﻷرا‪6‬ﻚ‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻮم )‪(٢٥‬ﺧﺘﺎﻣﻪ ﻣ ْﺴﻚ وﰲ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻴﻖ ﻣﺨﺘ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻈﺮون )‪(٢٣‬ﺗ;ف ﰲ وﺟﻮﻫ@ ﻧﻀﺮة اﻟﻨﻌ‪((٢٤) 1‬ﺴﻘﻮن ﻣﻦ رﺣ ٍ‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓ ْﻠﻴﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ اﻟْﻤﺘﻨﺎﻓﺴﻮن )‪(٢٦‬وﻣﺰاﺟﻪ ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ‪ْ P‬ﺴﻨ ٍ‪(٢٧) 1‬ﻋ ْﻴﻨًﺎ (‪R‬ب ‪S‬ﺎ اﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﻮن )‪(٢٨‬إن ا‪U‬ﻳﻦ أﺟﺮﻣﻮا ﻛﺎﻧﻮا‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ا‪U‬ﻳﻦ آﻣﻨﻮا ﻳﻀﺤﻜﻮن )‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻛﺮاه ﰲ ا‪Z‬ﻳﻦ ﻗ ْﺪ ﺗﺒﲔ اﻟﺮ ْﺷﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟْﻐﻲ ﻓﻤ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻳﻜﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻏﻮت وﻳﺆﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﷲ ﻓﻘﺪ اﺳﺘﻤﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟ;وة‬
‫ﻻإ‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻔﺼﺎم ‪h‬ﺎ واﷲ ‪ٌ j‬‬
‫ﻴﻊ ﻋﻠ‪(٢٥٦) ٌ1‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺛﻘﻰ ﻻ‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
1
1.12 Properties of the Ism—Flexibility
Overview of Status:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Forms (R, N, J)
How to Tell Status (Ending Sounds, Ending Combinations)
Light or Heavy (normally, a word is heavy and must have a reason to be light)
Flexibility
In class today, we covered our last lesson on status, the flexibility of a word, and took the following
notes:
Flexibility:
1. Flexible (most words)
2. Non-Flexible (few words)
3. Partly Flexible (special words)
1. Flexible words: Most words in Arabic are like play dough—you can bend them however you want.
You can take a word like ٌ‫ م ْس ِلم‬and bend it to be ٌ‫م ْس ِل ًما‬, or bend it again and turn it into ٌ‫م ْس ِلم‬. We
ُ
ُ
ُ
can bend them however we want, in terms of status. All words on pg.6, and any word consistent
with the endings on pg.6, are flexible words.
2. Non-flexible words: There are a few words in Arabic that sound the same whether you say them in
Raf, Nasb, or Jarr status, and will not change at all. Words that sound like they end in an alif behave
ْ
ْ
this way, such as: ‫ك ِريٌا‬
َ ‫ه َدى ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌحسنىٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ َهذا ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌيحيىٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌ ٌز‬
ُ
َ
َ
َ
َ
ُ
3. Partly Flexible words: While fully flexible words look different in their Raf’, Nasb, or Jarr status, and
Non-flexible words look the same regardless of their status, partly flexible words have a slightly
different way of showing their status. I’ve listed the Raf’, Nasb, and Jarr versions of a fully-flexible
word (‫هود‬
ُ ( and a partly flexible word (‫)يوسف‬:
ٌ ‫ود‬
ٌ ‫ه‬
ُ ٌ
ٌ ٌ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ٌي‬
َ ‫وس‬
ُ ُ
ٌ‫هودًا‬
ُ
ٌ‫ف‬
ٌ َ ‫وس‬
ٌ ‫ي‬
ُ ُ
ٌ‫هود‬
ُ
ٌ‫ف‬
ٌ ‫ي‬
ُ ‫وس‬
ُ ُ
2
Do you notice the differences? ‫ يوسف‬isn’t heavy in any status, and Its Jarr version looks just like its
Nasb version. This is because a partly flexible must always be light, and cannot take an ‘i’ or ‫كرسة‬
sound. Remember than lightness means that a word cannot have double accents like ‘un,’ ‘an,’ or
‘in,’ nor can its combination end with a ‫ن‬.
In class, we limited our discussion to two kinds of partly flexibles: names of places and non-Arab
names. There are four Arab Prophets: ٌ‫محمدٌص‬,‫شع ْيب‬
ٌ ٌ, ‫هود‬
These names will not be
ُ , and ‫صالِح‬.
َُ
َ
considered partly-flexible because they are Arabs. All other names of prophets, therefore, will be
considered non-Arab. This eliminates the guessing game for you. Otherwise, you would have been
left in the dark wondering which are Arab in the Quran and which aren’t.
3
EXERCISES:
A. Use the following as a guide to make the Raf’, Nasb, and Jarr versions of each of the following words.
The answer key is attached.
ً ‫صالحٌصال‬
ٌ‫حا ٌصالِح‬
(fully flexible)
َ ِ َ ِ َ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ٌ ‫( يع ُقوبٌيع ُقوبٌيع ُق‬partly flexible because he’s not Arab)
‫وب‬
َ
َ َ
َ ُ
َ
‫يونُس‬
ُ
‫فِ ْرع ْون‬
َ
ْ
‫ائيل‬
ِ ‫ِإس َر‬
‫موىس‬
ُ
‫ِإ ْسحاق‬
َ
‫َهارون‬
ُ
ْ
‫اعيل‬
ِ ‫ْس‬
َ ‫ِإ‬
‫شع ْيب‬
َُ
‫مح َمد‬
َ ُ
‫هود‬
ُ
B. Using the translation as a clue, tell whether the words in red are partly flexible:
The nation of Ibraheem
The establisher of prayer
The reward of the workers
The book
Taqwa
The well-grounded ones
Dawood
The people of Yathrib
The love of desires
Ilyaas
ْ
ٌ ٌ‫اهي‬
ِ ‫ ِم َّلٌَ ِإبر‬.1
َ
َ
‫الص ََل ٌِة‬
َ ٌَ‫ مُ ِقي‬.2
ْ ‫ أ‬.3
ٌ ‫جرٌالعا ِم ِل‬
َ‫ي‬
َ ُ َ
ٌ ٌ‫الكتاب‬
.4
ُ َ ِ
ْ
ٌ ‫ َتقوى‬.5
َ
ٌ‫اسخُون‬
.6
ِ ‫الر‬
َ
َ
ٌ ‫ داو‬.7
‫ود‬
ُ َ
ْ
ْ
ٌ ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ أَه َلٌيث ِر‬.8
َ
َ
ُ
ٌ ٌ‫ات‬
ٌ‫ حب‬.9
ِ ‫الش َهو‬
َ َ ُ ُ
ْ
ٌ ‫اس‬
ٌ ‫ ِإلي‬.10
َ َ
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫‪Section A:‬‬
‫مح َمدٌمح َم ًداٌمح َمدٌ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اع َ ٌ‬
‫يل‬
‫ٌإ‬
‫يل‬
‫اع‬
‫ْس‬
‫إ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫يل‬
‫اع‬
‫ْس‬
‫ْس ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِإ َ‬
‫اقٌ‬
‫إ ْسحاقٌإ ْسحاقٌإ ْس‬
‫ح َ‬
‫ِ َ ُِ َ َ ِ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يلٌ‬
‫ائ ُ‬
‫ائ َ‬
‫ائ َ‬
‫يلٌ ِإسر ِ‬
‫يل ٌِإسر ِ‬
‫ِإسر ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫يونُسٌيونُسٌيونُسٌ‬
‫ُ ُ ُ َ ُ َ‬
‫ً‬
‫ٌهودٌ‬
‫ٌهودا ُ‬
‫هود ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ٌشع ْيبٌ‬
‫ٌشع ْي ًبا‬
‫شع ْيب‬
‫َُ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َُ‬
‫ٌهارونٌ‬
‫هارونٌهارون‬
‫َ ُ ُ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ‬
‫موىسٌموىسٌموىسٌ‬
‫ُ َ ُ َ ُ َ‬
‫فِ ْرع ْونٌفِ ْرع ْونٌفِ ْرع ْونٌ‬
‫َ ُ َ َ َ َ‬
‫)‪(FF = Fully Flexible; NF = Non-Flexible; PF = Partly Flexible‬‬
‫‪Section B:‬‬
‫‪PF‬‬
‫‪FF‬‬
‫‪FF‬‬
‫‪FF‬‬
‫‪NF‬‬
‫‪FF‬‬
‫‪PF‬‬
‫‪PF‬‬
‫‪FF‬‬
‫‪PF‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬
‫‪2.‬‬
‫‪3.‬‬
‫‪4.‬‬
‫‪5.‬‬
‫‪6.‬‬
‫‪7.‬‬
‫‪8.‬‬
‫‪9.‬‬
‫‪10.‬‬
1
2.1 Properties of the Ism—Introduction to Number
There is a lot of overlap between the study of status and number, so you will have to do very little work
in understanding this lesson. Just as Isms in Arabic have status, they also have number which tells you if
the word is singular, pair or plural. The ending sounds and ending combinations we learned in status can
also help you distinguish between words that are singular and words that are not. The following list
outlines the notes we took on number and how to tell if a word belongs to that number category:
Number:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Singular (ES)
Pair (EC)
People Plural (EC)
Feminine Plural (EC)
Human Broken Plurals (ES)
Non-human Broken Plurals (ES)
Words that end in ending combinations may be pair or plural (depending on the combination). You may
have noticed that ending sounds may be used to tell if a word is singular or a broken plural. This creates
a problem: how do you know if you’re looking at a singular word or a broken plural? That’s where
vocabulary comes in—you need to know what the word means, and that will be the deciding factor.
What is a broken plural, anyway? Broken plurals exist in English, as well. Normally, to make a word
plural in English, you can add an ‘s’ at the end (‘book’ becomes ‘books,’ ‘car’ becomes ‘cars, ‘house’
becomes ‘houses,’ etc). Any plural that doesn’t simply take an ‘s’ to become a plural is considered a
broken plural. Geese, teeth, and mice are examples of broken plurals in English because they aren’t
predictable and need to be learned on a case-by-case basis. Arabic broken plurals are simply defined as
any plurals that don’t end with a plural combination: pair (aani, ayni), people plural (oona, eena) or
feminine plural (aatun, aatin). Common examples of Arabic broken plurals you may have heard are
‫( ﻛﻔﺎر‬the plural of ‫)ﻛﺎﻓﺮ‬, ‫( رﺳﻞ‬the plural of ‫)رﺳﻮل‬, and ‫( ﻛﺘﺐ‬the plural of ‫)ﻛﺘﺎب‬.
2
EXERCISES:
What is the number of each of the red words below? How can you tell?
From clay
Those who will meet
Two groups
The ones who ignore
The truth
Drink
The promise of Allah
The ones who deliberately ignore
The two angels
Miraculous signs
Believing women
Two gardens
Two arguers
The reward of the workers
The subservient ones
ْ
‫ﲔ‬
ٍ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻃ‬.1
‫ ﻣ َﻼﻗﻮن‬.2
َ
ْ
‫ﻃﺎ َﻔﺘﲔ‬
.3
َ َ
ْ
‫ﲔ‬
‫ﺿ‬
‫ ﻣ‬.4
َ
‫ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ‬.5
َ
ٌ‫ ﺷﺮاب‬.6
َ َ
ْ
‫اﷲ‬
َ ‫ َوﻋﺪ‬.7
‫ﲔ‬
َ ‫ اﻟﻤ‬.8
َ ‫ﻜ ﺬﺑ‬
ْ
‫ﲔ‬.9
َ ‫اﻟﻤ َﻠ‬
َ
‫ آﻳﺎت‬.10
َ
ٌ
ْ
‫ ﻣﺆﻣﻨَﺎت‬.11
‫ ﺟﻨَﺘﺎن‬.12
َ َ
‫ﺧ ْﺼﻤﺎن‬
.13
َ َ
ْ ‫ أ‬.14
‫ﲔ‬
‫ﺟﺮ‬
َ
َ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠ‬
َ
‫ﲔ‬
َ .15
َ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﻧﺘ‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Sing, ES
Plrl, EC (People Plrl Comb)
Pair, EC (Pair Comb)
Plrl, EC (People Plrl Comb)
Sing, ES
Sing, ES
Sing, ES
Plrl, EC (People Plrl Comb)
Pair, EC (Pair Comb)
Plrl, EC (Fem Plrl Comb)
Plrl, EC (Fem Plrl Comb)
Pair, EC (Pair Comb)
Pair, EC (Pair Comb)
Plrl, EC (People Plrl Comb)
Plrl, EC (People Plrl Comb)
1
2.2 Properties of the Ism—Number cont’d.
We’re almost done with our study of number. So far, your notes should look like this:
Number:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Singular (ES)
Pair (EC)
People Plural (EC)
Feminine Plural (EC)
Human Broken Plurals (ES)
Non-human Broken Plurals (ES)
There’s only one crazy rule in Arabic that we’ll have to get used to: Arabs treat non-human broken
plurals like a ‘she.’
This is weird on two levels: the broken plural you’re talking about may have nothing to do with a girl and
the word is plural in meaning, but the Arabs treat it as a ‘she’ (singular and feminine), anyway. For
example, an Arab would say:
Fatimah bought four books. She read each of her quickly. After finishing, she returned all of her
to the store, even though she liked her very much.
In English, it would have been:
Fatimah bought four books. She read each of them quickly. After finishing, she returned all of
them to the store, even though she liked them very much.
You’ll get used to this rule as you practice identifying non-human broken plurals.
2
EXERCISES:
Broken Plurals: Tell the Number and Gender of the word
‫ ﻗﻠﻮ ْﻢ‬.1
Their hearts
ْ
Their hearing
‫ﻌ‬
ْ
.2
ْ ‫ أ ْﺑﺼﺎر‬.3
Their eyes
ٌ ‫ ﻋﺬ‬.4
‫اب‬
Punishment
The fools
‫ اﻟﺴﻔﻬﺎء‬.5
Darknesses
‫ﺎت‬
ٍ ‫ ﻇﻠﻤ‬.6
ٌ
# .7
ْ
‫ ٌﻢ‬$‫ ﺑ‬.8
Deaf people
Mute people
Blind people
Their fingers
Your witnesses
The rocks
The people
Gardens
Spouses
The names
The skies
Goblets
Backs
Heads
ْ
ٌ ‫ ﻋ ْﻤ‬.9
‫ﻲ‬
‫ أﺻﺎﺑﻌ‬.10
‫ ﺷﻬﺪاءﻛ ْﻢ‬.11
‫ اﻟﺤﺠﺎرة‬.12
‫ اﻟﻨﺎس‬.13
ٌ
‫ ﺟﻨﺎت‬.14
ٌ ‫ أ ْزو‬.15
‫اج‬
ْ
‫ اﻷ ﺎء‬.16
‫ اﻟﺴﻤﺎوات‬.17
‫ أﺑﺎرﻳﻖ‬.18
ٌ ‫ ﻇﻬ‬.19
‫ﻮر‬
ٌ ‫ رؤ‬.20
‫وس‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
S, F
S, M
S, F
S, M
S, F or PL,M (human broken plural)
PL, F
S, F or PL, M (human broken plural)
S, F or PL, M (human broken plural)
S, F or PL, M (human broken plural)
S, F
S, F or PL, M (human broken plural)
S, F
S, F or PL, M (human broken plural)
PL, F
S, F or PL, M (human broken plural)
S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
S, F
1
3.1 Properties of the Ism—Gender (Fake Feminine)
In English, we say that something is a ‘he,’ ‘she,’ or ‘it.’ ‘It’ does not exist in Arabic. In Arabic, everything
has a gender, a masculine or feminine gender. Something we would call an ‘it’ in English is given a fake
gender in Arabic. How do you know what the gender of a word is? Here’s a good rule of thumb:
Pretend that all words are masculine unless you find certain clues to make the word feminine.
By this logic, it would only make sense to study the feminine since everything else will be considered
masculine.
There are two kinds of feminine in Arabic:
1. Real Feminine
2. Fake Feminine
1. Real Feminine is just another word for female. Real feminine words will be considered feminine
ْ
ٌ
ٌ
whether the word is in Arabic or not. ‫( أم‬mom), ‫( ا ْﻣﺮأة‬woman/wife), ‫( أﺧﺖ‬sister), ‫( ﺧﺎل‬maternal
ٌ
aunt), ‫( ﻋﻤﺔ‬paternal aunt), ‫ ﺣ ْﺴﻨﻰ‬Husna, ‫ ﻋﺎ ﺸﺔ‬Ayesha, etc are examples of real feminine.
2. Fake Feminine: There are 3 kinds of fake feminine. We only covered one of them in class today:
a. If a word ends with ‫ ة‬, ‫ ٰى‬, or ‫ آء‬, chances are that the word is feminine.
ٌ
ْ
ْ
ٌ ْ
ٌ
‫( ر ﺔ‬mercy), ‫( ﻣﻐﻔﺮة‬forgiveness), ‫( ﺻﻼة‬prayer), ‫( ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺔ‬resurrection), ‫( ('ى‬good news),
ْ
ْ
‫( ﻛﱪى‬greater/greatest), ‫( ﺑ ْﻴﻀﺂء‬white), ‫( ز ْرﻗﺂء‬blue), ‫( ﺧﻀﺮآء‬green), etc are all considered
fake feminine.
ْ
ْ
However, ‫ﻋﺒ ْﻴﺪة‬, ‫ﻃﻠﺤﺔ‬, 4‫ ﻣﻮ‬, and ‫ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ‬are men’s names even though they end with ‫ ة‬or ‫ى‬
ٰ .
Since they already have a real gender, they’re not considered fake feminine.
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪Tell the Status, Number, and Gender:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻟ ْﻴ‪ً9‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻃﺎ ﻔﺘﲔ‬
‫‪ .3‬وﺑﻨﺎﺗ? ْﻢ‬
‫‪ .4‬اﻟ?ﺘﺎب‬
‫‪ .5‬آﻳﺎت‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺟﻨ ًﺔ‬
‫‪ .7‬اﻟﻤﺘﻘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .8‬اﻟﺼ‪D‬ى‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻣﻔﻠﺤﻮن‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻋﺬ ٌ‬
‫اب‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻇﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫‪ .12‬اﻟﺤﺠﺎرة‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻋ ْﻴﻨﲔ‬
‫‪ .14‬اﻟﻮا‪K‬ان‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .15‬اﻷﻗﺮﺑﻮن‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
1. N, S, F
2. N/J, PAIR, F
3. R, PL, F
4. R, S, M
5. R, PL, F
6. N, S, F
7. N/J, PL, M
8. R/N/J, S, F
9. R, PL, M
10. R, S, M
11. N/J, PL, F
12. R, S, F
13. N/J, PAIR, F
14. R, PAIR, M
15. R, PL, M
1
3.1.1 Fi’l Past Passive
We’ve finished the basics of grammar and started learning the meanings of the first ayaat of Surah Kahf.
We’re going to be starting Unit 3, Sarf, really soon. Before we do, though, we’re going to learn a few
things about passives. There are two kinds of passives: past passive and present passive. Passives are a
fi’l thing—not an ism or harf thing. Right now, we’ll focus on the past passives. Look at the fi’l below:
‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺗﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺘﻞ‬
‫درس‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
He wrote
He fought
He killed
He taught
He helped
In English, if I were to say, “He helped,” who’s the doer? “He” is. If I said, “The teacher helped,” who
helped? “The teacher” did. Now, if I said, “He was helped,” who helped? We don’t know. Likewise, if I
said, “The teacher was helped,” I don’t know who the doer is. I know the teacher was helped, but I don’t
know who did the helping. In cases like this, when the fi’l is mentioned, but you don’t know who the
doer is, you call that fi’l passive. The doer is a mystery. When you do know who the doer is like in “he
helped,” you’d say the fi’l is active.
You can make a word passive in English by adding words like “was,” “is being,” etc, for example, “He
sees” (active) becomes “He is being seen” (passive, because we don’t know who is doing the act of
seeing). Take a look at the second line to see how I’m going to make the first row passive:
‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺗﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺘﻞ‬
‫درس‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺗﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺘﻞ‬
‫درس‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
Notice when I wrote the second line, the ending always stayed ‘a.’ I didn’t mess with the ending at all. I
did, however, change the first couple sounds, and I made the same change to every word. I made the
word sound like there was an ‘u’ and then an ‘e.’ When you’ve got a past tense fi’l invaded by an ‘u’ and
‘e’ sound (remember, the last letter is off-limits), the fi’l becomes passive.
‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺗﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺘﻞ‬
‫در س‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
He wrote
He fought
He killed
He taught
He helped
‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺗﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺘﻞ‬
‫در س‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
It was written (“he
was written” is
doesn’t make
sense)
He was fought
He was killed
He was taught
He was helped
2
EXERCISES:
A. Which of the following words are passive?
ْ
ْ
(٨) ‫ وإذا اﻟﻤ ْﻮءودة ﺳ ﻠﺖ‬.8
ْ
ْ
(٩) ‫ﺐ ﻗﺘﻠﺖ‬
ٍ ‫ ﺑﺄي ذﻧ‬.9
ْ
(١٠) ‫ت‬34 ‫ وإذا اﻟﺼﺤﻒ‬.10
ْ
(١١) ‫ وإذا اﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻛﺸﻄﺖ‬.11
ْ
ْ
(١٢) ‫ وإذا اﻟﺠﺤ? ﺳ@ت‬.12
ْ
ْ ْ
(١٣) ‫ وإذا اﻟﺠﻨﺔ أزﻟﻔﺖ‬.13
ْ
ْ
ْ ‫ﺖ ﻧ ْﻔ ٌﺲ ﻣﺎ أ‬
(١٤) ‫ﺣﻀﺮت‬
‫ ﻋﻠﻤ‬.14
ْ
ْ
(١) ‫ إذا اﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻛﻮرت‬.1
ْ
ْ
(٢) ‫ وإذا اﻟﻨﺠﻮم اﻧﻜﺪرت‬.2
ْ
ْ
(٣) ‫ وإذا اﻟﺠﺒﺎل ﺳﲑت‬.3
ْ
ْ
(٤) ‫ وإذا اﻟﻌﺸﺎر ﻋﻄﻠﺖ‬.4
ْ
ْ
(٥) ‫ت‬3‫ وإذا اﻟﻮﺣﻮش ﺣ‬.5
ْ
ْ
(٦) ‫ وإذا اﻟﺒﺤﺎر ﺳﺠﺮت‬.6
ْ
(٧) ‫ وإذا اﻟﻨﻔﻮس زوﺟﺖ‬.7
B. Try to make each of the following words passive. Remember that you want and ‘u’ and ‘e’ sound
take over the fi’l if you want to make it a passive past tense. (Hint: You can use multiple u’s and
at least one ‘e’ when you want to make a passive past tense. This will come in handy when you
see a fi’l with lots of letters in it!)
‫ﺟﻌﻞ‬
‫أ ْرﺳﻞ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺄل‬
‫ﺗﺬ ﻛ ﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎون‬
‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺘﻞ‬
‫ﻊ‬S
‫ﺻﺎﺑﺮ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺪ ل‬
‫ﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺿﺮب‬
‫ﻗﺮأ‬
‫أﻣﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰل‬
C. Take the following fi’l, make them passive, and run through them through the entire past tense
chart.
‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬إذا اﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻛﻮرت )‪passive (١‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬وإذا اﻟﻨﺠﻮم اﻧﻜﺪرت )‪(٢‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬وإذا اﻟﺠﺒﺎل ﺳﲑت )‪passive (٣‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .5‬وإذا اﻟﻮﺣﻮش ﺣ‪3‬ت )‪passive (٥‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬وإذا اﻟﺒﺤﺎر ﺳﺠﺮت )‪passive (٦‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .7‬وإذا اﻟﻨﻔﻮس زوﺟﺖ )‪passive (٧‬‬
‫ﺳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬
‫أ ْرﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺘﻞ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺰل‬
‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮون‬
‫ﺻﻮﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫أﻣ ﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮئ‬
‫ﺿﺮب‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺒﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺒﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .8‬وإذا اﻟﻤ ْﻮءودة ﺳ ﻠﺖ )‪passive (٨‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺐ ﻗﺘﻠﺖ )‪passive (٩‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﺑﺄي ذﻧ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .10‬وإذا اﻟﺼﺤﻒ ‪34‬ت )‪passive (١٠‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .12‬وإذا اﻟﺠﺤ? ﺳ@ت )‪passive (١٢‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬وإذا اﻟﺠﻨﺔ أزﻟﻔﺖ )‪passive (١٣‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺖ ﻧ ْﻔ ٌﺲ ﻣﺎ أ ْ‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮت )‪(١٤‬‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻋﻠﻤ‬
‫‪A.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﻮا‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠ ْﻤ\ْ‬
‫ﻧﺼ ْﺮت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻤﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺒﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻛﺘﱭ‬
‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒ\ْ‬
‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮت‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺼ ْﺮت‬
‫ﻧﺼ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺼ ْﺮت‬
‫ﻧﺼ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺼ ْﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮوا‬
‫ﻧﺼ ْﺮن‬
‫ﻧﺼ ْﺮ ْ‬
‫[‬
‫ﻧﺼ ْﺮﺗﻦ‬
‫‪B.‬‬
‫‪C.‬‬
1
3.1.2 Fi’l Present Passive
We’re continuing our discussion on passives—just like there are past passive fi’l, there are present
passive fi’l, too. We know that the two sounds that take over a passive past tense are ‘u’ and ‘e’. Now, if
ْ
you want to make present tense fi’l like ‫ﻳﻜﺘﺐ‬, ‘He writes’ passive, two other sounds take over: ‘u’ and
‘a.’ We’re going to leave the last letter of the present tense alone—that’s off-limits. So:
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﺘﺐ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﺘﺐ‬
taken over by ‘u’
and ‘a’ sound
ْ
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﺘﺐ‬, ‘He writes,’ was made passive when it was taken over by an ‘u’ and ‘a’ sound, turning into ‫ﻳﻜﺘﺐ‬,
‘It was written.’ If I look at ‫ﻳﺪرس‬, for example, it already has an ‘u’ in it. so I just need to make one
change to make it passive, ‫ﻳﺪرس‬:
‫ﻳﺪرس‬
‫ﻳﺪرس‬
So, the two sounds that take over a past tense are ‘u’ and ‘e.’ In a past tense, sometimes you have
multiple letters. So what do you do to all the other letters? The idea is to leave the last letter alone. All
you have to do is make sure that the second-last letter is ‘e,’ and the rest should all be ‘u.’ You can have
as many ‘u’s as you need, but you need one ‘e.
On the other hand, if there are multiple letters in the present tense fi’l, you just need one ‘u’, and can
have as many ‘a’s as you need. I’m writing it out here for you so it’s easier to see where I’m going with
this:
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮون‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
‫ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮون‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮوا‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮوا‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
2
EXERCISES:
A. Make the following fi’l passive. Make sure you pay attention to whether or not the fi’l is past or
present tense so you know which two sounds are important!
ْ
‫ أﻧﺬر‬.1
ْ
‫ !ﻛﻮن‬.2
ْ
‫ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬.3
ْ
‫ ﺳﺒﺤﺖ‬.4
ْ
‫ ْﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬.5
‫ أﻣﺮوا‬.6
ْ
‫ ا ْﺳﺘﻤﻌﻦ‬.7
‫ ﻛﱪا‬.8
ْ
‫ ﻳﺄﻣﺮون‬.9
‫ ﻋﺬب‬.10
‫ ﻳﻘﺪر‬.11
ْ
ْ ‫ ا‬.12
‫ﺪت‬1‫ﺟ‬
ْ
‫ﺪ‬1‫ ﺗﺠ‬.13
‫ أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬.14
‫ ﻏﻔﺮ‬.15
‫ وﺟﺪ‬.16
B. Take the following verbs, make them passive, and run through the past tense chart (if the fi’l
listed past tense) or the present tense chart (if the fi’l listed is present tense):
!5
7‫ﻓ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻌ َﻠﻢ ‪3.‬‬
‫أﻣﺮوا ‪6.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺆﻣﺮون ‪9.‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا ْ‬
‫ﺟ‪َ 1‬ﺪت ‪12.‬‬
‫ﻏﻔﺮ ‪15.‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻌ َﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌ َﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌ َﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌ َﻠﻤﲔَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻋﻠَﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻌ َﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌ َﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌ َﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌ َﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﻌ َﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻌ َﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻳﻌ َﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌ َﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌ َﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪!5‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪!5‬ت‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ت‬
‫‪َ !5‬‬
‫‪!5‬ا‬
‫َ‬
‫‪َ !5‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ْ 5‬‬
‫!ﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ْ 5‬‬
‫!ﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪!5‬وا‬
‫‪ْ 5‬‬
‫!ت‬
‫‪ْ 5‬‬
‫!ت‬
‫‪َ !5‬ﻧﺎ‬
‫‪ْ 5‬‬
‫!ن‬
‫َ‬
‫! ْ‬
‫‪ْ 5‬‬
‫>‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫‪!5‬ﺗ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫!ﻛﻮن ‪2.‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْﺴﺘﺨ َﺪم ‪5.‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺬر ‪1.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺤﺖ ‪4.‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻤﻌﻦ ‪7.‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ﻛﱪا ‪8.‬‬
‫ﻳ َﻘ َﺪر ‪11.‬‬
‫ﻋﺬب ‪10.‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﺠ َ‪1‬ﺪ ‪13.‬‬
‫َ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ ‪14.‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ﻓ‪َ 7‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓ ﻬ ﻤﺖ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓ ﻬ ﻤﺖ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓ ﻬ ﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓ ﻬ ﻤﺖ‬
‫‪A.‬‬
‫وﺟ َﺪ ‪16.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫َ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﺘﺎ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﻨَﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﻦ‬
‫َ‬
‫ﻓﻬ ْﻤ;ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﺘ َ‬
‫‪B.‬‬
1
3.2 Properties of the Ism—Gender (Feminine because the Arabs said so)
There are 3 kinds of Fake Feminine:
1. Words that end with ‫ ة‬, ‫ى‬
ٰ , or ‫آء‬
2. Broken Plurals
3. Feminine because the Arabs said so
1. Words that end with ‫ ة‬, ‫ى‬
ٰ , or ‫ آء‬: We discussed this category in the previous session. You can look at
the last video if you need a review.
2. Broken Plurals: Human broken plurals are sometimes considered feminine, while non-human broken
plurals are always considered fake feminine. When the Arabs want to say something like ‘I bought a
lot of books. I read each of them quickly,’ the Arab would say, ‘I bought a lot of books. I read each of
her quickly.’
3. Feminine because the Arabs said so: The words on pg.12 of the 201 Handout are considered fake
feminine. The story on that page will help you remember all of them. In addition to these words,
body parts that come in two’s are also considered fake feminine. I’m listing a few of them below:
ٌ ْ
ٌ
ٌ
ٌ ْ
‫( ﻳﺪ‬hand), ‫ﺟﻞ‬
‫( ر‬foot), ‫( ﺷﻔﺔ‬lip), ‫( أذ ٌن‬ear), ‫( ﻋﲔ‬eye)
You will be able to recognize fake feminine words more easily as you go through some practice
exercises.
2
EXERCISES:
Tell the Status, Number, and Gender:
Protections
Oaths
The ones that are married
Your mistakes
Those who ignore
Men
Fornicators
The obligation
Outcome
The subservient ones
The two angels
Trade
Two hundred
Means
The person
Legacies
The people of many worlds
Fear
The hunger
White
He created the skies
‫ ﺣﺠﻮر‬.1
‫ أ َ ْﻳﻤﺎن‬.2
َ
ْ
‫ﲔ‬
َ ‫ ﻣﺤﺼﻨ‬.3
‫ﻴ َﺌﺎﺗ' ْﻢ‬# ‫ ﺳ‬.4
َ
ْ
‫ﲔ‬
َ ‫ ﻣ)ﺿ‬.5
‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﺎل‬.6
َ #
‫ﲔ‬
َ ‫ ﻣ َﺴﺎﻓﺤ‬.7
‫ﻳﻀﺔ‬
َ ‫اﻟﻔﺮ‬
َ .8
‫ ﻋﺎﻗﺒﺔ‬.9
َ َ
‫ﲔ‬
َ ‫ َﻗﺎﻧﺘ‬.10
ْ
‫'ﲔ‬
.11
َ ‫اﻟﻤ َﻠ‬
َ
‫ ﺗﺠﺎر ًة‬.12
َ َ
ْ
‫ ﻣ َﺌﺘﲔ‬.13
َ
ً
‫ﻃ ْﻮﻻ‬
َ .14
ْ
‫ﺴﺎن‬9‫ اﻹ‬.15
َ
‫ ﺳﻨَﻦ‬.16
َ
.17
َ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟَﻤﲔ‬
َ
ٌ
‫ﺧ ْﻮف‬
َ .18
‫ اﻟﺠﻮع‬.19
ْ
‫ﻀﺂء‬
َ ‫ َﺑﻴ‬.20
‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎوات‬
‫ ﺧﻠﻖ‬.21
َ َ َ# َ َ َ
3
The angels
A miraculous sign
Two
The women
The orphans
Jahannam (Hell Fire)
Their hearts
Your witnesses
The wind
‫ﻜﺔ‬F‫ اﻟﻤﻼ‬.22
‫ آﻳ ًﺔ‬.23
ْ ْ
‫ اﺛﻨﺘﲔ‬.24
‫ﺴﺎء‬#I‫ اﻟ‬.25
‫ اﻟﻴﺘﺎﻣﻰ‬.26
K# ‫ ﺟﻬ‬.27
‫ ْﻢ‬M‫ ﻗﻠﻮ‬.28
‫ ﺷﻬﺪاءﻛ ْﻢ‬.29
‫ اﻟﺮﻳﺢ‬.30
#
4
ANSWER KEY:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
J, S, F
R, S, F
N/J, PL, M
N/J, PL, F
N/J, PL, M
J, PL, M or J, S, F
N/J, PL, M
J, S, F
R, S, F
N/J, PL, M
N/J, pair, M
N, S, F
N/J, pair, F
N, S, M
R, S, M
N, S, F
N/J, PL, M
R, S, M
J, S, M
R, S, F
N/J, S, F
J, PL, M or J, S, F (human broken plural)
N, S, F
N/J, pair, F
R, PL, F or R, S, F (human broken plural)
R/N/J, PL, M or R/N/J, S, F (human broken plural)
R, S, F
J, S, F
N, PL, M or N, S, F (human broken plural)
R, S, F
1
3.2.1 Af’ala Family
Today, we started a really important subject: Sarf. It requires quite a bit of memorization, but once you
learn it, it really helps you build vocabulary. I want you to imagine that there’s a machine that the Arabs
invented thousands of years ago. When you put a word inside this machine, and you turn it on, it can
take that one word and turn it into a 100 words. So instead of you having to learn 100 words, you just
have to learn how to use this machine, and you can make 100 words yourself. That machine is called
‘Sarf.’
Before, if I gave you a past tense verb, you wouldn’t know what its present tense was unless I told you,
and vice versa. I’m going to teach you a way, for some words, that when you see the past tense, you can
correctly guess what the present tense will be, and vice versa. That’s what we’re going to start to do
today.
We started looking at our first family of words: ‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ ْﺴﻠﻢ إ ْﺳﻼ ًﻣﺎ‬
Cousins of ‫ أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬will have a past tense that looks and sounds just like it. The same for its present tense
and masdar. A masdar was something new that I introduced in class. It’s an ism. Remember that an ism
is the name of a person, place, thing, idea, adjective, adverb and more? Well, the masdar is the Arabic
word for idea. And it’s typically translated as “to ____” , has an “ing,” or a “ion” at the end. For example,
‫ إ ْﺳﻼ ًﻣﺎ‬, the masdar of ‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬, means “to submit,” “submitting,” or “submission.” All of these translations
talk about the idea of submitting.
Look at the examples listed below. If you read them aloud, you can hear how they sound similar to each
other. And their spellings are similar, too. So if you see a past tense the looks like this, you can predict
what its present tense and masdar will be. That’s what sarf allows you to do. Listen for the pattern:
ً
ً
‫إ ْﺳﻼﻣﺎ‬
‫ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬
ً ‫إ ْﻧﺰاﻻ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰل‬
ْ
‫إﻧﻘﺎﺿﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﻘﺾ‬
ً ‫إ ْﺑﻌﺎدا‬
‫ﻳ ْﺒﻌﺪ‬
‫أ ْﺑﻌﺪ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﻘﺾ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ is. The first line has all the harakaat on it.‬أ ْﺳﻠﻢ ْﺴﻠﻢ إ ْﺳﻼﻣﺎ ‪A. Each of the following is to be read as‬‬
‫‪See if you can recite each of the words below following the pattern you noticed in this family:‬‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫إ ْﺳﻼﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳ"ض‬
‫إ‬
‫اﺿﺎ‬
‫أﻓﺴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺴﺪ‬
‫إﻓﺴﺎدا‬
‫أﻓﻠﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻠﺢ‬
‫إﻓﻼﺣﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﺖ‬
‫إﻧﺒﺎﺗﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺬر‬
‫ﻳﻨﺬر‬
‫إﻧﺬارا‬
‫أﻧﺰل‬
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
‫إﻧﺰاﻻ‬
‫أ‪-‬ﺸﺄ‬
‫ﻳ‪/‬ﺸﺄ‬
‫إ‪-‬ﺸﺎءا‬
‫أﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻌﻢ‬
‫إﻧﻌﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫أﻧﻔﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﻖ‬
‫إﻧﻔﺎﻗﺎ‬
‫أﻧﻜﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻜﺮ‬
‫إﻧﻜﺎرا‬
‫أﻫﻠﻚ‬
‫‪7‬ﻠﻚ‬
‫إﻫﻼﻛﺎ‬
‫أﺑﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺼﺮ‬
‫إﺑﺼﺮا‬
‫أ‬
‫ض‬
‫?‪ family‬أ ْﺳﻠﻢ ‪B. Which of the following words are part of the‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻼة‬
‫‪ .1‬وﻳﻘﻴﻤﻮن ‪A‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪A .2‬ا‪K‬ﻳﻦ ﻳﺆﻣﻨﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻐ ْﻴﺐ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬أﻧﺰل ﻋ‪ Y‬ﻋ ْﺒﺪه اﻟ<ﺘﺎب‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .4‬و ﻟ ْﻢ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ^ ﻋﻮﺟﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻗ ‪A‬ﻴ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺬر ﺑﺄﺳﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ أﻓﻮاﻫ‪e‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻛﻠﻤ ًﺔ ﺗﺨﺮج ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .7‬إن ﻳﻘﻮﻟﻮن إ ‪A‬ﻻ ﻛﺬﺑﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .8‬أ ْم ﺣﺴ ْﺒﺖ أ ‪A‬ن أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟ<ﻬﻒ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻻ أﻗﺴﻢ ‪I‬ﺬا اﻟﺒ‪H‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .10‬أ ْو إﻃﻌ ٌ‬
‫ﺎم ﰲ ﻳ ْﻮ ٍم ذي ﻣ ْﺴﻐﺒ ٍﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻓﺄ‪Z‬ﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﺠﻮرﻫﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻛ_ﺎ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻗﺪ أﻓﻠﺢ ﻣﻦ ز ‪A‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻓﺄﻧﺬ ْرﺗ< ْﻢ ﻧﺎرا ًﺗﻠﻈ‪A‬ﻰ‬
‫‪A .14‬‬
‫ا‪K‬ي ﻛ ‪A‬ﺬب و ﺗﻮ ‪fA‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫‪A. Oral exercise‬‬
‫‪B. “yes” = part of family‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻼة‬
‫‪ .1‬وﻳﻘﻴﻤﻮن ‪A‬‬
‫‪yes‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪A .2‬ا‪K‬ﻳﻦ ﻳﺆﻣﻨﻮن ﺑﺎﻟﻐ ْﻴﺐ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬أﻧﺰل ﻋ‪ Y‬ﻋ ْﺒﺪه اﻟ<ﺘﺎب‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .4‬و ﻟ ْﻢ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ^ ﻋﻮﺟﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻗ ‪A‬ﻴ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺬر ﺑﺄﺳﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ أﻓﻮاﻫ‪e‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻛﻠﻤ ًﺔ ﺗﺨﺮج ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .7‬إن ﻳﻘﻮﻟﻮن إ ‪A‬ﻻ ﻛﺬﺑﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪yes‬‬
‫‪yes‬‬
‫‪yes‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪.8‬أ ْم ﺣﺴ ْﺒﺖ أ ‪A‬ن أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟ<ﻬﻒ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻻ أﻗﺴﻢ ‪I‬ﺬا اﻟﺒ‪H‬‬
‫‪ .10‬أ ْو إ ْﻃﻌ ٌ‬
‫ﺎم ﰲ ﻳ ْﻮ ٍم ذي ﻣ ْﺴﻐﺒ ٍﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻓﺄ‪Z‬ﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﺠﻮرﻫﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻛ_ﺎ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻗﺪ أﻓﻠﺢ ﻣﻦ ز ‪A‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻓﺄﻧﺬ ْرﺗ< ْﻢ ﻧﺎرا ًﺗﻠﻈ‪A‬ﻰ‬
‫‪A .14‬‬
‫ا‪K‬ي ﻛ ‪A‬ﺬب و ﺗﻮ ‪fA‬‬
‫‪yes‬‬
‫‪yes‬‬
‫‪yes‬‬
‫‪yes‬‬
‫‪yes‬‬
1
3.2.2 Akhbara Family (Part 2)
We started learning about the members of the ‫ أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬family. So far we know:
ً
‫إ ْﺳﻼﻣﺎ‬
‫ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬
To submit / Submission
He submits
He submitted
ْ
ْ
The first word ‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬, is past tense, or ‫اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬. ‫ ْﺴﻠﻢ‬is the present tense, or ‫اﻟﻔﻌﻞ اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬. The last
ْ
one, ‫إ ْﺳﻼ ًﻣﺎ‬, is the ‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬, the idea.
We learned one more member of this family today: the Ism Faa’il ‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬. The Ism Faa’il is the word for
an ‘er,’ like a teacher, farmer, succeeder. The guy that does something is the Ism Faa’il. You make an Ism
Fail by looking at the present tense and replace the ‘yu’ with a ‘mu.’
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ً
‫إ ْﺳﻼﻣﺎ‬
‫ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬
Now, we’ve got four words now ( ‫ ﻓﻬﻮ‬doesn’t count. It’s just there to make it flow). ‫( أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬he submitted),
‫( ْﺴﻠﻢ‬he submits), ‫( إ ْﺳﻼ ًﻣﺎ‬submission/ to submit), ‫( ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬then he is a submitter. A ‘Muslim’ is the guy
that submits). Once you’ve made it, you can make it heavy and go through the ‫ ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬chart on page 6,
like this:
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ٌ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
ْ
‫ﺎت‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤ‬
ْ
‫ﺎت‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ْ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
ْ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
ً
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٍﻢ‬
ٌ
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ ٍﺔ‬
2
EXERCISES:
A. Practice putting the following words through the ‫ أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬family (say all four words):
ْ
‫ أدرك‬.13
ْ
‫ أﻧﺬر‬.14
ْ
9‫ أﻟ‬.15
ْ ‫ أ‬.10
‫ﺣﺴﻦ‬
ْ ‫ أ‬.11
‫ﺟﺮج‬
ْ
‫ أﻧﻌﻢ‬.12
ْ
‫ أﻧﻘﺾ‬.7
ْ
‫ أﻓﺴﺪ‬.8
ْ .9
‫أرﺳﻞ‬
ْ
‫ أﻓﻠﺢ‬.4
ْ
‫ أﻧﺒﺖ‬.5
ْ
‫ أﻧﺰل‬.6
ْ
‫ أﺷﺮك‬.1
ْ
‫ أﻧﺠﺢ‬.2
ْ
‫ أ=ق‬.3
B. Take the Ism Faa’il of each of the following fi’l and put it through page 6:
ْ
‫أﻓﻠﺢ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰل‬
ْ
‫أﻓﺴﺪ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺬر‬
ْ ‫أ‬
‫ﺣﺴﻦ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬أﺷﺮك‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬أﻧﺠﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬أ=ق‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .4‬أﻓﻠﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .5‬أﻧﺒﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬أﻧﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .7‬أﻧﻘﺾ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .8‬أﻓﺴﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﺷﺮاﻛﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫إﻧﺠﺎﺣﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫إ=اﻗﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫إﻓﻼﺣﺎ‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫إﻧﺒﺎﺗﺎ‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫إﻧﺰاﻻ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫إﻧﻘﺎﺿﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫إﻓﺴﺎدا‬
‫ْ‬
‫>ك‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺠﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳ‪B‬ق‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻠﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻘﺾ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺴﺪ‬
‫‪ .9‬أ ْرﺳﻞ‬
‫إ ْرﺳﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻳ ْﺮﺳﻞ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺴﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮج‬
‫‪ .10‬أ ْ‬
‫ﺣﺴﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .11‬أﺧﺮج‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .12‬أﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إدراﻛﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫إﻧﺬارا‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫إ‪I‬ﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻠ‪9‬‬
‫ﻣ ْﺤﺴ ٌ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴ ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨ ًﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨ ٍﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺘﲔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨْﺠ ٌ‬
‫ﺢ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‪B‬ق‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﻔﻠ ٌ‬
‫ﺢ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺒﺖ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻔﺴﺪ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺮﺳﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺤﺴ ٌ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺨﺮ ٌ‬
‫ج‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‬
‫ً‬
‫إ ْ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﻧﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫إﺧﺮاﺟﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫إﻧﻌﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻌﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺪرك‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬أدرك‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .14‬أﻧﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .15‬أﻟ‪9‬‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ>ك‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﻌ ٌﻢ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺪرك‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻠ‪9‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬ ٍر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺎت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨ ٍ‬
‫‪A.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬرا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬران‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬرون‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬر ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬرﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬرة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬرﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬرﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬرﺗﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬرات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬر ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬر ٍة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬر ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬرﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬر ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻨﺬر ٍ‬
‫‪B.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴ ٍﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪون‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ٍة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ٍ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻻ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰ ٍل‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰ‪L‬‬
‫ﻣﻨْﺰ‪ًL‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰ‪ٍ L‬‬
‫ﻣ ْﻔﻠ ٌ‬
‫ﺢ‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠ ٍﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﺎن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﲔ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﲔ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤ ًﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤ ٍﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤﺎت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻔﻠﺤ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻻن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﲔ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻻت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ت‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻻ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ت‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻻ ٍ‬
1
3.2.3 Akhbara Family (Part 3)
Today, we’re going to finish up the second line of our family. I taught you:
ٌ ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ْ
ً ‫ﺧﺒﺎرا‬
‫إ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧ ﱪ‬
So he’s an
informer
To inform
He informs
He informed
We know that in the past tense, the doer is known. Sometimes, you can pronounce the past tense
differently so that the doer is unknown--that’s what happens in the passive. The way to do that is to
ْ
make two sounds take over the word: ‘u’ and ‘e.’ So, if the past tense was ‫أﺧﱪ‬, then the past passive
ْ
ْ
ْ
version would be ‫أﺧﱪ‬. Now if ‫ أﺧﱪ‬means ‘he informed,’ ‫ أﺧﱪ‬means ‘he was informed.’ We don’t know
who informed him anymore. The doer is a mystery.
Those are the two sounds that take over the past tense. The two sounds that take over the present
ْ
ْ
tense are ‘u’ and ‘a,’ so ‫ ﻳﺨﱪ‬from the first line becomes ‫( ﻳﺨﱪ‬I didn’t have to change the beginning
ْ
because it was already ‘u’—I only had one part to change, this time). ‫ ﻳﺨﱪ‬means ‘he informs,’ so the
ْ
passive, ‫ ﻳﺨﱪ‬means ‘he is being informed.’
Let’s translate everything we’ve got so far:
ٌ ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫إﺧﺒﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
So he’s an informer
ٌ ْ
‫ﻓﻬﺰ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
To inform
ْ
ً ‫ﺧﺒﺎرا‬
‫إ‬
He informs
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
He informed
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
…
To inform
He is being informed
He was informed
ً
ْ
ٌ ْ
‫ ﻳﺨﱪ‬in the first line gave birth to ‫ﻣﺨﱪ‬. I took the ‘yu’ and put a ‘mu’ and that’s how I got the Ism Faa’il.
ْ
ٌ ْ
ٌ ْ
ٌ ْ
‫ ﻳﺨﱪ‬gives birth to ‫ﻣﺨﱪ‬. There’s a big difference between ‫ﻣﺨﱪ‬, the ism faa’il, and ‫ﻣﺨﱪ‬, what we call the
ٌ ْ
Ism Maf’ool. Its meaning is passive: ‫ ﻣﺨﱪ‬is the one that gets informed, NOT the informer. Practice
saying these two lines aloud with the verb list in 3.2.1 Handout to get you more comfortable with this
material.
2
EXERCISES:
A. Make these words passive and put them through the entire past tense chart. Pay special
attention to the harakaat and sounds, being sensitive to whether or not the word is active or
passive.
ْ
ْ
ْ
‫أﻓﻠﺢ‬
‫أﻫﻠﻚ‬
‫أﻧﺬر‬
B. Take the present tense of these words, make them passive, and then put them through the
entire present tense chart. Respect the passive sounds.
ْ
‫أﻓﻠﺢ‬
ْ
‫أﻫﻠﻚ‬
C. Translate the following words into English:
ْ
‫ ﻳﺨﱪ‬.7
ْ
‫ ﻳﺨﱪان‬.8
ْ
‫ أﺧﱪﺗﺎ‬.9
ْ
‫ أﺧﱪ‬.10
ْ
‫ أﺧﱪوا‬.11
ْ ْ
‫ أﺧﱪﻧﺎ‬.12
D. Translate the following words into Arabic:
1. They both were informed
2. Both of them are being informed
3. We informed
4. I was informed
5. Both of you inform
6. Both of those women were informed
7. I am being informed
8. You were informed
9.
Both of those women are being
informed
10. Those women are being informed
11. He was informed
12. She was informed
ْ
‫أﻧﺬر‬
ْ
‫ أﺧﱪا‬.1
ْ
‫ ﺗﺨﱪﻳﻦ‬.2
ْ ْ
ْ ‫ﱪ‬
‫ أﺧ‬.3
ْ
‫ ﺗﺨﱪون‬.4
ْ ْ
‫ ﻳﺨﱪن‬.5
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬.6
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ أﻧﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ أﻧﺬرت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﻧﺬ ْرت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﻧﺬ ْرت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎأﻧﺬ ْرت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﻧﺬرا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﻧﺬرﺗﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﻧﺬ ْرﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﻧﺬ ْرﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ أﻧﺬ ْرﻧﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻨ َﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻨ َﺬران‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨ َﺬران‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻨ َﺬران‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻨ َﺬران‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻨ َﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ #‬أﻧﺬروا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ أﻧﺬ ْرن‬
‫أﻧ) أ ْﻧﺬ ْر ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ أﻧﺬرﺗ *‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ أﻓﻠﺢ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ أﻓﻠﺤﺖ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﻓﻠﺤﺖ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﻓﻠﺤﺖ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻓﻠﺤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻨ َﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أَﻧﺖ ﺗﻨ َﺬر‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻨ َﺬرﻳﻦ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻧ َﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ #‬ﻳﻨ َﺬرون‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻨ َﺬ ْرن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ) ﺗﻨ َﺬرون‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻨ َﺬ ْرن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻔ َﻠﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻔﻠَﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻔﻠَﺢ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻔ َﻠﺤﲔَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻓﻠَﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ أﻫﻠﻚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ أﻫﻠ"ﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﻫﻠ"ﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﻫﻠ"ﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻫﻠ"ﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﻓﻠﺤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﻓﻠﺤﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﻓﻠﺤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﻓﻠﺤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ أﻓﻠﺤﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ْ‬
‫‪-‬ﻠﻚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ #‬أﻓﻠﺤﻮا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ أﻓﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫أﻧ) أﻓْﻠ ْﺤ)ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ أﻓﻠﺤﺘ *‬
‫ﻫﻲ ْ‬
‫‪َ .‬ﻠﻚ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ْ‬
‫‪َ .‬ﻠﻚ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪َ .‬ﻠ"ﲔَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻫ َﻠﻚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻔ َﻠﺤﺎن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻔ َﻠﺤﺎن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻔ َﻠﺤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻔ َﻠﺤﺎن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻔﻠَﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﻫﻠ"ﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﻫﻠ"ﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﻫﻠ"ﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﻫﻠ"ﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ أﻫﻠ"ﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ #‬أﻫﻠ"ﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ أﻫﻠ"ﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫")ْ‬
‫أﻧ) أﻫﻠ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﺘ‬
‫"‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻫ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ أ‬
‫*‬
‫‪A.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ْ‬
‫‪-‬ﻠ"ﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫"ﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ‪َ .‬ﻠ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫"ﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪َ .‬ﻠ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫"ﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪َ .‬ﻠ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ْ‬
‫‪َ 0‬ﻠ"ﻨﺎ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ #‬ﻳﻔ َﻠﺤﻮن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻔ َﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ) ﺗﻔ َﻠﺤﻮن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻔ َﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ْ #‬‬
‫ﻠ"ﻮن‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ْ‬
‫ َﻠ"ﻦ‬‫َ‬
‫أﻧ) ْ‬
‫‪َ .‬ﻠ"ﻮن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ْ‬
‫‪َ .‬ﻠ"ﻦ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪B.‬‬
4
C.
ْ
7. ‫( ﻳﺨﱪ‬Present Tense) He informs
ْ
8. ‫ﱪان‬
َ َ ‫( ﻳﺨ‬Present Passive Tense) Both of
them are being informed
ْ
9. ‫( أﺧﱪﺗﺎ‬Past tense) Both of them fem.
fem. are being informed
ْ ْ
3. ْ ‫( أﺧﱪ‬Past Tense) You all informed
informed
ْ
10. ‫( أﺧﱪ‬Present Tense) I inform
ْ
11. ‫( أﺧﱪوا‬Past Passive Tense) They were
ْ
4. ‫( ﺗﺨﱪون‬Present Tense) You all inform
ْ ْ
5. ‫( ﻳﺨﱪن‬Present Tense) They fem.
informed
Inform
ْ
6. ‫( أﺧﱪ‬Past Passive Tense) He was
ْ ْ
12. ‫( أﺧﱪﻧﺎ‬Past Passive Tense) We were
informed
D.
ْ
1. ‫ﱪا‬
َ ‫( أﺧ‬Past Passive Tense) Both of
them were informed
ْ
2. ‫( ﺗﺨﱪﻳﻦ‬Present Passive Tense) You
1. They both were informed
2. Both of them are being informed
3. We informed
4. I was informed
5. Both of you inform
6. Both of those women were informed
7. I am being informed
8. You were informed
9.
Both of those women are being
informed
10. Those women are being informed
11. He was informed
12. She was informed
informed
ْ
‫أﺧﱪا‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪان‬
ْ ْ
‫أﺧﱪﻧﺎ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﺧﱪت‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺨﱪان‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪﺗﺎ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﺧﱪت‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺨﱪان‬
ْ ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪن‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺨﱪ‬
1
3.2.4 Akhbara Family (Part 4)
ْ
The sarf sagheer of the ‫ أﺧﱪ‬family is:
ٌ ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ٌ ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ
‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫إﺧﺒﺎرا‬
ْ
ً
‫إﺧﺒﺎرا‬
ً
‫و اﻟ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ٌ ْ ْ
‫و اﻟﻈ ْﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ ْ ْ
‫اﻷ ْﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﺧﱪ‬
ْ
The last two lines are new. Al Amru ‫اﻷ ْﻣﺮ‬is the command, and An Nahyu ‫ اﻟ ﻲ‬is the forbidding. We’ll
ْ
discuss ‫اﻷ ْﻣﺮ‬, and ‫اﻟ ﻲ‬, and ‫ اﻟﻈ ْﺮف‬in more detail in the next session, InshaAllah. For now, though, I’d
like you to memorize these lines flawlessly. For more practice, try doing the sarf kabeer—that is, put
each word in each line in its respective chart.
1
3.2.5 Akhbara Family (Part 5)
Okay, today, started going over the new lines we learned in the last session:
ٌ ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ٌ ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ
‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫إﺧﺒﺎرا‬
ْ
ً
‫إﺧﺒﺎرا‬
ً
‫و اﻟ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ ْ ْ
‫اﻷ ْﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﺧﱪ‬
ْ ْ
ْ
You know what the first two lines mean. The third line is new. ‫ اﻷ ْﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ‬means ‘the command.’ ‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ ْ
means “Inform!’ Every time you make a command for this family, it looks like ‫أﺧﱪ‬. So the command of
ْ ْ
ْ
‫ أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬is ‫ أ ْﺳﻠ ْﻢ‬and the command for ‫أﺷﺮك‬, is ‫أﺷﺮك‬. That’s how they all are.
Now, when we learned how to make commands, we would take the present tense, make it lightest, and
ْ
ْ ْ
take the ‘ta’ off. If we did that to ‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬, we’d end up with ‫ﺧﱪ‬, which is not readable, so we’d add an alif.
In this family, you always add an ‫أ‬.
ْ ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ ْ
‫ﺧﱪ‬
ْ ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
Add ‫أ‬
Remove the ‘ya’
Make lightest
Take present tense
Just a note—commands can only be given to someone that’s there. You can’t give commands to ‘he,
she, they, etc.’ I cant give commands to myself, either. I can only give commands to ‘you.’ There are six
different you’s in Arabic, and so, you have to know how to make six commands. We just made the
ْ ْ
command for anta: ‫أﺧﱪ‬. That’s not the command for ‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬, *‫أﻧ‬, etc. Let’s walk through them and make
their commands. Memorize this before moving onto the next session:
Add َ‫أ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪا‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪوا‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪي‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪا‬
ْ ْ
‫أﺧﱪن‬
Remove ‘ta’
ْ ْ
‫ﺧﱪ‬
ْ
‫ﺧﱪا‬
ْ
‫ﺧﱪوا‬
ْ
‫ﺧﱪي‬
ْ
‫ﺧﱪا‬
ْ ْ
‫ﺧﱪن‬
Make lightest
ْ ْ
‫ﺗﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺨﱪا‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺨﱪوا‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺨﱪي‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺨﱪا‬
ْ ْ
‫ﺗﺨﱪن‬
Take present tense
ْ
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
ْ
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﱪان‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧ*ْ ﺗﺨﱪون‬
ْ
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺨﱪﻳﻦ‬
ْ
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﱪان‬
ْ
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺨﱪن‬
2
EXERCISES:
Each of the following needs to have commands that match:
ْ
ْ
‫أﻧ*ْ أﺧﱪوا‬
ْ
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﺧﱪا‬
ْ
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺖ أﺧﱪ‬
ْ
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻦ أﺧﱪن‬
ْ
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﺧﱪا‬
ْ
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ أﺧﱪي‬
Go through each of the fi’l below and see if you can create the commands following the pattern we
learned in this family.
ْ
‫ أﻧﺒﺖ‬.10
ْ
‫ أﻧﻌﻢ‬.11
‫ أ ْﺑﺼﺮ‬.12
ْ
‫ أﻓﻠﺢ‬.7
ْ
‫ﺸﺄ‬7‫ أ‬.8
ْ
‫ أﻫﻠﻚ‬.9
ْ
‫ أﻓﺴﺪ‬.4
ْ
‫ أﻧﺰل‬.5
ْ
‫ أﻧﻜﺮ‬.6
ْ
‫ض‬3‫ أ‬.1
ْ
‫ أﻧﺬر‬.2
ْ
‫ أﻧﻔﻖ‬.3
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬أ‪3‬ض‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬أﻧﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬أﻧﻔﻖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .4‬أﻓﺴﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .5‬أﻧﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬أﻧﻜﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .7‬أﻓﻠﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻓﻠ ْﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻓﻠ‪D‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻓﻠﺤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻓﻠﺤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻓﻠﺤﻮا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻓﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أ‪7‬ﺸﺄ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ‪7‬ﺸﺌﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ‪7‬ﺸﺌﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ‪7‬ﺸﺆوا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أ‪7‬ﺸﺌﻦ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻫﻠﻚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻫﻠ‪H‬ﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻫﻠ‪H‬ﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻫﻠ‪H‬ﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻫﻠ‪H‬ﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺒﺘﻮا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺒﺘﻦ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أ‪3‬ض‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ‪3‬ﺿﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ‪3‬ﺿﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ‪3‬ﺿﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ‪3‬ﺿﻮا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أ‪3‬ﺿﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺬ ْر‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺬرا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺬرا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺬروا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺬ ْرن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﻔﻖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻔﻘﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻔﻘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻔﻘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻔﻘﻮا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﻔﻘﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻫﻠ‪H‬ﻲ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻓﺴﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻓﺴﺪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻓﺴﺪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻓﺴﺪوا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻓﺴﺪن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺒﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺒﺘﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺒﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺒﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺰ‪J‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺰﻻ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺰﻻ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺰﻟﻮا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺰﻟﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻌ ْﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻌﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻌﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻌﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﻌﻤﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻜ ْﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻜﺮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻜﺮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻜﺮوا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻜ ْﺮن‬
‫أ ْﺑﺼ ْﺮ‬
‫أ ْﺑﺼﺮا‬
‫أ ْﺑﺼﺮوا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺬري‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻓﺴﺪي‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻜﺮي‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .8‬أ‪7‬ﺸﺄ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .9‬أﻫﻠﻚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .10‬أﻧﺒﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .11‬أﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫‪ .12‬أ ْﺑﺼﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ‪7‬ﺸ‪G‬ﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﻌﻤﻲ‬
‫أ ْﺑﺼﺮي‬
‫أ ْﺑﺼﺮا‬
‫أ ْﺑﺼ ْﺮن‬
1
3.2.6 Akhbara Family (Part 6)
We are finishing off the sarf sagheer of this family today. Here’s what we’ve got:
ٌ ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ٌ ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ
‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫إﺧﺒﺎرا‬
ْ
ً
‫إﺧﺒﺎرا‬
ً
‫و اﻟ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ٌ ْ ْ
‫و اﻟﻈ ْﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
ْ ْ ْ
‫اﻷ ْﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﺧﱪ‬
ْ ْ
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺨﱪ‬means ‘Don’t inform!’ It’s a forbidding statement where you’re telling someone not to do
something. Just like there are six commands, there are six ways to forbid. All you have to do is take the
present tense (make sure it’s second person—a ‘you’), make it lightest, tack on the ‫ ﻻ‬in the beginning,
and you’ve got the forbidding taken care of. Look:
ْ
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺨﱪوا‬$‫أﻧ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻ ﺗﺨﱪن‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺨﱪا‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺨﱪا‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺨﱪي‬
(Notice that the commanding and the forbidding are both lightest, but in the forbidding, you don’t get rid of the
‘ta’ in the beginning.)
ٌ
Now, let me tell you what ‫ ﻇ ْﺮف‬tharf means. A ‫ ﻇ ْﺮف‬is an ism that has to do with time or space. ‫ ﻓ ْﻮق‬and
ْ
‫ ﺗﺤﺖ‬mean ‘over or above’ and ‘under,’ both of which are spaces, or places, so they are considered ‫ﻇ ْﺮف‬.
ْ
‫ ﻗ ْﺒﻞ‬and ‫ ﺑﻌﺪ‬mean ‘before’ and ‘after,’ respectively. Both have to do with time, so they, too, are tharf. ‫و‬
ٌ ْ ْ
‫( اﻟﻈ ْﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺨﱪ‬notice it looks like the ism maf’ool) means, ‘the time or place of informing.’ So if I inform
ٌ ْ
you of something in the house, the house becomes the ‫ﻣﺨﱪ‬, the place where I informed you.
ٌ ْ
We’ve got one last part for the sarf kabeer—the sarf kabeer of the tharf, ‫ﻣﺨﱪ‬. It follows the chart of
the masdar:
ٌ
ْ
‫ﻣﺨﱪات‬
ْ
‫ت‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺨﱪا‬
ْ
‫ات‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫ﻣﺨﱪان‬
ْ
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ْﻳﻦ‬
ْ
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ْﻳﻦ‬
ٌ ْ
‫ﻣﺨﱪ‬
ً ْ
‫ﻣﺨﱪا‬
ْ
‫ﱪ‬
ٍ ‫ﻣﺨ‬
2
EXERCISES:
A. Go through each of the fi’l below and see if you can come up with the six ways to forbid,
following the pattern we learned in this family.
ْ
‫أﻓﺴﺪ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﻜﺮ‬
ْ
‫أﻫﻠﻚ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﻌﻢ‬
B. Do the sarf kabeer of the tharf for the fi’l listed above.
C. Take these letters, put them in this family, and do their sarf sagheer:
‫ ن ف ق‬.6
‫ ن ذ ر‬.5
‫ ف ل ح‬.4
‫ ع ر ض‬.3
‫ ل ه م‬.2
‫ ش ر ك‬.1
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬أﻫﻠﻚ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪F‬ﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ ْ‬
‫‪F‬ﻠ‪E‬ﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬أﻧﻜﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ْ‬
‫‪F‬ﻠ‪E‬ﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ْ‬
‫‪F‬ﻠ‪E‬ﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ْ‬
‫‪F‬ﻠ‪E‬ﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜﺮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜﺮوا‬
‫ﻻ ْ‬
‫‪F‬ﻠ‪E‬ﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ ْﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜﺮي‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬أﻫﻠﻚ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻠﻚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻠ‪E‬ﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻠ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬أﻧﻜﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ ٌﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮا‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ ٍﺮ‬
‫‪ .1‬ش ر ك‬
‫‪ .2‬ل ه م‬
‫‪ .3‬ع ر ض‬
‫‪ .4‬ف ل ح‬
‫‪ .5‬ن ذ ر‬
‫‪ .6‬ن ف ق‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜﺮا‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻠ‪E‬ﺎت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻬﻠ‪ٍ E‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻬﻠ‪ٍ E‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮان‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﺷﺮك ‪HK‬ك‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﺷﺮك‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻠ‪M‬‬
‫أﻟ‪M‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﻟ‪M‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ‪P‬ض ﻳ‪O‬ض‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أ‪P‬ض‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻠﺢ‬
‫أﻓﻠﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﻓﻠ ْﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺬر‬
‫أﻧﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﻧﺬ ْر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﻖ‬
‫أﻧﻔﻖ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﻧﻔﻖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .4‬أﻓﺴﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ ْﺮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻠ‪E‬ﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻠ‪E‬ﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻠ‪E‬ﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬أﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮ ٍ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‪H‬ك‬
‫إﺷﺮاﻛﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫واﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ‪HL‬ك‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻠ‪M‬‬
‫إ‪N‬ﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻠ‪M‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْ‪ٌ O‬‬
‫ض‬
‫إ‪P‬اﺿﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗ‪O‬ض‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﻔﻠ ٌ‬
‫ﺢ‬
‫إﻓﻼﺣﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻠ ْﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
‫إﻧﺬارا‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺬ ْر‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﻖ‬
‫إﻧﻔﺎﻗﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻔﻖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬أﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌ ٌﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﻤﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌ ٍﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .4‬أﻓﺴﺪ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴ ٍﺪ‬
‫‪A.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻌ ْﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻌﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻌﻤﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻﺗﻨﻌﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻌﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺴﺪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺴﺪا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺴﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻﺗﻔﺴﺪي‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻌﻤﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺴﺪوا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺴﺪن‬
‫‪B.‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﻤﺎت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﻤ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﻤ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻔﺴﺪ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪HK‬ك‬
‫أﺷﺮك‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ‪H‬ك‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻠ‪M‬‬
‫أﻟ‪M‬‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻠ‪M‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳ‪O‬ض‬
‫أ‪P‬ض‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ْ‪ٌ O‬‬
‫ض‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻠﺢ‬
‫أﻓﻠﺢ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ْﻔﻠ ٌ‬
‫ﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺬر‬
‫أﻧﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﻖ‬
‫أﻧﻔﻖ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﺷﺮاﻛﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إ‪N‬ﻬﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻠ‪M‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫إ‪P‬اﺿﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﻓﻼﺣﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﻧﺬارا‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﻧﻔﺎﻗﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‪H‬ك‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْ‪ٌ O‬‬
‫ض‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﻔﻠ ٌ‬
‫ﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﻖ‬
‫‪C.‬‬
1
3.3.1 Allama Family (Part 1)
We started our next family today, the ‫ ﻋﻠﻢ‬family:
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ً ‫ﺗ ْﻌﻠ‬
‫ﻴﻤﺎ‬
ً ‫ﺗ ْﻌﻠ‬
‫ﻴﻤﺎ‬
ْ
ْ
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠ ْﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬
ْ
‫و اﻟﻈ ْﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ْ
‫اﻷ ْﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻋﻠ ْﻢ‬
ْ
The first difference between this family and the first one we learned is that the ‫ أﺧﱪ‬family has an alif in
ْ
ْ
the beginning (‫ أﻧﻔﻖ‬,‫ أﺧﱪ‬,‫)أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‬, while this family always has a shadda on the middle letter (‫ ﻧﺰل‬,‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬, ,‫ﻛﺮم‬
‫)ﺷﺮف‬. If the past tense sounds like ‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬, then its present tense will sound like ‫ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬, and all the other
words in the sarf sagheer will follow this family’s pattern.
ْ
ْ
ْ
ً
Now, when we said ‫أﺧﱪ ﻳﺨﱪ إﺧﺒﺎرا‬, we went on to say ‫…ﻓﻬﻮ‬something, right? The next word, or the Ism
Faa’il, is pretty easy to construct. It’s just the present tense with a ‘mu’ on it. That’s where ‫ ﻣﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬comes
from. Likewise, the Ism Maf’ool (the last word on the second line), is just a ‘mu’ on the present passive
(remember that the present passive likes to have an ‘u’ and ‘a’ sound, while the past passive takes an ‘u’
and ‘e’ sound). The tharf looks just like the Ism Maf’ool, so there’s less to memorize!
The last bit that we constructed was the command—where did we get ‫ ﻋﻠ ْﻢ‬from? The same way we
ْ
normally make commands. We just took the present tense, took off the ta in the beginning (‫)أﻧﺖ‬, and
ْ
made it lightest. We can read it just fine, so there’s no need to add anything to the beginning. The ‫أﺧﱪ‬
family is known for having an alif in their command, rules aside, so you’ll always find one there.
Memorize this family, and practice going through the exercises to get more comfortable plugging in
different words into this pattern.
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ family. See if you can recite the sarf sagheer of‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎ ‪A. Each of the following is from the‬‬
‫‪each of the words below following the pattern you noticed in this family:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺪل‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪل‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻼ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺘﻴﻌﺎ‬
‫ﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻳﺒﲔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻨﺎ‬
‫زﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻨﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺨﺮ‬
‫>ﺴﺨﺮ‬
‫=ﺴﺨﲑا‬
‫ﻋﺬب‬
‫ﻳﻌﺬب‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪم‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪم‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺮق‬
‫ﻳﻔﺮق‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻘﺎ‬
‫ذﺑﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺬﺑﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺬﺑﻴﺤﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺮف‬
‫ﻳﺼﺮف‬
‫ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪر‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪر‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮا‬
‫ﻛﺮم‬
‫ﻳﻜﺮم‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﻳﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻄﻴﻌﺎ‬
‫ﻏﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻐﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻘﲑا‬
‫ً‬
‫‪B. Now that you’ve gotten your feet wet, try plugging in these letters into this family. Go on and do‬‬
‫‪the sarf sagheer each time.‬‬
‫سبح‬
‫بشر‬
‫صدق‬
‫كذب‬
‫نز ل‬
‫قرب‬
‫فرق‬
‫ذبح‬
‫أول‬
‫د بر‬
1
3.3.2 Allama Family (Part 2)
Today, we’re just going to practice what we’ve learned for this family. The sarf sagheer is:
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻌﻠ ْﻴ ًﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬
So he is a teacher
Teaching
He teaches
He taught
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻌﻠ ْﻴ ًﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬
So he was the person being
taught (student)
Teaching
He is being taught
He was taught
ْ
ْ
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠ ْﻢ‬
ْ
‫اﻷ ْﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻋﻠ ْﻢ‬
Forbidding Form: Don’t Teach!
ْ
‫و اﻟﻈ ْﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
Command Form: Teach!
The time or place to teach
Practice this a few times, and then move on to the exercises. That should have more practice for you to
do so you become comfortable with this family.
2
EXERCISES:
A. Practice going through the sarf kabeer of the past, past passive, present, and present
passive tenses, using words from the pg.2 of the previous handout. The sarf kabeer of ‫ﻧﺰل‬
is attached to this handout for your reference. Be sure to respect the pattern of this family,
and the sounds that come with past passive and present passive tenses!
B. Translate into English:
ْ
‫ﻋﻠﻤﺖ‬.1
‫ ﻋﻠ ْﻢ‬.6
ْ
‫ ﻋﻠﻤﻦ‬.2
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬.7
ْ
‫ ﻳﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬.8
‫ ﻳﻌﻠﻤ ْﻮن‬.3
‫ ﻣﻌﻠﻤ ْﻮن‬.10
‫ ﺗﻌﻠﻤ ْﻮن‬.5
ْ
‫ أﺧﱪا‬.9
ْ
‫ ﻋﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬.4
C. Translate the following words into Arabic:
1. Both of them (fem.) are being taught
6.
I was taught
2. You (fem) are teaching
7.
I am teaching
3. They (masc.) were taught
8.
I am being taught
4. They (fem.) taught
9.
Both of you are being taught
5. Two Teachers
10. I was informed
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫‪Past Tense‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻧﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
‫‪Past Passive Tense‬‬
‫‪ ,‬ﻧﺰﻟ ْﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻧﺰﻟﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﻧﺰﻟْ‪ْ.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻧﺰﻟﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻧﺰﻻ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻧﺰﻟﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻧﺰﻟﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻧﺰﻟﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺰﻟﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻧﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
‫‪Present Tense‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻨﺰل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺰﻻن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻨﺰل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻻن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻨﺰل‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻻن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻨﺰﻟﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻻن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻧﺰل‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪.1‬ﻋﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻌﻠﻤ ْﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﻌﻠﻤ ْﻮن‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻧﺰﻻ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻧﺰﻟﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻧﺰﻟﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻧﺰﻟﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺰﻟﻨﺎ‬
‫‪A.‬‬
‫‪ ,‬ﻧﺰﻟ ْﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻧﺰﻟﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﻧﺰﻟْ‪ْ.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻧﺰﻟﺘﻦ‬
‫‪Present Passive Tense‬‬
‫‪ ,‬ﻳﻨﺰﻟ ْﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺰﻟ ْﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻟﻦ‬
‫‪ .6 (Past Passive) You were taught‬ﻋﻠ ْﻢ‬
‫‪ .7 They fem. taught‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫‪(Present Passive Tense) They are‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻳﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫‪being taught‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .9 Both of you taught‬أﺧﱪا‬
‫‪ .10 All of you are teaching‬ﻣﻌﻠﻤ ْﻮن‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻨﺰل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺰﻻن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻨﺰل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻻن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻨﺰﻟﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻻن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻻن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻧﺰل‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻨﺰل‬
‫‪ ,‬ﻳﻨﺰﻟ ْﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺰﻟ ْﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻟﻦ‬
‫!‪Teach‬‬
‫!‪(both of you)Don’t Teach‬‬
‫‪They fem. are teaching‬‬
‫‪(Past Passive Tense) Both of them were‬‬
‫‪informed‬‬
‫‪people who teach/teachers‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ 6. I was taught‬ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫‪1. Both of them (fem.) are being taught‬‬
‫أﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ 7. I am teaching‬ﺗﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫‪2. You (fem) are teaching‬‬
‫أﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ 8. I am being taught‬ﻋﻠﻤﻮا‬
‫‪3. They (masc.) were taught‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﺧﱪت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫‪4. They (fem.) taught‬‬
‫‪ 10. I was informed‬ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫‪5. Two Teachers‬‬
‫‪9. Both of you are being taught‬‬
‫‪B.‬‬
‫‪C.‬‬
3.5.1 Jaahada Family
We’re starting our third family today:
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ً و ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
You’ll notice that this family has two masdars, and an alif right after the first letter in the past tense.
Other than that, there’s nothing too different about this family’s sarf from the others.
Now, to make the Ism Faa’il, which is the fa-huwa part, what do you look for? You look at the fil
ٌ
mudaari’. So if it’s ‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬, you just pop a ‘mu’ on it, and you’ve got ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬.
ٌ
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ً و ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
In the previous families, every time we started the second line, there was an ‘u’ and an ‘e’ sound, like
ْ
‫ أﺧﱪ‬and ‫ﻋﻠﻢ‬. The same thing is going to happen here, except it’s going to sound a little weird: ‫ﺟﻮﻫﺪ‬. It
sounds long because ‫ ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬was long, and so, the ‘u’ sound in the passive sounds long, too. The ‘e’ sound
is normal, just how we would expect it to be. The second word, for the present passive, had an ‘u’ and
ْ
ْ
‘a’ sound going on. ‫ ﻳﺨﱪ‬became ‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬, and ‫ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬became ‫ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬. So now, in this family, ‫ ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬becomes
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬. Nothing new, here. The present passive is where the Ism Maf’ool comes from, so it’s no surprise
ٌ
that it’s ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬.
ٌ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
ٌ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ًوﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ًوﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻮﻫﺪ‬
The rest of the sarf sagheer is predictable. For the command, just take the present tense, take the ya off,
ْ
make it lightest, and there you have it: ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬. Nothing fancy is going on for the Nahi or the Tharf (looks
like the Ism Maf’ool). That’s it. Now you know the third family!
ٌ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
ٌ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ًوﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ًوﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
ْ
‫و اﻟ"ﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻮﻫﺪ‬
ٌ
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪A. See if you can recite the sarf sagheer (all four lines) of each of the words below following the‬‬
‫‪pattern you noticed in this family. Use the notes above as a guide, but try to do it from memory‬‬
‫‪when you’re comfortable:‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ًو ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ﺟﺎدل‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎدل‬
‫ﺟﺪاﻻ و ﻣﺠﺎد*‬
‫ﻫﺎﺟﺮ‬
‫‪-‬ﺎﺟﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺠﺎرا و ﻣﻬﺎﺟﺮة‬
‫راﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺮاﺑﻂ‬
‫رﺑﺎﻃﺎ و ﻣﺮاﺑﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻬﺎدا و ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪة‬
‫ﺻﺎﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺼﺎﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺒﺎرا و ﻣﺼﺎﺑﺮة‬
‫واﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻮاﻓﻖ‬
‫وﻓﺎﻗﺎ و ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻇﻬﺎرا و ﻣﻈﺎﻫﺮة‬
‫ﺣﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎ و ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫داﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺪاﻓﻊ‬
‫دﻓﺎﻋﺎ و ﻣﺪاﻓﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺎﻋﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺎﻋﻒ‬
‫ﺿﻌﺎﻓﺎ و ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻗﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺎﺑﺎ و ﻣﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺣﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺐ‬
‫ﺻﺤﺎﺑﺎ و ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺎدر‬
‫ﻳﻐﺎدر‬
‫ﻏﺪارا و ﻣﻐﺎدرة‬
‫ﻗﺎﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺎﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺴﺎﻣﺎ و ﻣﻘﺎ‪F‬ﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺎدا و ﻣﺒﺎﻋﺪة‬
1
3.6. Ta’allma Family
Our fourth family:
ً
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
There’s a ‫ ت‬in this family and it’s all fatha, fatha, fatha except when you get to the ‘u’ of the present
tense (but you’d expect the ‘u’ for the present tense anyway, so there’s nothing new there). The other
‘u’ is in the masdar. Other than that, you’ve got fathas across the board.
The next word should be easy to construct since we’ve come up with an ‫ اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬before. ‘Mu’ and ‘e’
are the two sounds that come up every time, and this family is no exception. So the ‫ اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬here is:
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ً
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
Now, let’s make the passives. Remember that past passives have ‘u’ and ‘e’ sounds, while present
passives have ‘u’ and ‘a’ sounds. You can have multiple u’s when making the past passive. Here we go:
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ً
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ً
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
The ‫ ت‬is a fixture to this family, so it’s still going to be there in the past tense. The ‫ أﻣﺮ‬and the ‫ ﻲ‬are
not going to be any different in construction than in any other of the families: we’ll take the present
tense, make it lightest, pop off the ‫ ي‬for the ‫أﻣﺮ‬, and switch the ‫ ي‬to a ‫ ت‬for the ‫ ﻲ‬:
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ً
ً
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫واﻟ"ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﻠ ْﻢ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
You already know the ‫ﻇﺮف‬, and now, the fourth family, too.
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻠ ْﻢ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪ family as a guide:‬ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ‪Try out the sarf sagheer of these words using the‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺪﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺑﺮا‬
‫ﺗﻐﲑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑا‬
‫ﺗﻔﻜﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻔﻜﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻜﺮا‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪل‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺪل‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻼ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺑﺺ‬
‫ﻳﱰﺑﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺑﺼﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪم‬
‫ﻳﺘﻘﺪم‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻄﻮع‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻮع‬
‫ﺗﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻔﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺴﺤﺎ‬
‫=ﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻳ?ﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫=ﺸﻬﺪا‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻄﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻄﻬﺮا‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰل‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺰل‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺘﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺘﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺘﻼ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮع‬
‫ﻳﺘﺠﺮع‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﺗﱪج‬
‫ﻳﺘﱪج‬
‫ﺗﱪﺟﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺠﻼ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻤﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﺪا‬
‫‪F‬ﺠﺪ‬
‫ﻳ‪G‬ﺠﺪ‬
‫‪F‬ﺠﺪا‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮ‪H‬ﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻛﻼ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻤﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﻤﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻴﻤﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻄﲑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﲑ‬
‫ﺗﻄﻴﲑا‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﲒ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﲒ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﲒا‬
1
3.7.1 Tasaa’ala Family
We’re starting a new family today, but before we get into the memorization of it, I want you to notice some
similarities between this one and the ‫ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬family:
ً
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
ً ‫ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳ ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
Look: the ‫ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬family has a ‫ت‬, a shaddah before you get to the last letter, and fatha’s everywhere (except when
you get to the masdar). The next family is also all fathas, but has an alif instead of a shaddah. That’s the only
difference. So if we picked up ‫ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬and tried putting it in this new family, it would be:
ً
ً
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬
We just replaced the shaddah with an alif. So, it’s pretty similar to the previous family we just learned. The sarf
sagheer, then, is also similar to the ‫ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬sarf sagheer. Again, just elongate the sound where you would normally
expect to have a shaddah, and you’ve got:
ٌ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ﺴﺎ ﻞ‬
ً ‫ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬
ٌ
ً ‫ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
ْ
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗ ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻳ ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻳ ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺴﻮ ﻞ‬
ٌ
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
There you have it. Practice the exercises in this handout, and you will know five families!
2
EXERCISES:
A. See if you can recite the sarf sagheer (all four lines) of each of the words below following the pattern
you noticed in this family. Use the notes above as a guide, but try to do it from memory when you’re
comfortable:
ً ‫ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫ﻳ ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎوﻧﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺎون‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎون‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎرﻛﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﺎرك‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎرك‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎوزا‬
‫ﻳﺘﺠﺎوز‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎوز‬
‫ﺗﺜﺎﻗﻼ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺜﺎﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺎﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺎﻣﺰا‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﺎﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺎﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺎﻓﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺨﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮاﺟﻌﺎ‬
‫ﻳﱰاﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺮاﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺸﺎورا‬
‫ﻳ ﺸﺎور‬
‫ﺸﺎور‬
‫ﺗﻈﺎﻫﺮا‬
‫ﻳﺘﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎرﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺎرف‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎرف‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺳﺮا‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺎﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﺎﺑﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺎﺑﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺟﺮا‬
‫ﻳﺘﻔﺎﺟﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺟﺮ‬
‫ﺎ‬A‫ﺗﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻘﺎﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺻﺮا‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
B. Take the following letters and plug them into this family (do the sarf sagheer):
‫وع د‬
‫نبز‬
‫لو م‬
‫نف س‬
C. Review: Keep all the families that you learned so far in mind as you try this exercise. Look at the
following words, and try to figure out which family they belong to:
‫‪3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟْﻤ ْﺮﻋﻰ )‪(٤‬ﻓﺠﻌ‪ Z‬ﻏﺜﺎء ً أ ْ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺢ ْ‬
‫ﺣﻮى )‪(٥‬ﺳﻨﻘﺮﺋﻚ ﻓﻼ‬
‫اﺳﻢ رﺑﻚ اﻷﻋ‪(١) L‬ا‪O‬ي ﺧﻠﻖ ﻓﺴﻮى )‪(٢‬وا‪O‬ي ﻗﺪر ﻓﻬﺪى )‪(٣‬وا‪O‬ي أ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻳﺨﺸﻰ‬
‫ﺗ_ﺴﻰ )‪(٦‬إﻻ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎء اﷲ إﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ اﻟﺠﻬﺮ وﻣﺎ ﻳﺨﻔﻰ )‪(٧‬وﻧ‪ef‬ك ﻟﻠ‪ef‬ى )‪(٨‬ﻓﺬﻛ ْﺮ إن ﻧﻔﻌﺖ ا‪O‬ﻛﺮى )‪(٩‬ﺳﻴﺬﻛﺮ ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫)‪(١٠‬وﻳﺘﺠﻨ‪l‬ﺎ اﻷﺷﻘﻰ )‪(١١‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺐ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ٌة ﻳ ْﺤﺴﺒﻮن ﻛﻞ ﺻ ْﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠ ْ‪ْ w‬ﻢ ‪ x‬اﻟْﻌﺪو ﻓ ْ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺎﻣ‪ ْo‬وإ ْن ﻳﻘﻮﻟﻮا ْﺴﻤ ْﻊ ﻟﻘ ْﻮﻟ‪ ْo‬ﻛﺄ‪ْ p‬ﻢ ﺧﺸ ٌ‬
‫ﺎﺣﺬ ْر‪ ْx‬ﻗﺎﺗﻠ‪o‬‬
‫وإذا رأ ْﻳ‪ْ n‬ﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻚ أ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﷲ أ‪ y‬ﻳﺆﻓﻜﻮن )‪(٤‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻒﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ رﺑﻚ و‪ ْx‬ﻧﺎ ﻤﻮن‬
‫إﻧﺎ ﺑﻠ ْﻮﻧﺎ‪ ْx‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺑﻠ ْﻮﻧﺎ أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﺠﻨﺔ إذ أﻗﺴﻤﻮا ﻟﻴ ْﺼﺮﻣ!ﺎ ﻣ ْﺼﺒﺤﲔ )‪(١٧‬وﻻ ~ ْﺴﺘﺜﻨﻮن )‪(١٨‬ﻓﻄﺎف ﻋﻠ ْ‪w‬ﺎ ﻃﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫)‪(١٩‬ﻓﺄ ْﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻛﺎﻟﺼﺮ‚ )‪(٢٠‬ﻓﺘﻨﺎد ْوا ﻣﺼﺒﺤﲔ )‪(٢١‬أن اﻏﺪوا ﻋ‪ L‬ﺣ ْﺮﺛ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ إن ﻛﻨ…ْ ﺻﺎرﻣﲔ )‪(٢٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻄﻠﻘﻮا و‪ ْx‬ﻳﺘﺨﺎﻓﺘﻮن )‪…(٢٣‬ﻗﺎل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْوﺳﻄ‪ o‬أﻟ ْﻢ أﻗﻞ ﻟ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ ﻟ ْﻮﻻ ﺴﺒﺤﻮن )‪(٢٨‬ﻗﺎﻟﻮا ﺳ ْﺒﺤﺎن رﺑﻨﺎ إﻧﺎ ﻛﻨﺎ ﻇﺎﻟﻤﲔ )‪(٢٩‬ﻓﺄﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻌﻀ‪ o‬ﻋ‪ L‬ﺑﻌ ٍﺾ ﻳﺘﻼوﻣﻮن )‪(٣٠‬ﻗﺎﻟﻮا ﻳﺎ و ْﻳﻠﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﻧﺎ ﻛﻨﺎ ﻃﺎﻏﲔ )‪(٣١‬ﻋﺴﻰ رﺑﻨﺎ أن ﻳ ْﺒﺪﻟﻨﺎ ﺧﲑًا ﻣ!ﺎ إﻧﺎ إ‪ Š‬رﺑﻨﺎ راﻏﺒﻮن )‪…(٣٢‬أﻓﻨﺠﻌﻞ اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﺠﺮﻣﲔ )‪(٣٥‬ﻣﺎ ﻟ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ ﻛ ْﻴﻒ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗ ْﺤﻜﻤﻮن )‪(٣٦‬أ ْم ﻟ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ ﻛﺘ ٌ‬
‫ﺎب ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺪرﺳﻮن )‪(٣٧‬إن ﻟ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﲑون )‪(٣٨‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫نفس‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻮﻓﺲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻓﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻓﺴﺎ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﻓ ْﺲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻓ ٌﺲ‬
‫لو م‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻓ ٌﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺑﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺑﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺑﺰا‬
‫ﺗﻨﻮﺑﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺑﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺑﺰا‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﺑ ْﺰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮوم‬
‫ﻳﺘﻼوم‬
‫ﺗﻼوﻣﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻼو ٌم‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻼو ٌم‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻼو ْم‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻼو ٌم‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻓ ٌﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺑ ٌﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻼوم‬
‫ﻳﺘﻼوم‬
‫ﺗﻼوﻣﺎ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻼو ْم‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﻓ ْﺲ‬
‫نبز‬
‫‪B.‬‬
‫وعد‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺑ ٌﺰ‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺑ ْﺰ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺑ ٌﺰ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻮاﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻋﺪا‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮاﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻋﺪ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻮاﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻋﺪا‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮاﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮوﻋﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻋﺪ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻮاﻋﺪ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻮاﻋﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟْﻤ ْﺮﻋﻰ )‪(٤‬ﻓﺠﻌ‪ Z‬ﻏﺜﺎء ً أ ْ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺢ ْ‬
‫ﺣﻮى )‪(٥‬ﺳﻨﻘﺮﺋﻚ ﻓﻼ‬
‫اﺳﻢ رﺑﻚ اﻷﻋ‪(١) L‬ا‪O‬ي ﺧﻠﻖ ﻓﺴﻮى )‪(٢‬وا‪O‬ي ﻗﺪر ﻓﻬﺪى )‪(٣‬وا‪O‬ي أ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ‪ :‬اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫‪C.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻳﺨﺸﻰ‬
‫ﺗ_ﺴﻰ )‪(٦‬إﻻ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎء اﷲ إﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ اﻟﺠﻬﺮ وﻣﺎ ﻳﺨﻔﻰ )‪(٧‬وﻧ‪ef‬ك ﻟﻠ‪ef‬ى )‪(٨‬ﻓﺬﻛ ْﺮ إن ﻧﻔﻌﺖ ا‪O‬ﻛﺮى )‪(٩‬ﺳﻴﺬﻛﺮ ﻣ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫ْ‬
‫)‪(١٠‬وﻳﺘﺠﻨ‪l‬ﺎ اﻷﺷﻘﻰ )‪(١١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ‪ :‬اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺐ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ٌة ﻳ ْﺤﺴﺒﻮن ﻛﻞ ﺻ ْﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠ ْ‪ْ w‬ﻢ ‪ x‬اﻟﻌﺪو ﻓ ْ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺎﻣ‪ ْo‬وإ ْن ﻳﻘﻮﻟﻮا ْﺴﻤ ْﻊ ﻟﻘ ْﻮﻟ‪ ْo‬ﻛﺄ‪ْ p‬ﻢ ﺧﺸ ٌ‬
‫ﺎﺣﺬ ْر‪ ْx‬ﻗﺎﺗﻠ‪o‬‬
‫وإذا رأ ْﻳ‪ْ n‬ﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻚ أ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ‪ :‬اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﷲ أ‪ y‬ﻳﺆﻓﻜﻮن )‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻒﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ رﺑﻚ و‪ ْx‬ﻧﺎ ﻤﻮن‬
‫إﻧﺎ ﺑﻠ ْﻮﻧﺎ‪ ْx‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺑﻠ ْﻮﻧﺎ أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﺠﻨﺔ إذ أﻗﺴﻤﻮا ﻟﻴﺼﺮﻣ!ﺎ ﻣﺼﺒﺤﲔ )‪(١٧‬وﻻ ~ ْﺴﺘﺜﻨﻮن )‪(١٨‬ﻓﻄﺎف ﻋﻠ ْ‪w‬ﺎ ﻃﺎ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫)‪(١٩‬ﻓﺄ ْﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻛﺎﻟﺼﺮ‚ )‪(٢٠‬ﻓﺘﻨﺎد ْوا ﻣﺼﺒﺤﲔ )‪(٢١‬أن اﻏﺪوا ﻋ‪ L‬ﺣ ْﺮﺛ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ إن ﻛﻨ…ْ ﺻﺎرﻣﲔ )‪(٢٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻄﻠﻘﻮا و‪ ْx‬ﻳﺘﺨﺎﻓﺘﻮن )‪…(٢٣‬ﻗﺎل‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أ ْوﺳﻄ‪ o‬أﻟ ْﻢ أﻗﻞ ﻟ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ ﻟ ْﻮﻻ ﺴﺒﺤﻮن )‪(٢٨‬ﻗﺎﻟﻮا ﺳ ْﺒﺤﺎن رﺑﻨﺎ إﻧﺎ ﻛﻨﺎ ﻇﺎﻟﻤﲔ )‪(٢٩‬ﻓﺄﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻌﻀ‪ o‬ﻋ‪ L‬ﺑﻌ ٍﺾ ﻳﺘﻼوﻣﻮن )‪(٣٠‬ﻗﺎﻟﻮا ﻳﺎ و ْﻳﻠﻨﺎ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﻧﺎ ﻛﻨﺎ ﻃﺎﻏﲔ )‪(٣١‬ﻋﺴﻰ رﺑﻨﺎ أن ﻳ ْﺒﺪﻟﻨﺎ ﺧﲑًا ﻣ!ﺎ إﻧﺎ إ‪ Š‬رﺑﻨﺎ راﻏﺒﻮن )‪…(٣٢‬أﻓﻨﺠﻌﻞ اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﺠﺮﻣﲔ )‪(٣٥‬ﻣﺎ ﻟ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ ﻛ ْﻴﻒ‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗ ْﺤﻜﻤﻮن )‪(٣٦‬أ ْم ﻟ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ ﻛﺘ ٌ‬
‫ﺎب ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺪرﺳﻮن )‪(٣٧‬إن ﻟ‪ْ ƒ‬ﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﲑون )‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﻀﺎرع‬
‫أ ْﺳﻠﻢ‪ :‬اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
1
3.8.1 Families 6, 7, and 8
Today, we are going to learn three families in one go. Don’t worry—they’re pretty similar, so just pay
attention, and you’ll learn them in no time. Here they are:
ْ
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ً
ً
ً
ْ
‫اﻧﻜﺴﺎرا‬
ْ
‫اﻧﻜ‬
ْ
‫ﻳ ﻨﻜ‬
All of these families start with an ‫ ا‬. Let’s take the first one, and try the sarf sagheer:
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣ ْﻘﱰ‬
‫ب‬
ً
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﻘﱰ‬
‫ب‬
ً
ْ
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
ْ ‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗ ْﻘﱰ‬%‫و اﻟ‬
‫ب‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
ْ ‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ا ْﻗﱰ‬
‫ب‬
ٌ ‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ْﻘﱰ‬
‫ب‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
Simple enough, right? This family has a ‫ ت‬in it—that’s what distinguishes it from the other two. The
second family’s sarf sagheer is similar:
ٌ
ً ‫ا ْﻧﻜﺴﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﻜ‬
ْ
ْ
‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ‬%‫و اﻟ‬
ٌ
ْ
‫ﻳﻨ ﻜ‬
ْ
ْ
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻜ‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ اﻧﻜ‬
ْ
‫اﻧﻜ‬
This one seems a little short, right? This is a shortcut family—there isn’t any passive for it, so you go
straight to ‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ‬. The last family:
ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
ً
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎرا‬
ً ‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮ‬, ‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ‬%‫و اﻟ‬
ْ
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
2
You now know all eight families. Practice running through lots of examples to help solidify them in your
mind. You know the first three families by heart, so it’ll be hard to forget them. As for the others, here
are some tips to help you keep them straight:
1. The first three families are the ONLY ones in which the present tense, commanding, and forbidding
have a dummah.
ْ
ً ‫ﺧﺒﺎرا‬
‫إ‬
ً
ْ
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ً و ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
2.
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
‫ﻢ‬8‫ﻳﻌﻠ‬
‫ﻢ‬8‫ﻋﻠ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
The next two all begin with ta, and pretty much have fatha’s across the board (except the masdar):
ً
‫ﻠﻤﺎ‬8 ‫ﺗﻌ‬
ً ‫ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬,
‫ﻠﻢ‬8 ‫ﻳﺘﻌ‬
‫ﻠﻢ‬8 ‫ﺗﻌ‬
‫ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬B‫ﻳ‬
‫ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬,
3. The last three are ‫ ا‬families. They have an ‫ ا‬in the past tense and the masdar. Notice that the ‫ا‬
ً
ْ
doesn’t have a hamza like in ‫إﺧﺒﺎرا‬.
ْ
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
ً ‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ً
ً ‫ا ْﻧﻜﺴﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﻜ‬
ْ
‫اﻧ ﻜ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES‬‬
‫‪A. Practice. Do the sarf sahgeer of each of these, using the first page as a guide (if you need it!):‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻈﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻈﻢ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻢ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺼﺮ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺼﺎرا‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺒﻖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺎﻗﺎ‬
‫اﻧ‪FB‬‬
‫ﻳﻨ‪FB‬‬
‫اﻧ‪B‬ﺸﺎرا‬
‫اﻋﺘﺰل‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺰل‬
‫اﻋﺘﺰاﻻ‬
‫اﻏﱰف‬
‫ﻳﻐﱰف‬
‫اﻏﱰاﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺑ‪J‬ﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺒ‪J‬ﻞ‬
‫اﺑ‪J‬ﺎﻻ‬
‫اﻗﱰن‬
‫ﻳﻘﱰن‬
‫اﻗﱰاﻧﺎ‬
‫اﻛ‪B‬ﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻜ‪B‬ﺴﺐ‬
‫اﻛ‪B‬ﺴﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺟ‪J‬ﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺠ‪J‬ﺪ‬
‫اﺟ‪J‬ﺎدا‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎ‬
‫اﻏ‪B‬ﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻐ‪B‬ﺴﻞ‬
‫اﻏ‪B‬ﺴﺎﻻ‬
‫اﺟﺘﻨﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺘﻨﺐ‬
‫اﺟﺘﻨﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺣ‪B‬ﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺤ‪B‬ﺴﺐ‬
‫اﺣ‪B‬ﺴﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻗﺘﺘﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻞ‬
‫اﻗﺘﺘﺎﻻ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻘﻠﺐ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻘﻠﺐ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻘﻼﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺒﻌﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ‬
‫اﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻔﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﻠﻖ‬
‫اﻧﻔﻼﻗﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺒﺠﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﺠﺲ‬
‫اﻧﺒﺠﺎﺳﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻘ‪U‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻘ‪U‬‬
‫اﻧﻘﻌﺎرا‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫!‪ family does not have passives‬اﻧﻘﻠﺐ ‪Remember that the‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ا‪V‬ﺴﻠﺦ‬
‫ﻳ‪X‬ﺴﻠﺦ‬
‫ا‪V‬ﺴﻼﺧﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻜﺪر‬
‫ﻳﻨﻜﺪر‬
‫اﻧﻜﺪارا‬
‫ا‪Y‬ﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳ‪%‬ﻤﺮ‬
‫ا‪Y‬ﻤﺎرا‬
‫اﻧﺼﺮف‬
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺮف‬
‫اﻧﺼﺮاﻓﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫اﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻔﺠﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﺠﺮ‬
‫اﻧﻔﺠﺎرا‬
‫اﻧﻔﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﻄﺮ‬
‫اﻧﻔﻄﺎرا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫اﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔﺎرا ً‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻻ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺄذن‬
‫ﺴﺘﺄذن‬
‫اﺳﺘﺄذاﻧﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﻼﺻﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﻼﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪل‬
‫ﺴﺘﺒﺪل‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻻ‬
‫اﺳﺘ_‪F‬‬
‫ﺴﺘ_‪F‬‬
‫اﺳﺘ_ﺸﺎرا‬
‫اﺳﺘﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺤﻔﺎﻇﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺮج‬
‫ﺴﺘﺨﺮج‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺮاﺟﺎ‬
‫اﺳﱰﻫﺐ‬
‫ﺴﱰﻫﺐ‬
‫اﺳﱰﻫﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻌﻤﺮ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎرا‬
‫اﺳ‪B‬ﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺴ‪B‬ﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫اﺳ‪B‬ﺸﻬﺎدا‬
‫اﺳﺘﺼﺮخ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺼﺮخ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺼﺮاﺧﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻀﻌﻒ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻀﻌﻒ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻀﻌﺎﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻄﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻄﻌﻢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻄﻌﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺘﺐ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻌﺘﺐ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺘﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻌﺠﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺠﺎﻻ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺼﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫‪Practice for the last family:‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻠﻆ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻐﻠﻆ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻼﻇﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻤﺴﻚ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺴﺎﻛﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻨﻜﺢ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻨﻜﺢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻨﻜﺎﺣﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻨﻜﻒ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻨﻜﻒ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻨﻜﺎﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﱪ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻜﱪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺒﺎرا‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻜﺜﺮ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺜﺎرا‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻋﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪3.9.1 Cumulative Review (Part 1‬‬
‫‪We’re going to go through some ayahs in Surah AlKahf and try to match words to the families we’ve‬‬
‫‪learned so far:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬اﻟﺤﻤﺪ ﷲ ا ي أﻧﺰل ﻋ ﻋ ْﺒﺪه اﻟ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﺘﺎب وﻟ ْﻢ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ! ﻋﻮﺟﺎ )‪(١‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﻧﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﻧﺰاﻻ‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫إﻧﺰاﻻ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺰل‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫و اﻟ‪-‬ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺰل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ >ﻧﻪ وﻳ@? اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﲔ ا ﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮن اﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺎت أن ﻟ‪ G‬أﺟﺮً ا ﺣﺴﻨًﺎ )‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ (a‬ﻗﻴ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺬر ﺑﺄ ًﺳﺎ ﺷﺪﻳﺪا ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪), it ends with ‘a’.‬ﻳﻨﺬر( ’‪ makes the present tense light, so instead of ending with ‘u‬ل ‪Note:‬‬
‫‪ light‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺬر‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﻧﺬ ْر‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﻧﺬارا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫إﻧﺬارا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟ‪-‬ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺬ ْر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ >ﻧﻪ وﻳ@? اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﲔ ا ﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮن اﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺎت أن ﻟ‪ G‬أﺟﺮً ا ﺣﺴﻨًﺎ )‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ (b‬ﻗﻴ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺬر ﺑﺄ ًﺳﺎ ﺷﺪﻳﺪا ﻣ‬
‫‪.‬ﻳ@? ‪ still carries over. Orginially, it was‬ل ‪Note: The effect of the‬‬
‫‪ light‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫‪?M‬‬
‫ﻳ@?‬
‫‪?M‬‬
‫ﻳ@?‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗ@ﺸﲑا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗ@ﺸﲑا‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ‪ْ M‬‬
‫?‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣ@ ٌ‬
‫?‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ@ ٌ‬
‫?‬
‫و اﻟ‪-‬ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗ@ ْ‬
‫?‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ@ ٌ‬
‫?‬
2
ْ
ْ ْ ً
ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ ْ
(٢) ‫ أﺟﺮً ا ﺣﺴﻨًﺎ‬G‫ﻦ >ﻧﻪ وﻳ@? اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﲔ ا ﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮن اﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺎت أن ﻟ‬
‫( ﻗﻴ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺬر ﺑﺄ ًﺳﺎ ﺷﺪﻳﺪا ﻣ‬c
ٌ ‫ﻣ ْﺆﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ْ
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﻮن‬
Note: If you go through the families, it matches up with the akhbara family most closely, even though
ْ
ْ
ً
it sounds a bit different since it starts with a hamza. Instead of ‫أ ْءﻣﻦ ﻳﺆﻣﻦ إﺋﻤﺎﻧﺎ‬, we smooth it out to:
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺆﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣ ْﺆﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ْ ‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗ ْﺆﻣ‬-‫و اﻟ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ً
ً
‫إﻳﻤﺎﻧﺎ‬
‫إﻳﻤﺎﻧﺎ‬
ٌ ‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ْﺆﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺆﻣﻦ‬
‫آﻣﻦ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺆﻣﻦ‬
ْ ‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ آﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫أوﻣﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
ْ
ْ ْ ً
ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ ْ
(٢) ‫ أﺟﺮً ا ﺣﺴﻨًﺎ‬G‫ﻦ >ﻧﻪ وﻳ@? اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﲔ ا ﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠﻮن اﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺎت أن ﻟ‬
‫( ﻗﻴ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺬر ﺑﺄ ًﺳﺎ ﺷﺪﻳﺪا ﻣ‬d
Note: This one doesn’t match up with any of the families we learned yet. It’s not from the 8 big families
we learned, but we still know that it’s a ‫ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬.
ً ‫( وﻳﻨْﺬر ا ﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﻮا اﺗﺨﺬ اﷲ و‬a .3
(٤) ‫>ا‬
Note: The effect of the ‫ ل‬still carries over.
ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
ْ
‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺬ ْر‬-‫و اﻟ‬
ْ
‫إﻧﺬارا‬
ْ
ً
‫إﻧﺬارا‬
ً
ْ
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺬ ٌر‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺬر‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺬر‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﻧﺬ ْر‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺬر‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺬر‬
‫ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬light
ً ‫( وﻳﻨْﺬر ا ﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﻮا اﺗﺨﺬ اﷲ و‬b
(٤) ‫>ا‬
Note: We know this is ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬, even though it’s not the first word of the past tense chart (which would
be ‫)ﻗﺎل‬. It’s got three letters, but doesn’t match up with any of the families we learned so far. It must be
3
from one of the small families we haven’t learned yet (hint: if the past tense is only 3 letters, it can’t be
from one of the 8 families).
ْ ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ ْ
‫ْ إن ﻟ ْﻢ‬d‫(ﻓﻠﻌﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﺧ ٌﻊ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻋ آﺛﺎر‬٥) ‫ إن ﻳﻘﻮﻟﻮن إﻻ ﻛﺬ ًﺑﺎ‬G‫ﻦ أﻓﻮاﻫ‬
‫ ْﻢ ﻛﱪت ﻛﻠﻤ ًﺔ ﺗﺨﺮج ﻣ‬W‫ﻦ ﻋﻠ ٍﻢ وﻻ ﻵﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣ‬G‫ ﻣﺎ ﻟ‬.4
ْ
ْ
(٦) ‫ﺬا اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺚ أﺳ ًﻔﺎ‬f ‫ﻳﺆﻣﻨﻮا‬
When I’ve gone through all the families we’ve covered, I don’t find a match. It must be from a small
family. All I know so far is that this is ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬.
ْ ْ
ْ
‫ﻦ >ﻧﻚ‬
‫ﻬﻒ ﻓﻘﺎﻟﻮا رﺑﻨﺎ آﺗﻨﺎ ﻣ‬
ْ
ْ
ْ ْ
ْ ‫ ﻛﺎﻧﻮا ﻣ‬m‫ْﻬﻒ واﻟﺮﻗ‬
‫ اﻟ‬q‫(إذ أوى اﻟﻔﺘﻴﺔ إ‬٩) ‫ﻦ آﻳﺎﺗﻨﺎ ﻋﺠ ًﺒﺎ‬
ْ
‫ أ ْم ﺣﺴ ْﺒﺖ أن أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟ‬.5
ْ ‫ﺊ ﻟﻨ ﺎ ﻣ‬
ْ ‫ ًﺔ وﻫﻴ‬rْ ‫ر‬
(١٠) ‫ﻦ أ ْﻣﺮﻧﺎ رﺷ ًﺪا‬
ْ ‫ ﻫﻴ‬sounds like ‫ !ﻋﻠ ْﻢ‬Commands and forbidding have a sukoon (in the sarf sagheer) at the end, so that’s
‫ﺊ‬
what gives this one away. It’s not a past tense because it doesn’t have an ‘a’ at the end. The sarf sagheer
for this word is challenging, but this is what we came to in class:
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻬﻴ‬
‫ﺊ‬
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻬﻴ‬
‫ﺊ‬
ْ ‫ﻴ‬v ‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ‬-‫و اﻟ‬
‫ﺊ‬
ً
ً
ْ
‫ﻴﻴﺌﺎ‬v
ْ
‫ﻴﻴﺌﺎ‬v
ٌ ‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻬﻴ‬
‫ﺊ‬
‫ﻴﺊ‬w
‫ﻫﻴﺊ‬
‫ﻴﺊ‬w
‫ﻫﻴﺊ‬
ْ ‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻫﻴ‬
‫ﺊ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪3.9.2 Cumulative Review (Part 2‬‬
‫‪Today, we went over sarf kabeer of each of three families. It’s written out here so that you can refer to‬‬
‫‪these notes as you practice doing the sarf kabeer yourself. It looks a little overwhelming, but you know‬‬
‫!‪all this‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﺧ ﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﺧ ﱪ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ أﺧﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ أﺧﱪ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ أﺧﱪت‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﺧﱪت‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﺧﱪت‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺧﱪت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺧﺒ ٌ‬
‫ﺎر‬
‫إ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺧﺒﺎرا ً‬
‫إ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎر‬
‫إﺧﺒ ٍ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ﱪ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺨﱪا ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﱪ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﺧﱪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﺧﱪﺗﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﺧﱪﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﺧﱪﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ أﺧﱪﻧﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﺧﺒﺎران‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﺧﺒﺎر ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﺧﺒﺎر ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺧﺒﺎرا ً‬
‫إ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺧﺒﺎرا ً‬
‫إ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫) أﺧﱪوا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ أﺧﱪن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﱪ ْ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬أﺧ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ أﺧﱪﺗ ‪3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺨﱪﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺧﱪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﱪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﱪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﱪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﱪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫) ﻳﺨﱪون‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺨﱪن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﱪون‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺨﱪن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫إﺧﺒﺎرت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫إﺧﺒﺎر ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫إﺧﺒﺎر ٍ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪون‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ٍة‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪات‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ﱪ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ﱪ ٍ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ أﺧﱪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ B‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ أﺧﱪت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﺧﱪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ أﺧﱪﺗﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﺧﱪت‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﺧﱪﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺧﱪت‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ أﺧﱪﻧﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﺧﱪت‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺨﱪا ً‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﱪ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ٍ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﺧﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ أﺧﱪي‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺨﱪا ً‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﱪ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ٍ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﺧﱪﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫) أﺧﱪوا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ أﺧﱪن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﱪ ْ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬أﺧ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﺗ‬
‫ﱪ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ أﺧ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪون‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﺧﱪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ أﺧﱪا‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬أﺧﱪوا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ أﺧﱪن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ B‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫) ﻳﺨﱪون‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﱪان‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺨﱪن‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﱪان‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺨﱪﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺧﱪ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪ ٍة‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﺨﱪي‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﱪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﱪان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺨﱪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﱪون‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺨﱪن‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪات‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ﱪ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺨﱪﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺨ ﱪ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ ﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺨﱪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺨﱪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﺨﱪوا‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻﺗﺨﱪن‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻋﻠ‪ْ 3‬ﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠ‪ْ 3‬ﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﺗ ْﻌﻠ‪ٌH‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﲔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠ ٍ‪H‬‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫) ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﻋﻠ ْﻤ‪ْ.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘ ‪3‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪ٍ 3‬ﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ B‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎن‬
‫) ﻳﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻌﻠ‪ٌ 3‬ﻢ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫) ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﻋﻠ ْﻤ‪ْ.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘ ‪3‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤ ًﺔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ B‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎن‬
‫) ﻳﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻮن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪ٌ 3‬ﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠ ٍﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻋﻠ‪ْ 3‬ﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠ ٍﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﻨﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻋ ‪3‬ﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﲔ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻋﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤ ًﺔ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﻌﻠ‪ْ 3‬ﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻢ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻌ ‪3‬ﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ ﻲ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎﻻﺗﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻﺗﻌﻠ‪3‬ﻤﻦ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻮﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ًو ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ًو ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺪت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺟﺎﻫﺪت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺟﺎﻫﺪت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺪت‬
‫ﺟﻬ ٌ‬
‫ﺎد‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺪﺗﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺪﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺪﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺟﺎﻫﺪﻧﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدان‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪة‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﺗﺎن‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎ ٍد‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍة‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪا ً‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫ ٍﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎد ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎد ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫) ﺟﺎﻫﺪوا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺟﺎﻫﺪن‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻫ ْﺪ ْ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﺗ‬
‫ﺪ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺟﺎﻫ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫) ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪون‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪون‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدات‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎد ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎد ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺪا‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪون‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪة‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍة‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ B‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺟﻮﻫﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺟﻮﻫﺪت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺟﻮﻫﺪت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺟﻮﻫﺪت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺪت‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪا ً‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫ ٍﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺪا‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺪﺗﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺪﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺟﻮﻫﺪﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺟﻮﻫﺪﻧﺎ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺟﺎﻫﺪي‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺪا‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪا ً‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫ ٍﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪون‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺪا‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫) ﺟﻮﻫﺪوا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺟﻮﻫﺪن‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺟﻮﻫ ْﺪ ْ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﺗ‬
‫ﺪ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺟﻮﻫ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻫﺪوا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺟﺎﻫﺪن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ B‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫) ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪون‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪان‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪون‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪة‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍة‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪﺗﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ ﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪا‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪي‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪا‬
‫أﻧ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪوا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺪن‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪3.9.3 Cumulative Review (Part 3‬‬
‫‪Picking up from where we left last time, we did the sarf kabeer of three more families:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻠ ْﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫و اﻟ‪5‬ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﻠ ْﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠ ٍﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٍﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫أﻧ ﺗﻌﻠ ْﻤ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫أﻧ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ٍﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ= اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٍﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﻠ ْﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻲ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٍﻢ‬
‫أﻧ ﺗﻌﻠ ْﻤ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠ ٌﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫أﻧ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ= اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺗﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺘﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ٍﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫أﻧ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻤ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ‪5‬ﻲ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﺘﻌﻠ ْﻢ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﻲ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧ ﻻﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻﺗﺘﻌﻠﻤﻦ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻞ‬
‫ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ً‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟ‪5‬ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ً‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋ ٍﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻦ‬
‫أﻧ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋ ْﻠ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺘﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻞ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻼ ً‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪ٍ A‬ﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫أﻧ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼت‬
‫ت‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ٍ‬
‫ت‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻠﻮن‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻠﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻠﲔ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ= اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻼن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻠﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻠﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻼ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻞ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﻦ‬
‫أﻧ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪ْ A‬ﻠ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪GA‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻠﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻠﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻠﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪ً GA‬‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪ٍGA‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻼت‬
‫ت‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻼ ٍ‬
‫ت‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎ‪A‬ﻼ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ= اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫أﻧ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻦ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﺖ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ً‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋ ٍﻞ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪F‬ﺴﻮ‪A‬ﻠﻨﺎ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋ‪H‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ً‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋ ٍﻞ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻮن‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﲔ‬
‫أﻧ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ‪F‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼت‬
‫ت‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ٍ‬
‫ت‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋ‪G‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋ‪ً G‬‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋ‪ٍG‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﺘﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼت‬
‫ت‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ٍ‬
‫ت‬
‫ﻣ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ‪5‬ﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎﻻﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋ‪H‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎﻻﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫أﻧ ﻻﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻﺗ‪C‬ﺴﺎﺋﻠﻦ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰب‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ا ْﻗﱰ ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ اﻗﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ اﻗﱰﺑﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ اﻗﱰﺑﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ اﻗﱰﺑﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
‫ا ْﻗﱰ ٌ‬
‫اب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
‫ا ْﻗﱰ ٌ‬
‫اب‬
‫ﻣ ْﻘﱰ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰ ٍ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﻮن‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫و اﻟ‪5‬ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗ ْﻘﱰ ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ْﻘﱰ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰﺑﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ ا ْﻗﱰ ْﺑ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣ ْﻘﱰ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﻘﱰ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻗﱰب‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﱰﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻘﱰﺑﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻘﱰ ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻘﱰ ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ= اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰﺑﻮا‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ اﻗﱰﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ اﻗﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ اﻗﱰﺑﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ اﻗﱰﺑﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ ا ْﻗﱰ ْﺑ ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺎت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ= اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻘﱰﺑﻮن‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﱰﺑﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﺎن ﻫﻦ ﻳﻘﱰ ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﺎن أﻧ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﻮن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﺎن أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻘﱰ ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻣ ْﻘﱰ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰ ٍ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ْاﻗﱰ ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ اﻗﱰ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣ ْﻘﱰ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻗﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﻮن‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻗﱰﺑﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻗﱰﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ اﻗﱰﺑﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ اﻗﱰ ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺎت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗ ْﻘﱰ ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﻘﱰ‪N‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻘﱰب‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﱰﺑ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ‪5‬ﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻘﱰﺑﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻘﱰﺑﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ ﻻﺗﻘﱰﺑﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻﺗﻘﱰ ْﺑﻦ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪3.9.4 Cumulative Review (Part 4‬‬
‫‪In the previous session, we went over the sarf kabeer of three families. We’ve only got two more to go:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧ ﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ اﻧﻜ ت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ااﻧﻜ ْ ت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ اﻧﻜ ْ ت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ اﻧﻜ ْ ت‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ا ْﻧﻜﺴ ٌ‬
‫ﺎر‬
‫ا ْﻧﻜﺴﺎرا ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎر‬
‫ا ﻧ ﻜﺴ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻜﺴﺎران‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫اً‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْﻳﻦ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫' اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ‪ ,‬اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫وا‬
‫ْن‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﺗ ‪1‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻨﻜ‬
‫ان‬
‫ان‬
‫ان‬
‫ان‬
‫ْ‬
‫' ﻳﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻨﻜ‬
‫ون‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ‪ ,‬ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْن‬
‫ون‬
‫ْن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻜﺴﺎرات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ٍ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ اﻧﻜ ا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ اﻧﻜ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻧﻜ ْ ﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻧﻜ ْ ﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ اﻧﻜ ْ ﻧﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻜ‬
‫ا ْﻧﻜﺴﺎرا ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ‪ ,‬اﻧﻜ‬
‫ون‬
‫ﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ﻳﻦ‬
‫وا‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ة‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ٍة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫اﻟ ﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ا‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ات‬
‫ات‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ‪ ,‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫وا‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ اﻧﻜ‬
‫ي‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫اً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜ‬
‫ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ اﻧﻜ‬
‫ْن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮﺳﺮات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮﺳﺮ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﻨﻜﺮﺳﺮ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ي‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ‬
‫ْن‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮت‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮت‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮت‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔﺎرا ً‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔﺎرا ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫' ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮوا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ْ ,‬‬
‫اﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔ ْﺮ ْ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ اﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗ ‪1‬‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔ ٌ‬
‫ﺎر‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔﺎرا ً‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﺎر‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻔ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎران‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎر ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎر ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘ ْﻐﻔﺮا ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٍﺮ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮون‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أ ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪ْ D‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫' ‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮون‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧ‪ْ C ,‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮون‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎرات‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎر ٍ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎر ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫' ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮوا‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮت ﻫﻤﺎ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔ ْﺮت أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ أﻧ‪ ,‬ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔ ْﺮ ْ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫أﻧﺖ ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔ ْﺮت أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ أﻧﺘﻦ ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔ ْ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﺗ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍة‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮات‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان ' ‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮون‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان ﻫﻦ ‪ْ B‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان أﻧ‪ْ C ,‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮون‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان أﻧﺘﻦ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ أ ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘ ْﻐﻔﺮا ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٍﺮ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮون‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ًة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍة‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮي‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮا‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮي‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘ ْﻐﻔﺮا ً‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮان‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮوا‬
‫أﻧ‪,‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮات‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪ْ D‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮات‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ ﻲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎﻻ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮا أﻧ‪ ,‬ﻻ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮوا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎﻻ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮا أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻ‪ْ C‬ﺴﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮن‬
1
3.10 Cumulative Exam
What is the sarf sagheer and sarf kabeer of the following words? Say them aloud, record yourself, and
then double-check your answers by checking against the answer key attached. If you struggle through
this, practice the sarf charts some more before moving on to new material.
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﺷﺮف‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ﺷﺮف‬
‫ف‬
‫ﺷﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺷﺮف‬
‫ف‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ف‬
‫واﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻳﻒ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻲ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٍف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪7‬‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻳﻔ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻳﻔ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻓﻮا‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻓْ‪ْ3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺎت‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧ‪3‬‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪7‬‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺷﺮف‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ﻓﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪3‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻓًﺎ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻮ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺷﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻓﻮا‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻓْ‪ْ3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻳﻒ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺎن‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺎت‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓًﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٍف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮف‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﰲ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻓﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓًﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٍف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺎت‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ!ﻲ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻓﺎ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻻ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ‬
‫ﰲ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻓﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻ‬
‫ﻓﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻗﻮرب‬
‫ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻗﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻗﺮا ًﺑﺎ و ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮا ًﺑﺎ و ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎرب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎرﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺘﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﻗﺮ ٌ‬
‫اب‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﺎن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻗﺮا ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫اب‬
‫ﻗﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺎرﺑﻮا‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻗﺎر ْﺑ‪ْ3‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻗﻮرب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﻮرﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﻮرﺑﺘﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﻮرﺑﻮا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻗﻮر ْﺑ‪ْ3‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﻮرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﺎت‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٍ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر‪M‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻗﺎرﺑﻮا‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﻘﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﻘﺎر‪M‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ!ﻲ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻻﺗﻘﺎرﺑﻮا‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻﺗﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا ً‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮت‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮوا‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‪ْN‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﺗﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮت‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ات‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ًة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍة‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮوا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮ‪ْN‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﺗﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ات‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮة‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﺎن‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮي‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮوا‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮي‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ًة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍة‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮوا‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ!ﻲ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
1
3.10 Cumulative Exam
What is the sarf sagheer and sarf kabeer of the following words? Say them aloud, record yourself, and
then double-check your answers by checking against the answer key attached. If you struggle through
this, practice the sarf charts some more before moving on to new material.
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﺷﺮف‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ﺷﺮف‬
‫ف‬
‫ﺷﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺷﺮف‬
‫ف‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ف‬
‫واﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻳﻒ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻲ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٍف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪7‬‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻳﻔ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻳﻔ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻓﻮا‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻓْ‪ْ3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺎت‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧ‪3‬‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪7‬‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺷﺮف‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ﻓﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪3‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻓًﺎ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻮ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺷﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻓﻮا‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻓْ‪ْ3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻳﻒ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺎن‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺎت‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓًﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٍف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮف‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﰲ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻓﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓًﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٍف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺎت‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ!ﻲ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻓﺎ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻻ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ‬
‫ﰲ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻓﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻ‬
‫ﻓﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻗﻮرب‬
‫ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻗﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻗﺮا ًﺑﺎ و ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮا ًﺑﺎ و ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎرب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎرﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺘﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﻗﺮ ٌ‬
‫اب‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﺎن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻗﺮا ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫اب‬
‫ﻗﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺎرﺑﻮا‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻗﺎر ْﺑ‪ْ3‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻗﻮرب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﻮرﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﻮرﺑﺘﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﻮرﺑﻮا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻗﻮر ْﺑ‪ْ3‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﻮرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﺎت‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٍ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر‪M‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻗﺎرﺑﻮا‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﻘﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﻘﺎر‪M‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ!ﻲ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻻﺗﻘﺎرﺑﻮا‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻﺗﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا ً‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮت‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮوا‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‪ْN‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﺗﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮت‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ات‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ًة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍة‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮوا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮ‪ْN‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﺗﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ات‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮة‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﺎن‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮي‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮوا‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮي‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ًة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍة‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮوا‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ!ﻲ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
1
3.10 Cumulative Exam
What is the sarf sagheer and sarf kabeer of the following words? Say them aloud, record yourself, and
then double-check your answers by checking against the answer key attached. If you struggle through
this, practice the sarf charts some more before moving on to new material.
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﺷﺮف‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ﺷﺮف‬
‫ف‬
‫ﺷﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺷﺮف‬
‫ف‬
‫ْ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ف‬
‫واﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻳﻒ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻲ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٍف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪7‬‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻳﻔ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻳﻔ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻓﻮا‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻓْ‪ْ3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺎت‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻮ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧ‪3‬‬
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ‪7‬‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺷﺮف‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ﻓﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪3‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻓًﺎ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻮ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺷﺮف‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻔﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻓﻮا‬‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻓْ‪ْ3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻨﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻳﻒ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺎن‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﻮن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺎت‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓًﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٍف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮف‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﰲ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺷﺮﻓﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓًﺎ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٍف‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻓﺎت‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻓ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ!ﻲ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ف‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻓﺎ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻻ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ‬
‫ﰲ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻓﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻ‬
‫ﻓﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻦ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻗﻮرب‬
‫ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻗﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻗﺮا ًﺑﺎ و ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮا ًﺑﺎ و ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎرب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎرﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺘﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﻗﺮ ٌ‬
‫اب‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﺎن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻗﺮا ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫اب‬
‫ﻗﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺎرﺑﻮا‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻗﺎر ْﺑ‪ْ3‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻗﻮرب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﻮرﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﻮرﺑﺘﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺖ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﻮرﺑﻮا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرب‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﻗﺎرب‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻗﻮر ْﺑ‪ْ3‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﻮر ْﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻗﻮرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻘﺎرب‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻗﺮاﺑﺎت‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٍ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻗﺎر‪M‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ًﺑﺎ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ًﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍﺔ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻗﺎرﺑﻮا‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﻘﺎر ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻﺗﻘﺎر‪M‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻘﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺎرﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎر ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻗﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ!ﻲ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑﺎت‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎرﺑ ٍ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻻﺗﻘﺎرﺑﻮا‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻﺗﻘﺎر ْﺑﻦ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا ً‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫و اﻟ!ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮت‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮوا‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‪ْN‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮﺗﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮت‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮﺗﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮت‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﺗﻤﺎ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ات‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ًة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍة‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮوا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫أﻧﺎ أﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮ‪ْN‬‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﺛ ْﺮﺗﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ات‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎض ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮة‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﻋ‪ G‬اﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮل‬
‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل ﻣﺆﻧﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﺎن‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫ﻫﻦ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮون‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮي‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٌﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛ ٍﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻇﺮف‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮان‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮوا‬
‫أﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮي‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ًة‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍة‬
‫أﻧ‪ 3‬ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮوا‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﺮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮﺗﲔ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮات‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫اﻟ!ﻲ‬
‫ات‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺎﺛﺮ ٍ‬
‫أﻧﺘﻦ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛ ْﺮن‬
1
3.11.1 Six Small Families (Part 1)
We’re going to start the six families now. We learned the 8 families first because they are easier—they’re
ْ
ْ
predictable. If I gave you ‫أﻧﻌﻢ‬, you can do the sarf sagheer of it because you know how to do ‫أﺧﱪ‬. That’s
not how it works with the six families, though. Knowing the first word of the family isn’t enough. You would
need to know the maadi, mudaari’, and the masdar. The masdars can be different, too. If you have ‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬,
ً
which sounds just like ‫ ﻊ‬, and you’d think the masdar is ‫( ﺣ ْﺴﺒﺎ‬since the masdar of ‫ﻊ‬
ً ْ
is ‫) ﻌﺎ‬, but the
ً
masdar is actually ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎ‬. This is something you’re going to have to get used to. I’ll give you the masdars of
the words we go over in class, and when you memorize them, there won’t be any guesswork.
Now, here are the maadi, mudaari’, and masdar of the six families (we’ll go over the sarf sagheer later):
ً
To open
ً ْ
‫ﺿﺮﺑﺎ‬
To hit
ً
To help
To listen
To
calculate
To honor
ْ
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎ‬
ً
ْ
‫ﻧﺼﺮا‬
ً ْ
‫ﻌﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺮاﻣ ًﺔ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻀﺮب‬
‫ﺿﺮب‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
‫ ْﺴﻤﻊ‬#
‫ﻊ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﺮم‬
‫ﻛﺮم‬
We came up with a story in class to help remember all the families:
ْ
ْ
ً ْ
ً
Somebody opened the door (‫)ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﺘﺤﺎ‬, and got hit as soon as he walked in (‫)ﺿﺮب ﻳﻀﺮب ﺿ ْﺮﺑﺎ‬. He
ْ
ً ْ
asked for help (ً ‫)ﻧﺼﺮ ﻳﻨﺼﺮ ﻧ ْﺼﺮا‬, but nobody listened to him (‫ﻌﺎ‬
‫ ْﺴﻤﻊ‬# ‫) ﻊ‬. He got hit because he couldn’t
ْ
ً
calculate (‫)ﺣﺴﺐ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎ‬, but next time, he did well on the test, and was honored by the teacher ( ‫ﻛﺮم‬
ْ
‫)ﻳﻜﺮم ﻛﺮاﻣ ًﺔ‬.
Now let’s make some observations:
1. Let’s look at the past tenses of these families:
2
There are three that are fatha’s all across (‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬, ‫ﺿﺮب‬, and ‫)ﻧﺼﺮ‬, two
that have a kasra on the middle letter (‫ﻊ‬
and ‫)ﺣﺴﺐ‬, and one with a
damma in the middle (‫)ﻛﺮم‬. Note: When I say the fat-ha one, or the
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺮ ب‬
‫ﻓﺘ ﺢ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻊ‬
kasra-one, I’ll always be referring to the middle letter of the word
since the first and last letters are always the same.
‫ﻛﺮم‬
2. What makes the three fatha families different from each other? Their present tenses do. Look:
ْ
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ‬
Goes to an ‘a’
ْ
‫ﻳﻀﺮب‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬
An ‘a’
‫ﺿﺮب‬
Goes to an ‘e’
An ‘a’
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
Goes to a ‘u’
An ‘a’
The past tenses have fathas all across, but the middle letter in the present tense is different. If it has a
fatha, it matches the ‫ ﻓﺘﺢ‬family; a kasra, it matches ‫ ;ﺿﺮب‬and a damma matches the ‫ ﻧﺼﺮ‬family. If you
didn’t know the families, you’d think that ‫ ﺿﺮب‬is exactly the same as ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬. Then you might guess that the
ْ
ْ
present tense of ‫ ﺿﺮب‬is ‫ ﻳﻀﺮب‬when it’s actually ‫ﻳﻀﺮب‬. That’s why the harakahs are really important—
you don’t want to put something in the wrong family.
Then there are two kasra families. Again, their past tenses look similar, but it’s the present tenses that
make them different: one is an ‘e’ to ‘a’, and the other is ‘e’ to ‘u’.
‫ ْﺴﻤﻊ‬#
ْ
‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
Now, the last family has a damma in both the past and present tense.
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﺮم‬
‫ﻛﺮم‬
3
EXERCISES
A. Memorize all the six families. You need to know them by heart so that you don’t confuse them with
each other. Once you have them down, go on to Part B and practice.
B. Looking at the past and present tenses of these words, figure out which family they belong to.
Don’t worry about the masdars for now.
Tip: When the past tense is fatha, it could belong to either the fataha, daraba, or nasara family, and
the present tense could either be like yaftahu, or yadribu, or yansuru. If the past tense has a kasra
in it, then it could go with either samia or hasiba. But if the past tense has a damma in it, it can only
go with one family, the karuma family.
Which Family?
Present Tense
ْ
‫ﻳﻀﺤﻚ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻳ ْﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻳ ْﺒﻌﺪ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺠﻠﺲ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﺘﺐ‬
‫ﻳ ْﺒﺪأ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﻈﺮ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
‫ ْﺴﺄل‬#
ْ
‫ﻳﺄﺧﺬ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻐﻀﺐ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺤﺰن‬
Past Tense
‫ ﺿﺤﻚ‬.1
‫ ﻛﻔﺮ‬.2
‫ رﺟﻊ‬.3
‫ ﺑﻌﺪ‬.4
‫ ﻋﻠﻢ‬.5
‫ ﺟﻠﺲ‬.6
‫ ﻛﺘﺐ‬.7
‫ ﺑﺪأ‬.8
‫ ﺣﻔﻆ‬.9
‫ ﻧﻈﺮ‬.10
‫ ﻧﺰل‬.11
‫ ﺳﺄل‬.12
‫ أﺧﺬ‬.13
‫ ﻏﻀﺐ‬.14
‫ ﺣﺰن‬.15
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY‬‬
‫‪Part B:‬‬
‫‪Past Tense‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺿﺤﻚ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻛﻔﺮ‬
‫‪ .3‬رﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺟﻠﺲ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻛﺘﺐ‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺑﺪأ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻧﺰل‬
‫‪ .12‬ﺳﺄل‬
‫‪ .13‬أﺧﺬ‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻏﻀﺐ‬
‫‪ .15‬ﺣﺰن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻀﺤﻚ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻳ ْﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻳ ْﺒﻌﺪ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻠﺲ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﺐ‬
‫ﻳ ْﺒﺪأ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
‫‪ْ #‬ﺴﺄل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻐﻀﺐ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺰن‬
‫‪Present Tense‬‬
‫?‪Which Family‬‬
‫ﻊ ‪ْ #‬ﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺿﺮب ﻳﻀﺮب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻛﺮم ﻳﻜﺮم‬
‫ﻊ ‪ْ #‬ﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺿﺮب ﻳﻀﺮب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻊ ‪ْ #‬ﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺿﺮب ﻳﻀﺮب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻊ ‪ْ #‬ﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻊ ‪ْ #‬ﺴﻤﻊ‬
1
3.11.2 Six Small Families (Part 2)
We started the six small families last session, and went over their sarf sagheer today, beginning with:
ً
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻓﺎﺗ‬
‫ﺢ‬
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﻔﺘ‬
‫ﻮح‬
ً
ْ
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎ‬
ْ
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘ ْﺢ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ اﻓﺘ ْﺢ‬
Notice that the ism faa’il rhymes with the word ‫ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬. So the one who opens, or the opener, is ‫ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬. We’d
make the ism faai’ls of the other families the same way: the one who hits would be ‫ ; ﺿﺎرب‬the one who
helps would be ‫ ;ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‬the one who listens, ‫ ﺳﺎﻣﻊ‬and so on.
ْ
ْ
Likewise, the ism maf’ool rhymes with ‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮل‬. That’s where we got ‫ ﻣﻔﺘﻮح‬from, the one that was opened.
You’d go on and do this to make the ism maf’ool of the other families, too: the one that was hit would be
ْ
ْ
‫ ;ﻣﻀﺮوب‬the one helped, ‫ﻣﻨﺼﻮر‬, etc.
The amr and the nahi are no mystery to us now. We construct them the same way we always have: take the
present tense, make it lightest, take off the ta in the beginning, and if it’s hard to read (the first letter starts
with a sukoon), just pop on an alif and you’re good to go.
With that as a refresher, let’s go over the sarf sagheer of the rest of the families:
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﺿﺎر‬
‫ب‬
ْ
ٌ ‫ﻀﺮ‬
‫وب‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻧﺎﺻ ٌﺮ‬
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨْﺼ‬
‫ﻮر‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﺳﺎﻣ ٌﻊ‬
ً ْ
‫ﺿﺮﺑﺎ‬
ً ْ
‫ﺿﺮﺑﺎ‬
ْ
ْ ‫ﻀﺮ‬
‫ب‬
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗ‬
ً
ً
ْ
‫ﻧﺼﺮا‬
ْ
‫ﻧﺼﺮا‬
ْ
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺼ ْﺮ‬
ً ْ
‫ﻌﺎ‬,
ْ
‫ﻳﻀﺮب‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻀﺮب‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ ْﺴﻤﻊ‬/
‫ﺿﺮب‬
‫ﺿﺮب‬
ْ
ْ ‫اﺿﺮ‬
‫ب‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺮ‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ اﻧﺼ ْﺮ‬
‫ﻊ‬,
2
ٌ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺴﻤﻮع‬
‫ ْﺴﻤﻊ‬/
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ‬
‫ ْﺴﻤ ْﻊ‬1 ‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ‬
ً
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﺣﺎﺳ‬
‫ﺐ‬
ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺤﺴﻮب‬
ً ْ
‫ﻌﺎ‬,
ً
ْ
‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎ‬
ْ ‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻﺗ ْﺤﺴ‬
‫ﺐ‬
‫ﻊ‬,
ْ
‫ ْﻊ‬,‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ا‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
ْ ‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ‬
ْ ‫اﺣﺴ‬
‫ﺐ‬
Our last family is different from the rest of our families, so we’ll go over it in detail here.
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﺮم‬
‫ﻛﺮاﻣ ًﺔ‬
ٌ4‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺮم‬
Notice that the ism faai’l sounds different than the ones we made before. It’s not ‫ ﻛﺎر ٌم‬like we’d expect.
Rather, it has something that sounds like 4‫ﻛﺮ‬. Instead of adding an alif like you would to make ‫ ﺿﺎرب‬or
‫ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‬, you add a ya.
This family also does not have a passive, so there is no passive line to do. There was another family that we
ْ
learned of before that didn’t have a passive—the 9‫ اﻧﻜ‬family. So there are two families that never have a
ْ
passive, the 9‫ اﻧﻜ‬family and the ‫ ﻛﺮم‬family.
No surprises in the amr or nahi, so here’s our sarf sagheer:
ٌ4‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻛﺮ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﺮم‬
‫ﻛﺮاﻣ ًﺔ‬
ْ
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﺮ ْم‬
‫ﻛﺮم‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ اﻛﺮ ْم‬
All we have left to learn now is the tharf. There are three tharf for each family, but they all follow the same
pattern. So, if you know the tharf of one family, you know the tharf of the others:
ٌ ْ
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
ْ
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺢ‬
ْ
‫ﻣﻔﺘ ٌﺢ‬
All the tharfs begin with ‘ma.’ Remember that a tharf refers to a time or place. So if you took the verb ‫ ﺳﺠﺪ‬,
ٌ
ٌ
ٌ
to make sajdah, the tharf for that would be ‫ ﻣ ْﺴﺠﺪ ﻣ ْﺴﺠﺪ ﻣ ْﺴﺠﺪة‬. Sound familiar? A masjid is a place where
ٌ
ْ
you make sajdah! School, in Arabic, is ‫ ﻣﺪرﺳﺔ‬. It matches the third of these words!
Congratulations. You’ve now learned all 14 families. Keep practicing them so that you don’t forget them.
Sarf comes by saying things out loud, so practice, practice, practice!
3
EXERCISES
A. Look at the verb list from 3.11.1 Six Small Families (Part 1). Now that you’ve learned the sarf
sagheer of all six families, try doing the sarf sagheer of all of those words, paying close attention to
the harakaat. Remember that the ism faa’il of the ‫ ﻛﺮم‬family is different from the others and
doesn’t have a passive.
Use this as a guide:
ً
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﻔﺘ‬
‫ﻮح‬
ً
ْ
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎ‬
ْ
‫و اﻟ ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘ ْﺢ‬
ٌ ْ
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
ٌ ‫ﻣ ْﻔﺘ‬
‫ﺢ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ‬
ْ
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻔﺘ ٌﺢ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ اﻓﺘ ْﺢ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬
1
4.1 Properties of the Ism—Introduction to Type
Today we’re going to get introduced to the last property of the ism—type. When we talk about type, we
talk about a word being common or proper. To understand this better, think about the difference
between saying ‘a chair,’ and ‘the chair.’ Well, ‘a chair’ is not specific and could refer to any chair, while
‘the chair’ is very particular. What I mean by ‘common’ is that it could be anything while something
‘proper’ is something specific. Just like how we would say that everything is masculine unless proven
feminine when we were studying gender, we say that everything is common unless proven proper when
we study type.
There are seven kinds of proper isms:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Proper names
Pronouns
Pointers
The one being called
5. Words that have ‫ال‬
1. Proper names (e.g: Husna, Dallas, and New York)are names of specific people, places, etc.
2. Pronouns (he, she, them, they, it, etc. ) refer to something/someone specific, and are also
considered proper.
3. Pointers (this, that, these, those): I haven’t taught you these in Arabic yet, but pointers are always
proper. For example, if you asked, ‘Which computer?’ and I said, ‘This computer,’ I used two words
to refer to the computer (this + computer). The word ‘this,’ the word I’m using to point at the
computer, is also considered proper.
4. When you call someone you’re referring to a specific person. Even if you use a general word like,
‘Girl!’ you’re still calling someone in particular, and so, the one being called would be considered
proper.
When you call someone in Arabic, you have to use the word ‫ ﻳﺎ‬, and make them light. The one
you call cannot be heavy. For example, I would say, ‫ ﻳﺎ و‬when I want to say, ‘Boy!’ I would
never say ٌ ‫ﻳﺎ و‬.
Remember that a word is normally heavy and needs to have one of four reasons to be light. This
is the second reason we’ve learned so far, the first being partly flexibles.
5. Words that have ‫ال‬: ‫ ال‬means ‘the,’ so words that start with ‫ ال‬are considered proper.
2
There is something that you should never, ever forget about ‫ال‬. Think back to the lesson on light and
heavy. Now look at the ‫ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ‬chart below and see if you notice anything:
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎن‬
ْ
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
ْ
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﺎن‬
ْ
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
ْ
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺘﲔ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ ال‬hates tanween. Either the tanween is there or ‫ ال‬is there. They both can’t be on the same word. But ‫ال‬
has no problem with ending combinations, so long as they also don’t end in tanween (did you see that
the tanween had to go in the feminine plural combination?). ‫ ال‬doesn’t make a word light. It only gets
rid of tanween. The pair and plural combinations remain heavy when used with ‫ال‬.
Why can’t a word have ‫ ال‬and tanween at the same time? Well, ‫ ال‬means ‘the,’ and tanween is the
English equivalent of ‘a.’ The Arabs don’t have a word for ‘a,’ but whenever a tanween comes on a word,
ٌ ‫ ﻛﺘ‬means ‘a
the translation needs to have an ‘a’ in it. For example, ‫ﺘﺎب‬
‫ اﻟ‬means ‘the book,’ while ‫ﺎب‬
ٌ ‫ﺘ‬
book.’ Does it make sense so say, ‘A the book?’ No. That’s why you can’t ever say ‫ﺎب‬
‫ اﻟ‬because that
would mean you have both an ‘a’ and ‘the’ on the word.
There are a total of seven reasons a word can be proper, and we now know five. We’ll cover the rest in
the next session, inshaAllah.
3
EXERCISES:
Are the following proper or common?
The prayers
The middle, the balanced, the excellent
‫ اﻟﺼﻠﻮات‬.1
‫ اﻟﻮ ْﺳﻄﻰ‬.2
Strange
‫ ﻋﺠ ًﺒﺎ‬.3
The people
‫ اﻟﻨﺎس‬.4
This
Your Master
His Permission
Drink
He
The one who
The miraculous signs
For a nation
‫ْﻢ‬
‫ ﻫﺬا‬.5
‫ رﺑ‬.6
ْ
‫ إذﻧﻪ‬.7
ٌ ‫ ﺷﺮ‬.8
‫اب‬
‫ ﻫﻮ‬.9
‫ي‬2‫ ا‬.10
‫ اﻵﻳﺎت‬.11
‫ ﻟﻘ ْﻮ ٍم‬.12
Zakariyyah
‫ زﻛﺮﻳﺎ‬.13
Master!
‫ ﻳﺎ رب‬.14
This Quran
‫ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻘ ْﺮآن‬.15
4
ANSWER KEY:
1. P
2. P
3. C
4. P
5. P
6. P
7. P
8. C
9. P
10. P
11. P
12. C
13. P
14. P
15. P
1
4.2 Properties of the Ism—Type (cont’d)
We learned five kinds of proper isms so far:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Proper Names
Pronouns
Pointers
When you’re calling someone
5. When it has an ‫ ال‬on it
6. ‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺻﻮل‬
7. If the word after ‘of’ is proper, the word before ‘of’ is also proper
(1-5 were explained on previous handout)
6. ‫اﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺻﻮل‬: I’m giving you the Arabic name for this here because giving the English one would make it
more confusing. Here are the ‫ اﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺻﻮل‬we learned in class today:
those who ‫ا ﻳﻦ‬
the two who ‫ا ان‬
the one who ‫ا ي‬
those who (f) ‫اﻻ‬
the two who (f) ‫اﻟﺘﺎن‬
the one who (f) ‫اﻟﺘﻲ‬
These are a small group of words that you’ll find all over the Quran. It’s good to know them and their
meanings.
7. If the word after ‘of’ is proper, the word before ‘of’ is also proper. This is something I made you
write down, but we aren’t ready to discuss it just yet!
We’ve now officially finished the study of type. Practice identifying the four properties of the ism to
solidify everything we’ve learned so far.
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫?‪What’s the status, number, gender, and type of each of the following words‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻓﺌﺘﲔ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻧﻔ ٍﺲ واﺣﺪ ٍة‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻣ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓ (ﻘﻮن‬
‫‪ .3‬إذا ﺟﺎءك (‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻨﻔﻘﲔ‬
‫‪ .4‬واﻟﺼﺎدﻗﲔ واﻟﻘﺎﻧﺘﲔ و (‬
‫ﺐ اﻟﺸﻬﻮات‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣ ( (‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬واﻟﺮاﺳﺨ(ﻮن ﰲ اﻟﻌﻠﻢ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻓ ْﻮق اﺛﻨﺘﲔ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻛﺎﻓﺮة‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .9‬إن ﰲ ذﻟﻚ ﻟﻌﱪ ًة ﻷ(و‪ B‬اﻷ ْﺑﺼﺎر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺂر‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻏﲑ ﻣ(ﻀ ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻣ‪H‬ﺸﺎ‪G‬ﺎت‬
‫(‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻣﻨﻪ (آﻳﺎت‬
‫‪ .13‬و ا ان‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .14‬أﻫﻞ اﻟ‪O‬ﺘﺎب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﲑ‬
‫‪ .15‬ﻋﺬاب ﻳﻮ ٍم ﻛﺒ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .16‬ﻫﺬان ﺧ ْﺼﻤﺎن اﺧﺘﺼ (ﻤﻮا ﰲ ر‪ْ G‬ﻢ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﺿﻮن‬
‫‪ .17‬و (‪ U‬ﻣ(‪( W‬‬
‫‪ .18‬ﺑﻨﻲ إ ْﺳﺮا‪Y‬ﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .19‬آل ﻓ ْﺮﻋ ْﻮن‬
‫‪ .20‬ﻣ‪ Z‬إ ْﺑﺮاﻫ[‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
1. N/J, 2, F, C
2. First word: J, S, F, C
Second word: J, S, F, C
3. R, PL, M, P
4. N/J, PL, M, P
5. N/J, PL, F, P
6. R, PL,M, P
7. N/J, 2, F, C
8. R, S, F, C
9. N, S, F, C
10. J, S, M, C
11. R, PL, F, C
12. R, PL, F, C
13. R, 2, M, P
14. J, S, M, P
15. First word: J, S, M, C
Second word: J, S, M, C
16. R, 2, M, C
17. R, PL, M, C
18. N/J, S, M, P
19. N/J, S, M, P
20. N/J, S, M, P
1
5.1 Fragments—Introduction to Idhafah
Today, we’re going to move on from studying the four properties of the ism to see how isms come
together with other isms and form phrases. A phrase is more than two words. There are two kinds of
phrases in Arabic: sentences and fragments. Sentences are complete ideas. When I say, ‘I am a teacher,’
I’m communicating a full idea, so this would be called a sentence. ‘My marker,’ on the other hand,
doesn’t convey a complete thought. It’s more than a word, but less than a sentence—which is what we
call a fragment. Before I teach you sentences, I’m going to teach you five different fragments, the first of
which is called Idhafah ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬.
The definition of an Idhafah is: __________ of _____________. Here are some Idhafahs we listed out in
class:
The house of Allah SWT
The name of a friend
The car of the teacher
There are other ways an Idhafah can present itself, but you can rearrange it so that you see the ‘of’
again:
His car
car of his
Your house
house of yours
The people’s book
book of the people
The Idhafah is always made up of two parts: the part before the ‘of’, the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬, and the part after the
‘of’, the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬, for example:
The house of Allah SWT
‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬
2
EXERCISES:
Find the ‫( ﻣﻀﺎف‬M), the part before ‘of,’ and the ‫( ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬MI), the part after ‘of,’ in each of the
following phrases:
1. The Night of Power
11. The people of the book
2. The Messenger of Allah
12. Our signs
3. The Creator of the Universe
13. The teacher’s book
4. Their happiness
14. The nation of ‘Aad
5. His fate
15. Their hands
6. Sons of Isra’el
16. Your Master
7. The life of this world
17. His Permission
8. Ibraheem A’s nation
18. The Promise of Allah
9. The establisher of prayer
19. Musa’s mother’s heart
10. The reward of the life of the hereafter
20. Their prayer
3
ANSWER KEY:
1. M= night; MI= power
2. M= messenger; MI= Allah
3. M = The Creator; MI= the Universe
4. M = happiness; MI= their
5. M = fate; MI = his
6. M = sons; MI = Isra’el
7. M= the life; MI = this world
8. M = nation; MI= Ibraheem A
9. M = the establisher; MI = prayer
10. M= the reward; MI = the life
M = the life; MI= the hereafter
11. M= the people; MI = the book
12. M = signs; MI= our
13. M = book; MI = the teacher
14. M = nation; MI = ‘Aad
15. M = hands; MI = their
16. M = Master; MI = Your
17. M = Permission; MI = His
18. M = Promise; MI= Allah
19. M = heart ; MI = mother
M= mother; MI = Musa
20. M = prayer; MI = their
1
5.1.1 Vocabulary Words (Part 1)
In this unit, I want to focus on learning vocabulary and how to make some good sentences. The words
below are 20 ism faa’ils, or titles of people, from the Qur’an that we will be using. We went over the
meaning of the first 8. Memorize this vocabulary:
‫ منافِق‬.4
ُ
‫ كا ِفر‬.3
Hypocrite
Disbeliever
‫ ظالِم‬.8
Someone who does
wrong
ْ
‫ مف ِسد‬.12
ُ
‫ خالِق‬.16
‫خاسر‬
ِ .20
ْ
‫ْعض‬
ِ ُ‫ م‬.7
Someone who
ignores
‫ م ْص ِلح‬.11
ُ
ْ
‫ مج ِرم‬.15
ُ
‫شاهد‬
ِ .19
ْ
‫ مح ِسن‬.2
ُ
Someone who
does excellent
‫ش‬
ّ ِ َ‫ مُب‬.6
Someone who
congratulates
‫ كا ِذب‬.10
ْ
‫ مف ِلح‬.14
ُ
‫كع‬
ِ ‫ را‬.18
ْ
‫ مؤ ِمن‬.1
ُ
Believer
ْ
‫ من ِذر‬.5
ُ
Warner
‫قائل‬
ِ .9
‫صابر‬
ِ .13
‫ساجد‬
ِ .17
2
EXERCISES
A. Use the list below to help you practice the meanings. Cover the English, then look at the Arabic,
and try to guess the meaning. After doing that a few times, cover the Arabic, look at the English,
and try to come up with the Arabic word yourself.
1. Believer
2. Someone who does excellent
3. Disbeliever
4. Hypocrite
5. Warner
6. Someone who congratulates
7. Someone who ignores
8. Someone who does wrong
ْ
‫ مؤ ِمن‬.1
ُ
ْ
‫ مح ِسن‬.2
ُ
‫ كا ِفر‬.3
‫ منا ِفق‬.4
ُ
ْ
‫ من ِذر‬.5
ُ
‫ش‬
ّ ِ َ‫ مُب‬.6
ْ
‫ْعض‬
ِ ُ‫ م‬.7
‫ ظالِم‬.8
B. Now, try Exercise A out of order or flashcard these words. Put the Arabic on one side and English
on the other. Look at the Arabic and then try to guess the English. When you’re comfortable,
switch: look at the English and try to come up with the Arabic. Master these eight words before
moving on to the next lesson.
1
5.1.2 Vocabulary Words (Part 2)
Today, we did another eight words:
‫ منا ِفق‬.4
ُ
‫ كا ِفر‬.3
Creator
ْ
‫ْعض‬
ِ ُ‫ م‬.7
‫ م ْص ِلح‬.11
ُ
Someone who
makes peace
ْ
‫ مج ِرم‬.15
ُ
Criminal
‫خاسر‬
ِ .21
‫شاهد‬
ِ .19
‫ ظالِم‬.8
ْ
‫ مف ِسد‬.12
ُ
Someone who
makes trouble
‫ خالِق‬.16
‫ش‬
ّ ِ َ‫ مُب‬.6
ْ
‫ مؤ ِمن‬.1
ُ
ْ
‫ من ِذر‬.5
ُ
Liar
A speaker
ْ
‫ مح ِسن‬.2
ُ
‫ كا ِذب‬.11
‫قائل‬
ِ .9
ْ
‫ مف ِلح‬.14
‫صابر‬
ِ .13
ُ
A successful A patient person
person
‫كع‬
ِ ‫ را‬.18
‫ساجد‬
ِ .17
Practice going through these words until you can give the Arabic when you hear the English. Be sure to
review the first eight words we learned last session as well.
2
EXERCISES
A. Use the list below to help you practice the meanings. Cover the English, then look at the Arabic, and
try to guess the meaning. After doing that a few times, cover the Arabic, look at the English, and try
to come up with the Arabic word yourself.
9. A speaker
10. Liar
11. Peace-maker
12. Trouble-maker
13. A patient person
14. A successful person
15. Criminal
16. Creator
‫قائل‬
ِ .9
‫كا ِذب‬
َ .10
‫ م ْص ِلح‬.11
ُ
ْ
‫ مف ِسد‬.12
ُ
‫صابر‬
.13
ِ
ْ
‫ مف ِلح‬.14
ُ
ْ
‫ مج ِرم‬.15
ُ
‫ خالِق‬.16
B. Now, try Exercise A out of order or flashcard these words. Put the Arabic on one side and English on
the other. Look at the Arabic and then try to guess the English. When you’re comfortable, switch:
look at the English and try to come up with the Arabic. Throw in the eight words you learned in the
last lesson as well.
1
5.1.3 Vocabulary Words (Part 3)
We’re finishing off this handout today by going over the meaning of the last four words:
ٌ‫ منا ِفق‬.4
ُ
ٌ‫ ظالِم‬.8
ْ
ٌ‫ مف ِسد‬.12
ُ
ٌ‫ خالِق‬.16
ٌ‫خاسر‬
.21
ِ
A loser
ٌ‫ كا ِفر‬.3
ٌ‫ش‬
ّ ِ َ‫ مُب‬.6
ْ
ٌ‫ مؤ ِمن‬.1
ُ
ْ
ٌ‫ من ِذر‬.5
ُ
ْ
ٌ‫ مف ِلح‬.14
ُ
ٌ‫صابر‬
.13
ِ
ْ
ٌ‫ مح ِسن‬.2
ُ
ْ
ٌ‫ْعض‬
ِ ُ‫ م‬.7
ٌ‫ م ْص ِلح‬.11
ُ
ْ
ٌ‫ مج ِرم‬.15
ُ
ٌ‫ كا ِذب‬.11
ٌ‫كع‬
ِ ‫ را‬.18
ٌ‫ساجد‬
.17
ِ
Someone who
testifies
Someone who
does ruku’
Someone who
does sajdah
ٌ‫شاهد‬
.19
ِ
ٌ‫قائل‬
ِ .9
You are responsible for these words that come up in the Quran. Be sure to learn the new words (the last
row) and also review the words you learned before (1-16).
2
EXERCISES
A. Use the list below to help you practice the meanings. Cover the English, then look at the Arabic, and
try to guess the meaning. After doing that a few times, cover the Arabic, look at the English, and try
to come up with the Arabic word yourself.
17. Someone who does sajdah
ٌ‫ساجد‬
.17ٌ
ِ
18. Someone who does ruku’
ٌ‫كع‬
ِ ‫ را‬.18
19. Someone who testifies
ٌ‫شاهد‬
.19
ِ
20. A loser
ٌ‫خاسر‬
.20
ِ
B. Now, try Exercise A out of order or flashcard these words. Put the Arabic on one side and English on
the other. Look at the Arabic and then try to guess the English. When you’re comfortable, switch:
look at the English and try to come up with the Arabic. Throw in the 16 words you learned in the last
two lessons, as well.
1
5.2 Fragments—Idhafah (cont’d)
We’re continuing our conversation about ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. These two words make up an ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬. They
are both isms and have a status, number, gender and type. Today, we just got used to the rules of
making an Idhafah. Here’s how it goes:
a. The ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬must be light and cannot have an ‫ ال‬on it. If we wanted If we tried to make a ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬out
of ‫رﺳﻮل‬, these would be our options:
0 2
‫ﻮل‬
0 ‫ﺳ‬0 ‫ر‬2
"
Light, no ‫ال‬
‫ﻮل‬
‫اﻟﺮ‬
0 ‫ﺳ‬
0 24
!
Has ‫ال‬
ٌ
‫رﺳﻮل‬
0 2
Heavy
!
b. The ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬must be Jarr. If we wanted ‫ اﷲ‬to be our ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬, our options would look like:
8‫اﷲ‬
4 ‫ﻮل‬
0 ‫ﺳ‬0 ‫ر‬2
"
Jarr
‫اﷲ‬
‫رﺳﻮل‬
24 0 0 2
Not Jarr
!
‫رﺳﻮل اﷲ‬
0 4 0 0 2
!
Not Jarr
When you have a word that’s light and has no ‫ال‬, and the word right after it is ‫ﺟﺮ‬, you have a ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and
‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬situation. It’s an all-or-nothing deal, though. If one word meets the ‫’ﻣﻀﺎف‬s conditions, but the
word right after it is not ‫ﺟﺮ‬, then it’s not an Idhafah, and vice versa. Both words meet this criteria in
‫اﷲ‬
‫ ر‬so it’s considered an Idhafah.
4 ‫ﻮل‬
0 ‫ﺳ‬
0 2
To help things come together a bit more, think back to the definitions of a ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. A ‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬
is the word before ‘of,’ and a ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬is the word after ‘of.’ Now think back to the definition of Jarr.
Sound familiar? Jarr status is defined as the word after ‘of,’ too! So it would make sense that a ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬
would have to be Jarr—their definitions match!
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪Are the highlighted portions of cases of‬‬
‫‪َ ? Remember:‬‬
‫‪%‬إﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬
‫‪Light‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺮ ‪Jarr‬‬
‫ال ‪No‬‬
‫‪ْ ,‬ﺴﻢ اﷲ اﻟﺮ ْ‪1‬ﻦ اﻟﺮﺣ )‪(١‬اﻟْﺤ ْﻤﺪ ‪%‬ﷲ رب اﻟْﻌﺎﻟﻤﲔ )‪(٢‬اﻟﺮ ْ‪1‬ﻦ اﻟﺮﺣ )‪(٣‬ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻳ ْ‬
‫ﺎك‬
‫ﻳ‬
‫إ‬
‫(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻳﻦ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫ﻮ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ ‪َ َ- % %‬‬‫َ َ ‪% % َ- %‬‬‫َ ‪َ % َ َ %- َ % َ - 7‬‬
‫‪% % َ- % َ َ- % َ- % %‬‬
‫َ ‪َ %‬‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻫﺪﻧﺎ اﻟﺼﺮاط اﻟْﻤ ْ‬
‫َ‬
‫‬‫ﻮب‬
‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻐ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫اﻟ‬
‫ﲑ‬
‫ﻏ‬
‫ﻢ‬
‫@‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﺖ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻧ‬
‫أ‬
‫ﻳﻦ‬
‫ا=‬
‫اط‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺻ‬
‫(‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻘ‬
‫ﺘ‬
‫ﺴ‬
‫ﺎك ‪ْ َ 5‬ﺴﺘ ‪%‬ﻌﲔ ‪(٥)7‬‬
‫ﺪ و ‪%‬إ ‪َ -‬ﻳ‬
‫َﻧﻌﺒ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ ‪% 7 َ % َ %‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‬‫َ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪َ 7‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ﻋﻠ ْ ْ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺎﻟ‪%-‬ﲔَ )‪(٧‬‬
‫@ﻢ َوﻻ ‪َ -‬‬
‫َ َ ‪%‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ا=ي ﻳﺪع اﻟْﻴﺘ )‪(٢‬وﻻ ﻳﺤﺾ ﻋ‪ N‬ﻃﻌﺎم اﻟْﻤ ْ‬
‫أَرأ َ ْﻳﺖ ‪َ -‬‬
‫ﲔ )‪(٣‬ﻓَﻮ ْﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺴ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻜ ‪-%‬ﺬ‬
‫ا=ي ﻳ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ب ‪%‬ﺑﺎ ‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ﻚ ‪% 7 - 7 َ % َ-‬‬
‫ﻳﻦ )‪(١‬ﻓَ َﺬﻟ‪%‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ ‪% % َ َ َ َ 7- 7‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‬‫َ َ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا=ﻳﻦ ‪ ْQ‬ﻋ ْ‬
‫ا=ﻳﻦ ‪ْQ‬‬
‫ﻼ‪ْ R‬‬
‫ﺎﻫﻮن )‪َ - (٥‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‬‫ﺎﻋﻮن )‪(٧‬‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫اﻟ‬
‫ﻮن‬
‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻳ‬
‫و‬
‫(‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫)‬
‫ون‬
‫اء‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﻳ‬
‫ﺳ‬
‫ﻢ‬
‫ﺻ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﲔ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﺼ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‬‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ‪َ 7 َ َ 7َ َ َ َ 7 َ7‬‬
‫‪َ 7 َ %‬‬
‫‪َ 7 %‬‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وج )‪(١‬واﻟْﻴ ْﻮم اﻟْﻤ ْﻮﻋﻮد )‪(٢‬وﺷﺎﻫﺪ وﻣ ْﺸﻬﻮد )‪(٣‬ﻗﺘﻞ أ ْ‬
‫ﺪو ‪%‬د‬
‫اﻷﺧ‬
‫ﺎب‬
‫ﺤ‬
‫ﺻ‬
‫ﱪ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫اﻟﺴ َﻤﺎ ‪%‬ء ذَ ‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪َ 7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ ‪7‬‬
‫ات اﻟ ‪7 7‬‬
‫َو ‪َ -‬‬
‫َ ‪7‬‬
‫َ ‪7‬‬
‫َ َ‬
‫)‪(٤‬اﻟﻨﺎر ذات اﻟْﻮﻗﻮد )‪(٥‬إ ْذ ‪ ْQ‬ﻋﻠ ْ@ﺎ ﻗﻌ ٌ‬
‫ﻮد )‪(٦‬‬
‫‪7 7 َ َ َ 7 % % 7 َ % َ % َ-‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫‪ْ ,‬ﺴﻢ اﷲ اﻟﺮ ْ‪1‬ﻦ اﻟﺮﺣ )‪(١‬اﻟْﺤ ْﻤﺪ ‪%‬ﷲ رب اﻟْﻌﺎﻟﻤﲔ )‪(٢‬اﻟﺮ ْ‪1‬ﻦ اﻟﺮﺣ )‪(٣‬ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻳ ْ‬
‫ﺎك‬
‫ﻳ‬
‫إ‬
‫(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻳﻦ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫ﻮ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫َ ‪% %‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫َ َ‬‫ ‪%‬‬‫َ َ ‪% % َ- %‬‬‫َ ‪َ % َ َ %- َ % َ - 7‬‬
‫‪% % َ- % َ َ- % َ- % %‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﻫﺪﻧﺎ اﻟﺼﺮاط اﻟْﻤ ْ‬
‫ﻧ ْﻌﺒﺪ وإﻳﺎك ‪ْ 5‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‬‫ﻮب‬
‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻐ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫اﻟ‬
‫ﲑ‬
‫ﻏ‬
‫ﻢ‬
‫@‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﺖ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻧ‬
‫أ‬
‫ﻳﻦ‬
‫ا=‬
‫اط‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺻ‬
‫(‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻘ‬
‫ﺘ‬
‫ﺴ‬
‫(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﲔ‬
‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺘ‬
‫ﺴ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ ‪% 7 َ % َ %‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‬‫َ‬
‫َ ‪َ َ َ َ- % َ 7 7‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪َ َ 7‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫ﻋﻠ ْ ْ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺎﻟ‪%-‬ﲔَ )‪(٧‬‬
‫@ﻢ َوﻻ ‪َ -‬‬
‫َ َ ‪%‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ا=ي ﻳﺪع اﻟْﻴﺘ )‪(٢‬وﻻ ﻳﺤﺾ ﻋ‪ N‬ﻃﻌﺎم اﻟْﻤ ْ‬
‫أَرأ َ ْﻳﺖ ‪َ -‬‬
‫ﲔ )‪(٣‬ﻓَﻮ ْﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺴ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻜ ‪-%‬ﺬ‬
‫ا=ي ﻳ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ب ‪%‬ﺑﺎ ‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ﻚ ‪% 7 - 7 َ % َ-‬‬
‫ﻳﻦ )‪(١‬ﻓَ َﺬﻟ‪%‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ ‪% % َ َ َ َ 7- 7‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‬‫َ َ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا=ﻳﻦ ‪ ْQ‬ﻋ ْ‬
‫ا=ﻳﻦ ‪ْQ‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‬‫‬‫ﺎﻋﻮن )‪(٧‬‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫اﻟ‬
‫ﻮن‬
‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻳ‬
‫و‬
‫(‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫)‬
‫ون‬
‫اء‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﻳ‬
‫(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻮن‬
‫ﺎﻫ‬
‫ﺳ‬
‫ﻢ‬
‫ﻼ‪R‬‬
‫ﺻ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﲔ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﺼ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ﻟ ‪َ -% َ 7 %‬‬
‫‪َ 7 َ َ 7َ َ َ َ 7 َ7 7 َ %‬‬
‫‪َ 7 َ %‬‬
‫َ ‪َ َ 7‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وج )‪(١‬واﻟْﻴ ْﻮم اﻟْﻤ ْﻮﻋﻮد )‪(٢‬وﺷﺎﻫﺪ وﻣ ْﺸﻬﻮد )‪(٣‬ﻗﺘﻞ أ ْ‬
‫ﺪو ‪%‬د‬
‫اﻷﺧ‬
‫ﺎب‬
‫ﺤ‬
‫ﺻ‬
‫ﱪ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫اﻟﺴ َﻤﺎ ‪%‬ء ذَ ‪%‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ ‪7‬‬
‫ات اﻟ ‪7 7‬‬
‫َو ‪َ -‬‬
‫َ ‪7‬‬
‫َ ‪7‬‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬اﻟﻨﺎر ذات اﻟْﻮﻗﻮد )‪(٥‬إ ْذ ‪ ْQ‬ﻋﻠ ْ@ﺎ ﻗﻌ ٌ‬
‫ﻮد )‪(٦‬‬
‫َ ‪7 7 َ َ َ 7 % % 7 َ % َ %‬‬‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬
1
5.2.1 Vocabulary-Sarf Sagheer
We are going over where the first eight words of this chart came from by looking at their sarf sagheer.
Soon, we will start using them in sentences.
ٌ‫ منا ِفق‬.4
ُ
ْ
ٌ‫ْعض‬
ِ ُ‫ م‬.7
ٌ‫ ظالِم‬.8
ٌ
ٌ
ْ
ٌ‫فهوٌمؤ ِمن‬
ُ
ٌSo he’s a believer
ٌ‫ِإيمانا‬
َ
ٌTo believe
ٌ
ٌ
ْ
ٌ‫فهوٌمح ِسن‬
ُ
So he’s someone
ٌwho excels
ْ ‫إ‬
‫حسانا‬
َ ِ
ٌTo excel
ْ
ٌ‫ مؤ ِمن‬.1
ُ
ْ
ٌ‫ من ِذر‬.5
ُ
ْ
ٌ‫ مح ِسن‬.2
ُ
ٌ‫ كا ِفر‬.3
ٌ‫ش‬
ّ ِ َ‫ مُب‬.6
ْ
ٌُ ‫يخ ِب‬
ُ
ْ
ٌ ‫يؤ م‬
‫ن‬
ُ ِ ُ
ٌHe believes
ْ
ٌُ ‫يخ ِب‬
ُ
ْ
ٌ ‫يحس‬
‫ن‬
ُ ِ ُ
ٌHe excels
ْ
ٌ‫ب‬
َ َ ‫أَخ‬
ٌ‫آمن‬
َ َ
ٌHe believed
ْ
ٌَ َ ‫أَخ‬
‫ب‬
ْ ‫أ‬
ٌ‫حسن‬
َ َ َ
ٌHe excelled
ْ
ٌ‫ مؤ ِمن‬.11
ُ
.
2
ْ
ٌ ‫سن‬
ِ ‫ مُح‬.2.
‫م‬
ْ
‫كُفرا‬
ْ
ٌ ‫ين ص ر‬
ُ
َ
ُ
ْ
ٌ ُ ‫يكف‬
‫ر‬
َ
ُ
ٌHe disbelieves
ٌ‫َنصر‬
َ َ
ٌ‫ كافِر‬.3
ٌ‫ك َفر‬
َ َ
He disbelieved
ٌ
ٌ
ٌ‫د‬
‫ي‬
ِ ‫ج‬
ُ ‫اه‬
َ ُ
ٌ‫اه َد‬
َ ‫ج‬
َ
ٌ‫ منافِق‬.4
ٌ‫فهوٌمنَا ِفق‬
ُ
So he’s a
ٌhypocrite
ٌ‫ِن َفاقاٌوٌمنَافَ َقة‬
ُ
ٌHypocrisy
ٌ‫ينَا ِف ُق‬
ُ
ٌHe is hypocritical
ٌ‫َنافَ َق‬
He was
hypocritical
ٌ
ٌ
ٌ‫كافِر‬
َ ٌ‫فهو‬
So he’s a
ٌdisbeliever
ٌTo disbelieve
ُ
2
5
ْ .
ٌ‫ من ِذر‬.5
ُ
ْ
ٌُ ‫يخ ِب‬
ُ
ْ
ٌ ‫ين ِذ‬
‫ر‬
ُ ُ
ٌHe warns
ْ
ٌ‫ب‬
َ َ ‫أَخ‬
ْ
ٌ ‫أَن َذ‬
‫ر‬
َ
ٌHe warned
ٌ‫يع ِّلم‬
ُ َُ
ٌ‫ع ّلَم‬
َ َ
To congratulate
ٌ‫ش‬
ّ ِ ‫يب‬
ُ َُ
He congratulates
ٌ‫ش‬
َّ ‫ب‬
َ َ
He
congratulated
ْ
ٌ‫ْعض‬
ِ ُ‫فهوٌم‬
So he’s someone
that ignores
ْ
‫ِإْعاضا‬
َ
To ignore
ْ
ٌ ِ ‫يخ‬
ُ‫ب‬
ُ
ْ
ٌ ُ ‫ْع‬
‫ض‬
ِ ُ‫ي‬
He ignores
ْ
ٌ‫ب‬
َ َ ‫أَخ‬
ْ
ٌ ‫أَْع‬
‫ض‬
َ َ
He ignored
ْ
ٌ‫ْعض‬
ِ ُ‫ م‬.7
ٌ
ٌ
ٌ ‫َنصر‬
َ َ
ٌ‫ ظالِم‬.8
ٌ
ٌ
ْ
ٌ‫فهوٌمن ِذر‬
ُ
ٌSo he’s a warner
ْ
‫ِإن َذارا‬
ٌ‫ش‬
ّ ِ َ‫فهوٌمُب‬
So he’s a
congratulator
ٌ‫ظالِم‬
َ ٌ‫فهو‬
So he’s someone
who wrongs
ٌTo warn
ْ
‫َتب ِشريا‬
ْ
‫ظُلما‬
To wrong
ْ
ٌ ‫ين ص ر‬
ُ
َ
ُ
ْ
ٌ ‫يظ ِل‬
‫م‬
َ
ُ
He wrongs
ٌ‫ظ َلم‬
َ
َ
He wronged
‫م‬
ٌ
ٌ‫ش‬
ّ ِ َ‫ مُب‬.6
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪5.2.2 Vocabulary Words-Sarf Sagheer (Part 2‬‬
‫‪We are picking up where we left off last time and are finishing the sarf sagheer of the remaining words‬‬
‫‪on this chart:‬‬
‫قائلٌ‬
‫‪ِ .9‬‬
‫‪ .21‬كا ِذبٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .21‬مف ِلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫صابرٌ‬
‫‪.21‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ساجدٌ‬
‫‪.21‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫قائلٌ‬
‫‪ِ ٌ.9‬‬
‫‪ .22‬م ْص ِلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .21‬مج ِرمٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫كعٌ‬
‫‪ .21‬را ِ‬
‫َنصرٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫الٌ‬
‫َق َ‬
‫يلٌ‬
‫ِق َ‬
‫شاهدٌ‬
‫‪.29‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ينصرٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ً‬
‫َق ْولٌ‬
‫ولٌ‬
‫َي ُق ُ‬
‫ً‬
‫َق ْولٌ‬
‫الٌ‬
‫ي ُ َق ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌقُلٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .21‬مف ِسدٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪ .21‬خالِقٌ‬
‫خاسرٌ‬
‫‪.11‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ائلٌ‬
‫فهوٌ َق ِ‬
‫م ُقولٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَل ٌَت ُقلٌ‬
‫الٌ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنه ٌَم َقال ٌَم ِقيل ٌَم َق َ‬
‫‪ .21‬كا ِذبٌ‬
‫َضربٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ك َذبٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫كُ ِذبٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ .22‬م ْص ِلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بٌ‬
‫أَخ َ َ‬
‫أ َ ْص َلحٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫أ ُ ْص ِل ٌ‬
‫ح‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يض ِربٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يك ِذ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يك َذ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بْ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌ ِاك ِذ ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫كا ِذبٌ‬
‫ك ِذ ًبا‬
‫ك ٌ‬
‫ِ‬
‫فهوٌ َ‬
‫ذ ًباٌ ‪َ /‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ذوبٌ‬
‫ك ِذ ًبا‬
‫ِ‬
‫َمك ُ‬
‫كذ ًباٌ ‪َ /‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنهٌلٌتكذ ْ‬
‫بٌ‬
‫َ َ ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌمك ِذبٌمك َذبٌمك َذبةٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ ِ ٌ‬
‫بُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ي ْص ِلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ي ْص َل ٌ‬
‫ح‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌأ ْصلحٌْ‬
‫َ ِ‬
‫ِإ ْص ََل ً‬
‫حا‬
‫ِإ ْص ََل ً‬
‫حا‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌم ْص َلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫فهوٌم ْص ِلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫فهوٌم ْص َلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَلٌت ُ ْص ِلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .21‬مف ِسدٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بٌ‬
‫أَخ َ َ‬
‫صابرٌ‬
‫‪.21‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َضربٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .21‬مف ِلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بٌ‬
‫أَخ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أَف َل ٌ‬
‫ح‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أُف ِل ٌ‬
‫ح‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ ِ ٌ‬
‫بُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يف ِل ٌ‬
‫ح‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يف َل ٌ‬
‫ح‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌأَف ِل ْ ٌ‬
‫ح‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .21‬مج ِرمٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بٌ‬
‫أَخ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ ِ ٌ‬
‫بُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يجر ٌم‬
‫ُ ِ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يجرمٌ‬
‫ُ َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌأَج ِر ٌْم‬
‫‪ .21‬خالِقٌ‬
‫َنصرٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أَفس َدٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أُف ِس َ ٌ‬
‫د‬
‫بٌ‬
‫َص َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أَجرمٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أُج ِرمٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫خ َل َقٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫خُ ِل َقٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ ِ ٌ‬
‫بُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يف ِس ٌُ‬
‫د‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يفس ٌُ‬
‫د‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌأَف ِس ٌ‬
‫د‬
‫ْ‬
‫يض ِربٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ي ْص ِ ٌ‬
‫بُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌ ِاص ِ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ينصرٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخل ُ ُ ٌ‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ َل ُ ٌ‬
‫ق‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرمنهٌاُخلُقٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِإفسادًا‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِإفسادًا‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌمفسدٌ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫صْ ً‬
‫با‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوٌمف ِسدٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوٌمفسدٌ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَلٌتُف ِسدٌ‬
‫ابرٌ‬
‫فهوٌ َص ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَل ٌَت ْص ِ ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بةٌ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنه ٌَمص ِب ٌَمص َبٌ َمص َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِإف ََل ً‬
‫حا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِإف ََل ً‬
‫حا‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌمف َلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِإجرا ًما‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫جراماًٌ‬
‫ِإ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌمجرمٌ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫خل ًقا‬
‫َ‬
‫ًْ‬
‫خلقا‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوٌمف ِلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوٌمف َلحٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَلٌتُف ِل ْحٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوٌمج ِرمٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوٌمجرمٌ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَلٌتُج ِر ٌْم‬
‫خالِقٌ‬
‫فهوٌ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوٌمخلُوقٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَل ٌَتخل ُ ٌ‬
‫ق‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌمخ ِلقٌمخ َلقٌمخ َل َقةٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ساجدٌ‬
‫‪.21‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َنصرٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫كعٌ‬
‫‪ .21‬را ِ‬
‫فَتحٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫سج َدٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫شاهدٌ‬
‫‪.29‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يفتحٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫كعٌ‬
‫ر‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫كعٌ‬
‫ي ْر‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ك ْ ٌع‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌ ِار َ‬
‫ََسِعٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫ي َ ْسمعٌ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يَش َه ٌُ‬
‫د‬
‫ْ‬
‫يُش َه ٌُ‬
‫د‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌ ِاش َه ٌ‬
‫د‬
‫َش ِه َدٌ‬
‫ش ِه َدٌ‬
‫ُ‬
‫خاسرٌ‬
‫‪.11‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ينصرٌ‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫ي َ ْسج ٌُ‬
‫د‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌاُسج ٌ‬
‫د‬
‫ُ‬
‫ََسِعٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫خ ِْسٌ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫خُ ِْسٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫ي َ ْسمعٌ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ ٌ‬
‫ْس‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ ٌ‬
‫ْس‬
‫ُ َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرٌمنهٌ ِاخ ْ ٌ‬
‫ْس‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫سج َد ًةٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫اجدٌ‬
‫فهوٌ َس ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَلٌت َ ْسج ٌ‬
‫د‬
‫ُ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌم ْس ِجدٌم ْسجدٌم ْسج َدةٌ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫رك ُ ً‬
‫وعا‬
‫ُ‬
‫كعةٌ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌم ْركعٌم ْركعٌم ْر‬
‫َ ِ َ َ َ ََ‬
‫َش َهاد ًةٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫شهاد ٌةً‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫كعٌ‬
‫فهوٌرا ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ك ْ ٌع‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَل ٌَتر َ‬
‫اهدٌ‬
‫فهوٌ َش ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوٌمش ُهودٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنه ٌَلٌتَش َه ٌ‬
‫د‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌمش ِهدٌمش َهدٌمش َه َدةٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫خُ ً‬
‫ْسا‬
‫ْ‬
‫خُ ً‬
‫ْسا‬
‫اسرٌ‬
‫خ ِ‬
‫فهو َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوٌمخسورٌ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالهنيٌعنهٌ َل ٌَتخ ْ ٌ‬
‫ْس‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وٌالظرفٌمنهٌمخ ِْسٌمخْسٌمخْسةٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ‬
1
5.3.1 Introduction to Sentences
ْ ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
There are two kinds of sentences in Arabic: a) ‫ُجْ ةَل ِفع ِليةة‬
‫ م‬b) ‫ُج ةَل ِإْسِيةة‬.
‫ م‬A ‫ُج ةَل ِإْسِيةة‬
‫ م‬is defined as an ismْ
based sentence—the most important thing in the jumlah (sentence) is the ism. A ‫ُجْ ةَل ِفع ِليةة‬
‫ م‬is defined as
a fi’l-based sentence—the most import thing the jumlah is the fi’l. The harder one of these two is ‫ُجْ ةَل‬
‫م‬
ْ
‫إْسِيةة‬,
ِ and that is what the first third of this unit will focus on.
Now, to understand Jumlah Ismiyyah really well, we have to understand its three parts:
1. ‫ م ْبت ةدأ‬Mubtada’
‫م ة‬
2. ‫خ ةب‬
‫ ة‬Khabar
3. ‫ب‬
ِ ‫الخ ة‬
‫ مم ةت ةع ِلق ِب ة‬Muta‘alliq bil khabar
1. Mubtada’: the most important part of a Jumlah Ismiyyah. Without a mubtada’, you can’t have a
jumlah ismiyyah. This is the first thing you should look for when you’ve got a jumlah ismiyyah.
How do you find it?
a. It is an ism that has to be raf,’ and if you are looking at a long line, the first raf’ thing that
you come across will be your mubtada. A mubtada’ will NEVER be jarr.
b. There’s only one time that your mubtada will be nasb: Harf Nasbs are harfs that beat up on
mubtada’s. For example:
ْ
ْ
‫س‬
‫خ‬
‫ي‬
‫ف‬
‫ل‬
‫ان‬
‫س‬
ِ ‫ِإ ةن‬
ِ
‫االن ة ة ة‬
‫م ر‬
‫اهب ِإ ةَل ر ِب‬
ِ ‫ِإ ِن ذة‬
‫ة‬
ْ ْ
‫أ ة ةن لة مُه أةجرً ا حسنًا‬
‫ة‬
‫ة‬
ً ‫إن لِلمت ِقني مف‬
‫ازا‬
‫ِ ة م ة ة ة ة‬
ْ ْ
‫الك ْو ةثر‬
‫اك‬
‫ِإنةا أةعطةينة ة‬
‫ة ة‬
Is that ‫إ ةن‬or
ِ ‫?إنةا‬
ِ It is ‫إ ةن‬+
ِ ‫( ةنا‬the attached version of
nahnu). Since the noon is repeated, you can just
smoosh them together = ‫ِإنةا‬
In sum, a mubtada is:
a. The first raf’ you find,
b. it can be a victim of harf nasb,
c. and you can’t have a sentence without it.
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES‬‬
‫‪Find the mubtada’s in the following sentences:‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫ك ي ْوم‬
‫ذل‬
‫ةِ ة ة‬
‫هذا ِصراط‬
‫ة‬
‫ة‬
‫حد‬
‫هو ِإ ةَل ةوا ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫هذا ِذكر مبارك‬
‫مة ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ك ِري‬
‫ِإنةه ملة مقرآن ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫هي ِفتنةة‬
‫ْ‬
‫هو مؤ ِمن‬
‫م‬
‫اوية‬
‫هي خ‬
‫ة ِ ة‬
‫الحجار ِة‬
‫‪ .9‬فه‬
‫ك ِ‬
‫ي ة‬
‫ة ة‬
‫ةِ ة‬
‫‪ .10‬هي حيةة‬
‫ة‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ِنعمة‬
‫‪ .11‬تل‬
‫ِ ة ة‬
‫‪ .12‬هذه س ِب ِيل‬
‫ة‬
‫‪ .13‬هذه جهن‬
‫ة ة ةم‬
‫ْ‬
‫كرة‬
‫‪ِ .14‬إ ةن ةهذه ةتذ ِ‬
‫ة‬
‫‪ِ .15‬إ ةّنا ب ةقرة‬
‫ة ة ة‬
‫‪ِ .16‬إ ةّنا ةشجرة‬
‫ة‬
‫ة ة‬
‫‪ .17‬هذا ْ‬
‫َشء ع ِجيب‬
‫ة ة ة‬
‫ة‬
‫حي‬
‫‪ .18‬إن‬
‫الل ةغفمور ر ِ‬
‫ِ ة ة‬
‫ة‬
‫اط م ْست ِق ري‬
‫‪ .19‬و هو عَل صر‬
‫ة مة ة ة ِ ة ر م ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل ةر مس ر‬
‫ول ة‬
‫‪ِ .20‬إنةه ملة ةقو م‬
‫ك ِر ر‬
‫‪ .21‬هو الغفور الودود‬
‫مة ة م م ة م م‬
‫‪.22‬‬
‫ظي‬
‫هو ةنبأ ةع ِ‬
‫مة ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ِ .23‬إنةما الحياة م المنيا لة ِعب و ةَلو‬
‫ة‬
‫ة ة ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪.24‬‬
‫المؤ ِمنمون‬
‫مُه م م‬
‫ة‬
‫ضالمون‬
‫‪ِ .25‬إ ةن ةه مؤ ةال ِء لة ة‬
‫ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .26‬ذلك‬
‫المح ِسنِنية‬
‫ج ةزآء م م‬
‫ةِ ة ة‬
‫‪ .27‬إن المنافقني ِف ْ‬
‫ار‬
‫أل ْس ةف ِل ِم‬
‫الر ِك ا ة‬
‫ن الن ة ِ‬
‫ِ ة م ة ِ ِ ةِ ة‬
‫ة‬
‫‪.28‬‬
‫‪.29‬‬
‫‪.30‬‬
‫‪.31‬‬
‫‪.32‬‬
‫‪.33‬‬
‫‪.34‬‬
‫‪.35‬‬
‫ار‬
‫الغ ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ه ةما ِِف ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫أةن مُتْ م ْس ِل ممون‬
‫ة‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات و ةن ِع ري‬
‫ِإ ةن ال مم ةت ِقنية ِِف‬
‫جن ة ر‬
‫ة‬
‫ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وأ ة ةن ع ةل ْي ِه النةشأ ة ةة األمخرى‬
‫ة ة‬
‫ة‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫نحن أنص‬
‫ار اللِ‬
‫ة مة ة م‬
‫هذا الي ْوم‬
‫ة ة م‬
‫ْ‬
‫اللِ حق‬
‫أ ة ةن وع ةد‬
‫ة‬
‫ة‬
‫ة‬
‫هو ق م ْرآن م ِجيد‬
‫ة‬
‫مة‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY‬‬
‫‪Mubtada’s are in red:‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫ك ي ْوم‬
‫ذل‬
‫ةِ ة ة‬
‫هذا ِصراط‬
‫ة‬
‫ة‬
‫حد‬
‫هو ِإ ةَل ةوا ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫هذا ِذكر مبارك‬
‫مة ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ك ِري‬
‫ِإنةه ملة مقرآن ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫هي ِفتنةة‬
‫ْ‬
‫هو مؤ ِمن‬
‫م‬
‫اوية‬
‫هي خ‬
‫ة ِ ة‬
‫الحجار ِة‬
‫‪ .9‬فه‬
‫ك ِ‬
‫ي ة‬
‫ة ة‬
‫ةِ ة‬
‫‪ .10‬هي حيةة‬
‫ة‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ِنعمة‬
‫‪ .11‬تل‬
‫ِ ة ة‬
‫‪ .12‬هذه س ِب ِيل‬
‫ة‬
‫‪ .13‬هذه جهن‬
‫ة ة ةم‬
‫ْ‬
‫كرة‬
‫‪ِ .14‬إ ةن ةهذه ةتذ ِ‬
‫ة‬
‫‪ِ .15‬إ ةّنا ب ةقرة‬
‫ة ة ة‬
‫‪ِ .16‬إ ةّنا ةشجرة‬
‫ة‬
‫ة ة‬
‫‪ .17‬هذا ْ‬
‫َشء ع ِجيب‬
‫ة ة ة‬
‫ة‬
‫حي‬
‫‪ .18‬إن‬
‫الل ةغفمور ر ِ‬
‫ِ ة ة‬
‫ة‬
‫اط م ْست ِق ري‬
‫‪ .19‬و هو عَل صر‬
‫ة مة ة ة ِ ة ر م ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل ةر مس ر‬
‫ول ة‬
‫‪ِ .20‬إنةه ملة ةقو م‬
‫ك ِر ر‬
‫‪ .21‬هو الغفور الودود‬
‫مة ة م م ة م م‬
‫‪.22‬‬
‫ظي‬
‫هو ةنبأ ةع ِ‬
‫مة ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ِ .23‬إنةما الحياة م المنيا لة ِعب و ةَلو‬
‫ة‬
‫ة ة ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪.24‬‬
‫المؤ ِمنمون‬
‫مُه م م‬
‫ة‬
‫ضالمون‬
‫‪ِ .25‬إ ةن ةه مؤ ةال ِء لة ة‬
‫ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .26‬ذلك‬
‫المح ِسنِنية‬
‫ج ةزآء م م‬
‫ةِ ة ة‬
‫‪ .27‬إن المنافقني ِف ْ‬
‫ار‬
‫أل ْس ةف ِل ِم‬
‫الر ِك ا ة‬
‫ن الن ة ِ‬
‫ِ ة م ة ِ ِ ةِ ة‬
‫ة‬
‫‪.28‬‬
‫‪.29‬‬
‫‪.30‬‬
‫‪.31‬‬
‫‪.32‬‬
‫‪.33‬‬
‫‪.34‬‬
‫‪.35‬‬
‫ار‬
‫الغ ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ه ةما ِِف ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫أةن مُتْ م ْس ِل ممون‬
‫ة‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات و ةن ِع ري‬
‫ِإ ةن ال مم ةت ِقنية ِِف‬
‫جن ة ر‬
‫ة‬
‫ة‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وأ ة ةن ع ةل ْي ِه النةشأ ة ةة األمخرى‬
‫ة ة‬
‫ة‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫نحن أنص‬
‫ار اللِ‬
‫ة مة ة م‬
‫!‪not a sentence‬‬
‫هذا الي ْوم‬
‫ة ة م‬
‫ْ‬
‫اللِ حق‬
‫أ ة ةن وع ةد‬
‫ة‬
‫ة‬
‫ة‬
‫هو ق م ْرآن م ِجيد‬
‫ة‬
‫مة‬
1
5.3.2 Parts of a Sentence–Mubtada’
A basic definition of the parts of the ‫مجةل إمسية‬:
The Mubtada’ (‫ )مبتدأ‬is the part before the “is”. It usually occurs first. Every sentence must have a
Mubtada’. There are two parts that could occur after the “is”. They are (1) Khabr (‫)خ َب‬
َ and (2) Muta’alliq
bil khabr (‫)مت َع ِلق بالخب‬. Both of these parts could occur individually or together. Here are the possible
َُ
scenarios:
1. ‫ = مجةل إمسية‬Mubtada’ + Khabr + Muta’alliq bil khabr
2. ‫ = مجةل إمسية‬Mubtada’ + Khabr
3. ‫ = مجةل إمسية‬Mubtada’ + Muta’alliq bil khabr
Guidelines for finding the Mubtada’:
1. The first Ism mentioned in Raf’ is the Mubtada’.
ْ
ُ ‫ أ َ َّلل ُأَك َب‬: the word ُ ‫ أ َ َّلل‬is the Mubtada’.
‫ ِف الب ْيت و د‬: ‫ل‬
‫ و د‬is the Mubtada’. (‫ ِف‬is a harf of jarr, and ‫ الب ْيت‬is Jarr, so neither of them is
‫ل‬
ِ
َ ِ َ ِ َ َ
َ
Mubtada’).
2. In some crazy cases the Mubtada’ can be Nasb. This is when a Harf of Nasb beats up a Mubtada’
and forces it into Nasb. However, it is important to remember that the Harf of Nasb and its victim
can have a long distance relationship. The harf of nasb and its victim constitute the Mubtada’.
ْ
ْ
ْ
‫س‬
‫اإلن‬
‫ ِإ َن‬: ‫اإلنسان‬
ِ
ِ ‫ ِإ َن‬is the Mubtada’.
‫سان لَ ِفي خُ ر‬
َ
َ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ
‫أ َ َن لَ ُُه أَجرً ا حسنًا‬: ‫ أ َ َن أَجرً ا حسنًا‬is the Mubtada’. ‫ أَجرً ا‬is the victim of ‫أ َ َن‬, but ‫ أَجر ًا حسنًا‬are Mawsoof
َ َ
َ َ
َ
ْ
Sifah, therefore ‫ أ َ َن أَجرً ا حسنًا‬together are the Mubtada’.
َ َ
ْ ‫د‬
‫ك‬
ِ ‫ك‬
َ ‫باخع َنف َس‬
َ َ‫ لَ َعل‬: ‫ك‬
َ َ‫ – لَ َع َل( لَ َعل‬harf of Nasb, ‫ – ك‬victim) is the Mubtada’.
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES‬‬
‫‪Find the Mubtada’ in the following sentences:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫د ِ َّللِ‬
‫الحم ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ .2‬أ َ َن َل ب ْي ًتا‬
‫َُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬أ‬
‫ّيم أَك َب ُ‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫‪ِ .4‬إنَه ع ِليد‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫د‬
‫ح ْيد‬
‫إن‬
‫اّلل َغفُور ر ِ‬
‫ِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫د‬
‫رية‬
‫دارنا َ‬
‫ك ِب َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك ِعسى ابن م ْري‬
‫ذلِ َ‬
‫َُ ََ‬
‫ل ك ُل ْ‬
‫َش رء‬
‫َُ ُ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫حون‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ُه الم‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ ُ ُ َ‬
‫هذ ِه جهن‬
‫‪ِ .11‬‬
‫َ َ َُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ألْنار‬
‫ن َتح ِِتا ا‬
‫‪ِ .11‬م‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫كل ْ‬
‫َش رء ع ِليد‬
‫ه َو ِب ُ ِ َ‬
‫‪ُ .12‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪.13‬‬
‫‪.14‬‬
‫‪.15‬‬
‫‪.16‬‬
‫‪.17‬‬
‫أل ْر ِض‬
‫ب الس‬
‫ربنا ر‬
‫ماوات و ا َ‬
‫ِ َ‬
‫َ ُ َ ُ َ‬
‫أي الح ْزب ْْي أ ْ‬
‫حص ى‬
‫َ ُ ِ َ ِ َ َ‬
‫ْ د‬
‫غ لف‬
‫قُلُوبُنا ُ‬
‫لع َل اّلل غف د‬
‫ور‬
‫ََ َ ُ‬
‫ََ‬
‫ك ْم‬
‫ِإنَا مع‬
‫ُ‬
‫ََ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWERS: Mubtada’ is in red‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫د ِ َّللِ‬
‫الحم ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ .2‬أ َ َن َل ب ْي ًتا‬
‫َُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬أ‬
‫ّيم أَك َب ُ‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫‪ِ .4‬إنَه ع ِليد‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫د‬
‫ح ْيد‬
‫إن‬
‫اّلل َغفُور ر ِ‬
‫ِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫د‬
‫رية‬
‫دارنا َ‬
‫ك ِب َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك ِعسى ابن م ْري‬
‫ذلِ َ‬
‫َُ ََ‬
‫ل ك ُل ْ‬
‫َش رء‬
‫َُ ُ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫حون‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ُه الم‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ ُ ُ َ‬
‫هذ ِه جهن‬
‫‪ِ .11‬‬
‫َ َ َُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ألْنار‬
‫ن َتح ِِتا ا‬
‫‪ِ .11‬م‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫كل ْ‬
‫َش رء ع ِليد‬
‫ه َو ِب ُ ِ َ‬
‫‪ُ .12‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪.13‬‬
‫‪.14‬‬
‫‪.15‬‬
‫‪.16‬‬
‫‪.17‬‬
‫أل ْر ِض‬
‫ب الس‬
‫ربنا ر‬
‫ماوات و ا َ‬
‫ِ َ‬
‫َ ُ َ ُ َ‬
‫أي الح ْزب ْْي أ ْ‬
‫حص ى‬
‫َ ُ ِ َ ِ َ َ‬
‫ْ د‬
‫غ لف‬
‫قُلُوبُنا ُ‬
‫لع َل اّلل غف د‬
‫ور‬
‫ََ َ ُ‬
‫ََ‬
‫ك ْم‬
‫ِإنَا مع‬
‫ُ‬
‫ََ‬
1
5.3.3 & 5.3.4 Parts of a Sentence–Khabr & Muta’alliq bil Khabr
We learnt that the ‫ مجةل إمسية‬is made up of 1) Mubtada’, 2) Khabr and 3) Muta’alliq bil khabr. The
Mubtada’ is the first Raf’ word you find or the Harf of Nasb and its victim together.
Today we will talk about the Khabr and the Muta’alliq bil Khabr (MBK). Remember that a ‫ مجةل إمسية‬must
always have a Mubtada’ and either a Khabr or a Muta’alliq bil Khabr, or both.
The second Raf’ word we find will be the Khabr.
1.
: ‫ الحمد‬is the Mubtada’ because it is the first Raf’ word. ‫ لِلل‬cannot be the Khabr because
‫الحمد ل ِّلل‬
َ
َ
it is Jarr. Therefore, this sentence does not have a Khabr.
ٌ
2. ‫ك‬
‫ك ل‬
َ ‫باخع َنف َس‬
َ َ‫لَ َع ّل‬: ‫ك‬
َ َ‫ لَ َع ّل‬is the Mubtada’ here (Harf of Nasb and its victim). Since we have identified
the Mubtada’, we have to look for a word after it that is Raf’. ‫باخ ٌع‬
‫ ل‬is the Khabr.
The Harf of Jarr and its victim is the Muta’alliq bil Khabr.
1. ‫ أ َ ّ َن لَُه أَجرً ا حسنًا‬: ‫ أ َ ّ َن‬and ‫ أَجرً ا حسنًا‬together is the Mubtada’. ‫ لَُه‬is the Muta’alliq bil Khabr.
َ َ
َ َ
2. ‫كثون فلي له‬
‫ ُه ما‬: ‫ ُه‬is the Mubtada’, ‫كثون‬
‫ ما‬is the Khabr (2nd Raf’ word), ‫ فلي له‬is the Muta’alliq bil Khabr
َ ‫ل‬
َ ‫ل‬
(Harf of Jarr and its victim).
Sometimes we find an independent word that is Nasb in the ‫ مجةل إمسية‬- this word is part of the Khabr
itself. Make sure not to confuse this with the victim of the Harf of Nasb.
ٌ
ٌ
1. ‫ك‬
‫ك ل‬
‫ ل‬is the Khabr. ‫ك‬
َ ‫باخع َنف َس‬
َ َ‫ لَ َع ّل‬: ‫ك‬
َ َ‫ لَ َع ّل‬is the Mubtada’, ‫باخع‬
َ ‫ َنف َس‬is a Nasb word (it is not the victim
of a harf of Nasb), therefore it is part of the Khabr.
2. ً ‫ أ َ ّّيم أَحسن عمل‬: ‫ أ َ ّّيم‬is the Mubtada’, ‫ أَحسن عم ًل‬is the Khabr.
َ َ َ
َ َ َ
3. ‫طعا ًما‬
َ ‫كى‬
َ ‫كى‬
َ ‫ أ َ ّّيم أَز‬: ‫ أ َ ّّيم‬is the Mubtada’, ‫طعا ًما‬
َ ‫ أَز‬is the Khabr (‫كى‬
َ ‫ أَز‬is Raf’, but it is not apparent
because it is a non-flexible word.)
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES‬‬
‫‪Identify the Mubtada’, Khabr, and Muta’alliq bil Khabr in the following sentences:‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫الحمد ل ّ َِلل‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ .1‬سالل ٌم طالل ٌ‬
‫ب يف المع َه لد‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ .6‬أ َ ّّيم أَك َب‬
‫‪ .5‬لإنَه لبك ّل َش ٍء ع لليٌ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ل َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫حيٌ‬
‫‪ .11‬إن‬
‫اِل َغفور ر ل‬
‫ل َّ َّ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫رية‬
‫‪ .12‬دارنا َ‬
‫ك لب َ‬
‫‪ .9‬لإ ّنَا ل ِّلل‬
‫‪ .4‬أ َ ّ َن َل بي ًتا‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ .8‬لإنَه ع لليٌ‬
‫ّ َ‬
‫ك لعسى ابن مري‬
‫‪ .14‬ذلل َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫‪ .3‬إنا لجاعلون خل ً‬
‫ألر لض‬
‫يفة يف ا َ‬
‫ل َّ َ ل‬
‫َ َ ل َ‬
‫اِلل‬
‫ول ّ‬
‫‪ .7‬أ َ ّ َن لفيكم َرس َ‬
‫‪.11‬‬
‫‪.13‬‬
‫‪َ .16‬ل ك ّل ََش ٍء‬
‫‪.15‬‬
‫‪ُ .18‬ه المف للحون‬
‫َ‬
‫‪.17‬‬
‫هذ له ج َه ّ َن‬
‫‪.21‬‬
‫ل َ‬
‫ألْنار‬
‫‪ .22‬لمن َتح لِتا ا َ‬
‫‪ .24‬هو لبك ّل َش ٍء ع لليٌ‬
‫ل َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ألر لض‬
‫ب الس‬
‫‪ .26‬ربنا ر‬
‫ماوات و ا َ‬
‫ل َ‬
‫َ ّ َ ّ َ‬
‫ْي أَحصى‬
‫‪ .28‬أ َ ّي ل‬
‫الحز َب ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .31‬قلوبنا غلف‬
‫‪.19‬‬
‫‪.21‬‬
‫‪.23‬‬
‫‪.25‬‬
‫‪.27‬‬
‫‪.29‬‬
‫راجعون‬
‫لإ ّنَا لإلي له ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ل‬
‫هو َم للك ليف هذا الب َ ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ضل لعل ًما‬
‫أ َ ّّيم أَف َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ك‬
‫ن‬
‫اب‬
‫ل‬
‫هو قا لت‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ك‬
‫ه َو قا لتل لاب لن َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫قائ ٌم‬
‫ليف البي ل‬
‫ت َزيد ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫َل س ّيَارة ليف أَم لريكا‬
‫َ َ‬
‫اِل عز ٌ‬
‫كيٌ‬
‫يز‬
‫ح ل‬
‫َّ َ ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫كتا ًبا‬
‫دارس ل‬
‫َص لديقنَا ل‬
‫لُه أَج ٌر كريٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫َل‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWERS‬‬
‫‪MUBTADA’ / KHABR / MUTA’ALLIQ BIL KHABR‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫الحمد ل ّ َِلل‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ .1‬سالل ٌم طالل ٌ‬
‫ب يف المع َه لد‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ .6‬أ َ ّّيم أَك َب‬
‫ٌ‬
‫خ لبري‬
‫‪ .5‬لإ ّنَه لبك ّ لل ََش ٍء َ‬
‫‪ .4‬أ َ ّ َن َل بي ًتا‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ .8‬لإنَه ع لليٌ‬
‫ّ َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫حيٌ‬
‫‪ .11‬إن‬
‫اِل َغفور ر ل‬
‫ل َّ َّ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫رية‬
‫‪ .12‬دارنا َ‬
‫ك لب َ‬
‫ك لعسى ابن مري‬
‫‪ .14‬ذلل َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫‪ .3‬إنا لجاعلون خل ً‬
‫ألر لض‬
‫يفة يف ا َ‬
‫ل َّ َ ل‬
‫َ َ ل َ‬
‫اِلل‬
‫ول ّ‬
‫‪ .7‬أ َ ّ َن فليكم َرس َ‬
‫‪ .9‬لإ ّنَا ل ِّلل‬
‫‪.11‬‬
‫‪.13‬‬
‫‪َ .16‬ل ك ّل ََش ٍء‬
‫‪.15‬‬
‫‪ُ .18‬ه المف للحون‬
‫َ‬
‫‪.17‬‬
‫هذ له ج َه ّ َن‬
‫‪.21‬‬
‫ل َ‬
‫ألْنار‬
‫‪ .22‬لمن َتح لِتا ا َ‬
‫‪ .24‬هو لبك ّل َش ٍء ع لليٌ‬
‫ل َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ألر لض‬
‫ب الس‬
‫‪ .26‬ربنا ر‬
‫ماوات و ا َ‬
‫ل َ‬
‫َ ّ َ ّ َ‬
‫ْي أَحصى‬
‫‪ .28‬أ َ ّي ل‬
‫الحز َب ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .31‬قلوبنا غلف‬
‫‪.19‬‬
‫‪.21‬‬
‫‪.23‬‬
‫‪.25‬‬
‫‪.27‬‬
‫‪.29‬‬
‫راجعون‬
‫لإ ّنَا لإلي له ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ل‬
‫هو َم للك ليف هذا الب َ ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ضل لعل ًما‬
‫أ َ ّّيم أَف َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ك‬
‫ن‬
‫اب‬
‫ل‬
‫هو قا لت‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ك‬
‫ه َو قا لتل لابنل َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫قائ ٌم‬
‫ليف البي ل‬
‫ت َزيد ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫َل س ّيَارة ليف أَم لريكا‬
‫َ َ‬
‫اِل عز ٌ‬
‫كيٌ‬
‫يز‬
‫ح ل‬
‫َّ َ ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫كتا ًبا‬
‫دارس ل‬
‫َص لديقنا ل‬
‫لُه أَج ٌر كريٌ‬
‫َ‬
‫َل‬
1
5.4 Introduction to Pronouns
The last thing that we did was ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. We’ll be going back to that soon, but in order to
continue, we have to go off track a little bit and learn something else. Today, we learned pronouns. We
started off by first going through the original pronouns with their meanings:
they
they (f)
all of you
all of you (f)
ْ
‫ﻫﻦ‬
ْ ‫أ ْﻧ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
both of them ‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
both of them (f) ‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
ْ
both of you ‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ
he
she
you
‫ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻫﻲ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ‬
ْ
both of you (f)‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
you-she ‫أﻧﺖ‬
ْ
‫ﻧﺤﻦ‬
I ‫أﻧﺎ‬
we
This list is on pg.18 of the 201 Handout Packet. Memorize these pronouns and their meanings. Pronouns
are one of the most important things in Arabic and will come up all the time. Make flashcards out of
them and run through them for practice. I need you to know them really well before moving on to the
next lesson.
2
EXERCISES:
Make flashcards out of the pronouns. Once you have them memorized, quiz yourself by looking only at
the English and trying to guess the Arabic. Mix up the cards and practice over and over again until you
can run through them very quickly.
1
5.6 Pronouns (Attached Versions)
We’re continuing our lesson on pronouns, but before we move on, you need to make sure you have the
original pronouns we learned last class memorized. If you haven’t done that yet, and don’t know them
backwards and forwards, then this lesson will not help you. Be sure you have the previous lesson down
before you move on.
Sometimes, when people are related to each other, they’re called cousins. When pronouns have
relationships, we call them something else, but we’ll call them cousins for now. I’m listing the cousins in
red under the original pronouns we already learned (this is also on pg.18 of the 201 Handout Packet):
ْ
Some cousins look
just like the
original pronouns!
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ه‬
‫ﻫﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺎ‬
ْ
ْ ‫أ ْﻧ‬
Other cousins
sound like they’re
cousins (just
exchange the ‫ت‬
for a ‫)ك‬
‫ﻛ ْﻢ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ك‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ك‬
ْ
‫ﻧﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺎ‬
‫’ﻫﻮ‬s cousin is always
confused. He’s always
saying, ُ‫?ه‬
‫’ﻫﻲ‬s cousin is always
laughing, ‘ha!’
‫أﻧﺎ‬
‫ ي‬or
Make sure you know all of the cousins by heart. This lesson is one of the most important lessons you will
learn in Arabic, so get lots of practice and memorize them well.
2
EXERCISES:
1. Memorize the cousins
2. Use the flashcards you made last class but this time, look at the English and try to guess the
cousin of that pronoun.
1
5.7 & 5.8 Fragments and Pronouns
We’re going learn one more thing about pronouns. So far, we know the original pronouns and their
cousins. The first step was to memorize them, the second was to learn their meanings, and the third was
to know their cousins (when we say that ‫ ه‬is the cousin of ‫ﻫﻮ‬,
that’s not actually ‫’ﻫﻮ‬s
cousin. It’s what
"
$"
$"
‫ﻫﻮ‬
becomes sometimes).
$"
There are original pronouns and attached pronouns. When you say ‫ﻫﻮ‬,
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬, ), etc, those are the original
$" $ " "
ْ) becomes ْ)… ’ those are the attached
pronouns. When you say, ‘‫ﻫﻮ‬
becomes ‫ه‬, ‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
becomes ‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬,
"
$ " "
" $ "
$"
pronouns. The original ones are always Raf’, and the attached ones are either Nasb or Jarr. If someone
asks you what the Raf’ version of ‫ﻫﻮ‬
is, you’d say ‘‫ﻫﻮ‬.’
If someone asked you for the Nasb or Jarr version
$"
$"
of ‫ﻫﻮ‬,
you’d say ‫ه‬.
"
$"
If you remember way back when we were discussing the status, we said that you can tell status by
ending sounds, ending combinations, and we wrote down one more thing: pronouns are weird.
Pronouns don’t care about ending sound or ending combinations. They’ve got their own rules. The
original ones are Raf’ and the attached ones are Nasb or Jarr. If you were looking at ending sounds and
looked at ‫ﻫﻮ‬,
the ‘a’ sound at the end sounds like Nasb, right? But because it’s an original pronoun, it
$"
doesn’t’ matter if it sounds like Nasb. It’s still counted as Raf’. The rule for telling the status is that
original pronouns are Raf’ and the attached ones are Nasb or Jarr.
A lot of times, you’ll come across words that look like they have a cousin stuck at the end of them.
Before this lesson, a word like ‫ ْﻢ‬0
‫ﺴ‬. "‫ﻧﻔ‬$ ‫ أ‬would look like one word. But now, you know that it’s actually
"
two words: ‫ﺲ‬. "‫ﻧﻔ‬$ ‫ أ‬and ‫ﻛ" ْﻢ‬. The second word is attached. The cousins are always attached at the end of
the word (that’s why we don’t really call them cousins—we call them ‘attached pronouns’).
Attached pronouns can be attached to an ism, fi’l, or harf. Right now, since we haven’t studied fi’l or
harf, we’re only going to talk about when it’s attached to an ism. Here’s something that we’ll explain
next time: whenever a pronoun is attached to an ism, the first word is a ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and the pronoun is a
‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. So if I looked at ‫ﻚ‬
the first word, ‫ب‬
.< ‫ر‬$ , would be the ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and the second word, the
$ ‫ﺑ‬.< ‫ر‬,
$
attached pronoun ‫ك‬$ , would be the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. This might take some time to get used, so go through the
exercises below to get your feet wet.
2
EXERCISES:
A. For each of the cases below, find the attached pronoun. What’s the original pronoun that it
came from? What does it mean?
‫ﻜﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑ‬.1
" $ $ "(
ْ
‫ﻚ‬
( ‫ "ﺗﺤ "ﺘ‬.2
‫ ﻤ ﺎ‬%‫ﺣ‬
‫ ﺻﺎ‬.3
"$ "( "
ْ
‫ا("ﺎ‬
" ‫ (زﻟﺰ‬.4
"
ْ
‫ﻚ‬
" ‫ "ﻧﻔ "ﺴ‬.5
ْ:‫ ﻛ ْﻴﺪ‬.6
$ " "
‫ازﻳﻨ( (ﻪ‬
( ‫ "ﻣ "ﻮ‬.7
/‫ﻮ‬
( ( ‫ﺳ‬$ ‫ ر‬.8
"
‫ﻚ‬
( ‫ "ﻣ‬E $ ‫ أ‬.9
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ أﺷﺪ‬.10
" $ "E $ "
B. Which word is the ‫ ?ﻣﻀﺎف‬Which is the ‫?ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬
$
ْ
2$ "‫ أ " ْﻣﻮاﻟ‬.6
"
ْ‫ﻢ‬N‫ ﺳ ْﻌﻴ‬.7
$
" "
‫ أ " ْﻣﺮ "ﻧﺎ‬.8
$
‫ﻀ (ﺒﻲ‬
" ‫ "ﻏ‬.9
ْ
‫ﻦ‬
" E ‫ أ"ﻫ (ﻠ (ﻬ‬.10
ْ
‫ ْﻢ‬N
‫ﻌ‬$ ‫ﺟ‬
( ‫ "ﻣﺮ‬.1
$
‫ﻚ‬
" $‫ﺑ‬E ‫ "ر‬.2
‫ﺎﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺿ‬.3
" ‫ﺤ‬
" $
ْ
‫ ﺻﺪر "ك‬.4
" "
‫ (ﻋﺒﺎده‬.5
$$ "
3
ANSWER KEY:
Section A:
1.
ْ
‫ﻤﺎ‬$‫ﻛ‬, original is ‫ﻤﺎ‬$ ‫أ "ﻧﺘ‬, both of you
"
"
2.
‫ك‬,
( original is ‫ﻧﺖ‬
( " ‫أ‬, you-she (you, fem)
3.
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬,
original is ‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬,
both of them
" $
" $
4.
‫ﻫﺎ‬,
‫ﻫ‬,
( she
" original is ‫ﻲ‬
"
‫ك‬,
‫ أ‬, you
" original is ‫ﻧﺖ‬
" "
ْ:, original is ْ:, they
$
$
5.
6.
7.
9.
‫ (ه‬, original is ‫ﻫﻮ‬,
he
"$
‫ (ه‬, original is ‫ﻫﻮ‬,
he
"$
‫ك‬,
( original is ‫ﻧﺖ‬
( " ‫أ‬, you-she (you, fem)
10.
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬,
original is ‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬,
both of them
" $
" $
8.
Section B:
Black = ‫ ;ﻣﻀﺎف‬Red = ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬
$
ْ
2, &‫أ & ْﻣﻮاﻟ‬.6
&
ْ‫ﻢ‬3‫ ﺳ ْﻌﻴ‬.7
,
& &
‫ أ & ْﻣﺮ &ﻧﺎ‬.8
,
‫ﺒﻲ‬/ ‫ﻀ‬
& ‫ &ﻏ‬.9
ْ
‫ﻦ‬
& 5 ‫ﻬ‬/ ‫ﻠ‬/ ‫ أ&ﻫ‬.10
‫ ْﻢ‬3
‫ﻌ‬, ‫ﺟ‬
/ ‫ &ﻣ ْﺮ‬.1
,
‫ﻚ‬
& ,‫ﺑ‬5 ‫ &ر‬.2
‫ﺿﺤﺎ &ﻫﺎ‬
.3
& ,
ْ
‫ ﺻﺪر &ك‬.4
& &
‫ﻋﺒﺎده‬/ .5
,, &
1
5.9 Fragments—Idhaafah Construction using Attached Pronouns
The last thing we did was go thru pg. 22 in our handout and say what the original pronoun was, which
word was the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬, and which word was the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. Today, I told you why we say that. The
definition of a ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬is the word before ‘of’ and the ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬is the word after ‘of.’ We also learned
that the ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬is light and never has ‫ال‬, and the ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬that always comes right after it is always Jarr.
Now if I say, ‘the book of mine,’ it’s a ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬because there’s an ‘of’ in there. ‘The book’ is
before ‘of,’ so it would be the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬. ‘Mine’ would be the ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬since it’s after ‘of.’ If I were to write
the Arabic version of this, I would have to make sure I made the ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬light and not put and ‫ال‬. The
ٌ ‫ﻛﺘ‬, make it light and don’t put ‫ ال‬on it, my ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬would
Arabic word for book is ‫ﻛﺘﺎب‬, so if I start with ‫ﺎب‬
be ‫ﻛﺘﺎب‬.
ٌ ‫ﻛﺘ‬
‫ﺎب ← ﻛﺘﺎب‬
Now, I have to add ‘mine’ as the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. ‘Mine’ comes from the pronoun ‘I,’ or ‫ أﻧﺎ‬in Arabic. Since it’s
the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬, and must be Jarr, I’d have to use the Jarr version of ‫أﻧﺎ‬: ‫ ي‬. Now I just put them together
and get ‫ ﻛﺘﺎ‬to mean ‘book of mine’ or ‘my book.’
‫ ي = ﻛﺘﺎ‬+ ‫ﻛﺘﺎب‬
We’ve said that pronouns can be stuck at the end of an ism, fi’l, or harf. But, you only call them ‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬
‫ إﻟﻴﻪ‬when they’re stuck to an ism.
Note: Whenever you have to add ‫ ي‬as the attached pronoun of ‫ أﻧﺎ‬, you will usually have a kasra on the
letter before the ‫( ي‬like the ‫ ب‬in the above example). This isn’t a grammar rule, but the Arabs always
like things to sound smooth. ‫ ﻛﺘﺎ‬doesn’t sound as smooth as ‫ﻛﺘﺎ‬, so they don’t say ‫ﻛﺘﺎ‬. ‫ ﻛﺘﺎ‬will
look like ‫ ﻛﺘﺎ‬in raf’, nasb, and jarr and you will need to use the context (more on this later) to
determine the status. This is NOT a grammar rule—just a phonetic one.
2
EXERCISES:
ْ
A. Use the isms listed below to create Idhafahs with a) her, b) both of yours, c) theirs, d) his, e) ‫ﻧﺤﻦ‬,
f) ‫ أﻧﺖ‬, g) ‫أﻧ‬. For example: My bag = ‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻲ‬
ٌ
‫ ﺳ "ﻴﺎرة‬.5
ٌ ْ
‫ دﻓﱰ‬.4
ٌ
‫ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ‬.3
‫ ﻗﻠ ٌﻢ‬.2
B. Now, try to come up with the Idhafah in Arabic by looking at the English:
ٌ ‫ ﻛﺘ‬book
1. ‫ﺎب‬
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
My book
Your book
Her book
Our book
Their book
2. ‫ ﻗﻠ ٌﻢ‬pen
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Their (2) pen (pen of both of theirs)
Their pen
Your (2) pen
His pen
Her pen
ٌ
3. ‫ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ‬bag
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
All of you ladies’ bag
Their bag
Your (2) bag
Our bag
Your (fem) bag
ٌ ‫ﻛﺘ‬.1
‫ﺎب‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫‪Section A:‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑ‪ْ 1‬ﻢ )‪g‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻚ )‪f‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎ )‪e‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻪ )‪d‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎ‪ْ +‬ﻢ )‪c‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻜﻤﺎ )‪b‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎ‪+‬ﺎ )‪1. a‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤ‪ْ 1‬ﻢ )‪g‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘ‪ْ 1‬ﻢ )‪g‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤﻚ )‪f‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤﻨﺎ )‪e‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤﻪ )‪d‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤ‪c) 3‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻚ )‪f‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻨﺎ )‪e‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻪ )‪d‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒ‪ْ 4‬ﻢ )‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤﻜﻤﺎ )‪b‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤﻬﺎ )‪2. a‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻜﻤﺎ )‪b‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒ‪4‬ﺎ )‪3. a‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫دﻓﱰﻛ ْﻢ )‪g‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫دﻓﱰك )‪f‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫دﻓﱰﻧﺎ )‪e‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫دﻓﱰه )‪d‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫دﻓﱰ‪c) ْ6‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫دﻓﱰﻛﻤﺎ )‪b‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫دﻓﱰﻫﺎ )‪4. a‬‬
‫ﺳ "ﻴﺎرﺗ‪ْ 1‬ﻢ)‪g‬‬
‫ﺳ "ﻴﺎرﺗﻚ )‪f‬‬
‫ﺳ "ﻴﺎرﺗﻨﺎ )‪e‬‬
‫ﺳ "ﻴﺎرﺗﻪ )‪d‬‬
‫ﺳ "ﻴﺎر‪ْ 9‬ﻢ )‪c‬‬
‫ﺳ "ﻴﺎرﺗﻜﻤﺎ )‪b‬‬
‫ﺳ "ﻴﺎر‪9‬ﺎ )‪5. a‬‬
‫‪Section B:‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎ‪ْ +‬ﻢ )‪e‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎ )‪d‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎ‪+‬ﺎ )‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤﻬﺎ )‪e‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤﻪ )‪d‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤﻜﻤﺎ )‪c‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻚ )‪e‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻨﺎ )‪d‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻜﻤﺎ )‪c‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻚ )‪b‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤ‪b) 3‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒ‪ْ 4‬ﻢ )‪b‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎ )‪1. a‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻤﻬﻤﺎ )‪2. a‬‬
‫ﻦ )‪3. a‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺘﻜ "‬
1
6.1 & 6.2 Fragments—Harf Jarr
We’ve been talking about ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. Before we move on, we have to memorize some stuff. I
had you memorize the following words in class today:
‫ﺧﻼ‬
ْ
‫ﻣﺬ‬
ْ
‫ﻣﻨﺬ‬
‫و‬
‫ل‬
‫ﻋﺪا‬
#‫ﺣﺘﻰ إ‬
‫ك‬
‫ت‬
‫ب‬
ْ ‫ﺣﺎش ﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫رب‬
ْ ‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﰲ‬
‫ﻋ‬
These are called Huroof Jaarah, and each one of them is called a Harf of Jarr. These harf have a job to
do: they make the next word Jarr. Whenever you see these harf with an ism after it, that ism has to be
Jarr. Unlike isms, though, a harf doesn’t have any properties, so it doesn’t have a status, a number, a
gender, or a type.
It’s important for you to memorize them well so that you can recognize them when they come up in
Quran, for example:
.)‫أﻋﻮذ ﺑﺎﷲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸ ْﻴﻄﺎن اﻟﺮﺟ‬
ْ
.)‫ﺎن اﻟﺮﺣ‬0‫ ْﺴﻢ اﷲ اﻟﺮ‬/
ْ
ْ
ْ ‫( ﻣ‬٣) ‫ اﻟﻨﺎس‬:‫(إ‬٢) ‫( ﻣﻠﻚ اﻟﻨﺎس‬١) ‫ﻗ ْﻞ أﻋﻮذ ﺑﺮب اﻟﻨﺎس‬
‫ي ﻳﻮ ْﺳﻮس ﰲ‬A‫(ا‬٤) ‫ﻦ ﺷﺮ اﻟﻮ ْﺳﻮاس اﻟﺨﻨﺎس‬
(٥) ‫ﺻﺪور اﻟﻨﺎس‬
So…
What are these harfs called? Huroof Jaarah
What is their job? To make the ism after them Jarr.
What properties do they have? None
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪Find all the Huroof Jaarah in the ayaat below:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺷﺮ ﻏﺎﺳﻖ إذا وﻗﺐ )‪(٣‬وﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺷﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻠﻖ )‪(٢‬وﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻗ ْﻞ أﻋﻮذ ﺑﺮب اﻟْﻔﻠﻖ )‪(١‬ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺷﺮ اﻟﻨﻔﺎﺛﺎت ﰲ اﻟﻌﻘﺪ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫)‪(٤‬وﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﺳ ٍﺪ إذا ﺣﺴﺪ )‪(٥‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻟ ْﻢ ﺗﺮ ﻛ ْﻴﻒ ﻓﻌﻞ رﺑﻚ ﺑﺄ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟْﻔﻴﻞ )‪(١‬أﻟ ْﻢ ﻳ ْﺠﻌ ْﻞ ﻛ ْﻴﺪ‪ْT‬‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻀ‬
‫ﺗ‬
‫ﰲ‬
‫ﻴﻞ )‪(٢‬وأ ْرﺳﻞ ﻋﻠ ْ‪ْ U‬ﻢ ﻃﲑًا‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻮل )‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻛ‬
‫ﻴﻞ )‪(٤‬ﻓﺠﻌﻠ‪ Z‬ﻛﻌﺼ ٍﻒ ﻣﺄ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫أﺑﺎﺑﻴﻞ )‪(٣‬ﺗﺮﻣ‪U‬ﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﺎر ٍة ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠ ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أرأ ْﻳﺖ ا‪A‬ي ﻳﻜﺬب ﺑﺎ^ﻳﻦ )‪(١‬ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ا‪A‬ي ﻳﺪع اﻟﻴﺘ) )‪(٢‬وﻻ ﻳﺤﺾ ﻋ ﻃﻌﺎم اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻜﲔ )‪(٣‬ﻓﻮ ْﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟ ْﻠﻤﺼﻠﲔ )‪(٤‬ا‪A‬ﻳﻦ ‪ ْT‬ﻋ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺻﻼ‪ْ f‬ﻢ ﺳﺎﻫﻮن )‪(٥‬ا‪A‬ﻳﻦ ‪ ْT‬ﻳﺮاءون )‪(٦‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎرك ا‪A‬ي ﺑﻴﺪه اﻟْﻤ ْﻠﻚ وﻫﻮ ﻋ ﻛﻞ ْ‬
‫‪ٍ l‬ء ﻗﺪ ٌ‬
‫ﻳﺮ )‪(١‬ا‪A‬ي ﺧﻠﻖ اﻟﻤ ْﻮت واﻟﺤﻴﺎة ﻟﻴ ْﺒﻠﻮﻛ ْﻢ أﻳ‪ْ m‬ﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎﻗﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮى ﰲ ﺧ ْﻠﻖ اﻟﺮ ْ‪0‬ﻦ ﻣ ْ‬
‫ات ﻃﺒ ً‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫أﺣﺴﻦ ﻋﻤﻼ وﻫﻮ اﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﻐﻔﻮر )‪(٢‬ا‪A‬ي ﺧﻠﻖ ﺳﺒﻊ ‪q‬ﺎو ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻓﻄﻮر )‪ْ s(٣‬‬
‫ﺎرﺟﻊ اﻟْﺒﺼﺮ ﻫ ْﻞ ﺗﺮى ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎوت ﻓ ْ‬
‫ارﺟﻊ اﻟْﺒﺼﺮ ﻛﺮﺗ ْﲔ ﻳ ْﻨﻘﻠ ْ‬
‫ﺐ إﻟ ْﻴﻚ اﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﺧﺎﺳ ًﺌﺎ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫وﻫﻮ ﺣﺴﲑ )‪(٤‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺷﺮ ﻏﺎﺳﻖ إذا وﻗﺐ )‪(٣‬وﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺷﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻠﻖ )‪(٢‬وﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻗ ْﻞ أﻋﻮذ ﺑﺮب اﻟْﻔﻠﻖ )‪(١‬ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺷﺮ اﻟﻨﻔﺎﺛﺎت ﰲ اﻟﻌﻘﺪ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫)‪(٤‬وﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﺳ ٍﺪ إذا ﺣﺴﺪ )‪(٥‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻟ ْﻢ ﺗﺮ ﻛ ْﻴﻒ ﻓﻌﻞ رﺑﻚ ﺑﺄ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟْﻔﻴﻞ )‪(١‬أﻟ ْﻢ ﻳ ْﺠﻌ ْﻞ ﻛ ْﻴﺪ‪ْT‬‬
‫ﻴﻞ )‪(٢‬وأ ْرﺳﻞ ﻋﻠ ْ‪ْ U‬ﻢ ﻃﲑًا‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻀ‬
‫ﺗ‬
‫ﰲ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻮل )‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻛ‬
‫ﻴﻞ )‪(٤‬ﻓﺠﻌﻠ‪ Z‬ﻛﻌﺼ ٍﻒ ﻣﺄ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫أﺑﺎﺑﻴﻞ )‪(٣‬ﺗﺮﻣ‪U‬ﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﺎر ٍة ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠ ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أرأ ْﻳﺖ ا‪A‬ي ﻳﻜﺬب ﺑﺎ^ﻳﻦ )‪(١‬ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ا‪A‬ي ﻳﺪع اﻟﻴﺘ) )‪(٢‬وﻻ ﻳﺤﺾ ﻋ ﻃﻌﺎم اﻟﻤ ْﺴﻜﲔ )‪(٣‬ﻓﻮ ْﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟ ْﻠﻤﺼﻠﲔ )‪(٤‬ا‪A‬ﻳﻦ ‪ ْT‬ﻋ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺻﻼ‪ْ f‬ﻢ ﺳﺎﻫﻮن )‪(٥‬ا‪A‬ﻳﻦ ‪ ْT‬ﻳﺮاءون )‪(٦‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎرك ا‪A‬ي ﺑﻴﺪه اﻟْﻤ ْﻠﻚ وﻫﻮ ﻋ ﻛﻞ ْ‬
‫‪ٍ l‬ء ﻗﺪ ٌ‬
‫ﻳﺮ )‪(١‬ا‪A‬ي ﺧﻠﻖ اﻟﻤ ْﻮت واﻟﺤﻴﺎة ﻟﻴ ْﺒﻠﻮﻛ ْﻢ أﻳ‪ْ m‬ﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎﻗﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮى ﰲ ﺧ ْﻠﻖ اﻟﺮ ْ‪0‬ﻦ ﻣ ْ‬
‫ات ﻃﺒ ً‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫أﺣﺴﻦ ﻋﻤﻼ وﻫﻮ اﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ اﻟﻐﻔﻮر )‪(٢‬ا‪A‬ي ﺧﻠﻖ ﺳﺒﻊ ‪q‬ﺎو ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻓﻄﻮر )‪ْ s(٣‬‬
‫ﺎرﺟﻊ اﻟْﺒﺼﺮ ﻫ ْﻞ ﺗﺮى ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎوت ﻓ ْ‬
‫ارﺟﻊ اﻟْﺒﺼﺮ ﻛﺮﺗ ْﲔ ﻳ ْﻨﻘﻠ ْ‬
‫ﺐ إﻟ ْﻴﻚ اﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﺧﺎﺳﺌﺎً‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫وﻫﻮ ﺣﺴﲑ )‪(٤‬‬
1
7.1 Fragments—Harf of Nasb
We’ve memorized the 17 Harf of Jarr, and today, we have to memorize something else. We’re almost
done memorizing stuff:
‫ﻟ ْﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫إن‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻞ‬
‫أن‬
‫ﻛ ﺄن‬
These are the Harf of Nasb. Their job is to make the ism that comes right after them Nasb. I’ll share their
meanings with you once we start reading Quran. For now, I need you to memorize them. You can take a
look at these excerpts to see the Harf of Nasb at work:
‫ْﻢ‬
ْ
ْ
‫أن اﷲ ﻳﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﰲ أﻧﻔﺴ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‬
‫إن اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﻘﲔ ﰲ ا' ْرك اﻷ ْﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎر‬
ْ ‫ﻦ اﻟﱪ ﻣ‬
‫ﻦ آﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﷲ‬
‫ﻟ‬
ٍ
ْ
‫إن اﻹ ﺴﺎن ﻟﻔﻲ ﺧ‬
ً ‫ﻟ ْﻴﺘﻨﻲ ﻟ ْﻢ أﺗ ْﺨ ْﺬ ﻓﻼﻧًﺎ ﺧﻠ‬
‫ﻴﻼ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪Find the Harf of Nasb in these ayaat. Notice how the word that comes right after them is Nasb.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫وإن اﻟﻔﺠﺎر ﻟﻔﻲ ﺟﺤ ٍ@ )‪(١٤‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﻞ اﷲ ﻳﺤﻴﻴ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻠﻤﻮن )‪(٢٦‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫‪.10‬‬
‫‪.11‬‬
‫‪.12‬‬
‫‪.13‬‬
‫‪.14‬‬
‫‪.15‬‬
‫ْﻢ ‪ E‬ﻳﻤﻴﺘ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْﻢ ‪ E‬ﻳﺠﻤﻌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْﻢ إ‪ F‬ﻳ ْﻮم اﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﺔ ﻻ ر ْﻳﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ وﻟ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ اﻟﻨﺎس‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ اﻟﻨﺎس ﻻ ﻳﺆﻣﻨﻮن )‪(٥٩‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫إن اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﻻ ر ْﻳﺐ ﻓ‪Q‬ﺎ وﻟ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻧﻄﻔ ٍﺔ إذا ﺗﻤﻨﻰ )‪(٤٦‬وأن ﻋﻠ ْﻴﻪ اﻟ‪Z‬ﺸﺄة اﻷﺧﺮى )‪(٤٧‬‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا]ﻳﻦ ﻳﺠﺘﻨﺒﻮن ﻛﺒﺎ^ﺮ اﻹ‪ E‬واﻟﻔﻮاﺣﺶ إﻻ اﻟﻠﻤﻢ إن رﺑﻚ واﺳﻊ اﻟﻤﻐﻔﺮة‪(٣٢) ...‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وأن اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺟﺪ ﷲ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺪﻋﻮا ﻣﻊ اﷲ أﺣ ًﺪا )‪(١٨‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ‪ ْl‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻠﻤﻮن )‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺮددﻧﺎه إ‪ F‬أﻣﻪ ﻛ ْﻲ ﺗﻘﺮ ﻋ ْﻴ‪i‬ﺎ وﻻ ﺗﺤﺰن وﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ أن وﻋﺪ اﷲ ﺣﻖ وﻟ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت وﻧﻌ ٍ@ )‪(١٧‬‬
‫إن اﻟﻤﺘﻘﲔ ﰲ ﺟﻨ ٍ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ْ n‬ﺴﺄﻟﻮﻧﻚ ﻋﻦ اﻷﻫ‪ o‬ﻗﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﺎس واﻟﺤﺞ وﻟ‪s‬ﺲ اﻟﱪ ﺑﺄن ﺗﺄﺗﻮا اﻟﺒﻴﻮت ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮرﻫﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ اﻟْﱪ ﻣﻦ اﺗﻘﻰ وأﺗﻮا اﻟْﺒﻴﻮت ﻣ ْ‬
‫ْﻢ ﺗﻔﻠﺤﻮن )‪(١٨٩‬‬
‫ﻦ أ ْﺑﻮا‪v‬ﺎ واﺗﻘﻮا اﷲ ﻟﻌﻠ‬
‫وﻟ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْﻢ ﺳﻠﻄﺎﻧًﺎ‪(٨١) ...‬‬
‫ْﻢ أﺷﺮﻛ‪ ْy‬ﺑﺎﷲ ﻣﺎ ﻟ ْﻢ ﻳﻨﺰل ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠ ْﻴ‬
‫وﻛ ْﻴﻒ أﺧﺎف ﻣﺎ أﺷﺮﻛ‪ ْy‬وﻻ ﺗﺨﺎﻓﻮن أﻧ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻋﻠ ٍﻢ إن ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻮن إﻻ اﻟﻈﻦ وإن اﻟﻈﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻖ ﺷ ْﻴ ًﺌﺎ )‪(٢٨‬‬
‫وﻣﺎ ﻟ| ﺑﻪ ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫اب أﻟ ٍ@ )‪(٧‬‬
‫وإذا ﺗﺘ• ﻋﻠﻴﻪ آﻳﺎﺗﻨﺎ و‪ F‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﱪا ﻛﺄن ﻟﻢ ‪n‬ﺴﻤﻌﻬﺎ ﻛﺄن ﰲ أذﻧﻴﻪ وﻗ ًﺮا ﻓ•‪€‬ه ﺑﻌﺬ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺘﺎب ﺑﺎﻟْﺤﻖ واﻟْﻤﲒان وﻣﺎ ﻳ ْﺪرﻳﻚ ﻟﻌﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺮ ٌ‬
‫ﻳﺐ )‪(١٧‬‬
‫اﷲ ا]ي أﻧﺰل اﻟ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻌﻨ‪ ْy‬وﻟ‬
‫ﲑ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ْﻢ رﺳﻮل اﷲ ﻟ ْﻮ ﻳﻄﻴﻌ‬
‫واﻋﻠﻤﻮا أن ﻓﻴ‬
‫ﻢ ﰲ ﻛﺜ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻔﺮ واﻟﻔﺴﻮق واﻟﻌﺼﻴﺎن أوﻟ‪‰‬ﻚ ‪l‬‬
‫ﻢ اﻟ‬
‫ْﻢ وﻛﺮه إﻟ ْﻴ‬
‫ﻢ اﻹﻳﻤﺎن وزﻳﻨﻪ ﰲ ﻗﻠﻮﺑ‬
‫إﻟ ْﻴ‬
‫ﻦ اﷲ ﺣﺒﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺮاﺷﺪون )‪(٧‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻠ ْﻢ ﺗﻘﺘﻠﻮ‪ ْl‬وﻟ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ اﷲ ﻗﺘﻠ| وﻣﺎ رﻣ ْﻴﺖ إذ رﻣ ْﻴﺖ وﻟ‬
‫ﺣﺴﻨًﺎ إن اﷲ ‪ٌ Œ‬‬
‫ﻴﻊ ﻋﻠ@ٌ )‪(١٧‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ اﷲ رﻣﻰ وﻟﻴ ْﺒ‪ Š‬اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﲔ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻼء ً‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫وإن اﻟﻔﺠﺎر ﻟﻔﻲ ﺟﺤ ٍ@ )‪(١٤‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻗﻞ اﷲ ﻳﺤﻴﻴ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻠﻤﻮن )‪(٢٦‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫‪.10‬‬
‫‪.11‬‬
‫‪.12‬‬
‫‪.13‬‬
‫‪.14‬‬
‫‪.15‬‬
‫ْﻢ ‪ E‬ﻳﻤﻴﺘ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْﻢ ‪ E‬ﻳﺠﻤﻌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْﻢ إ‪ F‬ﻳ ْﻮم اﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﺔ ﻻ ر ْﻳﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ وﻟ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ اﻟﻨﺎس‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ اﻟﻨﺎس ﻻ ﻳﺆﻣﻨﻮن )‪(٥٩‬‬
‫إن اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﻻ ر ْﻳﺐ ﻓ‪Q‬ﺎ وﻟ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻧﻄﻔ ٍﺔ إذا ﺗﻤﻨﻰ )‪(٤٦‬وأن ﻋﻠ ْﻴﻪ اﻟ‪Z‬ﺸﺄة اﻷﺧﺮى )‪(٤٧‬‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا]ﻳﻦ ﻳﺠﺘﻨﺒﻮن ﻛﺒﺎ^ﺮ اﻹ‪ E‬واﻟﻔﻮاﺣﺶ إﻻ اﻟﻠﻤﻢ إن رﺑﻚ واﺳﻊ اﻟﻤﻐﻔﺮة‪(٣٢) ...‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وأن اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺟﺪ ﷲ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺪﻋﻮا ﻣﻊ اﷲ أﺣ ًﺪا )‪(١٨‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ‪ ْl‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻠﻤﻮن )‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺮددﻧﺎه إ‪ F‬أﻣﻪ ﻛ ْﻲ ﺗﻘﺮ ﻋ ْﻴ‪i‬ﺎ وﻻ ﺗﺤﺰن وﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ أن وﻋﺪ اﷲ ﺣﻖ وﻟ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت وﻧﻌ ٍ@ )‪(١٧‬‬
‫ﻨ‬
‫ﺟ‬
‫ﰲ‬
‫ﲔ‬
‫ﻘ‬
‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫إن اﻟ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ْ n‬ﺴﺄﻟﻮﻧﻚ ﻋﻦ اﻷﻫ‪ o‬ﻗ ْﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﺎس واﻟْﺤﺞ وﻟ ْ‪s‬ﺲ اﻟْﱪ ﺑﺄ ْن ﺗﺄْﺗﻮا اﻟْﺒﻴﻮت ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻇﻬﻮرﻫﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻢ ﺗﻔﻠﺤﻮن )‪(١٨٩‬‬
‫ﻦ اﻟﱪ ﻣﻦ اﺗﻘﻰ وأﺗﻮا اﻟﺒﻴﻮت ﻣﻦ أﺑﻮا‪v‬ﺎ واﺗﻘﻮا اﷲ ﻟﻌﻠ‬
‫وﻟ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْﻢ ﺳﻠﻄﺎﻧًﺎ‪(٨١) ...‬‬
‫ْﻢ أﺷﺮﻛ‪ ْy‬ﺑﺎﷲ ﻣﺎ ﻟ ْﻢ ﻳﻨﺰل ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠ ْﻴ‬
‫وﻛ ْﻴﻒ أﺧﺎف ﻣﺎ أﺷﺮﻛ‪ ْy‬وﻻ ﺗﺨﺎﻓﻮن أﻧ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻋﻠ ٍﻢ إن ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻮن إﻻ اﻟﻈﻦ وإن اﻟﻈﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻖ ﺷ ْﻴ ًﺌﺎ )‪(٢٨‬‬
‫وﻣﺎ ﻟ| ﺑﻪ ﻣ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﱪا ﻛﺄ ْن ﻟ ْﻢ ‪ْ n‬ﺴﻤ ْﻌﻬﺎ ﻛﺄن ﰲ أذﻧ ْﻴﻪ و ْﻗ ًﺮا ﻓ• ْ‬
‫وإذا ﺗ ْﺘ• ﻋﻠ ْﻴﻪ آﻳﺎﺗﻨﺎ و‪ F‬ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻜ ً‬
‫اب أﻟ ٍ@ )‪(٧‬‬
‫ﺬ‬
‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺑ‬
‫ه‬
‫‪€‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺘﺎب ﺑﺎﻟْﺤﻖ واﻟْﻤﲒان وﻣﺎ ﻳ ْﺪرﻳﻚ ﻟﻌﻞ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺮ ٌ‬
‫ﻳﺐ )‪(١٧‬‬
‫اﷲ ا]ي أﻧﺰل اﻟ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻌﻨ‪ ْy‬وﻟ‬
‫ﲑ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ْﻢ رﺳﻮل اﷲ ﻟ ْﻮ ﻳﻄﻴﻌ‬
‫واﻋﻠﻤﻮا أن ﻓﻴ‬
‫ﻢ ﰲ ﻛﺜ ٍ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻔﺮ واﻟﻔﺴﻮق واﻟﻌﺼﻴﺎن أوﻟ‪‰‬ﻚ ‪l‬‬
‫ﻢ اﻟ‬
‫ْﻢ وﻛﺮه إﻟ ْﻴ‬
‫ﻢ اﻹﻳﻤﺎن وزﻳﻨﻪ ﰲ ﻗﻠﻮﺑ‬
‫إﻟ ْﻴ‬
‫ﻦ اﷲ ﺣﺒﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺮاﺷﺪون )‪(٧‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻓﻠ ْﻢ ﺗﻘﺘﻠﻮ‪ ْl‬وﻟ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ اﷲ ﻗﺘﻠ| وﻣﺎ رﻣ ْﻴﺖ إذ رﻣ ْﻴﺖ وﻟ‬
‫ﺣﺴﻨًﺎ إن اﷲ ‪ٌ Œ‬‬
‫ﻴﻊ ﻋﻠ@ٌ )‪(١٧‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ اﷲ رﻣﻰ وﻟﻴ ْﺒ‪ Š‬اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﲔ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻼء ً‬
1
8.1 Fragments and Pronouns-Status of Attached Pronouns
We’ve done a lot of work so far. Before we go on, I want to share something with you about attached
pronouns:
Remember that the original pronouns are always Raf,’ and the attached versions are either Nasb or Jarr.
An attached pronoun will never, ever be Raf.’ How can you tell if it’s Nasb or Jarr? Let’s take a couple of
examples:
1.
ْ
ْ
Say we take the word ‫ﺑﻨﺖ‬$ . ‫ﺑﻨﺖ‬$ means daughter. If we say something like
ْ
ْ
‫ﻚ‬
' ) ‫ﺑﻨﺘ‬$ , we see that there two words: ‫ﺑﻨﺖ‬$ and the attached pronoun, ‫ 'ك‬, from
‫أﻧﺖ‬. Together, they mean, ‘your daughter.’ Now, we know that ‫ 'ك‬can only be
'
Nasb or Jarr, but how can we tell which one it is? If you think back to the
definition of an ism (a person, place, thing, adjective, adverb, or more), we
ْ
ْ
‫ﻚ‬
‫ﺘ‬
' ) ‫ﺑﻨ‬$
Your daughter
ْ
know that ‫ﺑﻨﺖ‬$ is a person, so ‫ﺑﻨﺖ‬$ must be an ism. Now here’s something you
can never forget: whenever a pronoun is attached to an ism, the ism is a
‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and the pronoun is the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. Since the ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬is always Jarr,
the pronoun has to be in Jarr status. So here, ‫ك‬,
' is Jarr.
2.
ْ
Let’s take another example. Say I’m looking at the word ‫ﻚ‬
' ‫ﻣﻨ‬$ . You know that ‫'ك‬
ْ ‫ ﻣ‬is a Harf of Jarr. What does a Harf of Jarr
is an attached pronoun and that ‫ﻦ‬
$
ْ ‫ﻣ‬, so ‫ﻦ‬
ْ ‫ ﻣ‬makes it Jarr.
do? It makes the word after it Jarr. ‫ 'ك‬came after ‫ﻦ‬
$
$
There are two reasons for something to be Jarr in Arabic:
1. It’s a ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬
2. It came after a Harf of Jarr.
! Harf of Jarr
ْ
‫ﻚ‬
' ‫ﻣﻨ‬$
Jarr
2
3.
We learned one more fragment: the Harf of Nasb. ‫ "ن‬# ‫إ‬% is a Harf of Nasb. What’s its
job? Whatever comes after it is in Nasb status. So if we have the word ‫ﻚ‬
" "‫ﻧ‬# ‫إ‬% ,
with ‫ "ك‬as an attached pronoun, we know that ‫ "ك‬has to be Nasb here
! Harf of Nasb
‫ﻚ‬
" "‫ﻧ‬# ‫إ‬%
Nasb
because it’s being beat up by a Harf of Nasb.
So…
When a pronoun is stuck to an ism, it becomes a ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬, and will have Jarr status.
When a pronoun is stuck to a Harf of Jarr, it’s status is Jarr.
When a pronoun is stuck to a Harf of Nasb, it’s status is Nasb.
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫?‪What is the status of each of the attached pronouns‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪" .1‬واﻣ "ﺮأ"ﺗ ‪1‬ﻪ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻴﺪ "ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺟ ‪%‬‬
‫‪% .2‬ﰲ ‪%‬‬
‫ﻚ‬
‫‪" .3‬ر ‪%#‬ﺑ "‬
‫ﻛﺎن "ﺗ ‪" #‬ﻮا ًﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ .4‬إﻧﻪ‬
‫‪" " 1 "# %‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻛ ْﻴﺪ‪ْ%‬‬
‫" " ‪1‬‬
‫ﲔ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻋ "ﻠ ْﻴ) ْﻢ ﻟ‬
‫ﺤﺎ ‪%‬ﻓ ‪%‬‬
‫ﻈ "‬
‫‪" " 1‬‬
‫"‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫ "ﻮ ﻳ‪1‬ﺒ ‪%‬ﺪئ ‪" 1‬و ﻳ‪% 1‬ﻌ ‪1‬‬
‫‪% .7‬إ ‪#‬ﻧ"ﻪ ‪1 1‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺖ ﺗ‪1‬ﺮا ًﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻟ" ْﻴﺘﻨ‪%‬ﻲ ﻛ‪1‬ﻨ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫"‬
‫"‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ﻚ‬
‫‪" .9‬واﺻ ‪%‬ﱪ "ﻧﻔ "ﺴ "‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫‪ .10‬إﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ‪9‬ﺴﺘ ‪%‬‬
‫‪" " " " " "# %‬‬
‫ﺎر ‪%‬ﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫‪ .11‬ءاﺛ‬
‫" " ‪" %‬‬
‫‪% .12‬ﻋﺒﺎ ‪%‬د "ﻧﺎ‬
‫"‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻟ‪%‬ﻨ‪1‬ﺨ ‪%‬ﺮج ‪%‬ﺑ ‪%‬ﻪ‬
‫"‬
‫‪ .14‬إﻧ) ْﻢ ﻇﻠ ْﻤ@ْ أ " ْﻧﻔﺴ)ﻢْ‬
‫‪"# %‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪" 1 1 "" 1‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫) ْﻢ‬
‫‪ .15‬و ‪%‬إذ ﻓ"ﺮﻗﻨ"ﺎ ‪%‬ﺑ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫"‬
‫"‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ْ F‬ﻢ‬
‫‪.16‬‬
‫ﻀ ‪%‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻐ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻮب "ﻋ "ﻠ ‪%‬‬
‫"‬
‫) ْﻢ‬
‫‪ .17‬اﻟﺤ ‪1 #‬ﻖ ‪%‬ﻣﻦ ر ‪%#‬ﺑ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫"‬
‫"‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .18‬و إﻟﻴﻨﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻤ ‪%‬ﺼﲑ ‪1‬‬
‫" ‪" " "%‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻜ‪J‬‬
‫ﻚ أ"ﻧﺖ اﻟﻌ ‪%‬ﻠ‪J‬‬
‫‪ .19‬إﻧ‬
‫اﻟﺤ ‪%‬‬
‫‪1 " 1 " " " "# %‬‬
‫ﻚ‬
‫‪% .20‬إ ‪" #‬ن "ﺷﺎ ‪%‬ﻧ "ﺌ "‬
4
ANSWER KEY:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
J
J
J
N
J
J
N
N
J
N
J
J
J
1st word: N; 2nd word: J
J
J
J
J
N
J
1
8.2 Fragments and Pronouns-Status of Attached Pronouns (Review)
In this lesson, I reviewed what I told you about pronouns in the last session. To recap, remember that
there are two kinds of pronouns: independent and attached. Independent ones are always Raf’.
Attached ones are always Nasb or Jarr.
I told you four things (we didn’t go into Raf’ status because independent pronouns are always Raf’ so
these four points were about attached pronouns):
When an Attached Pronoun
Comes After…
H.N (Harf of Nasb)
Fi’l
…Its Status Will Be:
H.J (Harf of Jarr)
J
Ism
J
N
N
Pronouns can be Nasb for two reasons and Jarr for two reasons:
When are they Nasb?
1. When they come after a Harf of Nasb. A Harf of Nasb likes to beat things up and make them
Nasb. If you take any of the Harf of Nasb and attach a pronoun at the end, that pronoun will be
Nasb.
2. When they are attached to a fi’l. We have not studied fi’l yet, but you still have to remember
this right now. One day, when we learn fi’l, you can have a pronoun attached at the end of
them, and when you do, it’s going to be Nasb.
When are they Jarr?
1. When they come after a Harf of Jarr because a Harf of Jarr likes to beat things up and make
them Jarr. They do this to pronouns, too.
2. When they come after an ism. Why? When an ism and a pronoun come together, it’s a ‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬
and ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬situation. The pronoun is the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬, and since ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬is always Jarr, the
pronoun has to be Jarr, as well.
These four points have to stick in your head. You’ve memorized the pronouns, know what they mean,
and now, you know their status.
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫?‪What is the status of the pronouns in red‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻟ ْﻢ ْ ْ‬
‫ح ﻟﻚ ﺻﺪرك )‪(١‬ووﺿﻌﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻚ وزرك )‪(٢‬ا!ي أﻧﻘﺾ ﻇﻬﺮك )‪(٣‬ورﻓﻌﻨﺎ ﻟﻚ ذﻛﺮك )‪(٤‬ﻓﺈن ﻣﻊ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﺐ )‪(٧‬وإ< رﺑﻚ ﻓ ْ‬
‫ﺎرﻏ ْ‬
‫ﺎﻧﺼ ْ‬
‫ﺐ )‪(٨‬‬
‫‪1‬ا )‪(٦‬ﻓﺈذا ﻓﺮﻏﺖ ﻓ‬
‫‪1‬ا )‪(٥‬إن ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌ‪ً 2 4 1‬‬
‫اﻟﻌ‪ً 2 4 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺎ أ ‪@2‬ﺎ اﻟ ‪2‬ﻤﺰﻣ ‪2‬ﻞ )‪(١‬ﻗ‪2‬ﻢ اﻟﻠ ْﻴﻞ إﻻ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ )‪(٢‬ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ‪ 2‬أو اﻧﻘ‪ْ 2‬ﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ‪ 2‬ﻗﻠﻴﻼ )‪(٣‬أ ْو زد ﻋﻠ ْﻴﻪ ورﺗﻞ اﻟ ‪2‬ﻘ ْﺮآن ﺗ ْﺮﺗﻴﻼ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫)‪(٤‬إﻧﺎ ﺳﻨﻠﻘﻲ ﻋﻠ ْﻴﻚ ﻗ ْﻮﻻ ﺛﻘﻴﻼ )‪(٥‬إن ﻧﺎﺷﺌﺔ اﻟﻠ ْﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ أﺷ ‪2‬ﺪ وﻃ ًﺌﺎ وأﻗﻮم ﻗﻴﻼ )‪(٦‬إن ﻟﻚ ﰲ اﻟ‪X‬ﺎر ﺳ ْﺒ ً‬
‫ﺤﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اذﻛﺮ ْ‬
‫اﺳﻢ رﺑﻚ وﺗﺒﺘ ْﻞ إﻟ ْﻴﻪ ﺗ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻓﺎﺗﺨﺬه وﻛﻴﻼ )‪(٩‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫إ‬
‫_‬
‫إ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ب‬
‫^‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫اﻟ‬
‫و‬
‫ق‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫اﻟ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫(‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻴﻼ‬
‫ﺘ‬
‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ )‪(٧‬و‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﺪو ﻣﺒﲔ )‪(٥‬وﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﺎن‬
‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻴﺪوا ﻟﻚ ﻛ ْﻴ ًﺪا إن اﻟﺸ ْﻴﻄﺎن ﻟﻺ‬
‫ﻗﺎل ﻳﺎ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺼ ْﺺ رؤﻳﺎك ﻋ‪ f‬إﺧﻮﺗﻚ ﻓﻴﻜ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﺗﺄوﻳﻞ اﻷﺣﺎدﻳﺚ وﻳ‪2 u‬ﻧﻌﻤﺘﻪ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻠ ْﻴﻚ وﻋ‪ f‬آل ﻳﻌ ‪2‬ﻘﻮب ﻛﻤﺎ أﺗﻤﻬﺎ ﻋ‪ f‬أﺑﻮ ْﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺘﺒﻴﻚ رﺑ‪2‬ﻚ وﻳﻌﻠ ‪2‬ﻤﻚ ﻣ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻗ ْﺒ ‪2‬ﻞ إ ْﺑﺮاﻫ‪ v‬وإ ْﺳﺤﺎق إن رﺑﻚ ﻋﻠ‪ ٌv‬ﺣﻜ‪(٦) ٌv‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻛﺎن ﰲ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ وإﺧﻮﺗﻪ آﻳﺎت ﻟﻠﺴﺎ‪y‬ﻠﲔ )‪(٧‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻟ ْﻢ ْ ْ‬
‫ح ﻟﻚ ﺻﺪرك )‪(١‬ووﺿﻌﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻚ وزرك )‪(٢‬ا!ي أﻧﻘﺾ ﻇﻬﺮك )‪(٣‬ورﻓﻌﻨﺎ ﻟﻚ ذﻛﺮك )‪(٤‬ﻓﺈن ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﺐ )‪(٧‬وإ< رﺑﻚ ﻓ ْ‬
‫ﺎرﻏ ْ‬
‫ﺎﻧﺼ ْ‬
‫ﺐ )‪(٨‬‬
‫‪1‬ا )‪(٦‬ﻓﺈذا ﻓﺮﻏﺖ ﻓ‬
‫‪1‬ا )‪(٥‬إن ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌ‪ً 2 4 1‬‬
‫اﻟﻌ‪ً 2 4 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺎ أ ‪@2‬ﺎ اﻟ ‪2‬ﻤﺰﻣ ‪2‬ﻞ )‪(١‬ﻗ‪2‬ﻢ اﻟﻠ ْﻴﻞ إﻻ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ )‪(٢‬ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ‪ 2‬أو اﻧﻘ‪ْ 2‬ﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ‪ 2‬ﻗﻠﻴﻼ )‪(٣‬أ ْو زد ﻋﻠ ْﻴﻪ ورﺗﻞ اﻟ ‪2‬ﻘ ْﺮآن ﺗ ْﺮﺗﻴﻼ‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫)‪(٤‬إﻧﺎ ﺳﻨﻠﻘﻲ ﻋﻠ ْﻴﻚ ﻗ ْﻮﻻ ﺛﻘﻴﻼ )‪(٥‬إن ﻧﺎﺷﺌﺔ اﻟﻠ ْﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ أﺷ ‪2‬ﺪ وﻃ ًﺌﺎ وأﻗﻮم ﻗﻴﻼ )‪(٦‬إن ﻟﻚ ﰲ اﻟ‪X‬ﺎر ﺳ ْﺒ ً‬
‫ﺤﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اذﻛﺮ ْ‬
‫اﺳﻢ رﺑﻚ وﺗﺒﺘ ْﻞ إﻟ ْﻴﻪ ﺗ ْ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻓﺎﺗﺨﺬه وﻛﻴﻼ )‪(٩‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫إ‬
‫_‬
‫إ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ب‬
‫^‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫اﻟ‬
‫و‬
‫ق‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫اﻟ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫(‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻴﻼ‬
‫ﺘ‬
‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ )‪(٧‬و‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻗﺎل ﻳﺎ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻻ ﺗ ْﻘﺼ ْ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺗﻚ ﻓﻴﻜﻴﺪوا ﻟﻚ ﻛ ْﻴ ًﺪا إن اﻟﺸ ْ‬
‫ﺪو ﻣﺒﲔ )‪(٥‬وﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﺎن‬
‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻺ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ﺎن‬
‫ﻄ‬
‫ﻴ‬
‫إ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﻋ‬
‫ك‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻳ‬
‫ؤ‬
‫ر‬
‫ﺺ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺘﺒﻴﻚ رﺑ‪2‬ﻚ وﻳﻌﻠ ‪2‬ﻤﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄوﻳﻞ اﻷﺣﺎدﻳﺚ وﻳ‪2 u‬ﻧﻌﻤﺘﻪ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ وﻋ‪ f‬آل ﻳﻌ ‪2‬ﻘﻮب ﻛﻤﺎ أﺗﻤﻬﺎ ﻋ‪ f‬أﺑﻮﻳﻚ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ﻗ ْﺒ ‪2‬ﻞ إ ْﺑﺮاﻫ‪ v‬وإ ْﺳﺤﺎق إن رﺑﻚ ﻋﻠ‪ ٌv‬ﺣﻜ‪(٦) ٌv‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻛﺎن ﰲ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ وإﺧﻮﺗﻪ آﻳﺎت ﻟﻠﺴﺎ‪y‬ﻠﲔ )‪(٧‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
1
8.3 Fragments—Idhafah (Special Mudafs)
Okay, there’s one last little bit about ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬that you have to know. Here is a list of words
we went over today in class:
‫وراء‬
ْ
‫ﺧﻠﻒ‬
ْ
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗ ْﺒﻞ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻓ ْﻮق‬
Behind
Behind
After
Before
Below
Above
‫ﻣﻊ‬
ْ
‫!ﻋﻨﺪ‬
ْ
‫ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﺣ ْﻮل‬
ْ
‫ﺑﲔ‬
Without, non
Around
Between
ْ
‫ﺾ‬
$ ‫ﺑﻌ‬
Some of
‫ي‬
$+ ‫أ‬
Which
ْ
‫ن‬0
$
Especially from
With
Has, with,
nearby
‫دون‬
$
Besides, other
than
‫ﻞ‬$ + $‫ﻛ‬
All of
All of these are isms. Remember the definition of an ism is a person, place, thing, adjective, adverb, and
more. Is ‘above’ a person? No. A place? No. A thing? No. An adjective? No. An adverb? More? Maybe.
Some words can’t be put under person, place, etc., so this is the ‘more’ list. I like to call these words
special ‫'ﻣﻀﺎف‬s. Here’s why:
1. Notice that I made all of them light without ‫ال‬. That’s because whenever you use them in Arabic,
they’re usually playing the role of a ‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬, so there’s no point in making them heavy to begin
with, even though it’s not impossible to make them heavy. A lot of times, you have to look and
see if the first word is light, no ‫ ال‬and the second word is Jarr to see if you have a ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and
‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬going on. Since these guys come as ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬anyway, I can automatically spot a ‫ﻣﻀﺎف‬
and ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬without having to think about it.
2. Why am I calling them ‘special’ ‫’ﻣﻀﺎف‬s? Well, when we translate Idhafah, the word ‘of’ usually
ْ
goes between the ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and the ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬. But if were to say 1! ‫ ْﺮ‬3‫اﻟ‬
‫( ﺗﺤﺖ‬1! ‫ ْﺮ‬$‫ ﻛ‬means
$
‘chair’), that means ‘under the chair,’ not ‘under of the chair.’ In other words, when you try to
2
figure out the meaning, even though it’s a ‫ ﻣﻀﺎف‬and ‫ﻣﻀﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬, you don’t necessarily need an
‘of.’
3. Lastly: I made some of them Nasb, and some of them Raf,’ It’s not a rule or anything, but when
you’re reading Quran, you’ll find that they happen to be Nasb. That’s only because they happen
to be details most of the time. ‘I was sitting.’ Where? ‘On top of the chair.’ ‘On’ gives me details
about where I was sitting. That’s why I’d find it Nasb. You can find them as Raf’, and even Jarr
sometimes, but normally, you’ll find them as Nasb.
I’m not making you memorize these words, but you are expected to know them.
3
EXERCISES:
Fill in the blanks with the correct meanings:
_________ the right/justification/truth/evidence
_________ all of you
_________ them
_________ them
_________ you all
_________ us
_________ them
_________ two sisters
_________ us
_________ the obligation
_________ that
You _________
_________ her/it
_________ the tree
_________ both of them
ْ
‫ !ﻖ‬+ ‫ﲑ اﻟﺤ‬
! ‫ !ﺑﻐ‬.1
‫ ْﻢ‬3
7‫آ‬
! ‫ ور‬.2
$
ْ ْ
9! ‫ ﺧﻠ !ﻔ‬.3
ْ ْ
9! ‫ ﻗﺒ !ﻠ‬.4
ْ
‫ ْﻢ‬3
‫ﻀ‬
$
$ ‫ ﺑﻌ‬.5
‫ ﺑ ْﻴﻨﻨﺎ‬.6
‫; ْﻢ‬$ + ‫ أ‬.7
$
ْ ْ
ْ
‫ﲔ‬
! ‫ﺧﺘ‬$‫ ﺑﲔ اﻷ‬.8
‫ﻧﺎ‬+ 0 .9
$
ْ
‫ ﺑﻌ !ﺪ اﻟﻔ !ﺮﻳﻀ !ﺔ‬.10
‫ دون ذﻟ!ﻚ‬.11
$
ْ
‫ !ﻋﻨ !ﺪك‬.12
‫ ﻓ ْﻮﻗﻬﺎ‬.13
ْ
‫اﻟﺸﺠﺮ !ة‬
+ ‫ ﺗﺤﺖ‬.14
‫ﻤﺎ‬$I‫ ﺑ ْﻴ‬.15
4
ANSWER KEY:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Without
Behind
Behind
Before
Some of
Between
Which
Between
Especially from
After
Other than
Have
Above
Under
Between
1
9.1 Fragments—Introduction to Mawsoof Sifah
Today, we’re starting our next fragment: they’re two words called ‫ ﻣﻮﺻﻮف‬and ‫ﺻﻔﺔ‬. In English, when
we say, ‘beautiful car,’ we’re describing something. If I want to describe lots of cars, I don’t say,
‘beautifuls cars.’ I say, ‘beautiful cars.’ I didn’t make the ‘beautiful’ plural even though the ‘cars’ are
plural. Similarly, if I say ‘smart boy,’ I don’t change it to ‘smart-ette’ when I want to talk about a girl. That
would be weird. But in Arabic, they do that.
In English, you have nouns and you have adjectives. They’re two separate things. In Arabic, nouns and
adjectives are part of the same family. They’re not separate. Why not? Because we say, an ‘ism is a
person, place, thing, idea, (so far, that’s like saying that an ism is a noun), we go on and say ‘adjective,
adverb, and more.’ So, in Arabic, nouns and adjectives are part of the same category. Now, an ism has
four properties, right? That means that every noun has status, number, gender, and type. It also means
that every adjective has status, number, gender and type, as well. So there is such a thing as ‘beautifuls’
and ‘smartette’ in Arabic. Just like you give nouns a number, you have to give adjectives a number. Just
like you give nouns a gender, you have to give adjectives a gender. The same goes for status and type.
Now, watch this:
ٌ ‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ ذﻛ‬
‫ﻲ‬
R, S, M, C = R, S, M, C
ٌ ‫ ذﻛ‬is also Raf’, singular, masculine, and common. You
‫ ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬is Raf’, singular, masculine, and common. ‫ﻲ‬
have two words that came together and match in all four properties. When that happens, you call the
first one ‫ ﻣﻮﺻﻮف‬and the second one ‫ﺻﻔﺔ‬. Now, when you translate it, you have to know that ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮف‬
and ‫ ﺻﻔﺔ‬work backwards. In English, the description comes first (intelligent) and the thing you’re
describing comes second (boy) so it looks like ‘intelligent boy.’ But in Arabic, it’s switched around. The
noun, boy, comes first. The adjective, intelligent, comes second. You won’t say, ‘Muslim intelligent’—
that’s bad English. Instead, you would say, ‘An intelligent Muslim.’
ٌ ‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ ذﻛ‬
‫ﻲ‬
intelligent
Muslim
= An intelligent Muslim
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪Tell whether each of the following is a case of Mawsoof and Sifah or not.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻼم اﷲ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺛﻤﻨًﺎ ﻗﻠ ً‬
‫ﻴﻼ‬
‫‪ .3‬و ﻧﻔﺼﻞ اﻵﻳﺎت‬
‫‪ .4‬رﺳﻮل اﷲ‬
‫‪ .5‬اﻟﻤ ْﺴﺠﺪ اﻟﺤﺮام‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬أﻋﻈﻢ درﺟ ٍﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻮل‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻛﻌﺼ ٍﻒ ﻣﺄﻛ ٍ‬
‫‪ .8‬اﻟﻘﻮم اﻟﻔﺎﺳﻘﲔ‬
‫‪ .9‬إ‪ً 9‬ﺎ واﺣ ًﺪا‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .10‬ﺟﻨﺘﺎن ﻣﺪﻫﺂﻣﺘﺎن‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻳ ْﻮم ا‪A‬ﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻋ ْﻴﻨﺎن ﻧﻀﺎﺧﺘﺎن‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻧﺎ ًرا ﺣﺎﻣﻴ ًﺔ‬
‫‪ .14‬اﻟﺼﺮاط اﻟﻤ ْﺴﺘﻘ‪D‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .15‬ﺑﲔ اﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ .16‬ا ْﺳﻢ رﺑﻚ‬
‫‪ .17‬ﻏ ْﻴﻆ ﻗﻠﻮ‪ْ I‬ﻢ‬
‫‪ .18‬ﻋﺬ ٌ‬
‫اب أﻟ‪ٌD‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .19‬ﻧﺬ ٌ‬
‫ﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﲔ‬
‫‪ .20‬ﻋ‪ O‬اﷲ‬
‫‪ is a collective plural word‬ﻗ ْﻮم ‪Note: the word‬‬
‫‪(nation) that is given plural, masculine adjectives‬‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
1
9.2 Fragments—Mawsoof Sifah
I just have to tell you a few more things about ‫ ﻣﻮﺻﻮف‬and ‫ ﺻﻔﺔ‬and we’ll be good to go. Here’s what
we know so far:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Noun comes first, adjective comes second
There may be lots of adjectives for one noun, for example: cold, hard, delicious chocolate
4 properties of noun = 4 properties of adjective (their properties match)
Broken plurals are treated like a girl. So when you want to give broken plurals an adjective, you
have to give them an adjective as though you’re giving a girl an adjective. This holds true for
words that are feminine because the Arabs said so. When you give those words an adjective,
you have to give those words a feminine adjective because the Arabs think that what you’re
talking about a feminine.
Just run through some more practice problems so that you become more familiar with how ‫ ﻣﻮﺻﻮف‬and
‫ ﺻﻔﺔ‬work.
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫?‪ cases‬ﺻﻔﺔ ‪ and‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮف ‪Are these‬‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺳﺤ ٌﺮ ﻣﺒﲔ‬
‫‪ .2‬إ ﻳ ْﻮم اﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻮ ٍم ﻋﻈ ٍ‬
‫‪ .4‬اﻟﻔ ْﻮز اﻟﻤﺒﲔ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻋ" ﻛﻞ ْ‬
‫& ٍء ﻗﺪ ٌ‬
‫ﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .6‬أﺳﺎﻃﲑ اﻷوﻟﲔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻨﺎ ا‪/‬ﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .8‬اﻟﺤﻴﺎة ا‪/‬ﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ .9‬إن اﷲ ﻗﺎد ٌر‬
‫‪ .10‬رب اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﲔ‬
‫‪ .11‬اﻟﻘ ْﻮم اﻟﻈﺎﻟﻤﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻋﲔ ﺟﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻛﺎﻟﻔﺮاش اﻟﻤ ْﺒﺜﻮث‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻣﺜﻘﺎل ذر ٍة‬
‫‪ .15‬ﻋ‪B‬ﺸ ٍﺔ راﺿﻴ ٍﺔ‬
‫‪ .16‬واﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺎت ﺿ ْﺒ ً‬
‫ﺤﺎ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .17‬ﻧ ٌ‬
‫ﺎر ﺣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .18‬ﻛﺎﻟﻌﻬﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﻔﻮش‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .19‬ﻟﺤﺐ اﻟﺨﲑ ﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .20‬ﻛﺘ ٌ‬
‫ﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
1
10.1 & 10.2 Fragments--Pointers
Today we’re going to use pg. 30 to start our next fragment: pointing words. We went over these words
in class:
‫ﻫﺆﻵء‬
‫ﻫﺬان‬
‫ﻫﺬا‬
these
these two
this
‫ﻫﺆﻵء‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﺎن‬
‫ﻫﺬه‬
these
these two (fem.)
this (fem.)
‫أوﻵ ﻚ‬
‫ذاﻧﻚ‬
‫ذﻟﻚ‬
those
both of those
that
‫أوﻵ ﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻧﻚ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻠﻚ‬
those
both of those (fem.)
that (fem.)
It might seem a bit hard to keep the meanings straight, but if you look at the list, you’ll notice that all the
ones that begin with ‘ha’ refer to something that’s nearby (this, these two, these), and the ones that end
with a ‘kaaf’ are far (that, those two, those). You need to memorize these words and know what they
mean.
We took a few notes on pointing words on pg. 30:
ْ
1. Pointing words are known as ‫أ ﺂء اﻹﺷﺎرة‬
2. They are all non-flexible, except for their pairs.
a. Non-flexible words look the same in Raf’, Nasb, and Jarr status. So, the Raf’ version of
‫ ذﻟﻚ‬is ‫ذﻟﻚ‬, the Nasb version is ‫ذﻟﻚ‬, and the Jarr version is ‫ذﻟﻚ‬. They all look the same.
Now, when you look at the pairs, that’s when you’ll see something different—they are
flexible. So if you took ‫( ﻫﺬان‬the Raf’ version), its Nasb version would look like ‫ﻫﺬ ْﻳﻦ‬, and
its Jarr version would look like ‫ﻫﺬ ْﻳﻦ‬, too. The chart below shows you what each of the
pointing words looks like in Raf’, Nasb, and Jarr (the grayed-out words are non-flexible):
‫ﻫﺆﻵء‬
‫ﻫﺆﻵء‬
‫ﻫﺆﻵء‬
‫ﻫﺬان‬
‫ﻫﺬ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬا‬
Raf’
‫ﻫﺬا‬
Nasb
‫ﻫﺬا‬
Jarr
2
‫ﻫﺆﻵء‬
‫ﻫﺬه‬
Raf’
‫ﻫﺬه‬
Nasb
‫ﻫﺆﻵء‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻫﺎﺗﲔ‬
ْ
‫ﻫﺎﺗﲔ‬
‫ﻫﺬه‬
Jarr
‫أوﻵ ﻚ‬
‫ذاﻧﻚ‬
‫ذﻟﻚ‬
Raf’
‫ذﻟﻚ‬
Nasb
‫ذﻟﻚ‬
Jarr
‫ﻫﺆﻵء‬
‫أوﻵ ﻚ‬
‫ذ ْﻳﻨﻚ‬
‫أوﻵ ﻚ‬
‫ذ ْﻳﻨﻚ‬
‫أوﻵ ﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻧﻚ‬
‫أوﻵ ﻚ‬
‫أوﻵ ﻚ‬
‫ﺗ ْﻴﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗ ْﻴﻨﻚ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻠﻚ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻠﻚ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻠﻚ‬
Raf’
Nasb
Jarr
3. Pointing words are always proper.
4. Pointing words can be used to make sentences or fragments.
a. If the word after the pointing word has ‘al’ (alif-laam), then it makes a fragment:
‫ﺒﻲ‬#‫ = ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨ‬This prophet (a fragment because the word after ‫ ﻫﺬا‬has an ‘al’ on it)
#
b. If the word after the pointing word does NOT have an ‘al’ after it, then it makes a
ٌ ‫ = ﻫﺬا ﻧﺒ‬This is a prophet. The ‘is’ comes about because you are now
sentence. So ‫ﻲ‬
#
looking at a sentence, not a fragment.
**Note: Points a and b only apply to pointing words, not every time an ‘al’ comes up in the
Quran.
ْ
5. ‫ ﻫﺬه‬or ‫ ﺗﻠﻚ‬could be talking about a broken plural. If this is the case, then it does not mean ‘this’
or ‘that.’ Since you’re talking about a plural, it’ll be translated as ‘those’ or ‘these,’ instead.
3
EXERCISES
Are the following sentences or fragments? Try translating them as you go along (some vocabulary has
been provided for you to help you piece things together).
book
Knowledgeable magician
Tree
Closer
Inferior, lower thing
Town
Companions of the fire
Better
The one who
Country
Nation
Intercessors
Master
Path
Goods/merchandise
Cattle
Arguers
She-camel
‫ ذﻟﻚ اﻟ)ﺘﺎب‬.1
ٌ*‫ﻫﺬا ﻟﺴﺎﺣ ٌﺮ ﻋﻠ‬# .2
‫اﻟﺸﺠﺮة‬
# ‫ﻫﺬه‬# .3
ْ
1‫ ذﻟﻚ أد‬.4
ْ
‫ﻧﻴﺎ‬3‫ا‬
# ‫ ﻫﺬه‬.5
ْ
‫ار‬3‫ا‬
‫ﻚ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﺗ‬.6
#
‫ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘ ْﺮﻳﺔ‬.7
‫ﺎر‬#‫ﻚ أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻨ‬8‫ أوﻟ‬.8
ٌ ْ
‫ ذﻟﻚ ﺧﲑ‬.9
‫ا<ي‬# ‫ﻫﺬ ا‬# .10
ً ‫ ﻫﺬا ﺑ‬.11
‫>ا‬
ْ
ٌ
‫ﻣﺔ‬# ‫ ﺗﻠﻚ أ‬.12
‫ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻘ ْﺮآن‬.13
‫ ﻫﺆﻵء ﺷﻔﻌﺎؤﻧﺎ‬.14
E# ‫ ﻫﺬا ر‬.15
ٌ
‫ ﻫﺬا ﺻﺮاط‬.16
‫ ﻫﺬه ﺑﻀﺎﻋﺘﻨﺎ‬.17
ٌ ‫ ﻫﺬه أ ْﻧﻌ‬.18
‫ﺎم‬
‫ ﻫﺬان ﺧ ْﺼﻤﺎن‬.19
‫اﷲ‬
# ‫ ﻫﺬه ﻧﺎﻗﺔ‬.20
4
ANSWER KEY
S = sentence, F = fragment
F
That book
S
This is certainly, a knowledgeable magician
F
This tree
S
That is closer
F
This inferior, lower thing
F
That house
F
This town
S
Those are the companions of the fire
S
That is better
S
S
This is the one who (there is an ‘al’ next, but this is an
exception to the rule…more about this later)
This is a country
S
That is a nation
F
This Quran
S
These are our intercessors
S
This is my Master
S
This is a path
S
These are our goods/merchandise
S
These are cattle
S
These two are arguers
S
This is the she-camel of Allah
‫ ذﻟﻚ اﻟ)ﺘﺎب‬.1
ٌ*‫ﻫﺬا ﻟﺴﺎﺣ ٌﺮ ﻋﻠ‬# .2
‫اﻟﺸﺠﺮة‬
# ‫ﻫﺬه‬# .3
ْ
1‫ ذﻟﻚ أد‬.4
ْ
‫ﻧﻴﺎ‬3‫ا‬
# ‫ ﻫﺬه‬.5
ْ
‫ار‬3‫ا‬
‫ﻚ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﺗ‬.6
#
‫ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘ ْﺮﻳﺔ‬.7
‫ﺎر‬#‫ﻚ أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻨ‬8‫ أوﻟ‬.8
ٌ ْ
‫ ذﻟﻚ ﺧﲑ‬.9
‫ا<ي‬# ‫ﻫﺬ ا‬# .10
ً ‫ ﻫﺬا ﺑ‬.11
‫>ا‬
ْ
ٌ
‫ﻣﺔ‬# ‫ ﺗﻠﻚ أ‬.12
‫ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻘ ْﺮآن‬.13
‫ ﻫﺆﻵء ﺷﻔﻌﺎؤﻧﺎ‬.14
E# ‫ ﻫﺬا ر‬.15
ٌ
‫ ﻫﺬا ﺻﺮاط‬.16
‫ ﻫﺬه ﺑﻀﺎﻋﺘﻨﺎ‬.17
ٌ ‫ ﻫﺬه أ ْﻧﻌ‬.18
‫ﺎم‬
‫ ﻫﺬان ﺧ ْﺼﻤﺎن‬.19
‫اﷲ‬
# ‫ ﻫﺬه ﻧﺎﻗﺔ‬.20
1
11.1 Sentences
We finished talking about the fragments and now we start the exciting step of making sentences! Before
we do that, please review the 5 fragments (more than a word but less than a sentence):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Idhaafah
Mawsoof/Sifah
Harf of Jar
Harf of Nasb
Pointers with Al
We learned there are 2 kinds of sentences:
ْ
1. Ism based (‫ا ﻴﺔ‬
ْ ): what we’ve been learning about
ْ
2. Fi’l based ( ‫) ْ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
ْ
Our first job in understanding a ‫ا ﻴﺔ‬
ْ
is to find the invisible “is”, here ar tips to do that:
ْ
1. Proper followed by common: ‫ اﷲ أﻛﱪ‬Allah IS greater
2. Harf of Nasb + it’s victim:
o
o
The invisible “is” is right after the harf & it’s victim ….. IS ‫إن اﻹ ﺴﺎن‬
Remember that the victim of a harf of nasb can be far away from the harf but we still
translate them together
3. Raf’ pronouns: ‫ ﻫﻮ‬isn’t just “he” but “he is…”
4. Pointers + no AL: review the lesson on pointers
5. Break in the chain
o when you can’t connect a bunch of isms together by applying what you learned of the 5
fragments, you will find the invisible “is” where the connection is lost
ْ
‫اﻟﺤﻤﺪ | ﷲ رب اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﲔ‬
ٌ ‫ﻢ | ﻣﺮ‬$‫ﰲ ﻗﻠﻮ‬
ْ
‫ض‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫? ”‪Where is the invisible “is‬‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫‪ .1‬إ‪ْ ,‬ﻢ ﻓﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .2‬رﺑﻨﺎ رب اﻟﺴﻤﺎوات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻠﻚ آﻳﺎت اﻟ‪1‬ﺘﺎب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﰲ اﻷ ْرض ﻗﻄ ٌﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﺎورات‬
‫‪ .5‬أوﻟ ٰـ;ﻚ أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻨﺎر‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬اﻷﻧﻔﺎل ﻟﻠـﻪ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻛﺄﻧﻚ ﺣﻔ ٌ‬
‫ﻲ‬
‫ﲔ‬
‫‪ .8‬اﻟﻈﺎﻟﻤﻮن ﰲ ﺿﻼ ٍل ﻣﺒ ٍ‬
‫‪ .9‬إن اﷲ ﻗﺎد ٌر‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻟ ٰـﻜﻨﻲ رﺳﻮل‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .11‬أﻧ‪ ْO‬ﻗ ْﻮ ٌم ﻣ‪M‬ﻓﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻣﻦ ﻃ ْﻠﻌﻬﺎ ﻗﻨْﻮ ٌ‬
‫ان داﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻛﺄن ﰲ أذﻧ ْﻴﻪ وﻗﺮً ا‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻫ ٰـﺬان ﺧ ْﺼﻤﺎن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .15‬اﻟﻨﺠﻮم ﻣﺴﺨﺮات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .16‬ﺑﻌﻀ‪ Z‬أ ْوﻟﻴﺎء ﺑﻌ ٍﺾ‬
‫‪ .17‬إن ﻟ ْﻠﻤﺘﻘﲔ ﻣﻔ ً‬
‫ﺎزا‬
‫ٌ ْ‬
‫‪ .18‬اﻟﻠـﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻟ‪1‬ﺎﻓﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .19‬أ ْﺑﺼﺎرﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺷﻌﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .20‬أن اﻟﻘﻮة ﻟﻠـﻪ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫‪ .1‬إ‪ْ ,‬ﻢ | ﻓﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .2‬رﺑﻨﺎ | رب اﻟﺴﻤﺎوات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻠﻚ | آﻳﺎت اﻟ‪1‬ﺘﺎب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﰲ اﻷ ْرض | ﻗﻄ ٌﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﺎورات‬
‫‪ .5‬أوﻟ ٰـ;ﻚ | أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟﻨﺎر‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬اﻷﻧﻔﺎل | ﻟﻠـﻪ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻛﺄﻧﻚ | ﺣﻔ ٌ‬
‫ﻲ‬
‫ﲔ‬
‫‪ .8‬اﻟﻈﺎﻟﻤﻮن | ﰲ ﺿﻼ ٍل ﻣﺒ ٍ‬
‫‪ .9‬إن اﷲ | ﻗﺎد ٌر‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻟ ٰـﻜﻨﻲ | رﺳﻮل‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .11‬أﻧ‪ | ْO‬ﻗ ْﻮ ٌم ﻣ‪M‬ﻓﻮن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻣﻦ ﻃ ْﻠﻌﻬﺎ | ﻗﻨْﻮ ٌ‬
‫ان داﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻛﺄن ﰲ أذﻧ ْﻴﻪ وﻗﺮً ا )ﻛﺄن وﻗﺮا ً| ﰲ أذﻧ ْﻴﻪ (‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻫ ٰـﺬان | ﺧ ْﺼﻤﺎن‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .15‬اﻟﻨﺠﻮم | ﻣﺴﺨﺮات‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .16‬ﺑﻌﻀ‪ | Z‬أ ْوﻟﻴﺎء ﺑﻌ ٍﺾ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .17‬إن ﻟ ْﻠﻤﺘﻘﲔ ﻣﻔ ً‬
‫ﺎزا )إن ﻣﻔﺎزا ً| ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻘﲔ (‬
‫ٌ ْ‬
‫‪ .18‬اﻟﻠـﻪ | ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻟ‪1‬ﺎﻓﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫‪ .19‬أ ْﺑﺼﺎرﻫﺎ | ﺧﺎﺷﻌﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .20‬أن اﻟﻘﻮة | ﻟﻠـﻪ‬
‫ بينة‬Bayyinah Institute
Fundamentals of Classical Arabic Exam 1 - Ism and Fragments
Name of Student: _______________________________
Date:__________
Section 1: Circle R, N or J in each cell below. If two answers are possible, circle both.
ْ
َ‫ كا ِذ ِب ن‬R N J
‫ي‬
َ‫سائحات‬
R
N
J
َ ‫ ِف ْرع ْو‬R N J
‫ن‬
‫ نث ُم ْو َد‬R N J
ِ
‫ن ن‬
‫ن‬
Location_____________________
ْ
َ‫مش ِف نق ْي‬
ُ
5points
R
Section 2: Circle P for Proper and C for Common in each of the following.
ْ
ْ
َ ‫ َ َ أنن‬P
‫ت‬
C
َ‫ َ َ بُْشى‬P
C
َ ‫اّل ْي‬
‫ن‬
C
َ‫د ْور َ نَق ْوم‬
‫ ص‬P
C
‫ َ َ هـذا‬P
ِ ‫ َ َ َن‬P
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ُ ُ ن‬
‫ن‬
Section 3: Circle M for Masculine and F for Feminine for each of the following.
ْ
ْ
‫طلح نَة‬
ََM
F
‫َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ أ ُ ََم‬M F
َ‫َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ننفس‬M F
َ‫ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ب ْيت‬M F
َ‫ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ صالة‬M
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
Section 4: Circle 1 for Singular, 2 for Pair and Pl for Plural.
ْ
َِ ‫ َ َ جنَ ن‬1 2 Pl
‫تان‬
َ ْ ‫ َ َ م ْس ِلم‬1 َ2 Pl
‫ي‬
‫ َ َ َ َ َ قا ِنتُو‬1 َ 2 َ َ Pl
َ‫َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ر ْيب‬1 2 Pl َ‫ َ مخت ِل نفة‬1
‫ُ ن‬
‫ُ ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
Section 5: Is each of the following a case of Mowsoof-Sifah? Circle Y for Yes and N for No.
َ ْ‫ظ‬
‫ي‬
Y N
َ ِ ‫َالغ ْي‬
‫ب‬
َ‫شاِبات‬
َ ‫َ َ هـذاَ ََالنَ ن ِب‬
ِ ‫كتابَ َ نَع‬
ِ َ Y N َ‫أ ن نش َ ُدَ ََق ُ َ نوة‬
ِ ‫ آياتَ ََمُت ن‬Y N ‫ي‬
‫ عالِ ُم َ ن‬Y N
َُ
Section 6: Is each of the following a mudhaf and mudhaf ilayh? Circle Y for Yes and N for No.
ْ ‫ أ‬Y N ‫ك َة‬
َ ِ ِ‫د ْون َ ََالخال‬
‫ق‬
‫عاب‬
Y N
َ‫ صالة َ ََرس ْول‬Y N
َْ ‫ك‬
‫م‬
‫كتاب‬
Y N
َ ِ ‫حسنَ ََالح ِد ْي‬
‫ث‬
‫م‬
ِ
ِ
ِ
‫ساج نداَ َ نَم َ ن ن‬
ُ
ُ
‫ن ن ن ن‬
ُ
‫ن‬
ُ ‫ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
Section 7: Is each of the following a sentence? Circle Y for Yes and N for No.
ْ
َ ‫دَ َ ِ َ ن‬
Y N
َ‫هـذا ََبيان‬
Y N
َ‫ِإ َ نّن ْم َ نَق ْوم‬
Y N
َ ‫كتاب َ َ َ ن‬
‫َاِل‬
Y N
َ َ ‫َاِلِ َ ََح‬
‫ق‬
َ ‫ِد ْين‬
ِ‫َِل‬
ِ
ِ
‫ن‬
َ
ُ ‫الحم‬
‫ن‬
ُ
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
ُ
ُ
Bayyinah Institute Fundamentals of Classical Arabic – Exam 1
N
J
5points
C
5points
F
5points
2
Pl
5points
َ َY
N
5points
Y
N
5points
Y
N
Page 1
‫ بينة‬Bayyinah Institute
Fundamentals of Classical Arabic Exam 1 - Ism and Fragments
Section 8: Tell the status of the pronouns (R, N or J).
ْ
ْ ‫(إ‬their faith) R N J ‫ت‬
َ‫ك َن‬
‫ن‬
َ ْ ‫ماّن‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
َ
‫ن‬
ُ ‫ ِب‬R N J
ِ
‫ أن‬R
ِ
ُُ
َ ‫ه‬
‫و‬
َََ R
N
J
َْ ‫ك‬
‫م‬
‫ ِف ْي‬R N J
َ ‫ ننصر ن‬R
‫ك‬
ُ
ُ‫ن‬
‫ن ن‬
N
J
‫ِإ َنننا‬
N
J
‫كتابنا‬
ُ ِ
R
N
R
J
N
J
َ‫ك ْم‬
‫لن نعلَ ن‬
ُ
ْ
َ ‫ ننح‬R
‫ن‬
ُ
20points
R
N
N
J
J
(he helped you)
Section 9: Match these fragments with their correct label
1. ______________ Idafah
2. ______________ Mowsoof & Sifah
3. ______________ Harf of Jarr
4. ______________ Harf of Nasb
5. ______________ Ismul Isharah & Musharun Ilayh
6. ______________ Sentence
Bayyinah Institute Fundamentals of Classical Arabic – Exam 1
ْ َ َ‫هـذا‬
a. ‫ََش َء‬
‫ن‬
15points
b. َ‫ذلكَ ََالرج ُل‬
ُ ‫ن َن‬
ْ
c. َ‫َشء ََع ِج ْيب‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
d. ‫م‬
َ ْ ‫ِإ َ نّن‬
ُ
e. َِ‫اِل‬
‫ِب َ ن‬
f. ُ َ‫نهـ ِذ ِهَ ََفا ِطمة‬
‫ن‬
g. َ‫دُعاء َ َالر ُس ْو ِل‬
‫ن َن‬
Page 2
‫ بينة‬Bayyinah Institute
Fundamentals of Classical Arabic Exam 1 - Ism and Fragments
Name of Student: _______________________________
Date:__________
Location_____________________
Section 1: Circle R, N or J in each cell below. If two answers are possible, circle both.
ْ
َ‫ كا ِذ ِب ن‬R N J
‫ي‬
َ‫سائحات‬
R
N
J
َ ‫ ِف ْرع ْو‬R N J
‫ن‬
‫ نث ُم ْو َد‬R N J
ِ
‫ن ن‬
‫ن‬
OO
OO
OO
OO
ْ
َ‫مش ِف نق ْي‬
ُ
5points
R
Section 2: Circle P for Proper and C for Common in each of the following.
ْ
ْ
َ ‫ َ َ أنن‬P
‫ت‬
C
َ‫ َ َ بُْشى‬P
C
َ ‫اّل ْي‬
‫ن‬
C
َ‫د ْور َ نَق ْوم‬
‫ ص‬P
C
‫ َ َ هـذا‬P
ِ ‫ َ َ َن‬P
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ُ ُ ن‬
‫ن‬
Section 3: Circle M for Masculine and F for Feminine for each of the following.
ْ
ْ
‫طلح نَة‬
ََM
F
‫َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ أ ُ ََم‬M F
َ‫َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ننفس‬M F
َ‫ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ب ْيت‬M F
َ‫ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ صالة‬M
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
Section 4: Circle 1 for Singular, 2 for Pair and Pl for Plural.
ْ
َِ ‫ َ َ جنَ ن‬1 2 Pl
‫تان‬
َ ْ ‫ َ َ م ْس ِلم‬1 َ2 Pl
‫ي‬
‫ َ َ َ َ َ قا ِنتُو‬1 َ 2 َ َ Pl
َ‫َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ر ْيب‬1 2 Pl َ‫ َ مخت ِل نفة‬1
‫ُ ن‬
‫ُ ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
Section 5: Is each of the following a case of Mowsoof-Sifah? Circle Y for Yes and N for No.
َ‫ظ ْي‬
Y N
َ ِ ‫َالغ ْي‬
‫ب‬
َ‫شاِبات‬
َ ‫َ َ هـذاَ ََالنَ ن ِب‬
ِ ‫كتابَ َ نَع‬
ِ َ Y N َ‫أ ن نش َ ُدَ ََق ُ َ نوة‬
ِ ‫ آياتَ ََمُت ن‬Y N ‫ي‬
‫ عالِ ُم َ ن‬Y N
َُ
Section 6: Is each of the following a mudhaf and mudhaf ilayh? Circle Y for Yes and N for No.
ْ ‫ أ‬Y N ‫ك َة‬
َ ِ ِ‫د ْون َ ََالخال‬
‫ق‬
‫عاب‬
Y N
َ‫ صالة َ ََرس ْول‬Y N
َْ ‫ك‬
‫م‬
‫كتاب‬
Y N
َ ِ ‫حسنَ ََالح ِد ْي‬
‫ث‬
‫م‬
ِ
ِ
ِ
‫ساج نداَ َ نَم َ ن ن‬
ُ
ُ
‫ن ن ن ن‬
ُ
‫ن‬
ُ ‫ن‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
Section 7: Is each of the following a sentence? Circle Y for Yes and N for No.
ْ
Y N
َ‫هـذا ََبيان‬
Y N
َ‫ِإ َ نّن ْم َ نَق ْوم‬
Y N
َ ‫كتاب َ َ َ ن‬
‫َاِل‬
Y N
َ َ ‫َاِلِ َ ََح‬
‫ق‬
َ ‫ِد ْين‬
َِ‫َِل‬
ِ
ِ
‫دَ َ ِ َ ن‬
‫ن‬
َ
ُ ‫الحم‬
‫ن‬
ُ
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
ُ
ُ
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Bayyinah Institute Fundamentals of Classical Arabic – Exam 1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
OO
N
J
5points
C
5points
O
F
5points
2
Pl
5points
َ َY
O
N
5points
O
Y
N
5points
O
Y
N
Page 1
‫ بينة‬Bayyinah Institute
Fundamentals of Classical Arabic Exam 1 - Ism and Fragments
Section 8: Tell the status of the pronouns (R, N or J).
ْ
ْ ‫(إ‬their faith) R N J ‫ت‬
َ‫ك َن‬
‫ن‬
َ ْ ‫ماّن‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
َ
‫ن‬
ُ ‫ ِب‬R N J
ِ
‫ أن‬R
ِ
ُُ
َ ‫ه‬
‫و‬
َََ R
N
J
َْ ‫ك‬
‫م‬
‫ ِف ْي‬R N J
َ ‫ ننصر ن‬R
‫ك‬
ُ
ُ‫ن‬
‫ن ن‬
O
O
O
O
O
N
J
‫ِإ َنننا‬
O
J
‫كتابنا‬
ُ ِ
N
(he helped you)
Section 9: Match these fragments with their correct label
g
1. ______________ Idafah
c
e
______________
Harf of Jarr
d
______________
Harf of Nasb
b
______________
Ismul Isharah & Musharun Ilayh
a , f Sentence
______________
2. ______________ Mowsoof & Sifah
3.
4.
5.
6.
R
Bayyinah Institute Fundamentals of Classical Arabic – Exam 1
ْ َ َ‫هـذا‬
a. ‫ََش َء‬
‫ن‬
O
N
R
N
J
O
J
َ‫ك ْم‬
‫لن نعلَ ن‬
ُ
ْ
َ ‫ ننح‬R
‫ن‬
ُ
O
20points
R
O
N
J
N
J
15points
b. َ‫ذلكَ ََالرج ُل‬
ُ ‫ن َن‬
ْ
c. َ‫َشء ََع ِج ْيب‬
‫ن‬
‫ن‬
d. ‫م‬
َ ْ ‫ِإ َ نّن‬
ُ
e. َِ‫اِل‬
‫ِب َ ن‬
f. ُ َ‫نهـ ِذ ِهَ ََفا ِطمة‬
‫ن‬
g. َ‫دُعاء َ َالر ُس ْو ِل‬
‫ن َن‬
Page 2
1
12.1 Introduction to Fi’l - Past Tense
Knowing your pronouns is very important in understanding how to use Fi’ls. Please review page 18;
know the pronouns and their meanings.
ْ
We started learning about past tense (‫ )ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ‬fi’ls today:
If a fi’l ends with this sound:
‘A’
The doer is:
He (‫)ھو‬
‘Att’
She ( ‫)ھ‬
‘Aa’
Both of them ( ‫)ھ‬
‘Taa’
Both of them (fem)( ‫)ھ‬
‘Oo’
All of them (‫)ھم‬
‘Na’
All of them (fem) (‫)ھُن‬
Looks like:
ْ
‫أﻧﺰل‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻻ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﺎ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟ ْﻮا‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﻦ‬
The meaning is:
He sent down
She sent down
Both of them sent down
Both of those girls sent down
They sent down
The women sent down
We also learned some new vocabulary:
ْ
‫أﻧﺰل‬
‫ﺟﻌﻞ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺬر‬
Sent down
Made
Warned
‫ﻛﱪ‬
‫ﺧﺮج‬
Got big
Left
‫ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫اﺗﺨﺬ‬
Congratulated
Worked
Took
‫ﻗﺎل‬
‫آﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺄ‬
Said
Believed
Assumed
Prepared
Then we practiced saying the fi’l chart with the pronouns on page 33. We should practice this chart with
the pronouns and know it very well.
We’ll be analyzing Surat ul Kahf with the grammar rules we’ve learned so be sure to start working on
memorizing it.
2
EXERCISES:
Translate the following sentences
1. ‫ﻗﺎﻟ ْﻮا‬
ْ
2. ‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﺎ‬
ْ
3. ‫ﺣﺴﺒﺖ‬
ْ
4. ‫أﻧﺬر‬
5. ‫ﺟﻌﻼ‬
6. Those women believed
7. Both of them said
8. She got big
9. The two girls prepared
10. They worked
11. The two girls took
12. Both of them left
13. She congratulated
14. The two girls assumed
15. Those women said
16. They warned
17. Both of them congratulated
18. He sent down
19. They got big
20. Those women prepared
3
ANSWER KEY:
1. ‫ﻗﺎﻟ ْﻮا‬
ْ
2. ‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﺎ‬
They said
The two girls sent down
ْ
3. ‫ﺣﺴﺒﺖ‬
ْ
4. ‫أﻧﺬ ْرن‬
The women warned
5. ‫ﺟﻌﻼ‬
Both of them made
She assumed
6. Those women believed
‫آﻣﻦ‬
7. Both of them said
‫ﻗﺎﻻ‬
8. She got big
9. The two girls prepared
ْ
‫ﻛﱪت‬
‫ﻫﻴﺄﺗﺎ‬
10. They worked
‫ﻋﻤﻠ ْﻮا‬
11. The two girls took
‫اﺗﺨﺬﺗﺎ‬
12. Both of them left
‫ﺧ ﺮﺟ ﺎ‬
ْ
‫ت‬
13. She congratulated
14. The two girls assumed
15. Those women said
16. They warned
17. Both of them congratulated
18. He sent down
19. They got big
20. Those women prepared
‫ﺣ ﺴﺒﺘ ﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻗﻠﻦ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺬر ْوا‬
‫ا‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰل‬
‫ﻛﱪ ْوا‬
ْ
‫ﻫﻴ ﺄ ن‬
1
12.2 Fi’l - Past Tense (cont’d)
We continued our lesson on past tense fi’l and how to change the fi’l depending on the doer:
If a fi’l ends with this sound:
‘Ta’
‘Toma’
‘Tom’
‘Ti’
‘Toma’
‘Toona’
‘To’
‘Naa’
The doer is:
ْ
You (‫)أﻧﺖ‬
ْ
Both of you (‫)أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ
All of you (ْ ‫)أﻧ‬
ْ
You (f)(‫)أﻧﺖ‬
ْ
Both of you (f) (‫)أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ
All of them (fem) (‫)أﻧﺘﻦ‬
I (‫)أﻧﺎ‬
ْ
We (‫)ﻧﺤﻦ‬
Looks like:
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ ْ‫أ ْﻧﺰﻟ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﻦ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺖ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﻨﺎ‬
The meaning is:
You sent down
Both of you sent down
All of you sent down
You (f) sent down
Both of you (f) sent down
All of you (f) sent down
I sent down
We sent down
Practice changing the fi’ls that we learned with the different doers (hidden/inside pronouns) like we
changed the fi’l ‫ ﻧﺼﺮ‬on page 33. We should always say the pronoun along with the fi’l as we practice.
We also started learning about how to tell the difference between the hidden pronoun inside the fi’l and
the outside pronoun that’s being affected by the fi’l. For example:
‫ﻧﺼﺮﻛ ْﻢ‬: first we identify the attached pronoun (‫ )ﻛ ْﻢ‬and ignore it. The translate the
original verb (‫ )ﻧﺼﺮ‬, he helped. Then translate the attached pronoun: all of you. Together it
translates as “he helped all of you”
2
EXERCISES:
Find the hidden pronoun and translate it:
Ex:
He
‫ﻫﻮ‬
ْ
‫ ﺧﻔﺖ‬.1
‫ﻗﺎل‬
ْ
‫ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ‬.2
‫ ﺗﻜﻠﻤ ْﻮا‬.3
‫ اﺗﻘ ْﻮا‬.4
‫ وﻫﻦ‬.5
Translate the following sentences:
1. You assumed
2. All of you (f) got big
3. All of you sent down
4. Both of you left
5. I warned
6. Both of you (f) took
7. We made
8. You (f) congratulated
9. We believed
10. All of you (f) prepared
Translate the following sentences:
Ex: He made them
ْ
% ‫ﺟ ﻌﻠ‬
ْ
(‫ أﻧﺰ‬.1
ْ
‫ ﺟﻌﻠﺘ) ْﻢ‬.2
‫ اﺗﺨﺬوﻫﺎ‬.3
ْ
‫ﻦ‬,‫ أﻧﺬ ْر‬.4
ْ /0 .5
.
3
ANSWER KEY:
Find the hidden pronoun and translate it:
I
‫أﻧﺎ‬
She
‫ﻫﻲ‬
They
ْ.
They
ْ.
He
‫ﻫﻮ‬
ْ
‫ ﺧﻔﺖ‬.1
ْ
‫ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ‬.2
‫ ﺗﻜﻠﻤ ْﻮا‬.3
‫ اﺗﻘ ْﻮا‬.4
‫ وﻫﻦ‬.5
Translate the following sentences:
1. You assumed
2. All of you (f) got big
3. All of you sent down
4. Both of you left
5. I warned
6. Both of you (f) took
7. We made
‫ﺣﺴ ْﺒﺖ‬
ْ
‫ﻛﱪﺗﻦ‬
ْ ْ‫أ ْﻧﺰﻟ‬
ْ ‫ﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺬ ْرت‬
ْ
‫اﺗﺨﺬﺗﻤﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﺟﻌﻠﻨﺎ‬
8. You (f) congratulated
ْ 0
‫ت‬/
9. We believed
‫آﻣﻨﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻫﻴﺄﺗﻦ‬
10. All of you (f) prepared
Translate the following sentences:
He sent it down
She made you
They took her
I warned them (f)
He congratulated them
ْ
(‫ أﻧﺰ‬.1
ْ
‫ ﺟﻌﻠﺘ) ْﻢ‬.2
‫ اﺗﺨﺬوﻫﺎ‬.3
ْ
‫ﻦ‬,‫ أﻧﺬ ْر‬.4
ْ /0 .5
.
1
12.3 Fi’l - Past Tense (Practice and Pronouns)
We continued practicing what we learned about past tense over the last two sessions. This session we
focused on finding the hidden pronoun which is always the doer and the attached pronoun, which is
always the detail. We also learned that when a pronoun is attached to a fi’l it is in nasb status. Complete
the following exercises for more practice.
Find the hidden pronoun and translate it:
ْ
‫ﻛﻔﺮت‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮ ْوا‬
‫ﻛﺎن‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻏﻔ ْﺮت‬
‫رﺟﻌﺘﺎ‬
ْ ‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﻦ‬
Translate the following sentences:
ْ
‫ﺎ‬$‫ﻫﻴﺄﺗ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺬرﺗﺎﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻌﻠﻮاﻛ ْﻢ‬
ْ
‫اﺗﺨﺬﺗﻤﺎﻫﻤﺎ‬
ْ +
‫*)ﻦ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﻪ‬
ْ
‫ﻗﻠﺘﻪ‬
ْ
‫ﻫﻴﺄﻧﺎﻫﺎ‬
ْ
‫ ْﻢ‬.‫ﺟﻌﻠ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ‬
2
ANSWER KEY
Find the hidden pronoun and translate it:
‫ﻫﻲ‬, she
ْ
‫ﻛﻔﺮت‬
ْ0, they
‫ﺷﻜﺮ ْوا‬
‫ﻫﻮ‬, he
‫ﻛﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬, both of them (f)
ْ
‫ أﻧﺖ‬, you (m)
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬, both of you
ْ ‫أ ْﻧ‬, all of you (m)
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬, all of you (f)
‫ﻋﻠﻤﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻏﻔ ْﺮت‬
‫رﺟﻌﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ ‫ﻛﺘ ْﺒ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﻦ‬
Translate the following sentences:
All of you (f) prepared her
Both of them (f) warned both of them
All of them made you
Both of you took both of them
You (f) congratulated them (f)
You sent it down
You (f) said it
We prepared her
I made them
Both of them (f) sent both of them down
ْ
‫ﺎ‬$‫ﻫﻴﺄﺗ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺬرﺗﺎﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻌﻠﻮاﻛ ْﻢ‬
ْ
‫اﺗﺨﺬﺗﻤﺎﻫﻤﺎ‬
ْ +
‫*)ﻦ‬
ْ ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﻪ‬
ْ
‫ﻗﻠﺘﻪ‬
ْ
‫ﻫﻴﺄﻧﺎﻫﺎ‬
ْ
‫ ْﻢ‬.‫ﺟﻌﻠ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰﻟﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ‬
1
12.4 Fi’l - Past Tense (Two Kinds of Doers)
We learned about 2 different kinds of doers:
1. Inside doers:
-
We already learned this in our previous lessons on Fi’l when we figured out the hidden
pronouns in a fi’l.
For example, when we say ‫ ﻧﺼﺮ ْوا‬we are implying an inside doer who is ْ
2. Outside doers:
-
ْ
They only work with ‫ ﻫﻮ‬or ‫ ﻫﻲ‬. For example, only fi’ls like ‫ ﻧﺼﺮ‬or ‫ ﻧﺼﺮت‬can have an outside
-
doer.
When your doer is not a pronoun it is called an outside doer
o
-
-
He helped is like using an inside doer (‫ )ﻧﺼﺮ‬but ‘Waleed helped’ is an example of using
an outside doer, a doer that is not a pronoun.
We discovered how to tell which word is the outside doer by learning these 2 rules:
o Must be in raf’ status (remember when we first learned about isms we said in ism in raf’
is the doer)
o Must be after the fi’l
Then we practiced with some examples:
o
‫ﻋﻠﻢ اﻟﻤﺪرس‬: the teacher is not the outside doer because it’s not in raf’ status. The doer
is still inside (‫ )ﻫﻮ‬so this will be translated as ‘He taught the teacher’
o
-
-
‫ﻋﻠﻢ اﻟﻤﺪرس‬: the teacher is in raf’ status & after the fi’l therefore it must be the outside
doer. This will be translated as ‘The teacher taught’
We talked about how the outside doer can be singular, dual, or plural
o ‫ﻗﺎل ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﻮن‬
‫ﻗﺎل ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ﻗﺎل ﻣﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬
We use the ‫ ﻫﻮ‬version of the fi’l if the outside doer is masculine (‫)ﻗﺎل ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ‬
ٌ
ْ
We use the ‫ ﻫﻲ‬version of the fi’l if the outside doer is feminine( ‫)ﻗﺎﻟﺖ ﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤﺔ‬
ٌ
Finally we learned that the doer is called ‫ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬in Arabic
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪Indicate whether there’s an inside or outside doer and who the doer is‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬أﻧﺰل اﻟ(ﺘﺎب‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺟﻌﻠﻨﺎ اﻟﺒ ْﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ .3‬آﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎس‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .4‬اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨ ْﻮن ﺧﺮﺟ ْﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .5‬أﻧﺬ ْرﺗ( ْﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺣﺴﺒﺘﻪ ﻟﺠ ًﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .7‬اﺗﺨﺬت اﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎت اﻟ(ﺘﺎب‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺟﻌﻞ اﷲ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻗﺎﻟﺘﺎ اﻟﻘﺼﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪>? .10‬ت اﻷم‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻛﱪ اﻟﻮ‪B‬ان‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻗﺎ‪C‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬اﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎت اﺗﺨﺬن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .14‬أﻧﺬر اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻮن‬
‫‪ .15‬ﺧﺮج اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ >? .16‬اﻟﻤﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫‪ .17‬اﻟﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻤﻠ ْﻮا‬
‫‪ .18‬اﻟﻄﻔﻼن اﺗﺨﺬا‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .19‬ﻫﻴﺄت اﻷﻣﻮر‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .20‬ﻗﺎﻟﺖ اﻟﻤﺪرﺳﺘﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪Ex: inside doer,‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ANSWER KEY:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .1‬أﻧﺰل اﻟ(ﺘﺎب‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺟﻌﻠﻨﺎ اﻟﺒ ْﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ .3‬آﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎس‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .4‬اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨ ْﻮن ﺧﺮﺟ ْﻮا‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .5‬أﻧﺬ ْرﺗ( ْﻢ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺣﺴﺒﺘﻪ ﻟﺠ ًﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .7‬اﺗﺨﺬت اﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎت اﻟ(ﺘﺎب‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺟﻌﻞ اﷲ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻗﺎﻟﺘﺎ اﻟﻘﺼﺔ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪>? .10‬ت اﻷم‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻛﱪ اﻟﻮ‪B‬ان‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻗﺎ‪C‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .13‬اﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎت اﺗﺨﺬن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .14‬أﻧﺬر اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻮن‬
‫‪ .15‬ﺧﺮج اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎن‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ >? .16‬اﻟﻤﺴﻠﻤﲔ‬
‫‪ .17‬اﻟﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻤﻠ ْﻮا‬
‫‪ .18‬اﻟﻄﻔﻼن اﺗﺨﺬا‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .19‬ﻫﻴﺄت اﻷﻣﻮر‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .20‬ﻗﺎﻟﺖ اﻟﻤﺪرﺳﺘﺎن‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪Ex: inside doer,‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪Inside doer,‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﺎس ‪Outside doer,‬‬
‫ْ ‪Inside doer,‬‬
‫أﻧﺎ ‪Inside doer,‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ‪Inside doer,‬‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎت ‪Outside doer,‬‬
‫اﷲ ‪Outside doer,‬‬
‫)‪ (f‬ﻫﻤﺎ ‪Inside doer,‬‬
‫اﻷم ‪Outside doer,‬‬
‫اﻟﻮ‪B‬ان ‪Outside doer,‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪Inside doer,‬‬
‫ﻫﻦ ‪Insider doer,‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨ ْﻮن ‪Outside doer,‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎن ‪Outside doer,‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪Inside doer,‬‬
‫ْ ‪Insider doer,‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ‪Inside doer,‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أﻧﺖ ‪Inside doer,‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺪرﺳﺘﺎن ‪Outside doer,‬‬
1
13.1 Fi’l - Present Tense
ٌ
ٌ
We started learning about Present Tense Fi’l (‫)ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬. Unlike ‫ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ‬where we change the
ٌ ْ
ٌ
endings first, with ‫ ﻓﻌﻞﻣﻀﺎرع‬we change the beginning first. First we learned how to change the doer of
ٌ ْ
ٌ
a ‫ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬from ‘He’ to ‘I’ to ‘We’:
If the ‫ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬begins with:
The doer is:
‫ي‬
َ or ُ‫ي‬
He (‫)ھو‬
‫ أ‬or ‫أ‬
I (‫)أﻧﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰل‬
The meaning is:
He sends down
I send down
ْ
‫ﻧﻨﺰل‬
ْ
We (‫)ﻧﺤﻦ‬
‫ ن‬or ‫ن‬
Looks like:
We send down
ٌ ْ
ٌ
Then we talked about the 4 different kinds of ‫ ي‬that we see in a ‫ﻓﻌﻞﻣﻀﺎرع‬:
If you see:
The doer is:
Looks like
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
‫ ي‬by itself
He (‫)ﻫﻮ‬
‫ ي‬with ‫آن‬
Both of them (‫)ﻫﻤﺎ‬
The meaning is
He sends down
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺰﻻن‬
Both of them send
down
They send down
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺰﻟ ْﻮن‬
ْ ْ
They (f) send down
‫ ي‬with ‫ن‬
They (f) (‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻦ‬
# ‫)ﻫ‬
ٌ ْ
ٌ
The rest of the doers (hidden pronoun within the ‫ )ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬begin with ‫ ت‬so we end up with:
‫ ي‬with ‫ْون‬
They (ْ!)
ْ ْ
‫ﻦ ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻦ‬
# ‫ﻫ‬
ْ
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻻن‬
ْ
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻨﺰل‬
ْ
‫!ْ ﻳﻨﺰﻟ ْﻮن‬
ْ
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺰﻻن‬
ْ
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﻨﺰل‬
Throughout our lesson we learned the present tense versions of the fi’ls we learned before:
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺰل‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ‬
ْ
‫ﻳ ﻨﺬ ر‬
Sends down
ْ
‫ﻳﻜﱪ‬
Makes
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﺮج‬
Warns
Gets big
Leaves
ْ
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
Works
ْ
‫ﻳ ﺤﺴ ﺐ‬
Takes
‫ﻳﻘﻮل‬
(
# )‫ﻳ‬
Congratulates
ْ
‫ﻳﺆﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺘﺨﺬ‬# ‫ﻳ‬
Says
Believes
Assumes
Prepares
‫ﻴﺊ‬# 4
2
EXERCISES:
Translate the following sentences:
‫ﺘﺨﺬ‬# ‫ ﻳ‬.1
ْ
‫ﻳﺤﺴﺒ ْﻮن‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﺮﺟﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻦ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻜﱪ‬
.2
.3
.4
.5
ْ
‫ ﻳﻨﺰﻟ ْﻮن‬.6
ْ
‫ ﺗﻨﺬران‬.7
(
# ;‫ أ‬.8
‫ آﻣﻦ‬.9
ْ
‫ ﻧﻌﻤﻞ‬.10
11. They (f) get big
12. Both of them (f) leave
13. He makes
14. I say
15. We warn
16. They prepare
17. Both of them congratulate
18. They (f) send down
19. She believes
20. We prepare
3
ANSWER KEY:
He takes
They assume
Both of them leave
They (f) say
She gets big
They send down
Both of them (f) warn
‫ﺘﺨﺬ‬# ‫ ﻳ‬.1
ْ
‫ﻳﺤﺴﺒ ْﻮن‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﺮﺟﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻦ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻜﱪ‬
.2
.3
.4
.5
ْ
‫ ﻳﻨﺰﻟ ْﻮن‬.6
ْ
‫ ﺗﻨﺬران‬.7
I congratulate
(
# ;‫ أ‬.8
I believe
‫ آﻣﻦ‬.9
We make
11. They (f) get big
12. Both of them (f) leave
13. He makes
14. I say
15. We warn
16. They prepare
17. Both of them congratulate
18. They (f) send down
19. She believes
20. We prepare
ْ
‫ ﻧﻌﻤﻞ‬.10
ْ ْ
‫ﻳﻜﱪن‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺨﺮﺟﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫أﻗ ْﻮل‬
ْ
‫ﻧﻨﺬر‬
‫ﻴﺌ ْﻮن‬# 4
‫(ان‬
# )‫ﻳ‬
ْ ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻦ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺆﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻴﺊ‬# >
1
13.2 Fi’l- Present Tense (cont’d)
ٌ
ٌ ْ
We continued learning about Present Tense (‫ )ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻀﺎرع‬and how to change it depending on the doer:
ْ
We learned that all the present tense fi’ls whose doers are the “‫ ”أﻧﺖ‬pronouns will begin with ‫ت‬
The doer is:
Looks like:
ْ
You (‫)أﻧﺖ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺰل‬
ْ
ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻻن‬
Both of you (‫)أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ
All of you (ْ ‫)أﻧ‬
ْ
You (f) (‫)أﻧﺖ‬
ْ
Both of you (f) (‫)أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
ْ
All of you (f) (‫)أﻧﺘﻦ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻟ ْﻮن‬
ْ ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻟﲔ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻻن‬
ْ ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻟﻦ‬
The meaning is:
You send down
Both of you send down
All of you send down
You (f) send down
Both of you (f) send
down
All of you (f) send down
Unfortunately due to sound quality we had to cut the video short. Please watch Lessons 13.1 and 13.2,
practice and know the conjugations really well before moving on to the next lesson.
2
EXERCISES:
Find the hidden pronoun and translate it:
Ex:
He
‫ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻘ ْﻮل‬
ْ
‫ ﻳﻌﻠﻤ ْﻮن‬.1
ْ
‫ﲔ‬%‫ 'ﺸﺎ‬.2
ْ ْ
‫ ﺗﺠﻤﻌﻦ‬.3
ْ
‫ ﻳﺄﻣﺮان‬.4
ْ
‫ ﺗﻤﻜﺮ‬.5
Translate the following sentences:
1. They work
2. You prepare
3. They (f) congratulate
4. Both of you leave
5. You (f) get big
6. All of you say
7. Both of them (f) believe
8. I send down
9. We warn
10. All of you (f) make
Translate the following sentences:
Ex: He makes them
ْ
ْ
- ‫ﻳ ﺠ ﻌﻠ‬
‫ﺎ‬.‫ ْﻳ‬/0‫ ﺗ‬.1
‫ ﻳﺘﺨﺬ ْوﻧﻪ‬.2
‫ ْﻢ‬6‫ﻴﺌﺎ‬9 .3
ْ
‫ أﻧﺬرﻛ ْﻢ‬.4
ْ
;‫ ﺗﻨﺰ‬.5
3
ANSWER KEY:
Find the hidden pronoun and translate it:
Ex:‫ﻫﻮ‬
ْ<
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
ْ
‫ أﻧﺖ‬or ‫ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘ ْﻮل‬
He
They
You(f)
All of you (f)
Both of them
You or She
ْ
‫ ﻳﻌﻠﻤ ْﻮن‬.1
ْ
‫ﲔ‬%‫ 'ﺸﺎ‬.2
ْ ْ
‫ ﺗﺠﻤﻌﻦ‬.3
ْ
‫ ﻳﺄﻣﺮان‬.4
ْ
‫ ﺗﻤﻜﺮ‬.5
Translate the following sentences:
ْ
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻠ ْﻮن‬
11. They work
‫ﻴﺊ‬9
12. You prepare
‫ن‬/0‫ﻳ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﺨﺮﺟﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻜﱪ ْﻳﻦ‬
13. They (f) congratulate
14. Both of you leave
15. You (f) get big
‫ﺗﻘ ْﻮﻟ ْﻮن‬
16. All of you say
ْ
‫ﺗﺆﻣﻨﺎن‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺰل‬
17. Both of them (f) believe
18. I send down
ْ
‫ﻧﻨﺬر‬
ْ ْ
‫ﺗﺠﻌﻠﻦ‬
19. We warn
20. All of you (f) make
Translate the following sentences:
ْ
Ex: He makes them
You (f) congratulate her
They take it
Both of you prepare them OR
Both of you (f) prepare them OR
Both of them (f) prepare them
I warn you
You send it down
‫ﺎ‬.‫ ْﻳ‬/0‫ ﺗ‬.1
‫ ﻳﺘﺨﺬ ْوﻧﻪ‬.2
‫ ْﻢ‬6‫ﻴﺌﺎ‬9 .3
ْ
‫ أﻧﺬرﻛ ْﻢ‬.4
ْ
;‫ ﺗﻨﺰ‬.5
ْ
-‫ﻳﺠﻌﻠ‬
1
13.3 Fi'l-Present Tense (The Light Harf)
We started this lesson by learning about the Light Harf.
‫ﺣﺘﻰ‬
ً ‫إذا‬
Until
In that case
‫ﻟ‬
ْ ‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ْ
‫أن‬
So that
Will not
To
‫ْﻲ‬
Then we learned how to turn the present tense fi’ls on page 39 into their light versions:
ْ
ْ
‫أﻧﺼﺮ ﻧﻨﺼﺮ‬
ْ
ْ
ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﻨﺼﺮا ﺗﻨﺼﺮ ْوا‬
ْ
ْ
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﻨﺼﺮا ﻳﻨﺼﺮ ْوا‬
ْ
ْ
ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺼﺮ ْي ﺗﻨﺼﺮا ﺗﻨﺼ ْﺮن‬
ْ
ْ
ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﻨﺼﺮا ﻳﻨﺼ ْﺮن‬
The light harfs above turn the Present Tense fi’l light and change the meanings accordingly:
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
ْ ْ
‫ﻦ ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ ً
‫إذا ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
He helps
He will not help
In that case, he will help
Also, remember, these light harf will ONLY work on present tense fi’l not past tense. Please practice
saying the light harf and know their meanings.
2
EXERCISES:
Without referring to any notes, write the light harfs and their meanings:
(1
(2
(3
(4
(5
Translate the following sentences:
Ex: Until he helps
ْ
‫ﺣﺘ ﻰ ﻳ ﻨ ﺼ ﺮ‬
1. So that all of you help
2. In that case, both of you will
help
3. To help (‫)ﻫﻲ‬
4. You (f) will not help
5. Until all of you (f) help
6. So that both of them (f) will help
7. We will not help
8. So that she helps
9. In that case, I will help
10. Until all of you help
Translate the following sentences:
ْ ْ
‫ﻦ ﻳﻨﺼ ْﺮن‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ ْ
‫أن ﻳﻨﺼﺮ ْوا‬
ْ
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺼﺮا‬
ْ
‫ْﻲ أﻧﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ ً
‫إذا ﺗﻨﺼﺮ ْوا‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
Without referring to any notes, write the light harfs and their meanings:
ْ
‫أن‬
To
Will not
So that
In that case
Until
‫ْﻲ‬
ْ ‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻟ‬
ً ‫إذا‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ‬
Translate the following sentences:
Ex: Until he helps
1. So that all of you help
2. In that case, both of you will
help
3. To help (‫)ﻫﻲ‬
4. You (f) will not help
5. Until all of you (f) help
6. So that both of them (f) will
help
7. We will not help
8. So that she helps
9. In that case, I will help
10. Until all of you help
ْ
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺼﺮ‬
ْ
‫ْﻲ ﺗﻨﺼﺮ ْوا‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ ً
‫إذا ﺗﻨﺼﺮا‬
ْ ْ
‫أن ﺗﻨﺼﺮ‬
ْ ْ
‫ﻦ ﺗﻨﺼﺮ ْي‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺼ ْﺮن‬
ْ
‫ْﻲ ﺗﻨﺼﺮا‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ
‫ْﻲ ﺗﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ ْ
‫ﻦ ﻧﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ
‫إذا ًأﻧﺼﺮ‬
ْ
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺼﺮ ْوا‬
Translate the following sentences:
They (f) will not help
So that they help
Until both of you help OR
Until both of you (f) help OR
Until both of them (f) help
So that I help
In that case, you will help
ْ ْ
‫ﻦ ﻳﻨﺼ ْﺮن‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ ْ
‫أن ﻳﻨﺼﺮ ْوا‬
ْ
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺼﺮا‬
ْ
‫ْﻲ أﻧﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻟ‬
ْ
‫إذا ًﺗﻨﺼﺮ ْوا‬
1
13.4 Fi'l-Present Tense (Practice)
We took this session as an opportunity to practice what we’ve learned so far. If you had difficulty
understanding the concepts in today’s session please go back and watch the Present Tense sessions.
EXERCISES:
Find the hidden pronoun and translate
ْ
‫ﻳ ﺿ ْﻮن‬
‫أﺣﺎﻓﻆ‬
ْ
‫ﻧﺨﻠﻖ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺠﲔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻘﻄﻌﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﺸ‬
ْ
‫ﺴﺎرﻋﻦ‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻜﱪان‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﻜﺮان‬
‫ﺗﺘﻘ ْﻮن‬
‫ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ‬
What is the “light” version of these words:
ْ
‫ﻧﺄﺧﺬ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔ ْﻮن‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺆﺗﻴﺎن‬
‫أﺑﺮء‬
‫ﻳ ْﺒﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺎﺟﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬3
ْ
‫ﺲ‬5‫ ْﺴﺘﺄ‬6
2
ANSWER KEY:
Find the hidden pronoun and translate
ْ7
They
‫أﻧﺎ‬
I
ْ
‫ﻧﺤﻦ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ‬
‫أﺣﺎﻓﻆ‬
ْ
‫ﻧﺨﻠﻖ‬
ْ
‫ﺗﻨﺠﲔ‬
We
You (f)
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
Both of you (m&f) or
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
Both of them (f)
‫ﻫﻲ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺖ‬
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻦ‬
ْ
‫ﻳ ﺿ ْﻮن‬
‫ﺗﺘﻘﻄﻌﺎن‬
ْ
‫ﺸ‬
She or,
You
ْ
‫ﺴﺎرﻋﻦ‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻜﱪان‬
All of you (f)
ْ
‫أﻧﺘﻤﺎ‬
Both of you (m/f) or
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
Both of them (f)
‫ﻫﻤﺎ‬
Both of them (m)
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﻜﺮان‬
ْ=‫أ ْﻧ‬
All of you
‫ﺗﺘﻘ ْﻮن‬
‫ﻫﻮ‬
He
‫ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ‬
What is the “light” version of these words:
ْ
‫ﻧﺄﺧﺬ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔ ْﻮا‬
ْ
‫ﻧﺄﺧﺬ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔ ْﻮن‬
‫أﺑﺮء‬
‫أﺑﺮء‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺆﺗﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻳ ْﺒﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
ْ
‫ﺎﺟﺮي‬3
ْ
‫ﺲ‬5‫ ْﺴﺘﺄ‬6
ْ
‫ﻳﺆﺗﻴﺎن‬
‫ﻳ ْﺒﺪ ْﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺎﺟﺮ ْﻳﻦ‬3
ْ
‫ﺲ‬5‫ ْﺴﺘﺄ‬6
1
13.5 Fi'l-Present Tense (The Lightest Harf)
We began a new lesson today learning about the lightest harf and they are:
ْ ْ‫ل‬
ْ ‫ل‬
ْ َ‫ف‬
ْ ْ‫ول‬
َ
Should
ْ ‫لَ ّما‬
ْ ‫م‬
ْ َ‫ل‬
ْ‫إن‬
ْ Not yet
ْ Did not
If
Then we learned how to turn the present tense fi’ls on page 39 into their lightest versions by changing
the end of the fi’ls like this:
-
With the hidden pronouns ‫و‬
ْ ‫ه‬,
ْ‫هي‬,ْْ ‫أنت‬, ‫أَنا‬, and ‫ن‬
ْ ‫ نح‬we changed the damma (ُ) to a sukoon (ُ)
َ
ُ َ
َُ َ
-
With the hidden pronouns ‫هما‬,
ْ ‫أنتما‬, ‫ت‬
‫ه‬,
ْ ُ ‫أَن‬, ْ‫ أَنت‬we get rid of the ‫ ن‬at the end
َ ُ ُ َُ
-
ْ‫هن‬
َّْ ُ ‫ أَنت‬don’t change in their lightest form
َ ّ and ‫ن‬
ْ‫ْ ْ ْ ْأَنصرْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْنَنصر‬
ُ
ُ
ْ
ْ ْ ْ ْ‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ َتنصرْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ َتنصراْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ َْتنصروا‬
ُ
ُ ُ
َ ُ
ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ‫ْ ْ ْ َتنصريْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ َتنصرا ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ َْتنصرن‬
ُ
َ ُ
َ ُ
ْ ْ ‫روا‬
ْ ‫ينصرْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْينصراْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْينص‬
ُ َ
ُ ُ َ َ ُ َ
ْ ْ ْ ْ‫َتنصرْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ َتنصراْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْْينصرن‬
ُ
َ ُ َ َ ُ
Similar to the light harf, the lightest harfs make the present tense fi’l into their lightest forms and
change the meaning depending on the harf. A couple of few examples:
ْ‫ينصر‬
ُ ُ َ
ْ‫لَمْينصر‬
ُ َ
ْ‫إنْينصر‬
ُ َ
He helps
He did not help
If he helps
We also discovered that ‫ ل‬can either make the fi’l light or lightest. How do we know which is which? If
the fi’l is light (ْ‫)لينصر‬, we understand it with the light harf meaning: so that he helps. If the fi’l is in the
َ ُ َ
lightest form (ْ‫)لينصر‬, we understand it with the lightest harf meaning: he should help.
ُ َ
2
EXERCISES:
Without referring to any notes, write the lightest harfs and their meanings:
ْ
)1
)2
)3
)4
)5
)6
Translate the following sentences:
ْ ْ‫شن‬
ْ ‫إنْ ْيب‬
َ ّ َُ
ْ‫لتعم َل‬
َ َ
‫لَمْ ْيحسبا‬
َ
َ
‫ذوا‬
ُ ‫لَ ّماْ َْت ّ َتخ‬
ْ‫ل ْت ُؤمن‬
Translate the following sentences:
Ex: he should help
1. If all of you believe
2. She did not assume
3. Both of them should send down
4. They (fem) didn’t say yet
5. You should prepare
6. If all of you (f) leave
7. Both of you (f) should warn
8. I didn’t make yet
9. He didn’t get big
10. If you (f) say
ْ‫لينْصر‬
ُ َ
3
ANSWER KEY:
Without referring to any notes, write the lightest harfs and their meanings:
If
ْ ْ‫) إن‬1
Did not
ْ‫) لَم‬2
Not yet
‫) لَ ّ َما‬3
ْ‫) ول‬4
َ
Should
ْ‫) فَل‬5
ْ‫) ل‬6
Translate the following sentences:
If they (f) help
So that you (or she) helps
Both of them did not assume
All of you did not take yet
You (or she) should believe
Translate the following sentences:
Ex: he should help
11. If all of you believe
12. She did not assume
13. Both of them should send down
14. They (fem) didn’t say yet
15. You should prepare
16. If all of you (f) leave
17. Both of you (f) should warn
18. I didn’t make yet
19. He didn’t get big
20. If you (f) say
ْ ْ‫شن‬
ْ ‫إنْ ْيب‬
َ ّ َُ
ْ‫لتعم َل‬
َ َ
‫لَمْ ْيحسبا‬
َ
َ
‫ذوا‬
ُ ‫لَ ّماْ َْت ّ َتخ‬
ْ‫ل ْت ُؤمن‬
ْ‫لينْصر‬
ُ َ
‫إنْ ْتُؤمنُوا‬
ْ‫لَمْ َتحسب‬
ْ‫لينز َل‬
َ
ْ‫لَ ّماْي ُقلن‬
َ َ
ْ‫ل ُُت ّيئ‬
َ
ْ‫إنْتُخرجن‬
َ
‫ذرا‬
‫ل ْتن‬
َُ ُ
ْ‫لَ ّماْأَجعل‬
َ
ْ‫ب‬
ُ ‫لَمْ َيك‬
ْ‫إنْ َت ُقول‬
1
13.6 Fi'l- The Outside Doer
We’ve learned about 2 different kinds of fi’l )‫ارع‬
ِ ( and each time we’ve practiced
ِ ‫ض‬
َ ُ ‫ماضي و م‬
ْ
them we’ve said the pronoun that’s being represented inside. For example: ‫ ََهْ ينصر ْون‬means “they
َ ُ ُ َ
ْ
ْ
help”. Even if we don’t say the pronoun (for example: ‫ )ينصرون‬it still means “they help”. This is because
َ ُ ُ َ
ْ‫ َه‬is the hidden inside doer inside the fi’l. We also know that the inside doer is always a pronoun.
ُ
Today we were introduced to the outside doer. An outside doer is a doer that is NOT a pronoun
ْ
ْ
and cannot be hidden inside the fi’l. Example: Husna helped )‫ (نَصرت ح ْسنَى‬vs. She helped )‫( َنصرت‬.
ُ
َ َ
َ َ
Husna is the outside doer because we can’t hide her name inside the fi’l. “She” is an inside doer because
the pronoun is hidden in the fi’l. We have two important questions to answer when we’re trying to
figure out if there’s an outside doer:
How do we find the outside doer?
-
It’s found after the fi’l (doesn’t have to be right after, can come later)
In raf’ status (remember when we first learned about isms, the doer was always raf’)
When should we look for an outside doer?
-
When the hidden pronoun inside the fi’l is ‫هو‬
or ‫ ِهي‬we look after it for a word in raf’ status. If
َُ
َ
we find it then that is the outside doer. If we don’t, then the doer must be the inside doer “he”
or “she”
We also learned something strange: even if the outside doer is a pair or a plural, the fi’l stays in the ‫هو‬
َُ
or ‫ ِهي‬form.
َ
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪Indicate if there is an inside doer or outside doer. Underline the outside doer if you find one‬‬
‫َل ع ْب ِد ِه‬
‫أنزل ع ٰ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِل ِبي ِه‬
‫وس‬
‫ي‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫ذ‬
‫فِ َ‬
‫ِإ َ َ ُ ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ات‬
‫ص ُل اْلي ِ‬
‫ن ُ َف ِ ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ي‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ؤ‬
‫ش ال ُم‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫يب ِ ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫لئب‬
‫أكَل ا ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ ِّ ُ‬
‫ش ِك‬
‫ِإ ِّ َن ال ِّلَـه يب ِ ِّ‬
‫َ َُ ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اِلش ُهر‬
‫انس َل َخ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َل ُالطِّ ِ َِّيب يخرج‬
‫َوال َب َ‬
‫ُ َ ُ ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫كيَ عهد‬
‫ش‬
‫ي ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫كونُ لِل ُم ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ال ال َم َل ُ‬
‫َق َ‬
‫ات‬
‫ع ِملُوا الصال‬
‫ح ِ‬
‫ِّ َ ِ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫سنَا النَِّار‬
‫لَن َت َم ِّ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اِلنع ِام‬
‫ح ِّلَت لَكم َبيمة‬
‫أُ ِ‬
‫ُ َِ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ات ُقوا ال ِّلَـه‬
‫َو ِّ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫كسب س ِ ِّي َئة‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫كا ِف ِرين‬
‫ِّ َّل ي ِّ َت ِخ ِذ ال ُمؤ ِمنُون ال‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فقوّل ل‬
‫َُ َ َُ‬
‫صالِحا جع َل‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
Indicate if there is an inside doer or outside doer. Underline the outside doer if you find one
Inside doer
Outside doer
Inside
Inside
Outside
Inside
Outside
Inside
Outside
Outside
Inside
Outside
Outside
Inside
Inside
Outside
Inside
inside
‫َل ع ْب ِد ِه‬
ٰ ‫أنزل ع‬
َ َ َ َ َ َ
ْ
‫ِل ِبي ِه‬
‫وس‬
‫ي‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫ذ‬
َ ِ‫ف‬
ُ ُ ُ َ َ ‫ِإ‬
ْ
‫ات‬
ِ ‫ص ُل اْلي‬
ِّ ِ ‫ن ُ َف‬
َ
ْ ْ
‫ي‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ؤ‬
‫ش ال ُم‬
ِ
ِ
ِّ ِ ‫يب‬
َ
ُ َُ
ْ
‫لئب‬
ِ ‫أكَل ا‬
ُ ِّ ُ َ َ َ
‫ش ِك‬
ِّ ِ ‫ِإ ِّ َن ال ِّلَـه يب‬
ُ َُ َ
ْ ْ
‫اِلش ُهر‬
َ ‫انس َل َخ‬
َ
ُ
ْ
ْ
‫َل ُالطِّ ِ َِّيب يخرج‬
َ ‫َوال َب‬
ُ ُ َ ُ
ْ ْ
ْ
‫كيَ عهد‬
‫ش‬
ُ ‫ي‬
ِ
ِ ‫كونُ لِل ُم‬
َ
َ
ْ
ُ ‫ال ال َم َل‬
َ ‫َق‬
‫ات‬
‫ع ِملُوا الصال‬
ِ ‫ح‬
َ ِ َ ِّ
َ
‫سنَا النَِّار‬
َ ِّ ‫لَن َت َم‬
ُ
ْ ْ
ْ
‫اِلنع ِام‬
‫ح ِّلَت لَكم َبيمة‬
ِ ُ‫أ‬
َ َ ُ َ َِ ُ
‫ات ُقوا ال ِّلَـه‬
َ ِّ ‫َو‬
َ
‫كسب س ِ ِّي َئة‬
َ َ َ َ
ْ
ْ ْ
‫كا ِف ِرين‬
‫ِّ َّل ي ِّ َت ِخ ِذ ال ُمؤ ِمنُون ال‬
َ
َ
َ
َ
‫فقوّل ل‬
َُ َ َُ
‫صالِحا جع َل‬
َ َ
َ
1
13.9 Fi'l-Forbidding
We’re going to learn how to ask someone not to do something in Arabic. When we’re forbidding
someone from doing something it has to be occurring at that moment so this is only relevant to present
tense fi’l since we can’t forbid someone in the past. Also, we must be talking directly to them so we can
ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ
only forbid using the “you” versions of the present tense fi’l )‫ن‬
ََ ُ ‫ت َ َأنتُما َ َأَن ُُتْ َ َأَنتَ َ َأَنت‬
َ ‫(أَن‬.
َ
َ
So how do we turn a normal present tense fi’l into a commanding fi’l?
1. We start off by saying ‫ ال‬which means no
2. Then we make the fi’ls in their lightest form.
Using page 39 as an example we end up with:
ْ
َ ‫َال ََتنصر ْوا‬
ُ
ُ
ْ
َ َ‫َالَ َتنص ْرن‬
َ
ُ
َ
َ
ْ
‫َال ََتنصرا‬
ُ
َ
ْ
‫َال ََتنصرا‬
َ ُ
َ
َ
ْ
َ‫ر‬
َ ْ ‫ال ََتنص‬
ُ
ْ
ْ
َ‫ال ََتنصري‬
ُ
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES:‬‬
‫‪What is the forbidding form of these fi’ls:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َ .1‬تجعل ُ ْونَ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪ .2‬تُحافظَانَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬تُنَج َ‬
‫يَ‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫ََت َت َ َقط َعانَ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫تَش ُ َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َت ُسارع َ‬
‫ن‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ت َ ْستكِبانَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫كرانَ‬
‫ََتن َُ‬
‫ذ ْو َ‬
‫ن‬
‫تتخ‬
‫َ َ ُ َ‬
‫كرَ‬
‫‪ .11‬ت َتذ َ‬
‫ََ َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ََ .11‬تختلفُ ْو َ‬
‫ن‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َ .12‬تحسب َ‬
‫يَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن َ‬
‫ر َ‬
‫‪ُُ .13‬تاج َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ستأنسانَ َ‬
‫‪َ .14‬ت ْ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن َ‬
‫و َ‬
‫ر ُؤ ْ َ‬
‫‪َ .15‬تق َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫يَ َ‬
‫‪َ .16‬ت ُق ْول َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َ .17‬تخرجانَ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫‪ .18‬تب ْ‬
‫ن َ‬
‫ّش َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ُُ .19‬تيئَ َ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن َ‬
‫‪َ .21‬تعملُو َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
3
ANSWER KEY:
What is the commanding form of these fi’ls:
ْ
‫ال ََتجعل ُ ْوا‬
َ
ْ
َ‫ َتجعل ُ ْون‬.1
َ َ
‫ظا‬
‫الَ َت‬
َ ‫حاف‬
َ ُ
َ‫ظان‬
‫ ت‬.2
َ ‫حاف‬
َ ُ
ْ
ََ ‫ تُنَج‬.3
‫ي‬
ْ ‫التن‬
َ‫ّج‬
َ َُ
‫الَ َت َقط َعا‬
َ
ْ
َ ْ ُ ‫الَ َت َش‬
‫ع‬
ْ
َ‫الت ُسارعن‬
َ َ
َ
ْ
‫ال َ َت َ ْستكِبا‬
َ
ْ
‫كرا‬
ُ ‫الَ ََتن‬
‫ذ ْوا‬
ُ ‫الَ ََت ََتخ‬
َْ ‫ك‬
‫ر‬
َ ‫َالَ ََت َت َذ‬
َ‫َتت َقط َعان‬
َ َ
ْ
َ ُ ‫تَش‬
‫ع‬
ُ
ْ
َ ‫تُسارع‬
‫ن‬
َ
ْ
َ‫ت َ ْستكِبان‬
َ
ْ
َ‫كران‬
ُ ‫َتن‬
َ ‫ذ ْو‬
‫ن‬
‫تتخ‬
َ ُ َ َ
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
َ‫كر‬
َ ‫ تتذ‬.11
ُ َ ََ
Translate the following:
All of you, don’t say!
You (f) don’t assume!
All of you (f), don’t prepare!
Both of you(f), don’t leave!
You, don’t send down
Both of you, don’t warn
You (f), don’t work
All of you, don’t make
Both of you, don’t congratulate
All of you(f), don’t take
‫ول ُ ْوا‬
َ ْ ‫ الَ َت ُق‬.11
ْ
َ‫ الَ َتحسب ْي‬.12
َ
ْ
َ َ‫ الَ ُُتيَئن‬.13
َ َ
ْ
َ ‫ ال َ َتخرجا‬.14
َ ُ
ْ ْ
َ ‫ل‬
َ ‫ ال َتُنز‬.15
ْ
َ ‫ ال َتُنذرا‬.16
َ
ْ
ْ
َ ‫ل‬
َ ‫ ال َ َتعم‬.17
َ
ْ
َ ‫ ال َ َتجعل ُ ْوا‬.18
َ
َ ‫ ال َتُبّشا‬.19
َ َ
ْ
َ ‫ذوا‬
ُ ‫ الَ َت َتخ‬.21
1
13.9 Fi'l-Commanding
During this session, we learned how to form commanding fi’ls. We turn a present tense fi’l into
commanding fi’l using two steps but sometimes it requires three:
STEP 1: Make everything lightest
‫ تُنَافِس ْوا‬‫تُنَافِس ْون‬
َ ُ
ُ
ْ
ْ
ْ
‫ َتضحكِ ْي‬َ‫َتضحكِي‬
َ
َ
ْ
ْ
‫ ت َ ْسجد‬ ‫د‬
ُ ُ‫تَسج‬
ُ
ْ
ْ
‫ك ْي‬
‫ ض‬ ‫ك ْي‬
‫َتضح‬
ِ ‫ح‬
ِ
َ
َ
ْ
ْ
‫ ْسجد‬ ‫ت َ ْسجد‬
ُ
ُ
STEP 2: Get rid of the ‫ ت‬in the beginning
‫ َنا ِفس ْوا‬ ‫تُنَا ِفس ْوا‬
ُ
ُ
STEP 3: If the word can’t be read, we must add an alif ) ‫ ( ا‬in the beginning
(can be read) ‫تُنَا ِفس ْوا‬
ُ
ْ
ْ
‫ك ْي‬
‫ اض‬‫ك ْي‬
‫ض‬
ِ ‫ح‬
ِ ‫ح‬
َ ِ
َ
ْ
ْ
‫ا ُ ْسجد‬‫ْسجد‬
ُ
ُ
Some points we should remember about adding an alif:

We never add an alif if the word can be read

If the second to last letter as an
ُ, we add an ُ on the alif; with everything else we add an ُ
2
EXERCISES:
What is the commanding form of these fi’ls:
ْ
‫ َتجعل ُ ْون‬.1
َ َ
‫ان‬
‫ ت‬.2
َ ِ‫حاف‬
ِ ‫ظ‬
َ ُ
ْ
َ‫ تُنَ ِجي‬.3
‫ان‬
ِ ‫َت َت َقط ََع‬
ْ
‫تَش ُع‬
ُ
ْ
‫سارعن‬
‫ت‬
َ ِ ُ
ْ
‫ان‬
‫ِب‬
‫ك‬
‫ت َ ْست‬
ِ
ِ
َ
ْ
‫ران‬
ُ ‫َتن‬
ِ ‫ك‬
‫ذ ْون‬
‫تتخ‬
َ ُ ِ َ َ
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
‫كر‬
َ ‫ تتذ‬.11
ُ َ ََ
Translate the following:
All of you, say!
.1
You (f) assume!
.2
All of you (f), prepare!
.3
Both of you(f), leave!
.4
You, get big!
.5
Both of you, say!
.6
You (f), work
.7
All of you, make
.8
Both of you, congratulate
.9
All of you(f), take
.11
3
ANSWER KEY:
What is the commanding form of these fi’ls:
ْ ‫ا‬
‫جعل ُ ْوا‬
َ ِ
ْ
‫ َتجعل ُ ْون‬.11
َ َ
‫حافِظَا‬
َ
‫ان‬
‫ ت‬.12
َ ِ‫حاف‬
ِ ‫ظ‬
َ ُ
ْ
َ‫ تُنَ ِجي‬.13
ْ ‫ن‬
‫ّج‬
ِ َ
‫َت َقط َعا‬
َ
ْ ‫ا ْش‬
‫ع‬
ُ ُ
ْ
‫سارعن‬
َ ِ
ْ
‫ِا ْستك ِِبا‬
َ
ْ
‫كرا‬
ُ ‫ا ُن‬
‫ذ ْوا‬
ُ ‫ِا َت ِخ‬
‫ك ْر‬
َ ‫َت َذ‬
‫ان‬
ِ ‫َت َت َقط ََع‬
ْ
‫تَش ُع‬
ُ
ْ
‫سارعن‬
‫ت‬
َ ِ ُ
ْ
‫ان‬
‫ِب‬
‫ك‬
‫ت َ ْست‬
ِ
ِ
َ
ْ
‫ران‬
ُ ‫َتن‬
ِ ‫ك‬
‫ذ ْون‬
‫تتخ‬
َ ُ ِ َ َ
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
‫كر‬
َ ‫ تتذ‬.21
ُ َ ََ
Translate the following:
All of you, say!
You (f) assume!
All of you (f), prepare!
Both of you(f), leave!
You, get big!
Both of you, say!
You (f), work
All of you, make
Both of you, congratulate
All of you(f), take
‫ ق ُ ْول ُ ْوا‬.1
ْ ‫ا‬
‫حس ِب ْي‬
ِ
َ
ْ
‫َه ِيئن‬
َ
ْ
‫ا ُخرجا‬
َ ُ
ْ ْ
‫اُك ُِب‬
.2
.3
.4
.5
‫ ق ُ ْو َل‬.6
ْ ‫ ِا ْعم‬.7
‫ل‬
َِ
ْ ‫ ا‬.8
‫جعل ُ ْوا‬
َ ِ
‫ ب َ ِّشا‬.9
َ
ْ
‫ ِا َت ِخذن‬.11
َ
1
SIMPLIFIED GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Term
Definition
Term
Definition
ÙvC
Name of person, place
object, indefinite action,
state of being etc.
A word confined in a
dimension of time.
A word without meaning
until something follows it.
Number (a property of both
ism & fi’l )
Singular
½p¥Ü× pìº
Partly Flexible Ism
ïÜG×
½D©×
éìÎC ½D©×
½ß¤ß×
ø¿¤
Non-Flexible
з¾
½pd
klµ
ldCÞ/kp¿×
øìÜSN/íÜS×
Pair\t
¸ØV
Plural
pÆn×
TÛå×
ECpµC
´ß¾p× / ¸¾o
EߥÜ× / H¥Û
oÞpW× / pV
ø¾p·×
Masculine
÷pÇÛ
Common/ Indefinite
½p¥Ü×
ÐìÃR
ÐÃRC
EDF
ol¥×
pñDب /pìب
øÎߤß×öDØvC
Fully Flexible Ism
Feminine
Status
Doer/ Subject
Detail/ Object
After Of/ Possessive
Proper/ Definite
Heavy (present tense)
Heaviest (present tense)
Shape family
Indefinite Action
з¿ÎDF éG¡×
½pd
÷oDzÓC ÙvC
éìÎC oD¡×
ölOG×
pGh
ï¨D×
´oD©×
EߥÜ× /
Àì¿h
ÖÞrW× / ÀhC
p×C
ïèÛ
kpW× ïRÔR
éì¾ lër× ïRÔR
oDV ½pd
Pronoun/ Pronouns
Words from the Alladhee
family.
1
The Word before an ‘OF’. No Alif Laam +
Always Light
Word After ‘OF’. Always Jarr
The one being Described
The description or adjective (must match
mowsoof in all four properties & must come
after mowsoof)
Inna, Anna etc. force the ism after them to jar
form
The haadha, dhaalika words. (table in your
book)
The word after ism ul isharah that has ‘AL’
prefix.
The part before the ‘is’ or ‘are’
The part after the ‘is’ or ‘are’
Past Tense
Preset/ Future Tense
Light Present Tense, caused generally by ‘an’,
‘lan’, ‘kay’, ‘idhan’.
The Lightest present tense, caused generally by
‘in’, ‘lam’, ‘lamma’, ‘laam’, ‘laa of forbidding’,
and a conditional statement.
Command. Must be lightest without the ‘taa
beginning from 2nd person present tense’.
Forbidding. Must be lightest weight 2nd person
with a laa before it.
Fi’ls that are three letter words in the past tense
‘hua’ conjugation.
Words that are more than three letter words in
the past tense ‘hua’ conjugation.
A harf that forces the ism after it to jar.
2
1. I was eating too much chocolate.
2. My teeth began aching.
3. My dentist game me a root canal.
ùEÔú®ÎC ùÚßvûýoùlúØÎC ùlùµDv
úEÔú®ÎC ùÚìvûýoùlúØÎC ùlùµDv
ùÚßvûýoùlúØÎC ùEÔú®ÎC ùlùµDv
ùÚìvûýoùlúØÎC úEÔú®ÎC ùlùµDv
úEÔú®ÎC ùlùµDv ÚìvûýoùlúØÎC
ùÚßvûýoùlúØÎClùµDv E
ù Ôú®ÎC
(SUBJECT) DOER OF THE ACT = ´ß¾p× / ¸¾o
(OBJECT) DETAIL OF THE ACT = EߥÜ× / H¥Û
(POSSESSIVE) AFTER AN ‘OF’ = oÞpW× / pV
2
3
Form of I’rab Shortcuts:
Doer of the act = Raf’ (R)
Detail of the act = Nasb (N)
After an ‘OF’ = Jarr (J)
Raf’ Recognition:
ø þ
(u) or
(un) ending for singular
A (aa) or ùØA (aani) ending for pair
Ü (oo) or ÷ØÜ (oona) ending for plural
Nasb Recognition:
÷ ú
(a) or
(an) ending for singular
üì÷ (ay) or ùÛüé÷
(ayni) ending for pair
ìù
(eena) ending for plural
(ee) or
÷Ûéù
Jarr Recognition:
(i) or
÷ ú
(in) ending for singular
üì÷ (ay) or ùÛüé÷
(ayni) ending for pair
ìù
(eena) ending for plural
(ee) or
÷Ûéù
3
4
I’RAB
4
5
LIGHT OR HEAVY?
l
à >翶=
k
ô «ï ¾ç
Ìæbß U
å =ßÆ
Äß ·ò ¶=
O
ß ÉåF^
ß ¶ï =
G
å Éëìõ ¶>åE
>âEÇàU
P
ß Ø
í Mà Æß
Íð ·í V
á ¾å
>âÒÉå¿Âß
Áó =ßb¶å =ßǶï =
Áß ÇàEfß ®ï Ùí =ßÆ
À
ó ÉáÉßNß¾îÙ=
>ßN·î Mà
=ßÇEß ?í
¤à Eà fè ¶=
À
ß Èåb¶å >ß]
5
6
MASCULINE
FEMININE
÷ØÝÖùÇüsøÕ ùØDÖùÇüsøÕ ù×þ ÇüsøÕ
÷ÛêÖùÇüsøÕ ùÛüê÷ÖùÇüsøÕ Jú ÖùÇüsøÕ
÷ÛêÖùÇüsøÕ ùÛüê÷ÖùÇüsøÕ ×\ ùÇüsøÕ
þODÖùÇüsøÕ Ø
ù DQ÷ÖùÇüsøÕ öþ ÖùÇüsøÕ
\ODÖùÇüsøÕ ùÛêü ÷QÖùÇüsøÕ öú ÖùÇüsøÕ
\ODÖùÇüsøÕ ùÛüê÷QÖùÇüsøÕ \öÖùÇüsøÕ
BROKEN PLURAL
øÔþ Ìü¾E
úDÕÌü¾E
\ÔÌü¾E
6
ù DÖǾ
Ø
ùÛüê÷ÖǾ
ùÛüê÷ÖǾ
×þ Ǿ
úJÖǾ
\×Ǿ
7
What is the I’rab of the word in blue?
7
8
Tell Whether The Word is Raf’, Nasb, or Jarr
8
9
FULLY, PARTLY OR NON-FLEXIBLE?
H
å >ßJ³
å ¶ï =
THE BOOK
hó Èóh£ß ¶ï =
THE ONE WITH AUTHORITY
Îí«ï¶àg
FLATTERY
>ârå·á^àº
SINCERELY, A SINCERE PERSON
Áß Çá ¢ß fá ªå ¹ó A
THE LINEAGE OR DESCENDANTS OF FIR’OWN
Áß Çàufó £á ºè
THE ONES WHO IGNORE
½ß aß A
ADAM
¼ß ÉåÂ=ßfEá Có ¹ß AßÆ
THE DESCENDANTS OF IBRAHIM
Áß =ßf»á ¢å ¹ß AßÆ
THE DESCENDANTS OF IMRAN
¼ß Èßfá ºß
MARYAM
>çÈfó ²í gß
ZAKARIYYA
9
10
Using the translation as a clue, tell whether any of the words is partly flexible:
The sons of Israel.
1
The progeny of Fir’own.
2
The nation of Ibrahim.
3
The establisher of the prayer
4
The reward of the workers.
5
By the belly of Makkah.
6
The people of the book.
7
The destroyers of the people of this
town
The people of Yathrib.
8
The nation of Yunus.
10
For the people.
11
The love of desires
12
And isn’t Allah the one who know
best?
Without any support
13
Gardens of Eden.
15
The nation of Fir’own, do they refuse
to be conscious of me?
16
9
14
10
11
GENDER
11
12
FEMININE BECAUSE THE ARABS SAID SO…
During a ‫ ﺣﺮب‬, a soldier was
daydreaming looking at a ‫ ﻧﺠ ﻢ‬in the ‫ﺳ ﻤﺎء‬
until the ‫ ﺷ ﻤﺲ‬came up. When he
snapped out of it, he realized he is the
only ‫ ﻧﻔ ﺲ‬left on the battlefield
surrounded by ‫ﻧ ﺎر‬, so he used a ‫ دﻟ ﻮ‬full
of water to make a ‫ﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ ﺳ‬all the way to
safer ‫أرض‬. In the hot blowing ‫ رﻳ ﺢ‬he
was desperately looking for a ‫ ﺑ ﺌﺮ‬to
draw water from. In his search, he finds
an empty ‫ دار‬inside which he finds a ‫آﺄس‬
full of ‫ﺧﻤﺮ‬. He is tempted despite his
fear of ‫ ﺟﻬﻨ ﻢ‬to take a sip but wards off
his temptation and uses his ‫ ﻋﺼ ﺎ‬to strike
the drink.
12
13
BROKEN PLURALS: Tell The Number & Gender of the Word
¼á ÃEå Çî·®î
á¼óÃ£å »á i
ß
¼á Âå åe>ßrEá ?í
H
ã =ßd¢ß
Ð>ßëí j
è ¶=
L
æ >ß»·î žî
¼ê q
à
¼ã ³ï Eà
Ê
ã »á ¢à
¼á Ãà £ß Eå >áq?í
¼î²Ð=ßbÃß m
à
Ìîeß >ßRV
å ¶ï =
l
à >翶=
L
æ >ç¿Q
ß
T
ã =ßÆgá ?í
Ð>ß»i
áÙ
í=
13
14
Tell the Number, Gender and Status:
14
15
Tell the Number, Gender and Status of eacher:
L
å =ßÆ>ß»j
ç ¶=
Íå ³í Ñå Ø
í »ß ¶ï =
ÊIå ?ífß ºá =
À
ó ÉáJß«í Ñå Bí{
Íð Èß A
À
ó ÉáJß¿ßMá =
Ð>ßj¿ç¶=
Îߺ>ßJÉ߶ï =
ÎßEfá î̄ï¶=
Íð Èç eë cà
¼á ³î Ià >ß¿Eß Æß
L
à >ßÈA
À
ó ÉáJßÒߺå
óÁ>ßJç¿ßQ
L
å >ßÒÉëj
ç ¶=
Íæ ¶í >ßÃR
ß Eå
15
16
TYPE
16
17
Are the following Common or Proper?
The Prayers
The Middle, The balanced, The Excellent
Strange
People
This
Your Lord
His Permission
The Promise of Allah
Drink
He
The one who
The Signs
For a nation
Zakariyya
Oh Lord
This Qur’
17
18
PRONOUN ASSOCIATIONS
ü×øå
DÖøå
÷Ýøå
×å
×å
DÖå
DÖå
ùä äø
äù äø
û÷Ûøå
û÷Ûøå
û÷Ûøå
Nasb (attached at the end)
Jarr (attached at the end)
DÖøå ÷íùå
DÖøå
DÖøå
Då
Då
Nasb (attached at the end)
Jarr (attached at the end)
ü×øQüÙE DÖøQüÙE ÷RüÙE
ü×øÂ
ü×øÂ
DÖøÂ
DÖøÂ
÷Á
÷
Á
Nasb (attached at the end)
Jarr (attached at the end)
ûÛøQÙE DÖøQüÙE ùRÙE
û÷ÛøÂ
û÷ÛøÂ
DÖøÂ
DÖøÂ
ùÁ
ù
Á
øÛücÙ
DÙE
DÙ
DÙ
íÙ
ì
18
Nasb (attached at the end)
Jarr (attached at the end)
Nasb (attached at the end)
*Jarr (attached at the end)
19
The Primary Rules for Idhafah
1.
Mudhaf must be
a. Light
b. Without Alif – Laam
2.
Mudhaf Ilaih Must be
a. Jarr
3.
The Basic Types of Idhafah are:
a. Typical: ‘of’ in translation.
b. Pronoun: Attached to an Ism.
c. Special Mudhafs
4.
The Mudhaf:
a. Determines 3 properties.
b. Type is dictated by Mudhaf Ilaih
5.
Nothing may come between the two.
19
20
3 TYPES OF IDHAFAH
There are many types of Idhafah constructions. The three most important ones to note
are the ones we covered in this course. The rest of them are self evident and one need not
get into unnecessary technicalities for a beginners course. Students must be strong in
their ability to recognize a mudhaf + mudhaf Ilaih situation. The best way to do that is to
know these three types of Idhafah well.
Type 1: Conventional Mudhaf + Mudhaf Ilaih
Two isms coming together to produce the meanings ‘The _M_ of M.I.’.
Here are some English examples with their Arabic Equivalent:
The House of Allah.
éÏÎC PìF
The Prayers of the Prophet.
ÍßvpÎC MCßϤ
The Deeds of the Companions.
The Example of a Mosquito.
øFDe¥ÎC ÍDص‫أ‬
ø¨ß·F ÐS×
Type 2: Special Mudhaf + Regular Mudhaf Ilaih
This construction, though an idhafah does not necessarily produce the ‘of’ meaning. The
following are commonly used special mudhafs.
Type 3: Mudhaf + Attached Pronouns.
Whenever an ism is attached to a pronoun, that ism acts as a mudhaf and the attached
pronoun as the mudhaf Ilaih. Though the attached pronouns don’t look like the
singular, pair or plural jarr that we are used to identifying from our Ism table, they are
still jarr which is why they are studied separately.
; ÙûúèGOÆ ;DØûúèGOÆ ;`úûéGOÆ
;ÝûúèGOÆ ;DØûúèGOÆ ;DèGOÆ
; þÙúÇGOÆ ;DØúÇGOÆ ;ùÈGOÆ
;ùýÝúÇGOÆ ;DØúÇGOÆ ;ûÈGOÆ
etc.
20
21
Idhafah Recognition Drill:
Tell whether each is an instance of Idhafah or not.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
21
22
IDHAFA WITH PRONOUNS: FILL IN THE BLANKS WITH PRONOUNS.
¼î³j
å «î ¾í?
______ selves.
____________ rebellion.
¼á ³
î Éà§á Eß
__________ glitter.
>ßêífà ]
á gà
¼á Ãà Âß ÇàQÆà
__________faces.
>ß¾fà ºá ?í
___________command.
¼á Ãà ºß Çá ®í
____________ nation.
_____________ family or people or dwellers.
>ß÷î Âá ?í
Åàaß ÆàbU
à
_______________ boundaries.
¼á ³
î ¾ß >í³ºß
_______________ place.
>ß÷å Ná»å Eå
With _________ example or likeness.
Äå ºë Ú
î ªí
Then for ____________ mother.
À
ç Ãó ·å Âá ?í
___________ family.
À
ç Âà =ßbU
á Có
One of _____________.
_______________ associates.
¼á ²î Õà Bí²fß m
à
_______________ marriage gifts.
À
ç Ãó Iå >í®bà q
ß
______________ action or work.
Êå·»ß ¢ß
´
í Eë eß
_______________ lord.
22
23
SPECIAL IDHAFAH: FILL IN THE BLANKS WITH CORERCT MEANINGS
__________ the right/ justification / truth/ evidence.
__________ all of you.
__________ them.
__________ two women.
_______________ them.
_____________ you all.
__________________ us.
__________________ them.
_________________ two sisters.
__________________ that for you all.
_________________ own behalf.
_________________ the obligation.
_________________ that.
_________________ have.
_________________ her / it.
___________________ the tree.
___________________ both of them.
23
24
The Primary Rules for Mowsoof + Sifah
1.
Mowsoof must be
a. First
b. Only One
2.
Sifah
a.
b.
c.
d.
is the same as Mowsoof in 4 properties
is after the Mowsoof
may be more than one
may not be right after mowsoof
24
25
Tell whether each is an instance of Mowsoof + Sifah or not.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
25
26
IS A MOWSOOF + SIFAH IN EACH OF THE FOLLOWING?
26
27
HUROOF OF JARR IN THE QUR’AN
With the believers. (With, because of, by, at, in
etc.)
They said, “By Allah!”
There actions are like ashes which the wind
blows fiercely on a stormy day.
And for you. The
confused with this
of emphasis should never be
because this is the only one that
forces to Jarr.
(I swear) By the fleeting passage of time!
Shouldn’t be confused with
eaning ‘and’.
From amongst yourselves
In just retribution there is life
They ask you regarding the spoils of war
And upon Allah the believers should place their
complete trust. (On, against, mandatory on, over
and upon)
Until the rise of dawn
Until a time (3 times in Qur’an)
It (the Qur’an) guides towards what is right.
27
28
HUROOF OF NASB
Certainly Allah is
That they are / That certainly they are
As though there is deafness in his ear (literally
barrier)
Woe is me! If only I didn’t take so-and-so for a
friend!
On the contrary righteousness is
So that you may be grateful.
28
29
Sentence Vs. Fragment Drill:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
29
30
POINTING WORDS ASSOCIATIONS
ôÉãå ØClå Clå
ôÉãå
ôÉãå
Clå
Clå
Nasb
ôÉãå ØDPDå älå
FEM.
NEAR
ôÉãå
ôÉãå
Ûélå
Ûélå
MASC.
NEAR
älå
älå
Nasb
ÁôÉÜE ÄÙCk ÄÆk
MASC.
FAR
ÁôÉÜE
ÁôÉÜE
ÛêPDå
ÛêPDå
Jarr
ÄÆk
ÄÆk
Nasb
ÁôÉÜE ÄÙDP ÄÇP
FEM.
FAR
ÁôÉÜE
ÁôÉÜE
ÄÚék
ÄÚék
Jarr
ÄÚêP
ÄÚêP
ÄÇP
ÄÇP
Jarr
Nasb
Jarr
If the word after any of these has ‘AL’, it becomes a
fragment like ‘This book’. If the word after does not
have ‘AL’ it becomes a sentence like ‘This is a book.’
|
30
31
The primary rules for Jumlah Ismiyah
1.
Try to analyze cause and effect between every
consecutive word based on the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Mudhaf + Mudhaf Ilaih
Mowsoof + Sifah
Harf of Jarr + its victim
Harf of Nasb + its victim
Ismul Isharah + Musharun Ilaih
At any point in your analysis if you are unable
to establish cause and effect, place an ‘is’ or an
‘am’ or an ‘are’ in the translation.
2.
3.
The part before the ‘is’ is called Mubtada’
The part after is called ‘Khabar’.
31
32
Draw a line where the part before the ‘is’ ends and the part after the ‘is’ begins.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
32
33
Plural
Pair
Singular
Ùç
DØç
CÞúpù¥ùÛ
Cùpù¥ùÛ
They helped.
They (2) helped.
Ýç
They helped (f).
He helped.
DùNùpù¥ùÛ
They (2) helped (f).
ÙOÛC
ÙúNþpù¥ùÛ
You all helped.
ùýÝúNþpù¥ùÛ
We helped
ßç
A
íç
AT
ùPÛC
PAUSE+ TA
ûPÛC
PAUSE+ TI
DÛC
PAUSE+ TU
ÝeÛ
PAUSE+ NAA
Masculine 2nd Person
ûPÛC
Feminine 2nd Person
You helped.
DùØúNþpù¥ùÛ
DùÛþpù¥ùÛ
ùPÛC
ùMþpù¥ùÛ
DØOÛC
You two helped.
Feminine 3rd Person
She helped.
DùØúNþpù¥ùÛ
You two helped.
íç
þMùpù¥ùÛ
DØOÛC
ÝúOÛC
Masculine 3rd Person
ùpù¥ùÛ
DØç
ùÚþpù¥ùÛ
You all helped (f).
ßç
ûMþpù¥ùÛ
You helped (f).
ÝeÛ
úMþpù¥ùÛ
I helped.
etc.
33
DÛC
ÙÏÇO×
1st Person
34
WHAT PRONOUN IS BEHIND EACH PAST TENSE?
34
35
WHAT PRONOUN IS BEHIND EACH PAST TENSE?
35
Translate accurately based on the English clues
36
To destroy
>ß¿³ï ·í Âá ?í
1
Ð>ßQ
2
K
á ·í î̄ßM
3
>翳õ ºß
4
To come
To become heavy
To settle (someone else)
To forbid
´
í £ß ¿ßºß
5
To throw out
Êå¿JßÈá Çß ¦ï ?í
6
´
í £ß FåIß
To follow
7
l
ß Çß i
á Çß ªí
To whisper evil suggestions
>ß»àÃ»ß i
ß >í®
To swear to someone
8
9
>í®=ßc
10
To wrong
>ß¿»á ·í ží
11
To expel
T
ß fß ]
á ?í
12
To taste
=ïÇî·£ß ªí
To do
13
fß ºß ?í
To command
14
To make illegal / forbid
½ß fç U
ß
15
To come
Ð>ßQ
16
=ïÆàfFß³ï Jßi
á
To lie against
To be arrogant
36
=ïÇàEdç ²í
17
37
FILL IN THE BLANKS WITH APPROPRIATE PRONOUNS.
__________ created _________.
¼á ³
î í̄ ·í ]
ß
__________ gave _____________ life.
¼á ²î >ßÉU
á @íªí
__________ fashioned _____________.
À
ç Âà =çÇj
ß ªí
__________ made _____________.
¼á ²î >ß¿·ï £ß Q
ß
And _______________ came to ________________.
¼á Ãà Iá Ð>ßQÆß
Then ________________ made ______________.
>ßÂ>ß¿·ï £ß R
ß ªí
__________________ understood _______________.
Then _________________slaughtered______________.
ÅàÇî·í̄ ¢ß
>ßÂÇàVEß dß ªí
_________________touched______________.
¼á Ãà Jáj
ç ºß
__________________ gave _________________.
¼î²>ß¿ÉáIß A
_________________ wronged _______________.
>ß¾Çà»·í ží
_________________ seized _______________.
¼î³áIßdß]í@íª
_________________ rescued _______________.
¼î²>ß¿ÉáR
ç ¾ß
_________________ favored _______________.
¼á ³
î Jà·ï v
ç ªí
_________________ expelled _______________.
>ß»àÃßQßfá]í@íª
___________________ taught ______________.
>ß¿ßJá»õ·ß¢
___________________ brought before ______________.
37
¼á Ãà u
ß fß ¢ß
38
FILL IN THE BLANKS WITH APPROPRIATE PRONOUNS.
__________ enables or facilitates travel for _________.
¼á ²î fà Éëj
ß Èà
__________ gave _____________ life.
¼á ²î >ßÉU
á @íªí
__________ fashioned _____________.
À
ç Âà =çÇj
ß ªí
__________ made _____________.
¼á ²î >ß¿·ï £ß Q
ß
And _______________ came to ________________.
¼á Ãà Iá Ð>ßQÆß
Then ________________ made ______________.
>ßÂ>ß¿·ï £ß R
ß ªí
__________________ understood _______________.
Then _________________slaughtered______________.
ÅàÇî·í̄ ¢ß
>Âß ÇàVEß dß ªí
_________________touched______________.
¼á Ãà Jáj
ç ºß
__________________ gave _________________.
¼î²>ß¿ÉáIß A
_________________ wronged _______________.
>ß¾Çà»·í ží
_________________ seized _______________.
¼î³áIßdß]í@íª
_________________ rescued _______________.
¼î²>ß¿ÉáR
ç ¾ß
_________________ favored _______________.
¼á ³
î Jà·ï v
ç ªí
_________________ expelled _______________.
>ß»àÃßQßfá]í@íª
___________________ taught ______________.
>ß¿ßJá»õ·ß¢
___________________ brought before ______________.
38
¼á Ãà u
ß fß ¢ß
39
PRESENT TENSE
¸ØV
ùÚÞúpú¥þÜùë
íÜS×
Ùç
They help.
ùÚþpú¥þÜùë
You all help (f).
ûÚCùpú¥þÜùN
úpú¥þÜùë
ûÚCùpú¥þÜùN
úpú¥þÜùN
ûÚCùpú¥þÜùN
HñDº pÆn×
Masculine 3rd Person
íç
HñDº TÛå×
Feminine 3rd Person
She helps.
DØOÛC
úpú¥þÜùN
You two help.
ÝúOÛC
ßç
He helps.
DØç
They (2) help (f).
ÙOÛC
You all help.
ùÚþpú¥þÜùN
DØç
They (2) help.
Ýç
They help (f).
ùÚÞúpú¥þÜùN
ûÚCùpú¥þÜùë
kp¿×
PÛC
p¨DdpÆn×
Masculine 2nd Person
You help.
DØOÛC
ùÝëûpú¥þÜùN
You two help (f).
PÛC
p¨DdTÛå×
Feminine 2nd Person
You help (f).
ÝeÛ
DÛC
úpú¥þÜùÛ
úpú¥þÛùC
ÙÏÇO×
1st Person
I help.
We help
Some Shortcuts:
‘YA’ Beginning = Someone Who’s Not Here (3rd Person, i.e. he, she, they etc.)
The Present Tense for ‘She’ and ‘You (m)’ is the same.
‘OONA’ was used in Ism study to show plural. It does the same thing here.
‘AANI’ was used in Ism study to show pair. It does the same thing here.
39
Translate accurately based on the English clues
40
Áß Æàf²õ dß Iß
To remember
1
Áß Çà»·å Ÿ
ï Èå
To wrong
Áß ÇàIÇà»Iß
To live and To die
Áß Çá ÉßV
á Iß
¼á Ãà ¾ß Æá fß Iß
To see (someone else)
Áß Çà»·í £á Iß
To say
5
Áß Çî¶Çî̄ßI
Áß ÆàaÇà£Iß
To return
G
è V
å Èà
To love
6
7
Áß ÇàFj
ßV
á Èß
To assume
3
4
fà ºà @ïÈß
To command
2
8
9
To explain
¸
àr
ë «í ¾à
10
To understand
Áß Çà»·í £á Èß
11
Áß Æàf]
å @ïJßj
á Èß
12
Áß Çàºbå ï̄ßJj
á Èß
To delay and To advance (make early)
Áß Çèrî̄ßÈ
13
To reach
¼á Ãà ¶î >ß¿Èß
14
To call
Áß Çà¢bá Iß
15
To narrate
Áß Çà»·í £á Iß
To know
16
Áß Çî·]
à bá Èß
To enter
40
17
41
PRESENT TENSE: FILL IN THE BLANKS WITH APPROPRIATE PRONOUNS.
_______________ commit(s) _________.
>ßþå >ßÉIå @ïÈß
__________ advise (s) or sermon(s) _____________ .
¼î³Ÿî £å Èß
Are/ Is __________ taking _____________?
Äà ¾ß Æàd]
à @ïIß ?í
Äà ¾á bà ¶õ
__________ own behalf.
Then _______________ return(s) ________________.
And ________________ guide(s) ______________.
>ßÂaç fà ¿ßªí
¼á ³
î ÈåbÃá ÈßÆß
____________ attack(s) or afflict (s) or test(s) ___________.
¼î³¿àJå«ï Èß
_________________has (ve) in store for ______________.
¼á Âà bà £å ¾ß
_________________multiply(s) ______________.
>ßÃ«ï ¢å >ßvÈà
__________________ throw(s) / cast(s)_________________.
Äå Éå·r
á ¾à
_________________ will certainly show _______________.
´
í ¿çÈßfó ¾à
_________________ give(s) _______________.
_________________ provide(s) _______________.
_________________ return (s) _______________.
_________________ take(s) _______________ in full.
Äå ÉåIÖá ¾à
¼î³î®àgáfßÈ
Åàbà Éå£Èà
À
ç Âà >õªÇß JßÈß
___________________ gather(s) ______________.
¼á Âà fà n
àV
á ¾ß
___________________ inform(s) ______________.
¼î³ÒàFë¿ß¿àªí
41
42
FILL IN THE BLANKS WITH APPROPRIATE PRONOUNS.
__________ appoint(s).
__________ gave _____________ life.
________________ command (s) people towards
good.
__________ assume(s) that they are to meet their
Lord.
_________ will never accept your demand.
_______take(s).
________________please(s) the viewers.
_________________ask or plea
_________________eat (s) the wealth of the orphans.
__________________ don’t (doesn’t) know.
_________________ bequest(s) or leave(s) a will.
_________________ come(s) or commit (s)
Should _________________ tell you all?
_________________ hide(s) or cover(s).
_________________ alone accept(s) their repentence.
How can ____________ be?
And _____________ explain(s) the ayaat.
42
43
Is the Present Tense Normal, Light or Lightest?
=Çè¿»à Iß
=Çîªeß >ߣJ߶å
=Ç࿺å Öá Ià
¸
ó]
à bá Èß
=Çà£ÉåìIà
=ÇàrU
á ?íÆß
Áß Çà»·ù £ß Ià
¼à ·í £á Èß
Áß Çî·»ß £á Iß
Áó =ßbR
àj
á Èß
=Æàf»å Iß ?ï
Áó >ßÉå̄ßJ·ï Èß
óÁ>ßÉå§áFßÈ
Äà ¶î @íj
á Èß
©à fà «ï ¿ßi
ß
=Æàd«î ¿ßI
43
44
ACTION WITHOUT TIME (ISM
MASDAR)
PRESENT FI’L
PAST FI’L
>ðºØáiC
¼à ·å j
á Èà
¼ß ·í i
á ?í
>ð»É·á£Iß
¼à ·åä £ß Èà
¼ß ·õ ¢ß
=ða>ÃåQ
bà Âå >RàÈ
bß Âß >Q
ð=fèFí³ßI
fà Fç³í JßÈß
fß Fç³í Iß
úÌøïDs÷P
øÈ÷ïDs÷Q÷é
÷È÷ïDs÷P
DúLCnùQü¾ùG
øKùn÷Qü¿÷é
÷K÷n÷Qü¾ùG
ImD©ù»üÙùG
ønù©÷»üÚ÷é
÷n÷©÷»üÙùG
ð=e>«á§åJáiC
fà «å §á Jßj
á Èß
fß «í §á Jßi
áC
44
Amr
Recognition Drill:
45
Are the following commands?
To remember
1
To carve
2
To congratulate
3
To wrong
4
To bring out
5
To follow
6
To obey
7
To accept
8
To devote oneself, to prostrate, to bow
down
9
To make or to place
10
To understand
11
To delay and To advance (make early)
12
To narrate
13
To reach
14
To call
15
To know
16
To enter
17
45
46
Retracing Commands:
Can you retrace the fi’l back to its normal, non-commanding state?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
46
47
How have the following sentences been negated?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
47
48
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
48
49
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
49
50
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
50
51
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
51
52
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
52
53
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
53
54
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
54
55
157.
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
170.
171.
172.
173.
174.
55
56
Retracing Commands:
Can you retrace the fi’l back to its normal, non-commanding state?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
56
57
Which bolded words are NOT from the Ta’leem family?
57
58
Qur’anic Examples of the TAKABBURAN family:
2:74
2:102
14:48
2:166
2:275
3:191
2:228
28:18
24:63
48:24
19:90
14:30
58:11
58
59
Which bolded words are NOT from the Mujaahadah family?
59
60
Which bolded words are NOT from the Islah family?
Áß Çà»Éå̄àÈß
å
Áß Ç࿺å Öá Èà
Áß ÇàV·å «ï »à ¶ï =
¼á Ãà Iß eá dß ¾í?
Áß Çà¢aå >ß^Èà
=ïÆàbj
å «ï Ià
Áß ÇàV·å r
á ºà
¼à ·í £á Èß
L
á Ð>ßu?í
œ
ñ ÉåVºà
¼ß ·í žï ?í
å
¼á ³î ÉåÉV
á Èà
T
ß fß ]
á ?í
¼á ³î JàÉå»Èà
Äà ¶î @íj
á Èß
©à fà «ï ¿ßi
ß
=Æàd«î ¿ßI
60
1
3.8.1 Families 6, 7, and 8
Today, we are going to learn three families in one go. Don’t worry—they’re pretty similar, so just pay
attention, and you’ll learn them in no time. Here they are:
ْ
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ً
ً
ً
ْ
‫اﻧﻜﺴﺎرا‬
ْ
‫اﻧﻜ‬
ْ
‫ﻳ ﻨﻜ‬
All of these families start with an ‫ ا‬. Let’s take the first one, and try the sarf sagheer:
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮﻣ ْﻘﱰ‬
‫ب‬
ً
ٌ ‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﻘﱰ‬
‫ب‬
ً
ْ
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
ْ ‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗ ْﻘﱰ‬%‫و اﻟ‬
‫ب‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
ْ ‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ا ْﻗﱰ‬
‫ب‬
ٌ ‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ْﻘﱰ‬
‫ب‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
Simple enough, right? This family has a ‫ ت‬in it—that’s what distinguishes it from the other two. The
second family’s sarf sagheer is similar:
ٌ
ً ‫ا ْﻧﻜﺴﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﻨﻜ‬
ْ
ْ
‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻜ‬%‫و اﻟ‬
ٌ
ْ
‫ﻳﻨ ﻜ‬
ْ
ْ
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻜ‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ اﻧﻜ‬
ْ
‫اﻧﻜ‬
This one seems a little short, right? This is a shortcut family—there isn’t any passive for it, so you go
straight to ‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ‬. The last family:
ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
ْ
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
ً
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎرا‬
ً ‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮ‬, ‫ﻲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻻ‬%‫و اﻟ‬
ْ
‫و اﻟﻈﺮف ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣ ْﺴﺘﻐﻔ ٌﺮ‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔ ْﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
2
You now know all eight families. Practice running through lots of examples to help solidify them in your
mind. You know the first three families by heart, so it’ll be hard to forget them. As for the others, here
are some tips to help you keep them straight:
1. The first three families are the ONLY ones in which the present tense, commanding, and forbidding
have a dummah.
ْ
ً ‫ﺧﺒﺎرا‬
‫إ‬
ً
ْ
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎدا ً و ﻣﺠﺎﻫﺪ ًة‬
2.
ْ
‫ﻳﺨﱪ‬
ْ
‫أﺧﱪ‬
‫ﻢ‬8‫ﻳﻌﻠ‬
‫ﻢ‬8‫ﻋﻠ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺪ‬
The next two all begin with ta, and pretty much have fatha’s across the board (except the masdar):
ً
‫ﻠﻤﺎ‬8 ‫ﺗﻌ‬
ً ‫ﺴﺎﺋﻼ‬,
‫ﻠﻢ‬8 ‫ﻳﺘﻌ‬
‫ﻠﻢ‬8 ‫ﺗﻌ‬
‫ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬B‫ﻳ‬
‫ﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬,
3. The last three are ‫ ا‬families. They have an ‫ ا‬in the past tense and the masdar. Notice that the ‫ا‬
ً
ْ
doesn’t have a hamza like in ‫إﺧﺒﺎرا‬.
ْ
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
ْ
‫اﻗﱰب‬
ً ‫ا ْﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ْ
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
ً
ً ‫ا ْﻧﻜﺴﺎرا‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨﻜ‬
ْ
‫اﻧ ﻜ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪EXERCISES‬‬
‫‪A. Practice. Do the sarf sahgeer of each of these, using the first page as a guide (if you need it!):‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻘﱰب‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻗﱰاﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻈﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻈﻢ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻢ‬
‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺼﺮ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺼﺎرا‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺒﻖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺎﻗﺎ‬
‫اﻧ‪FB‬‬
‫ﻳﻨ‪FB‬‬
‫اﻧ‪B‬ﺸﺎرا‬
‫اﻋﺘﺰل‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺰل‬
‫اﻋﺘﺰاﻻ‬
‫اﻏﱰف‬
‫ﻳﻐﱰف‬
‫اﻏﱰاﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺑ‪J‬ﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺒ‪J‬ﻞ‬
‫اﺑ‪J‬ﺎﻻ‬
‫اﻗﱰن‬
‫ﻳﻘﱰن‬
‫اﻗﱰاﻧﺎ‬
‫اﻛ‪B‬ﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻜ‪B‬ﺴﺐ‬
‫اﻛ‪B‬ﺴﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺟ‪J‬ﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺠ‪J‬ﺪ‬
‫اﺟ‪J‬ﺎدا‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎ‬
‫اﻏ‪B‬ﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻐ‪B‬ﺴﻞ‬
‫اﻏ‪B‬ﺴﺎﻻ‬
‫اﺟﺘﻨﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺘﻨﺐ‬
‫اﺟﺘﻨﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺣ‪B‬ﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺤ‪B‬ﺴﺐ‬
‫اﺣ‪B‬ﺴﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻗﺘﺘﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻞ‬
‫اﻗﺘﺘﺎﻻ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻘﻠﺐ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻘﻠﺐ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻧﻘﻼﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺒﻌﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ‬
‫اﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻔﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﻠﻖ‬
‫اﻧﻔﻼﻗﺎ‬
‫اﻧﺒﺠﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﺠﺲ‬
‫اﻧﺒﺠﺎﺳﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻘ‪U‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻘ‪U‬‬
‫اﻧﻘﻌﺎرا‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫!‪ family does not have passives‬اﻧﻘﻠﺐ ‪Remember that the‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ا‪V‬ﺴﻠﺦ‬
‫ﻳ‪X‬ﺴﻠﺦ‬
‫ا‪V‬ﺴﻼﺧﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻜﺪر‬
‫ﻳﻨﻜﺪر‬
‫اﻧﻜﺪارا‬
‫ا‪Y‬ﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳ‪%‬ﻤﺮ‬
‫ا‪Y‬ﻤﺎرا‬
‫اﻧﺼﺮف‬
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺮف‬
‫اﻧﺼﺮاﻓﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫اﻧﻄﻼﻗﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻔﺠﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﺠﺮ‬
‫اﻧﻔﺠﺎرا‬
‫اﻧﻔﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻔﻄﺮ‬
‫اﻧﻔﻄﺎرا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ا ْﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ‬
‫اﺳﺘ ْﻐﻔﺎرا ً‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻻ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺄذن‬
‫ﺴﺘﺄذن‬
‫اﺳﺘﺄذاﻧﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﻼﺻﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﻼﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪل‬
‫ﺴﺘﺒﺪل‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻻ‬
‫اﺳﺘ_‪F‬‬
‫ﺴﺘ_‪F‬‬
‫اﺳﺘ_ﺸﺎرا‬
‫اﺳﺘﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺤﻔﺎﻇﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺮج‬
‫ﺴﺘﺨﺮج‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺮاﺟﺎ‬
‫اﺳﱰﻫﺐ‬
‫ﺴﱰﻫﺐ‬
‫اﺳﱰﻫﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻌﻤﺮ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎرا‬
‫اﺳ‪B‬ﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺴ‪B‬ﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫اﺳ‪B‬ﺸﻬﺎدا‬
‫اﺳﺘﺼﺮخ‬
‫ﺴﺘﺼﺮخ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺼﺮاﺧﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻀﻌﻒ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻀﻌﻒ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻀﻌﺎﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻄﻌﻢ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻄﻌﻢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻄﻌﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺘﺐ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻌﺘﺐ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺘﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻌﺠﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺠﺎﻻ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺼﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫‪Practice for the last family:‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻠﻆ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻐﻠﻆ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻐﻼﻇﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻤﺴﻚ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺴﺎﻛﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻨﻜﺢ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻨﻜﺢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻨﻜﺎﺣﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻨﻜﻒ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻨﻜﻒ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻨﻜﺎﻓﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﱪ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻜﱪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺒﺎرا‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻜﺜﺮ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺜﺎرا‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫ﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻋﺎ‬
1 Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 1 This is the beginning of Unit 2, in which we will be studying the first 10 ayat of Surah Al-­‐Kahf. There are 3 goals of this unit: 1. Know those 10 ayat by heart 2. Know every single word in those ayat, and what each one means 3. Know how to apply all the grammar learned in Unit 1 to those 10 ayat Grammar Meaning Raf’, singular, masculine, proper Praise and gratitude Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr For Jarr, singular, masculine, proper Allah Ism Mawsool Jarr, singular, masculine, proper Review 7 types of words that are always proper The One who Past tense Fi’l Review conjugations He sent down Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr Upon Mudaf Jarr, singular, masculine, proper Slave Mudaf Ilaih His Detail = Maf’ool Nasb, singular, masculine, proper The book Harf And Word
3 3
’
0 ̌Ç
/
%1
/ 2 1g
+Ư
1 / 2 3
/ ˜Ï/ %
/
Ơ/ ³ /
1 z3 ³ ’
/
(1 3
v€Ɔ
1 Ç / /
) /
2 Lightest Harf Did not Lightest present tense Fi’l Review conjugations He makes Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr In Majroor It Maf’ool Nasb, singular, masculine, common Crookedness (confusion, evil) Something that is bent Ê3 /Ç
3 3
´ˆÛ
Æ
/ /
/
%
(
0
,
Ö³1
v‡
/
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember 3 3 3
3 3
3
3 3
/
2
Ç
(>)v‡Ö³1 Ɣ/ Æ´ˆÛÊ/Ç)v€Ɔ
1 Ç (1 ’1 z³/ Ơ/ ³/ %/ ˜Ï/ +Ư
1 1g/ 2 1 ’
0 ̌
/
/ / 0 / / / / /
/
Praise and gratitude is for Allah who sent down upon His slave the book, and He did not make in it crookedness.
1 Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 2 Grammar Meaning Word
Maf’ool Nasb, singular, masculine, common Something that stands upright/straight and does not move from its place Light Harf Review light and lightest Harf So that Light present tense Fi’l Review conjugations He/it warns Mawsoof Nasb, singular, masculine, common A war Sifah Nasb, singular, masculine, common Intense Harf Jarr Review Harf Harr From 3 Ë Î
1
Majroor – non-­‐flexible Special Mudaf Especially from 3
'ƒ 0 /
Mudaf Ilaih Him Harf And Light present tense Fi’l Review conjugations He/it congratulates Maf’ool Mawsoof Nasb, plural, masculine, proper Ism Mawsool Sifah Nasb, plural, masculine, proper Present tense Fi’l Review conjugations The believers The ones who They work/do vÌ, Ü2 1 ¿/
%1
3
”1 ÐÛ
/ 0
3
v›, ly /
, ’1 Ÿ ’Û
/
(
0
) /
ǃ
2 1 /ƾ0Û /
3 3
1ÐË1 nÌ0 Ç /è
ÎÛƯ
1 /2 /
3
0 ÈÌ´Û
'Ö
/ /
/
2 Maf’ool Nasb, plural, feminine, proper A few good things Harf Nasb Review Harf Nasb That '/ 2 / Harf Jarr Review Harf Harr For %/
Majroor Them 3Ɲ
0
Mawsoof Nasb, singular, masculine, common Reward Sifah Nasb, singular, masculine, common Beautiful v
Çv¤Ç 1 Œ
/ 1 /2
3
–, ‡/ v,М‹
/ /
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember 3
3 3
3
3 3
3
,
, Ü1 ¿
,
/1 2 /è
'Ö0ÈÌ´Û ÎÛƯ
1ÐË1 nÌ0 Ç ǃ
ƾ
Û
)
Ò
Ï
ƒ
Î
Ë
’Û
’
Ÿ
v
›
l
y
”
Ð
Ü
Ç
v
Ì
1
1
1
1
/
1
2
/
2/
/ / /
/
/ / 0
/ /0 / 0 0
3 3
(?)v,М‹ –, ‡/ ƭ0 /Ç'/ 2 / v
Çv¤Ç
1 Œ
/ 1 /2
/ /
Standing upright so that he/it warns about an intense war especially from Him, and so that he/it congratulates the believers who do a few good things that a beautiful reward is for them.
1 Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayahs 3-­‐5 Grammar Meaning Word
/è„1 Ã
1 vË/
Nasb, plural, masculine, common Those who will remain Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr In î1
Majroor It (1 Maf’ool Nasb, singular, masculine, common Forever Harf And Light present tense Fi’l Review conjugations He/it warns Ism Mawsool The ones who Past tense Fi’l Review conjugations They said Past tense Fi’l Review conjugations He took Outside doer, Raf’ The word Allah = Lafdh-­‐ul-­‐Jalalah Allah g
0 /2
Maf’ool Nasb, singular, masculine, common A son , / )
ƒ
/
Not at all Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr Have ’, y/ /
)
/
3
”1 Ð Û
/ 0
Ư
ÎÛ
1 /2 /
Ö0Çv¿/
”/ 
/ / 2 vË
/
%/
2 Majroor They 3Ɲ
0
Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr About 1
Majroor He/it Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr Any Jarr, singular, masculine, common Knowledge Harf And )
/
Nor ã
Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr Have %1
Mudaf Jarr, broken plural, masculine, common Fathers Mudaf Ilaih Their Past tense Fi’l Review conjugations She/it was huge Nasb, singular, feminine, common As a word Present tense Fi’l Review conjugations She/it comes out Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr From Mudaf Jarr, broken plural, masculine, common Mouths (1 3 Ë
Î
1
3
. ȳ1
Ê
ğv
1 y
/
3Ɲ
1
3
é
/
/ 0 Ã
|, ÌÈ1 Ã
/ /
3
–/
0 0
3 Ë1 Î
3
(1 Ö»/ /
3 Mudaf Ilaih Their 3Ɲ
1
Nothing 3
'1 Present tense Fi’l Review conjugations They say Except/but Nasb, singular, masculine, common A lie 'Ö0ÇÖÀ0 Û
/
/
ã
2 1
vy, ”1 Ã
/
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember (@) ’, y/ Ò1 Ü1»/è„1 Ã
1 vË/
/
Those who will remain in it.
3
, / )g/ 2 ”/ / 2 Ö0Çv¿ÎÛƯ
/
2
(A) ƒ
”
1
1 ÐÛ) //
/
/0
/ 0 /
And he/it warns the ones who said, “Allah took a son.”
3 3
3
3
3 3
3 ËÒy3ƭÇvË
3 ǎvyÝã)ÊÈ3 ³1 Î
'Ö0ÇÖÀ0 Û'1 ƭ1 Ó1 Ö»/ Î
Ë1 –/ |, ÌÈ1 Ã
é
Ã
Ê
1 1 1 0 / /
/0 / 11 /
/ /
/
0 0
/ .
/
/
(B)vy, ”1 Ã
/ ã 1
They do not have any knowledge at all about it and nor do their fathers have. What a huge word; it comes out from their mouths. They say nothing but/except a lie.
1 Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 6 Grammar Meaning Word
"/
Harf So Harf Nasb Review Harf Nasb Perhaps/maybe Attached pronoun, Mansoob Review attached pronouns You Destroying Maf’ool Mudaf Self Mudaf Ilaih Attached pronoun Review attached pronouns Your Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr Based on/over Ơ/ ³
/
Mudaf Jarr Consequences v
1 ƒ /
Mudaf Ilaih Their 3Ɲ
1
Lightest Harf Review lightest Harf If 3
'1 Lightest Harf Review lightest Harf Did not Lightest present tense Fi’l Review conjugations They believe Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr In Æ/ 2 ´/Ç
/
$/
²- v
1 y/
3
¼Ï/
š
/
/
$
Ê3 /Ç
3
Ö0ÐË1 nÛ
0
1
2 Pointing word = Ism-­‐ul-­‐Isharah Majroor This Word after pointing word with AL = Musharun Ilaih Jarr, singular, masculine, proper Speech Maf’ool Out of sadness/sorrow ”/ Ó
/
3
1 ’1 ŒÇ ‚Û
/
v¼, ›/ /
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember 3
3 3 3 3 3
,
”
Ö
Ð
Ë
n
Û
Ê
Ç
'
Ɲ
v
ƒ
Ơ
³
Â
œ
¼
ϲvyÂÈ´È»
(C)v¼›/ ‚Û
’
Œ
Ç
Lj
1
/ 1 1 / / / 1 0 1 0 / 1 1 / / / / / / 1 / / /2 / / /
So perhaps you are destroying yourself over their consequences if they did not believe in this speech out of sadness.
1 Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 7 Grammar Meaning Word
Harf Nasb Review Harf Nasb No doubt/certainly '/ 2 1
Attached pronoun We vÏ
Past tense Fi’l Review conjugations We made Whatever Harf Jarr On/upon Jarr Feminine because the Arabs said so The Earth Maf’ool Nasb Beautification Harf Jarr For Majroor It Light Harf So that Light present tense Fi’l Review conjugations We test Them Mudaf Which 3
v/ÐÈ´‡
/ /
vË
/
Ơ/ ³
/
3 1 ß
|, /ÐÛ1
%/
vÓ
/
%1
Ö0Èz3 Ï/
/
3Ɲ
0
+
0 2 / 2 Mudaf Ilaih Them Better Maf’ool Nasb In terms of deeds/actions 3Ɲ
0
3 œ‹
Î
0 / /
,ä
̳
/ /
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember 3 Ê3 Ǎ 3ƝÖÈz3 ÐÇvƟ|, ÐÛß
3 Ơ³vËvÐÈ3 ´‡vÏ
(D)ä̳Μ‹
/ / / / / / /2 1
/ / 0 / / 0 02 / 0 / 0 / 1 / / / 1 1
No doubt We made whatever is on the Earth beautification for it so that We test them, which of them is better in terms of deeds/actions.
1 Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 8 Grammar Meaning Word
)
/
Harf And Harf Nasb Review Harf Nasb No doubt/certainly '/ 2 1
Attached pronoun Review attached pronouns We vÏ
Truly %/
Raf’ Will make 'Ö0ȳv
1 ‡
/
/
Whatever vË
/
Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr On/upon Majroor It Mawsoof Dried up dirt or dust Sifah Barren/lifeless Ơ/ ³
/
vÓ
/
, ´1 £
’Ü
/
, –‡
0 0
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember , ´1 £vƵ3 ȳvË'Öȳv
(E) , –‡ ’Ü
ˆÇvÏ )
00
/ / / / / / 0 1 / / /2 1 /
No doubt We will truly make whatever is on it (the Earth) barren dust/dirt.
1 Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayahs 9-­‐10 Grammar Meaning Harf Or Past Tense Fi’l Review Conjugations Did you assume Harf Nasb Review Harf Nasb That Light, Mudaf Nasb Companions Mudaf Ilaih Jarr The cave Harf And Mudaf Ilaih Jarr The inscription (giant stone tablet) Past Tense Fi’l Review conjugations They were Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr From Mudaf Jarr Miracles/signs Mudaf Ilaih Our Maf’ool Nasb Strange When Word
&3 /
~z3 œ1 ‹
/
/
'/ 2 /
vΣ3 /
/ /
3
3
º
1 ÔƆ
/ Ç
)
/
ǽ1 ¿1 –Ç /2
Ö0ÏvÃ
/
3 Ë1 Î
v
1 Û
/
vÏ/
vz, ˆ³
/ /
3
1 2 Past Tense Fi’l Review conjugations He took refuge Fa’il Raf’ The young people Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr To Jarr The cave Harf Then Past Tense Fi’l Review conjugations They said Ö0Çv¿/
Mudaf Nasb (making a dua) Master / 2 /
Mudaf Ilaih Our Command Fi’l Give us Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr From 3 Ë
Î
1
Majroor Especially 3
'ƒ/
0
You Maf’ool Nasb Love, care and mercy Harf And Command Fi’l Review conjugations Provide *)/ /
3 3
0 | Ü/ €¼1 Ç /1
ƕ
3
3
1 ÔƆ
º
/ Ç
"
/
vÏ/
v/Ð1 $
/
3
|, ȉ
/ /
)
/
3 Ü2 1 Ó
r
/
3 For us Harf Jarr Review Harf Jarr From Mudaf Jarr Decisions Mudaf Ilaih Majroor Our Maf’ool Nasb Guidance v/Ð/Ç 3 Ë
Î
1
–1 Ë3 / vÏ/
’, Ÿ/ /
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember 3
3
3 ' ~z3 œ‹&3
3
,
(F)vzˆ³v/Ð1 vÛÎË1 Ö0ÏvÃ
ǽ
¿
–Ç
)
º
Ô
Ɔ
Ç
v
Œ
£
1
1
/ 1 /2 /
/
/ /
/ / / /2 / / 1 / /
/
Or did you assume that the people of the cave and the inscription were strange from Our miracles.
3 ËvÐvÐy ÖÇvÀ»ºÔ3 Ɔ3Ç ƕ |܀3 ¼3Ç *) 3
3ÎËvÐÇr
3 ÜÓ)|, ȉ3 ÂÏ3 ƒÎ
1 / / 21 / /
/ 1 / 1 / /2 / 0 / / 1 /
/10 / 1
// 1
/ / / 0
(>=) ’, Ÿ/ vÏ/ –1 Ë3 /
/
When the young people took refuge to the cave, then they said, “Our Master, give us mercy especially from you, and provide guidance for us from our decisions.
1
Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 1
This is the beginning of Unit 2, in which we will be studying the first 10 ayat of Surah Al-Kahf.
There are 3 goals of this unit:
1. Know those 10 ayat by heart
2. Know every single word in those ayat, and what each one means
3. Know how to apply all the grammar learned in Unit 1 to those 10 ayat
Grammar
Meaning
Raf’, singular, masculine, proper
Praise and gratitude
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
For
Jarr, singular, masculine, proper
Allah
Ism Mawsool
Jarr, singular, masculine, proper
Review 7 types of words that are always proper
The One who
Past tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
He sent down
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
Upon
Mudaf
Jarr, singular, masculine, proper
Slave
Mudaf Ilaih
His
Detail = Maf’ool
Nasb, singular, masculine, proper
The book
Harf
And
ْ ْ
‫ﺪ‬
‫اﻟ‬
ُ ‫ﺤﻤ‬
َ
Word
‫ِل‬
ِ‫اﷲ‬
َّ
‫ا�ي‬
ِ َّ
ْ
‫أَﻧﺰ َل‬
َ
�َ ‫ﻋ‬
َ
‫ﻋ ْﺒ ِﺪ‬
َ
ْ
‫ِه‬
‫�ﺘﺎب‬
ِ ‫اﻟ‬
َ َ
‫و‬
َ
2
Lightest Harf
Did not
Lightest present tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
He makes
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
In
Majroor
It
Maf’ool
Nasb, singular, masculine, common
Crookedness (confusion, evil)
Something that is bent
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember
‫ﻟَ ْﻢ‬
ْ ْ
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ‬
َ َ
‫َل‬
‫ه‬
ُ
ً
‫ِﻋﻮﺟﺎ‬
َ
ْ ْ ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ ْ
َ
ّ
‫اﻟ‬
(١) ‫�ﺘﺎب وﻟَﻢ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ َ� ِﻋﻮﺟﺎ‬
ِ ‫ا�ي أَﻧﺰ َل َﻋ َ� َﻋﺒ ِﺪ ِه اﻟ‬
ِ ِ‫ﺪ ِ ّ َﷲ‬
ُ ‫ﺤﻤ‬
َ
َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ َ
َ
Praise and gratitude is for Allah who sent down upon His slave the book, and He did not make in it
crookedness.
1
Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 2
Grammar
Meaning
Maf’ool
Nasb, singular, masculine, common
Something that stands
upright/straight and does not
move from its place
Light Harf
Review light and lightest Harf
So that
Light present tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
He/it warns
Mawsoof
Nasb, singular, masculine, common
A war
Sifah
Nasb, singular, masculine, common
Intense
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Harr
From
Majroor – non-flexible
Special Mudaf
Especially from
Mudaf Ilaih
Him
Harf
And
Light present tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
He/it congratulates
Maf’ool
Mawsoof
Nasb, plural, masculine, proper
Ism Mawsool
Sifah
Nasb, plural, masculine, proper
Present tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
The believers
The ones who
They work/do
Word
‫َﻗ ِ ّﻴ ًﻤﺎ‬
‫ِل‬
ْ
‫ﻳﻨ ِﺬر‬
َ ُ
ْ
‫ﺑﺄ ًﺳﺎ‬
َ
ً ‫ﺷ ِﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺪا‬
َ
ْ ‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ِ
ْ
‫َ�ن‬
ُ
‫ه‬
ُ
‫و‬
َ
�
ّ ِ َ�ُ‫ﻳ‬
َ
ْ ْ
َ‫اﻟ ُﻤﺆ ِﻣﻨِﲔ‬
‫ا�ﻳﻦ‬
ِ َّ
َ
ْ
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻠُﻮن‬
َ َ
َ
2
Maf’ool
Nasb, plural, feminine, proper
A few good things
Harf Nasb
Review Harf Nasb
That
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Harr
For
Majroor
Them
Mawsoof
Nasb, singular, masculine, common
Reward
Sifah
Nasb, singular, masculine, common
Beautiful
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember
‫ﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎﻟ‬
ِ ‫ﺤ‬
َ ِ َّ
‫أ َ ّ َن‬
‫َل‬
ْ�
ُ
ْ
‫أَﺟ ًﺮا‬
‫ﺣﺴﻨًﺎ‬
َ َ
ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ً
ً ‫ﻗ ِﻴ‬
ً
َِ ّ َ‫� اﻟﻤﺆ ِﻣﻨِﲔ‬
‫ا�ﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠُﻮن‬
�
‫ﻳ‬
‫و‬
‫ﻪ‬
‫ﻧ‬
�
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ا‬
‫ﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺪ‬
‫ﺷ‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺳ‬
‫ﺄ‬
‫ﺑ‬
‫ر‬
‫ﺬ‬
‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻴ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻤ‬
ِ
ِ
ِ
ِ
َ
ِ
ّ
َ
َّ
ُ
َ َ َ
َ
َ َ ُ
َ َُ َ ُ ُ
ْ ْ
(٢) ‫ﺎت أ َ ّ َن ﻟ َ ُ� أَﺟ ًﺮا ﺣﺴﻨًﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎﻟ‬
ِ ‫ﺤ‬
َ ِ َّ
َ َ
Standing upright so that he/it warns about an intense war especially from Him, and so that he/it
congratulates the believers who do a few good things that a beautiful reward is for them.
1
Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 6
Grammar
Meaning
Harf
So
Harf Nasb
Review Harf Nasb
Perhaps/maybe
Attached pronoun, Mansoob
Review attached pronouns
You
Destroying
Maf’ool
Mudaf
Self
Mudaf Ilaih
Attached pronoun
Review attached pronouns
Your
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
Based on/over
Mudaf
Jarr
Consequences
Mudaf Ilaih
Their
Lightest Harf
Review lightest Harf
If
Lightest Harf
Review lightest Harf
Did not
Lightest present tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
They believe
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
In
Word
‫َف‬
‫ﻟَﻌ ّ َﻞ‬
َ
‫َك‬
‫ﺎﺧ ٌﻊ‬
ِ ‫َﺑ‬
ْ
‫َﻧﻔﺲ‬
َ
‫َك‬
�َ ‫ﻋ‬
َ
‫ﺎر‬
ِ ‫آﺛ‬
َ
ْ�ِ
ْ
‫ِإن‬
‫ﻟَ ْﻢ‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺆ ِﻣﻨُﻮا‬
ُ
‫ب‬
ِ
2
Pointing word = Ism-ul-Isharah
Majroor
This
Word after pointing word with AL =
Musharun Ilaih
Jarr, singular, masculine, proper
Speech
Maf’ool
Out of sadness/sorrow
‫َﻫ َﺬا‬
ْ
‫ﻳﺚ‬
‫اﻟ‬
ِ ‫ﺤ ِﺪ‬
َ
‫أَﺳ ًﻔﺎ‬
َ
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember
ْ
ْ ٌ
ْ ْ ْ ْ
ً
‫ا‬
‫ﺬ‬
‫ﻮا‬
‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺆ‬
‫ﻳ‬
‫ﻢ‬
‫ﻟ‬
‫ن‬
‫إ‬
�
‫ﺎر‬
‫آﺛ‬
�
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻚ‬
‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻌﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﻊ ﻧ‬
(٦) ‫ﻳﺚ أَﺳﻔﺎ‬
‫ﺪ‬
‫ﺤ‬
‫اﻟ‬
�
ِ
َ ِ ِ َ َ َ ِ ُ ِ ُ َ ِ ِ َ َ َ َ َ َ ِ َ َ َّ َ َ َ
So perhaps you are destroying yourself over their consequences if they did not believe in this speech out
of sadness.
1
Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 7
Grammar
Meaning
Harf Nasb
Review Harf Nasb
No doubt/certainly
Attached pronoun
We
Past tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
We made
Whatever
Harf Jarr
On/upon
Jarr
Feminine because the Arabs said so
The Earth
Maf’ool
Nasb
Beautification
Harf Jarr
For
Majroor
It
Light Harf
So that
Light present tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
We test
Them
Mudaf
Which
Word
‫ِإ ّ َن‬
‫ﻧﺎ‬
ْ
‫ﺟﻌﻠﻨَﺎ‬
َ َ
‫ﻣﺎ‬
َ
�َ ‫ﻋ‬
َ
ْ
‫اﻷر ِض‬
‫ِزﻳﻨَ ًﺔ‬
‫َل‬
‫َﻫﺎ‬
‫ِل‬
‫َﻧ ْﺒﻠُﻮ‬
َ
ْ�
ُ
‫ي‬
ُ ّ َ‫أ‬
2
Mudaf Ilaih
Them
Better
Maf’ool
Nasb
In terms of deeds/actions
ْ�
ُ
ْ ‫أ‬
‫ﺣﺴﻦ‬
ُ َ َ
ً ‫ﻋﻤﻼ‬
َ َ
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember
ْ ‫اﻷرض زﻳﻨ ًﺔ �ﺎ ﻟﻨ ْﺒﻠﻮ�ْ أ� ْﻢ أ‬
ْ �‫إﻧﺎ ﺟﻌ ْﻠﻨﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋ‬
(٧) ‫ﺣﺴﻦ ﻋﻤﻼ‬
َ َ َ َ َ َ َّ ِ
َ َ ُ َ َ ُ ُّ َ ُ َ ُ َ ِ َ َ َ ِ ِ
No doubt We made whatever is on the Earth beautification for it so that We test them, which of them is
better in terms of deeds/actions.
1
Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayah 8
Grammar
Meaning
Harf
And
Harf Nasb
Review Harf Nasb
No doubt/certainly
Attached pronoun
Review attached pronouns
We
Truly
Raf’
Will make
Whatever
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
On/upon
Majroor
It
Mawsoof
Dried up dirt or dust
Sifah
Barren/lifeless
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember
Word
‫و‬
َ
‫ِإ ّ َن‬
‫ﻧﺎ‬
‫َل‬
‫ﺎﻋﻠُﻮن‬
ِ ‫ﺟ‬
َ
َ
‫ﻣﺎ‬
َ
�َ ‫ﻋ‬
َ
‫َﻫﺎ‬
ً ‫ﺻ ِﻌ‬
‫ﻴﺪا‬
َ
‫ﺟﺮ ًزا‬
ُ ُ
ً ‫ﺎﻋﻠﻮن ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠ ْ�ﺎ ﺻ ِﻌ‬
(٨) ‫ﻴﺪا ﺟﺮ ًزا‬
‫وإﻧﺎ ﻟﺠ‬
ُُ
َ َ َ َ َ َ ُ ِ َ َ َّ ِ َ
No doubt We will truly make whatever is on it (the Earth) barren dust/dirt.
1
Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayahs 3-5
Grammar
Meaning
Nasb, plural, masculine, common
Those who will remain
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
In
Majroor
It
Maf’ool
Nasb, singular, masculine, common
Forever
Harf
And
Light present tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
He/it warns
Ism Mawsool
The ones who
Past tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
They said
Past tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
He took
Outside doer, Raf’
The word Allah = Lafdh-ul-Jalalah
Allah
Maf’ool
Nasb, singular, masculine, common
A son
Not at all
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
Have
Word
ِ ‫َﻣﺎ‬
َ‫ﻛ ِﺜﲔ‬
‫ِﰲ‬
‫ِه‬
‫أَﺑ ًﺪا‬
َ
‫و‬
َ
ْ
‫ﻳﻨ ِﺬر‬
َ ُ
‫ا�ﻳﻦ‬
ِ َّ
َ
‫َﻗﺎﻟُﻮا‬
‫ﺨ َﺬ‬
َّ
َ ‫اﺗ‬
‫اﷲ‬
ُ َّ
ًَ‫و‬
‫�ا‬
َ
‫ﻣﺎ‬
َ
‫َل‬
2
Majroor
They
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
About
Majroor
He/it
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
Any
Jarr, singular, masculine, common
Knowledge
Harf
And
Nor
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
Have
Mudaf
Jarr, broken plural, masculine, common
Fathers
Mudaf Ilaih
Their
Past tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
She/it was huge
Nasb, singular, feminine, common
As a word
Present tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
She/it comes out
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
From
Mudaf
Jarr, broken plural, masculine, common
Mouths
ْ�
ُ
‫ب‬
ِ
‫ِه‬
ْ ‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ِ
ْ
‫ِﻋﻠ ٍﻢ‬
‫و‬
َ
‫ﻻ‬
‫ِل‬
�‫ﺎ‬
ِ ‫آﺑ‬
َ
ْ�ِ
ْ
‫ﱪت‬
َ
َُ ‫ﻛ‬
‫ﻛ ِﻠﻤ ًﺔ‬
َ َ
ْ
‫َﺗﺨﺮج‬
ُ ُ
ْ ‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ِ
ْ
‫أَﻓﻮا ِه‬
َ
3
Mudaf Ilaih
ْ�ِ
Their
ْ
‫ِإن‬
Nothing
Present tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
‫ﻳ ُﻘﻮﻟُﻮن‬
َ
َ
They say
‫ﻻ‬
ّ ‫ِإ‬
Except/but
Nasb, singular, masculine, common
‫ﻛ ِﺬ ًﺑﺎ‬
َ
A lie
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember
(٣) ‫ﻛ ِﺜﲔَ ﻓِﻴ ِﻪ أَﺑ ًﺪا‬
ِ ‫َﻣﺎ‬
َ
Those who will remain in it.
ْ
ً َ ‫اﷲ و‬
َ
ّ
(٤) ‫�ا‬
‫ﺬ‬
‫ﺨ‬
‫ا‬
‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺎﻟ‬
‫ﻗ‬
‫ﻳﻦ‬
�‫ا‬
‫ر‬
‫ﺬ‬
‫اﺗ‬
ِ
ِ ‫وﻳﻨ‬
َ ُ َّ َ َ َّ ُ َ َ
َ ُ َ
And he/it warns the ones who said, “Allah took a son.”
ْ ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ ً
ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
‫اﻫ ِ� ِإن ﻳ ُﻘﻮﻟُﻮن‬
‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻓ‬
‫أ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ج‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺨ‬
‫ﺗ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻛ‬
‫ت‬
‫ﱪ‬
‫ﻛ‬
�‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻵﺑ‬
‫ﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫و‬
‫ﻢ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻪ‬
‫ﺑ‬
�ُ َ‫ﻣﺎ ﻟ‬
ِ ُ
ِ َ
ِ
ِ
ِ
َ
ِ
ٍ
ِ
ِ
َ
ُ
ِ
َ
َ
َ
َ
َ
َ
َ
َ
َ
ُ
(٥) ‫ﻛ ِﺬ ًﺑﺎ‬
َ ‫ِإﻻ‬
They do not have any knowledge at all about it and nor do their fathers have. What a huge word; it
comes out from their mouths. They say nothing but/except a lie.
1
Cumulative Review – Kahf Ayahs 9-10
Grammar
Meaning
Harf
Or
Past Tense Fi’l
Review Conjugations
Did you assume
Harf Nasb
Review Harf Nasb
That
Light, Mudaf
Nasb
Companions
Mudaf Ilaih
Jarr
The cave
Harf
And
Mudaf Ilaih
Jarr
The inscription (giant stone
tablet)
Past Tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
They were
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
From
Mudaf
Jarr
Miracles/signs
Mudaf Ilaih
Our
Maf’ool
Nasb
Strange
When
Word
‫أ َ ْم‬
‫ﺣ ِﺴ ْﺒﺖ‬
َ
َ
‫أ َ ّ َن‬
‫أ َ ْﺻﺤﺎب‬
َ َ
ْ
ْ
‫�ﻬ ِﻒ‬
َ ‫اﻟ‬
‫و‬
َ
�ِ ‫اﻟﺮ ِﻗ‬
َّ
‫ﻛﺎﻧُﻮا‬
َ
ْ ‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ِ
‫ﺎت‬
ِ ‫آﻳ‬
َ
‫َﻧﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺠ ًﺒﺎ‬
َ َ
ْ
‫ِإذ‬
2
Past Tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
He took refuge
Fa’il
Raf’
The young people
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
To
Jarr
The cave
Harf
Then
Past Tense Fi’l
Review conjugations
They said
Mudaf
Nasb (making a dua)
Master
Mudaf Ilaih
Our
Command Fi’l
Give us
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
From
Majroor
Especially
You
Maf’ool
Nasb
Love, care and mercy
Harf
And
Command Fi’l
Review conjugations
Provide
‫أَوى‬
َ
ْ ْ
ُ ‫اﻟ ِﻔﺘ َﻴﺔ‬
�َ ‫ِإ‬
ْ
ْ
‫�ﻬ ِﻒ‬
َ ‫اﻟ‬
‫َف‬
‫َﻗﺎﻟُﻮا‬
‫ب‬
َ ّ ‫َر‬
‫َﻧﺎ‬
‫آ ِﺗﻨَﺎ‬
ْ ‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ِ
ْ
‫َ�ن‬
ُ
‫َك‬
ْ
‫ر� ًﺔ‬
َ َ
‫و‬
َ
ْ ‫ﻫﻴ‬
‫ﺊ‬
ِّ َ
3
For us
Harf Jarr
Review Harf Jarr
From
Mudaf
Jarr
Decisions
Mudaf Ilaih
Majroor
Our
Maf’ool
Nasb
Guidance
Blue: Review from Unit 1 | Green: Something new to remember
‫ﻟَﻨَﺎ‬
ْ ‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ِ
‫أ َ ْﻣ ِﺮ‬
‫َﻧﺎ‬
‫ر َﺷ ًﺪا‬
َ
ْ
ْ
ْ ‫أ ْم ﺣﺴ ْﺒﺖ أن أ‬
ْ
ً
(٩) ‫ﻛﺎﻧُﻮا ِﻣﻦ آﻳﺎ ِﺗﻨَﺎ ﻋﺠﺒﺎ‬
�
‫ﻗ‬
‫اﻟﺮ‬
‫و‬
‫ﻒ‬
‫ﻬ‬
�
‫اﻟ‬
‫ﺎب‬
‫ﺤ‬
‫ﺻ‬
ِ
ِ
َ ِ َّ َ
َ
َ َ
َ َ َ َّ َ َ ِ َ َ
َ
Or did you assume that the people of the cave and the inscription were strange from Our miracles.
ْ ‫إ ْذ أوى اﻟْﻔ ْﺘﻴﺔ إ� اﻟْ� ْﻬﻒ ﻓﻘﺎﻟﻮا رﺑﻨﺎ آﺗﻨﺎ ﻣ‬
ْ‫ﺊ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
ْ ‫ﻦ � ْﻧﻚ ر ْ� ًﺔ وﻫﻴ‬
ِ َ َ ِّ َ َ
َ ِ َ ِ َ َّ َ ُ َ َ ِ َ
َُِ َ ِ
ََ ِ
َ َ َ ُ
(١٠) ‫أ َ ْﻣ ِﺮ َﻧﺎ ر َﺷ ًﺪا‬
َ
When the young people took refuge to the cave, then they said, “Our Master, give us mercy especially
from you, and provide guidance for us from our decisions.
‫___________________________ ‪Name:‬‬
‫‪Unit 2 Exam‬‬
‫‪Section 1: Write the correct letter in the box. More than one letter may apply.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮف و ﺻﻔﺔ ‪E.‬‬
‫اﺳﻢ اﻹﺷﺎرة و ﻣﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ‪D.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻋ‪ 3‬ﻋ ْﺒ !ﺪ !ه‬
‫‪.2‬أن ﻟ*ْ أ ْ‬
‫ﺟﺮً ا ﺣﺴﻨًﺎ‬
‫‪/ -‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫اﻫ !*‬
‫‪! .3‬ﻣﻦ أﻓﻮ !‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪. 6‬أ ‪-‬ن أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟ‪C‬ﻬ !ﻒ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ?ﻧﻚ‬
‫‪.7‬ﻣ‬
‫! ‪/‬‬
‫‪.8‬ﺻ !ﻌ ً‬
‫ﻴﺪا ﺟﺮ ًزا‬
‫‪/ /‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺣﺮف اﻟﻨﺼﺐ ‪C.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮف اﻟﺠﺮ ‪B.‬‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪A.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﻳﺚ‬
‫‪&! .4‬ﺬا اﻟﺤ !ﺪ !‬
‫‪.5‬ﻣ ْ‬
‫ﻦ آﻳﺎ !ﺗﻨﺎ‬
‫!‬
‫‪ .9‬إﻧﺎ ﺟﻌ ْﻠﻨﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋ‪ْ 3‬‬
‫اﻷر !ض‬
‫!‪-‬‬
‫ﺊ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻣ ْ‬
‫‪ .10‬وﻫﻴ ْ‬
‫ﻦ أ ْﻣ !ﺮﻧﺎ‬
‫!‬
‫!‪-‬‬
‫?)‪Section 2: a) What form are each of the following fi’l in (past, present, command, light, lightest, etc‬‬
‫?‪b) Who’s the faa’il‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪! .1‬إذ أوى اﻟ !ﻔﺘﻴﺔ ‪! /‬إ‪ I‬اﻟ‪C‬ﻬ !ﻒ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻟ!ﻴﻨْ !ﺬر ﺑﺄ ًﺳﺎ ﺷ !ﺪ ً‬
‫ﻳﺪا‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻨ ْﺒﻠﻮ‪ ْM‬أ‪ْ N‬ﻢ أ ْ‬
‫ﺣﺴﻦ ﻋﻤﻼ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫! ‪/ /- / /‬‬
‫اﷲ و ً‬
‫?ا‬
‫اﺗﺨﺬ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻗﺎﻟ‪/‬ﻮا ‪-‬‬
‫‪/ -‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ .3‬أ ْم ﺣ !ﺴ ْﺒﺖ أ ‪-‬ن أ ْﺻﺤﺎب اﻟ‪C‬ﻬ !ﻒ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫‪! - .8‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎﻟ!ﺤ !‬
‫ا‪Q‬ﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠ‪/‬ﻮن ‪-‬‬
‫‪ .4‬إﻧﺎ ﺟﻌ ْﻠﻨﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋ‪ْ 3‬‬
‫اﻷر !ض‬
‫!‪-‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪ .9‬وﻟ ْﻢ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ‪! V‬ﻋﻮﺟﺎ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪Unit 2 Exam‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻫ !*‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﺨﺮ‬
‫ج !ﻣﻦ أﻓﻮ !‬
‫‪/ /‬‬
‫________________________ ‪Name:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺊ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻣ ْ‬
‫‪ .10‬وﻫﻴ ْ‬
‫ﻦ أ ْﻣ !ﺮﻧﺎ رﺷ ًﺪا‬
‫!‬
‫!‪-‬‬
‫?‪Section 3: What role are each of the following words playing (fi’l, faa’il, maf’ool etc)? What do these words mean‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪C‬ﺘﺎب‬
‫‪ .1‬أﻧﺰل ﻋ‪ 3‬ﻋﺒ !ﺪ !ه اﻟ !‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪ .2‬وﻟ ْﻢ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ‪! V‬ﻋﻮﺟﺎ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ﺎت‬
‫‪ Z‬اﻟ ‪/‬ﻤﺆ !ﻣﻨ!ﲔ ‪! -‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎﻟ!ﺤ !‬
‫‪ .3‬وﻳ‪- ! [/‬‬
‫ا‪Q‬ﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠ‪/‬ﻮن ‪-‬‬
‫ﻛ !ﺜﲔ ﻓ!ﻴ !ﻪ أﺑ ًﺪا‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻣﺎ !‬
‫‪ .5‬إﻧﺎ ﺟﻌ ْﻠﻨﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋ‪ْ 3‬‬
‫اﻷر !ض !زﻳﻨ ًﺔ `ﺎ‬
‫!‪-‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠ ْ‪a‬ﺎ ﺻ !ﻌ ً‬
‫ﻴﺪا ﺟﺮ ًزا‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اﻫ !*‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺗﺨﺮ‬
‫ج !ﻣﻦ أﻓﻮ !‬
‫‪/ /‬‬
‫ٌ ْ‬
‫ﺎﺧﻊ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻓﻠﻌﻠ‪-‬ﻚ ﺑ !‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ﻦ ?ﻧﻚ ر‪ً e‬ﺔ‬
‫‪ .9‬آﺗﻨﺎ ﻣ‬
‫! ! ‪/‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪! .10‬إن ﻳ ‪/‬ﻘﻮﻟ‪/‬ﻮن !إﻻ ﻛ !ﺬ ًﺑﺎ‬
Name: ________________________
Unit 2 Exam
Section 1:
AB .5
AB .10
BD .4
BC .9
AB .3
E .8
BCE .2
AB .7
Section 2:
ْ
ً ‫ ﻟ!ﻴﻨْ !ﺬر ﺑﺄ ًﺳﺎ ﺷ !ﺪ‬.6 a. Past
‫ﻳﺪا‬
َ
َ َ /
ْ ْ
b. ‫( ﻫﻮ‬inside the fi’l)
b. /‫اﻟ !ﻔﺘﻴﺔ‬
َ
a. Past tense
a.
Past
tense
a.
Light,
present tense;
ً َ ‫اﷲ و‬
‫?ا‬
‫اﺗﺨﺬ‬
‫ﻮا‬/‫ َﻗﺎﻟ‬.7
/َ َ - َ َ َ b. ‫اﷲ‬
b. M (inside fi’l)
b. ‫( ﻧﺤﻦ‬inside the fi’l)
/ َْ
a. Present tense
َ - .8 a. Past
‫ﺎت‬
‫ﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻠ‬Q‫ا‬
! ‫ﺤ‬
!َ ‫اﻟﺼﺎﻟ‬
/
َ - ‫ﻮن‬
َ َ َ َ !
b. M (inside the fi’l)
b. ‫( أﻧﺖ‬inside the fi’l)
َ
ْ ْ ْ
a. Lightest, present tense
a.
Past
‫ !ﻋﻮﺟﺎ‬Vَ ‫ وﻟَﻢ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ‬.9
َ َ / َ َ َ
b. ‫( ﻫﻮ‬inside the fi’l)
b. ‫( ﻧﺤﻦ‬inside the fi’l)
ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ ْ
‫ﻬ !ﻒ‬C
‫اﻟ‬
I
‫إ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻴ‬
‫ﺘ‬
َ ! / َ ‫ !إذ أ َ َوى اﻟ !ﻔ‬.1
َ
a. Light, present tense
a. Command
b. ‫أﻧﺖ‬
َ
Section 3:
Detail, maf’ool; dried up dirt or
dust
Victim of harf jarr, idaafah; their
mouths
Harf Nasb and its victim; perhaps,
maybe
Verb, command; give!
AB .1
AC .6
ْ ‫ ْﻢ أ‬N‫ْ أ‬M‫ ﻟﻨ ْﺒﻠﻮ‬.2
‫ﺣﺴﻦ ﻋﻤﻼ‬
َ َ / َ َ / /- َ / َ / َ !
ْ
ْ
‫ﻬ !ﻒ‬C
‫أ ْم ﺣﺴ ْﺒﺖ أن أ ْﺻﺤ‬
َ ‫ﺎب اﻟ‬
َ َ َ َ- َ َ ! َ َ
.3
ْ
ْ 3‫ إﻧﺎ ﺟﻌﻠﻨﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋ‬.4
‫اﻷر !ض‬
َ َ َ َ َ َ َ- !
a. Present
ْ ‫ﺊ ﻟﻨﺎ ﻣ‬
ْ
‫ﻦ أ َ ْﻣ !ﺮ َﻧﺎ ر َﺷ ًﺪا‬
! َ َ ‫ﻴ‬- ! ‫ َو َﻫ‬.10
َ
b. ‫(ﻫﻲ‬inside
the fi’l)
!
َ
ً ‫ ﺻ !ﻌ‬.6 Detail, maf’ool; the book
‫ﻴﺪا‬
َ
ْ
ْ
Maf’ool; crookedness, something
*! ‫اﻫ‬
! ‫ أَﻓﻮ‬.7
َ
bent
Maf’ool, mawsoof; the believers
‫ﻚ‬
َ َ ‫ﻠ‬- ‫ ﻓَ َﻠ َﻌ‬.8
Maf’ool; a few good things
‫ آ !ﺗﻨَﺎ‬.9 Detail, maf’ool; those who will remain
ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
*! ‫اﻫ‬
‫ َﺗﺨﺮ‬.5
! ‫ج !ﻣﻦ أَﻓﻮ‬
/ /
َ
ْ
‫ﺘﺎب‬C
‫ اﻟ‬.1
!
َ َ
‫ !ﻋﻮﺟﺎ‬.2
َ َ
ْ ْ
‫ﲔ‬
‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺆ‬
‫ﻤ‬/ ‫ اﻟ‬.3
!
!
َ
‫ﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎﻟ‬
! ‫ﺤ‬
َ ! َ-
‫ﲔ‬
! ‫ َﻣﺎ‬.4
َ ‫ﻛ !ﺜ‬
Name: ________________________
Detail, maf’ool; a lie
Unit 2 Exam
‫ ﻛ !ﺬ ًﺑﺎ‬.10 Inna and its victim; Certainly we
Detail, maf’ool; beautification
‫ﻧﺎ‬- ‫ !إ‬.5
‫!زﻳﻨ ًﺔ‬
1
Nahw – Kahf Ayah 11
ۡ
ٰٓ
ۡ
َ١١َ‫اِن ۡم هَِفَٱلكه هفَ هسنهنيَعددا‬
‫فَضر ۡبناَع ى‬
‫لَءاذ ه ه‬
Definition
and then
Nahw
N/A
ۡ
ٰٓ
ۡ
َ١١َ‫اِن ۡم هَِفَٱلكه هفَ هسنهنيَعددا‬
‫فَضر ۡبناَع ى‬
‫لَءاذ ه ه‬
Definition
we struck
Nahw
past-tense ‫ فعلَماض‬with the inside doerَ‫نحن‬
ۡ
ٰٓ
ۡ
َ١١َ‫اِن ۡم هَِفَٱلكه هفَ هسنهنيَعددا‬
‫فضر ۡبناَع ى‬
‫لَءاذ هه‬
Definition
upon
Nahw
َ‫حرفَجر‬
ۡ
ٰٓ
ۡ
١١َ‫اِن ۡمَ هِفَٱلكه هفَ هس هننيَعددا‬
‫فضر ۡبناَع ى‬
‫لَءاذ هه‬
Definition
their ears
َ‫ان‬
‫ ءاذ ه‬in is َ‫ جر‬form because of the َ‫ عل‬that comes before it. َ‫ مه‬is a َ‫مضافَإليه‬
Nahw
because it is attached to an ‫اسم‬. We know for sure that َ‫ان‬
‫ ءاذ ه‬is an َ‫ اسم‬because of
the َ ‫ عل‬that comes before it. A ‫ حرفَجر‬can only beat up on an ‫اسم‬.َ
2
ۡ
ٰٓ
ۡ
١١َ‫اِن ۡمَ هِفَٱلكه هفَ هسنهنيَعددا‬
‫فضر ۡبناَع ى‬
‫لَءاذ ه ه‬
Definition
in
Nahw
َ‫حرفَجر‬
ۡ
ٰٓ
ۡ
١١َ‫اِن ۡم هَِفَٱلكه هفَ هسنهنيَعددا‬
‫فضر ۡبناَع ى‬
‫لَءاذ هه‬
Definition
the cave
Nahw
َAn َ‫ اسم‬in ‫ جر‬form because of the َ‫حرفَجر‬before it
ۡ
ٰٓ
ۡ
١١َ‫اِن ۡم هَِفَٱلكه هفَ هس هننيَعددا‬
‫فضر ۡبناَع ى‬
‫لَءاذ هه‬
Definition
years
Nahw
َ‫ َ هسنهني‬is in َ‫ نصب‬form because it is a detail. It answers the question “how long did we
strike on their ears?”
ۡ
ٰٓ
ۡ
١١َ‫اِن ۡم هَِفَٱلكه هفَ هس هننيَعددا‬
‫فضر ۡبناَع ى‬
‫لَءاذ هه‬
Definition
Nahw
in count
َAll we can say about this word at this point it that it is in َ‫ نصب‬form. We haven’t
studied the grammar of this word yet.
1
Nahw – Kahf Ayah 12
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
then; a long time after
Nahw
N/A
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
we raised
Nahw
This is a ‫ فعل ماض‬with an inside doer ‫نحن‬
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
them
ۡ
َّ َّ َّ
This attached pronoun is a detail of ‫ بعثنا‬, therefore it’s a detail so we know its status
Nahw
is ‫نصب‬.
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
so that
Nahw
a light ‫حرف‬
2
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
we would know
Nahw
This is ‫ فعل مضارع‬that is light and has an inside doer ‫نحن‬
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
which of
Nahw
A special ‫مضاف‬
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
the two groups
Nahw
‫مضاف إليه‬that is in ‫ جر‬status
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
counts better
Nahw
We haven’t learned the grammar for this word yet, so just know what it means.
3
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
with regards to
Nahw
The ‫ ِل‬is a ‫ حرف جر‬but we haven’t learned the grammar of ‫ ما‬yet, so we are going to
pretend that it’s not there
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
they stayed
Nahw
‫ فعل ماض‬with an inside doer of ‫ُه‬
ْ
ۡ ‫ث بعثۡناُهۡ لن ۡعلم أي ٱلۡح ۡزب ۡۡي أ‬
٢١ ‫حص ٰى لِما لَّ ِبث ُ ٓوا أَّم ًدا‬
َّ
َّ َّ ِ َّ ِ ُ ‫ُ م َّ َّ َّ َّ ُ ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ م‬
َّ
Definition
Nahw
duration
This word is in ‫ نصب‬because it is a detail. It answers the question ‘How long did they
stay?’
1
Nahw – Kahf Ayah 13
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
ُ٣١ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
we
Nahw
N/A
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ
َّ
Definition
we tell a story/we narrate
Nahw
Present-tense verb ‫ فعلُمضارع‬with the inside doerُ‫نحن‬
*Note that the word ‘we’ is mentioned twice. Once with the word ‫ نحن‬and again inside the word ‫نقص‬.
We’ll learn about the purpose of this doubling of the pronoun next unit, Insha’Allah.
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫كُ َّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
onto you
ُ‫ جارُمجرور‬made up of a ُ‫ حرفُجر‬and an attached pronoun. ُ‫ ك‬is the attached
Nahw
ْ
ْ ‫ع‬when it has a pronoun attached to
version of ‫ت‬
ُ ‫أَّن‬. Notice that ُ‫ ع ََّل‬is pronounced ُ‫َل‬
َّ َّ
َّ
َّ
it.
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫كُ َّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
their news
2
ُ‫ َّنبأَُّ –مضافُمضافُإليه‬is the ُ‫ مضاف‬and ُ‫ ُه‬is an attached pronoun and a ُ‫مضافُإليه‬.
َّ
Nahw
َُّ‫ َّنبأ‬is in ُ‫ نصب‬form because it is a detail. It answers the question ‘What are we
َّ
narrating onto you?’
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
accurately/ with purpose
Nahw
ُ‫جارُمجرور‬
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
certainly they are
ُ‫إن‬
َّ is a ُ‫ حرفُنصب‬and ُ‫ ُه‬is an attached pronoun in ُ‫ نصب‬form. A ُ‫ حرفُنصب‬and its
Nahw
victim are usually followed by an ‘is’. This is where the ‘are’ in the above definition
comes from.
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
young people
Nahw
ُThis word is in ُ‫ رفع‬form because it has no reason to be in ُ‫ نصب‬or ‫جر‬.
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
they believed
Nahw
past-tense verb ُ‫ فعلُماض‬with the inside doer ‫ُه‬
3
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
in their master
ُ‫ ب‬is a ُ‫ حرفُجر‬, ُ‫ رب‬is a ُ‫ مجرور‬and a ُ‫مضاف‬, and ُ‫ ُه‬is an attached pronoun and a
Nahw
‫مضافُإليه‬.
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫وز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
ُ ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡم‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ
َّ
Definition
and
Nahw
N/A
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫وز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
ُ ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡم‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
we increased them
Nahw
ُ‫ زدنا‬is a ُ‫ فعلُماض‬with the inside doer ‫نحن‬. ُ‫ ُه‬is the attached pronoun for ‘them’.
ْ
ۡ
ٌ ۡ
ۡ
٣١ُ‫ك َُّنبأَُّهُبُٱلحقُِّۚإ َّّن ۡمُفتيةُءامنواُبرّب ۡمُوز ۡد هَّّن ۡمُهدى‬
‫نَّحنُ َّنقصُعلَّ ۡي‬
َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ َّ َّ
َّ
َّ
َّ
Definition
Nahw
in terms of guidance
It is in ُ‫ نصب‬form because it is a detail. It answers the question “what did we increase
them in?”
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Nahw – Kahf Ayah 14‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ب َٱلس ٰم ٰ‬
‫ٓاَإذاَ‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫وَرب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫عوا َ همنَدُو هن هَهۦَ َ هَإَلاًۖ َلقد َقُلن ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُُ هه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ٤١‬‬
‫‪we made firm‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫نحن ‪ with an inside doer of‬فعلَماض‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٓاَإذاَ‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫د‬
‫ق‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ًۖ‬
‫َل‬
‫َ‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫و‬
‫نَد‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫و‬
‫ع‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
‫َ‬
‫ب‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ه ه ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ٤١‬‬
‫‪on their hearts‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫وبَ ‪ and‬حرفَجر ‪َ َis‬عَلَ َ‬
‫‪ is in‬مه ‪ and‬مضاف ‪َ is a‬قُل ُ ه َ‬
‫وب‪ is beating up.‬عَل ‪ is the word that‬قُل ُ ه‬
‫مضافَإليه ‪ status because it is‬جر ‪an attached pronoun that is in‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٓاَإذاَ‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫د‬
‫ق‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ًۖ‬
‫َل‬
‫َ‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫و‬
‫د‬
‫نَ‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫و‬
‫ع‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
‫َ‬
‫ب‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ذ‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ ٤١‬‬
‫‪at the time when‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪N/A‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٓاَإذاَ‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫د‬
‫ق‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ًۖ‬
‫َل‬
‫َ‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫و‬
‫نَد‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫و‬
‫ع‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
‫َ‬
‫ب‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫ف‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ ٤١‬‬
‫‪they stood‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫مه ‪ with an inside doer‬فعلَماض‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٓاَإذاَ‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫د‬
‫ق‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ًۖ‬
‫َل‬
‫َ‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫و‬
‫نَد‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫و‬
‫ع‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
‫َ‬
‫ب‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫ف‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ه ه ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ ٤١‬‬
‫‪then they said‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫مه ‪ with an inside doer‬فعلَماض‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٓاَإذاَ‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫د‬
‫ق‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ًۖ‬
‫َل‬
‫َ‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫و‬
‫نَد‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫و‬
‫ع‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
‫َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ ٤١‬‬
‫‪our Master‬‬
‫بَ‬
‫مضافَ ‪ status because it’s a‬جر ‪ is an attached pronoun that is in‬ناَ ‪ and‬مضاف ‪ is a‬ر ُ‬
‫إليه‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٓاَإذاَ‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫د‬
‫ق‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ًۖ‬
‫َل‬
‫َ‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫و‬
‫نَد‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫و‬
‫ع‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
‫َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫اَ‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ه ه ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ ٤١‬‬
3
Definition
the Master of the skies and the earth
َ‫ب‬
َ ‫ السماوَا ه‬is a ‫ مضافَإليه‬in ‫ جر‬status.
ُ ‫ َر‬is ‫ مضاف‬and ‫ت‬
Nahw
َ‫ اۡل ْر هض‬is another ‫مضافَإليه‬, because it is also after-of. “Master of the skies, and
Master of the earth”. You can have multiple ‫ مضافَإليه‬and keep connecting them with
an “and”.
ۡ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ
ٰ
ۡ ‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل‬
ٰ
ٰ
َ‫ٓاَإذا‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫د‬
‫ق‬
‫ل‬
َ
‫ا‬
ًۖ
‫َل‬
َ
‫إ‬
َ
‫ۦ‬
َ
َ
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫و‬
‫نَد‬
‫م‬
َ
َ
‫ا‬
‫و‬
‫ع‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
َ
َ
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
َ
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
َ
‫ب‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
َ
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
ٰ
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ه ه ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
ُ
ُ
ُ
ُ
َ٤١َ‫شططا‬
Definition
we will never call
‫ َلن‬is a light ‫ حرف‬that beats up on present tense ‫فعل‬, which means “will not” or “will
never”.
Nahw
ْ
‫عوا‬
‫د‬
ُ ‫ ن‬is a light َ‫فعلَمضارع‬with an inside doer of ‫نحن‬. It's a hard ‫فعل‬, so don’t worry
about the conjugations.
ۡ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ
ٰ
ۡ ‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل‬
ٰ
ٰ
َ‫ٓاَإذا‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫د‬
‫ق‬
‫ل‬
َ
‫ا‬
ًۖ
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
َ
‫ۦ‬
َ
َ
‫ه‬
َ
‫ن‬
‫و‬
‫نَد‬
‫م‬
َ
‫ا‬
‫و‬
‫ع‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
َ
َ
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
َ
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
َ
‫ب‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
َ
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
ٰ
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ه ه ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
ُ
ُ
ُ
ُ
َ٤١َ‫شططا‬
Definition
any besides Him
َ‫ون‬
‫ همنَد ُ ه‬is a ‫جارَمجرور‬
Nahw
َ‫ دو هن‬is a َ‫ مضاف‬and ‫ هَه‬is an attached pronoun that is in ‫ جر‬status because it is a َ‫مضاف‬
ُ
‫إليه‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٓاَإذاَ‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫د‬
‫ق‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ًۖ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫و‬
‫نَد‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫و‬
‫ع‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
‫َ‬
‫ب‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ٤١‬‬
‫‪a god, someone who is worshiped an obeyed‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫”?‪ because it is a detail that answers the question, “who will we not call‬نصب ‪َIt is in‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫د َقُلنٓا َ هإذاَ‬
‫عوا َ همنَدو هن هَهۦَ َ هإَلاًۖ َلق َ‬
‫د‬
‫ن‬
‫نَ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
‫َ‬
‫ب‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ٤١‬‬
‫‪for sure, we would have said‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫حرف ‪ is a‬لقدَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫نحن ‪ with an inside doer of‬فعلَماض ‪ is a‬قُلنا‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ت َوَ ۡٱۡل ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫عوا َ همنَدو هن هَهۦَ َ هإَلاًۖ َلقد َقُلنٓا َ هإذاَ‬
‫د‬
‫نَن‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ض‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلس‬
‫َ‬
‫ب‬
‫اَر‬
‫ن‬
‫ب‬
‫َر‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َف‬
‫وا‬
‫ام‬
‫َق‬
‫ذ‬
‫َإ‬
‫م‬
‫وِب‬
‫ل‬
‫َق‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ورب‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُُ هه ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ٤١‬‬
‫‪in that case‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪َN/A‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٰ‬
‫ٓاَإذاَ‬
‫ت َوَٱۡلر ه َ‬
‫ب َٱلسمو ه َ‬
‫وربطنا َع ٰ‬
‫عو َا َ همنَدُو هن هَهۦَ َ هإَلاًۖ َلقد َقُلن ه‬
‫وِبم هَإذ َقامُوا َفقالُوا َربُناَر ُ‬
‫َل َقُل ُ ه ه‬
‫ض َلنَند ُ‬
‫شططاَ‪َ٤١‬‬
5
Definition
Nahw
a terrible lie
َIt is in ‫ نصب‬because it is a detail that answers the question, “what would we have
said?”
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Nahw – Kahf Ayah 15‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِف‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ِب‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا ُا ا ُا ا ا ُ‬
‫اا ا ا ا ا‬
‫ا ا ا ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ُ ا ا اا ا ا ُ ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪these (people) are‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪pointing word used for people plural‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِف‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ِب‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا ُا ا ُا ا ا ُ‬
‫اا ا ا ا ا‬
‫ا ا ا ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ُ ا ا اا ا ا ُ ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪our nation‬‬
‫‪ is a word that is‬اقومِ ‪.‬مضافِإليه ‪ is an attached pronoun and a‬اناِ ‪, and‬مضافِ ‪ is a‬اقومِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪.‬هؤآلء ‪plural because the Arabs said so. That is why the pointer used before it was‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫َٰٓ ٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪٥١‬‬
‫ذواِمنِدونهِۦِءاِلاةِۖٗلاو اَلِيأتُونِع الۡيمِب‬
‫خ ُ‬
‫اه ُؤ اَلءِ اقومُنااِ ا‬
‫ٱللِ ا‬
‫َتىِ اع اَلِ ا‬
‫ٱت ا‬
‫سلطان اِبينِۖٗفا امنِأاظلا ُمِم امنِٱف ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫‪they took‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫مهِ ‪ with the inside does‬فعلِماضِ ‪past-tense‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِف‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ِب‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ُا ا ا ُ‬
‫ا ا ا ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا اا‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪other than him‬‬
‫‪,‬هوِ ‪ is the attached pronoun for‬هِ ‪.‬مضاف ‪ and‬مجرور ‪ is‬دونِ ‪, and‬حرفِجرِ ‪ is a‬منِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪.‬مضافِإليه ‪and it is a‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِف‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ِب‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا ُا ا ُا ا ا ُ‬
‫اا ا ا ا ا‬
‫ا ا ا ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ُ ا ا اا ا ا ُ ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪gods‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫”?‪ form. It answers the question “what did they take‬نصبِ ‪A detail in‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِف‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ِب‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ٱللِ ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ُا ا‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ا اا‬
‫ُ‬
‫?… ‪why don’t‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪Question words used when asking why something didn’tِ or doesn’t happen.‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِف‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ِب‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ُا ا ا‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ا اا‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪they bring‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫مه ‪ with the inside doer‬فعلِمضارعِ ‪present-tense‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِف‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ب‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ُا ا‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ا اا‬
‫ُ‬
‫)‪in support of them (lit. upon them‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫مجرور ‪ being the‬مهِ ‪, and‬حرفِجرِ ‪ being the‬عَلِ ِ‪,‬جارِمجرورِ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ب‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ُا ا ا ُ‬
‫اا ا ا ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا اا‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪clear, powerful proof‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫انِ‬
‫انِ ‪. The two words‬جارِمجرور ‪ِ is a‬ب‬
‫سلطا ٍ‬
‫يِ ‪ُ and‬سلطا ٍ‬
‫‪ match in all 4 properties,‬اب ٍ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪.‬موصوفِصفة ‪meaning they are a‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ِب‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا ُا ا ُا ا ا ُ‬
‫اا ا ا ا ا‬
‫ا ا ا ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ُ ا ا اا ا ا ُ ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫?‪Then, who is more wrong‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪N/A‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫َٰٓ ٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ذواِمنِدونهِۦِءاِلاةِۖٗلاو اَلِيأتُونِع الۡيمِب‬
‫خ ُ‬
‫اه ُؤ اَلءِ اقومُنااِ ا‬
‫ٱللِ ا‬
‫َتىِ اع اَلِ ا‬
‫ٱت ا‬
‫سلطان اِبينِۖٗفا امنِأاظلا ُمِم امنِٱف ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫‪somebody who‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪, which means who. When they‬منِ ‪, and it is attached to the word‬حرفِجر ‪ِ is a‬منِ‬
‫ا‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫منِ ‪merge together, the spelling looks like this:‬‬
‫‪.‬م ا‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذِباِ‪٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِف‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ِب‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ُا ا ا ُ‬
‫اا ا ا ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ا ُ ا‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا اا‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪made (something) up‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪.‬هو ‪ with the inside doer‬فعلِماضِ ‪ِpast-tense‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫َٰٓ ٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪٥١‬‬
‫ذواِمنِدونهِۦِءاِلاةِۖٗلاو اَلِيأتُونِع الۡيمِب‬
‫خ ُ‬
‫اه ُؤ اَلءِ اقومُنااِ ا‬
‫ٱللِ ا‬
‫َتىِ اع اَلِ ا‬
‫ٱت ا‬
‫سلطان اِبينِۖٗفا امنِأاظلا ُمِم امنِٱف ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ا‬
‫ا‬
‫‪against Allah‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ِجارِمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫َٰٓ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ِۢ‬
‫هؤَلٓءِق ۡومناِٱتخذواِمنِدونهِ َٰٓ‬
‫ۦِءاِلةِۖٗل ا ۡوَلِيأتونِعل ۡ‬
‫كذباِ‪ِ٥١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫ع‬
‫ِ‬
‫ى‬
‫َت‬
‫ٱف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِم‬
‫م‬
‫ل‬
‫ظ‬
‫أ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ِف‬
‫ن‬
‫ۖٗ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِب‬
‫ن‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫س‬
‫ِب‬
‫م‬
‫ۡي‬
‫ا ُا ا ُا ا ا ُ‬
‫اا ا ا ا ا‬
‫ا ا ا ا ُ ا ا ا‬
‫ُ ا ا اا ا ا ُ ا‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪a lie‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫”?‪ form. Answers the question “what did they make up against Allah‬نصبِ ‪A detail in‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
1
Nahw – Kahf Ayah 16
ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي‬
ٓ‫وۥ‬
ۡ‫وه‬
ۡ ‫ف ِي‬
َ
ِ‫ئ‬
ِ
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
ِ
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
ِ
‫ا‬
ِ
ِ
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
ِ
ِ
‫ٱلل‬
ِ
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
ِ
ِ
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫و ِإ ِذ ِٱعتزل‬
ِ
ِ
ِ
َ
ِ
ِ
َ ُ َ
َُ َ ُ
َ
َِ َ ُ َ
َ ُ ُ َ َ َ ُ ُ ُ َ َ
ُ َ ََ
َ
َ َ َ ُ
ۡ ‫لكمِم‬
ِ٦١ِ‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِا‬
َ
َِ ُ
Definition
remember when
Nahw
N/A
ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي‬
ٓ
ۡ‫وه‬
ۡ
َ
ِ‫ئ‬
‫ي‬
ِ
ِ
‫ف‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
ِ
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
ِ
‫ا‬
ِ
‫ۥ‬
ِ
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
ِ
ِ
‫ٱلل‬
ِ
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
ِ
ِ
‫م‬
‫ت‬
ِ َ َِ ُ
ِ
َ
ِ
ِ
ُ
َِ َ ُ َ
َ
َ
ُ
ُ
ُ
ُ َ
َ
َ َ
ُ ُ ‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل‬
َ
ُ َ َ
ُ َ َ َ
َ
ۡ ‫لكمِم‬
ِ ٦١ِ‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِا‬
َ
َِ ُ
Definition
when you turned away
ِ‫ اعتزل ُت‬is a ‫ فعلِماض‬with an inside doer of ‫أنت‬.
َ َ
ِ‫ ه‬is an attached pronoun that is in ِ‫ نصب‬status because it is attached to a ‫ فعل‬and is
Nahw
therefore a detail of that ‫فعل‬.
The ‫ واو‬in between is there to make the word flow better. This is standard in Arabic
when you have to attach something to the end something that ends with ‫ت‬
ُِ .
ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ
ۡ
ِۡ‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُييئ‬
ٓ
ۡ‫وه‬
ۡ
َ
‫ي‬
ِ
ِ
‫ف‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
ِ
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
ِ
‫ا‬
ِ
‫ۥ‬
ِ
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
ِ
ِ
‫ٱلل‬
ِ
‫ّل‬
‫إ‬
ِ
ِ
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
ِ
ِ
‫م‬
‫ت‬
ِ
ِ
ِ
َ
ِ
ِ
ُ
َ ُ َ
َُ َ ُ
َ
َِ َ ُ َ
ُ ُ ‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل‬
َ ُ ُ َ َ َ
ُ َ ََ
َ َ َ ُ
ۡ ‫لكمِم‬
ِ ٦١ِ‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِا‬
َ
َِ ُ
Definition
and they don’t worship at all
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ of negation‬حرف ‪ is a‬ما‬
‫دونِ‬
‫ه ‪ with an inside doer of‬فعلِمضارع ‪ is a‬يعب‬
‫َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي ۡ‬
‫ٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ف‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ۥ‬
‫ِ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ُ َِ َ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
‫‪except for Allah‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪َ means except‬إّلِ‬
‫الل ‪The word‬‬
‫‪ because it is a detail that answers the question, “who did‬نصب ‪ِ َ is in‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫”?‪they worship‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي ۡ‬
‫وۥٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ف ِي ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ََ َ ُ َِ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ ُ َ َ َ ُ ُ َ ِ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫ُ َ َ َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
‫‪then take refuge‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪You don’t need an explanation of this word, just know the meaning.‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي ۡ‬
‫ٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ف‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ۥ‬
‫ِ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ُ َِ َ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ َُ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫ََ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
‫‪to the cave‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫جارِمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي ۡ‬
‫وۥٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ف ِي ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ََ َ ُ ِ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ ُ َ َ َ ُ ُ َ ِ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫ُ َ َ َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
‫‪he will spread‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫فعلِمضارع‬
‫‪ is lightest for a reason we haven’t learned yet, so don’t worry about it.‬فعل ‪This‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُييئِۡ‬
‫ٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ِ‬
‫نُش‬
‫ي‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ف‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ۥ‬
‫ِ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫ََ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ َ َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
‫‪for all of you‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ِجارِمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكم ِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي ۡ‬
‫ٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ف‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ۥ‬
‫ِ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ُ َِ َ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
‫‪your Master‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫بِ‬
‫‪.‬ين ُ ِ‬
‫ُش ‪ because it is the doer‬رفع ‪َ ِ is in‬ر َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫كمِ ‪ and‬مضاف ‪It is also a‬‬
‫‪.‬جر ‪ therefore its status is‬مضافِإليه ‪َ is a‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي ۡ‬
‫وۥٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ف ِي ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ََ َ ُ ِ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ ُ َ َ َ ُ ُ َ ِ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫ُ َ َ َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
‫‪from His mercy‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪ is beating it up, and it is‬من ‪ because the‬جر ‪ is‬رۡح ِة ‪.‬إضافة ‪ as well an‬جارِمجرور ‪This is a‬‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫مضافِإليه ‪ because it is a‬جر ‪ِ is an attached pronoun and it is in‬ه ‪. The‬مضاف ‪also a‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي ۡ‬
‫ٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ف‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ۥ‬
‫ِ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ُ َِ َ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َُ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
‫‪Definition and He would furnish for you‬‬
‫‪.‬هو ‪ with an inside doer of‬فعلِمضارع‬
‫‪ is also lightest for a reason we haven’t learned yet, so don’t worry about it.‬فعل ‪This‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي ۡ‬
‫ٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫ي‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ف‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ۥ‬
‫ِ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ُ َِ َ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َُ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُم َِِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
‫‪for you‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫جارِمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي ۡ‬
‫وۥٓ‬
‫وهۡ‬
‫ف ِي ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ِ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ٱلل‬
‫ِ‬
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ت‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ََ َ ُ َِ‬
‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل ُ ُ ُ َ َ َ ُ ُ َ ِ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫ُ َ َ َ‬
‫لكمِم ۡ‬
‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُمِ َِم ۡرفَقِاِ‪ِ٦١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َِ‬
5
Definition
Nahw
having to do with your problem
ِThis is a ‫ جارِمجرور‬as well an ‫إضافة‬. ‫ر‬
ِ ِ ‫ أَم‬is ‫ جر‬because the ‫ من‬is beating it up, and it is
also a ‫مضاف‬. The ِ‫ كُم‬is an attached pronoun and it is in ‫ جر‬because it is a ‫مضافِإليه‬
ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ‫نُش ِلك ۡم ِربكمِمنِر ۡۡحت ِهۦ ِوُيي‬
ٓ
ۡ‫وه‬
ۡ
َ
ِ‫ئ‬
‫ي‬
ِ
ِ
‫ف‬
‫ه‬
‫ك‬
‫ٱل‬
ِ
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
ِ
‫ا‬
ِ
‫ۥ‬
ِ
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ف‬
ِ
ِ
‫ٱلل‬
ِ
‫ّل‬
‫ِإ‬
‫ون‬
‫د‬
‫ب‬
‫ع‬
‫اِي‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
ِ
ِ
‫م‬
‫ت‬
ِ َ َِ ُ
ِ
َ
ِ
ِ
ُ
َِ َ ُ َ
َ
َ
ُ
ُ
ُ
َ
ُ
َ
َ َ
ُ ُ ‫َو ِإ ِذ ِٱع َت َزل‬
َ
ُ َ
ُ َ َ َ
َ
َ
ۡ ‫لكمِم‬
ِ٦١ِ‫نِأ َ ۡم ِركُمِ َِم ۡرفَقِا‬
َ
َِ ُ
Definition
a comfort
Nahw
ِThis word is a detail, therefore it is in ‫ نصب‬status.
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Nahw – Kahf Ayah 17‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ َ ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪and you will see‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫أنت ‪ with the inside doer‬فعل مضارع‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َُ َ‬
‫‪the sun‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫”?‪ form. It answers the question “what will you see‬نصب ‪A detail in‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ َٰ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك‬
‫ات ِ‬
‫َو َترى َ‬
‫ٱلشم َس ِإذَا َ‬
‫ي َو ِإذَا ََ‬
‫ٱلش َم ِ‬
‫ط َل َعت َت ََٰز َو ُر َعن َ‬
‫ات ٱل َي ِم ِ‬
‫ض ُِه ذَ َ‬
‫كه ِف ِِه ذَ َ‬
‫ال َو ُُه ِِف فَج َوةٖ ِمنهُۚ ُ ذَلِ َ‬
‫َغ َبت َتق ِر ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َُ َ‬
‫‪when it rises‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ط َلعت‬
‫‪. The feminine pronoun is used because‬هي ‪ with the inside doer‬فعل ماض ‪is a‬‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫الشمس‬
‫‪is feminine because the Arabs said so.‬‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫م ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ن ء َٰ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪it side steps‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪. Again, the inside pronoun here goes back to‬هي ‪ with the inside doer‬فعل مضارع‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪.‬الشمس‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫م ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ن ء َٰ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪from their cave‬‬
‫‪ُ is an attached pronoun and a‬ه ‪.‬مضاف ‪ and a‬مجرور ‪is a‬ك ْهف ‪ and‬حرف جر ‪ is a‬ع ْ‬
‫ن‬
‫َ ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪.‬مضاف إليه‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َُ َ‬
‫‪towards the right‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ات‬
‫‪.‬مضاف إليه ‪is a‬‬
‫الي ِم ِ‬
‫ي ‪ and‬مضاف ‪ is a‬ذَ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ َٰ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك‬
‫ات ِ‬
‫َو َترى َ‬
‫ٱلشم َس ِإذَا َ‬
‫ي َو ِإذَا ََ‬
‫ٱلش َم ِ‬
‫ط َل َعت َت ََٰز َو ُر َعن َ‬
‫ات ٱل َي ِم ِ‬
‫ض ُِه ذَ َ‬
‫كه ِف ِِه ذَ َ‬
‫ال َو ُُه ِِف فَج َوةٖ ِمنهُۚ ُ ذَلِ َ‬
‫َغ َبت َتق ِر ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َُ َ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪and when it sets‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪.‬هي ‪ with the inside doer‬فعل ماض ‪ََ is a‬غبت‬
‫ََ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َُ َ‬
‫‪it avoids them‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫هي ‪ with the inside doer‬فعل مضارع‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ َٰ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك‬
‫ات ِ‬
‫َو َترى َ‬
‫ٱلشم َس ِإذَا َ‬
‫ي َو ِإذَا ََ‬
‫ٱلش َم ِ‬
‫ط َل َعت َت ََٰز َو ُر َعن َ‬
‫ات ٱل َي ِم ِ‬
‫ض ُِه ذَ َ‬
‫كه ِف ِِه ذَ َ‬
‫ال َو ُُه ِِف فَج َوةٖ ِمنهُۚ ُ ذَلِ َ‬
‫َغ َبت َتق ِر ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َُ َ‬
‫‪towards the left‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ات‬
‫مضاف إليه ‪ِ is a‬‬
‫الش َم ِ‬
‫ال ‪ and‬مضاف ‪ is a‬ذَ َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫م ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ن ء َٰ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪while they are‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪ in this ayah is translated as ‘while’.‬و ‪ُ is a detached pronoun. Note that‬ه‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َُ َ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪in an open space‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫جار مجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َُ َ‬
‫‪in some part of it‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫جار مجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ َ ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪that is‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪pointing word‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫م ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ن ء َٰ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪from the miraculous signs of Allah‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ايت ‪,‬جار مجرور ‪ is a‬م ۡ‬
‫ن ء َٰ‬
‫ت‬
‫اي ِ‬
‫مضاف إليه ‪ is a‬ال ‪, and the word‬مضاف ‪ is a‬ء ََٰ ِ‬
‫ِ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡهُۚ َٰ‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ِِ َ َ َ ِ ِ َ َِ َ ََ َ ِ ُ ُ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ايت ٱله من ۡ‬
‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا ‪٧١‬‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ِمن ء َٰ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َُ َ‬
5
Definition
Whoever Allah would guide, then he is committed to guidance, and whoever
Allah would misguide…
Nahw
N/A
َٰ ُۚ‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡه‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
ِ
َ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ ِ َ ِ َ َ ُ ُ ِ َ ََ َ َِ َ ِ ِ َ َ َ ِِ َ َ ُ َ َ َ ََ َ َِ َ َ
َ َ َ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ‫ايت ٱله من‬
٧١ ‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا‬
‫َي ِد‬
ِ ِ َٰ ‫ِمن ء‬
ُ َ َ َ
َ ُ
َ َ
َ َ َ
َ َُ
Definition
Nahw
then you will not find
ْ ‫ ل‬is a light letter, which is why ‫ تجد‬is in light form. ‫ تجد‬is a ‫ فعل مضارع‬with the inside
‫ن‬
َ
َ ِ َ
َ ِ َ
doer ‫أنت‬.
َ
َٰ ُۚ‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡه‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
ِ
َ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ ِ َ ِ َ َ ُ ُ ِ َ ََ َ َِ َ ِ ِ َ َ َ ِِ َ َ ُ َ َ َ ََ َ َِ َ َ
َ َ َ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ‫ايت ٱله من‬
٧١ ‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا‬
‫َي ِد‬
ِ ِ َٰ ‫ِمن ء‬
ُ َ َ َ
َ ُ
َ َ
َ َ َ
َ َُ
Definition
for him
Nahw
‫جار مجرور‬
َٰ ُۚ‫وترى ٱلش ۡمس إذا طلعت ت َٰزور عن ك ۡهفِهۡ ذات ٱلۡيمي وإذا َغبت ت ۡقرضِه ۡ ذات ٱلشمال وُهۡ ِف ف ۡجوةٖ منۡه‬
‫ك‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
ِ
َ َ ُ ِ َ َ ِ ُ َ ِ َ ِ َ َ ُ ُ ِ َ ََ َ َِ َ ِ ِ َ َ َ ِِ َ َ ُ َ َ َ ََ َ َِ َ َ
َ َ َ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ ۡ
ۡ
ۡ ‫ايت ٱله من‬
٧١ ‫ٱل ف َ ُهو ٱل ُمهت ِد ومن يض ِلل فَ َلن َت ِج َد َلۥ ولِيا ُم ۡر ِشدا‬
‫َي ِد‬
ِ ِ َٰ ‫ِمن ء‬
ُ َ َ َ
َ ُ
َ َ
َ َ َ
َ َُ
Definition
A protective friend who will make sure that he is on the straight path
These words match in all 4 properties, which makes them a ‫موصوف صفة‬. They are in
Nahw
‫ نصب‬form because they are details. They answer the question, “what won’t you
find?”
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Nahw – Kahf Ayah 18‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡ ِّفراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪and you would think that they are‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫أنت ‪ with an inside doer of‬فعلۡمضارع‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعل ‪ status because it is attached to a‬نصب ‪ُ is an attached pronoun that is in‬ه‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪awake‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪. It answers the question “what would you assume‬فعل ‪This is the second detail of this‬‬
‫‪.‬نصب ‪about them?” Its status is‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ ۡ‬
‫وُهۡ ۡرقودٌۚ ۡونق ِّلُب ۡ‬
‫وت ۡحسُب ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫ال ۡو‬
‫ٱلشم ِّ ِۖ‬
‫ات ۡ‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫اظا‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ق‬
‫ي‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هَ ه ه‬
‫َ َ َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡ ِّفراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪while‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪N/A‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫ُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و هۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪they are‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫رفع ‪A detached pronoun, therefore its status is‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪fast asleep‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪ status‬رفع ‪ that is in‬اسم ‪This is an‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪and we keep on turning them‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪.‬نحن ‪ with an inside doer of‬فعلۡمضارع‬
‫‪.‬فعل ‪ status because it is attached to a‬نصب ‪ُ is an attached pronoun that is in‬ه‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪towards the right‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫اتۡ‬
‫جر ‪ and is therefore in‬مضافۡإليه ‪ is a‬الي ِّم ِّۡ‬
‫ي ‪ and‬مضاف ‪ is a‬ذَ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪and towards the left‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫اتۡ‬
‫الشم ِّ ۡ‬
‫جر ‪ and is therefore in‬مضافۡإليه ‪is a‬‬
‫ال ‪ and‬مضاف ‪ۡ is a‬ذَ َ‬
‫ِّ َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡ ِّفراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪their dog‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫كلبۡ‬
‫‪, therefore its status is‬مضافۡإليه ‪ُ is an attached pronoun and a‬ه ‪ and‬مضاف ‪ۡ is a‬‬
‫َ ه‬
‫جر‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡيقاظاۡ ۡوُهۡ ۡرقودٌۚ ۡونق ِّلُب ۡ‬
‫وت ۡحسُب ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫ال ۡو‬
‫ٱلشم ِّ ِۖ‬
‫ات ۡ‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هَ ه ه‬
‫َ َ َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪stretching‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪ status. No grammar for this yet.‬رفع ‪ in‬اسم ‪An‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪its two paws‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪ because it’s answering the question, “what was the dog‬نصب ‪ۡThe word is in‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ي ‪ is‬نصب ‪ِّ , the dual in‬ذراع ‪stretching?” The singular word is‬‬
‫‪ِّ , and the word is‬ذراع ِّۡ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ِّۡ , which is therefore‬ه ‪ is the attached pronoun‬مضافۡإليه ‪. Its‬مضاف ‪light because it is a‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪.‬جر‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪at the mouth of the cave‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ۡجارۡمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡ ِّفراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪had it been the case‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪ۡN/A‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪you were to find/climb up‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫أنت ‪ۡ with an inside doer of‬فعلۡماض‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪upon them‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ۡجارۡمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡ ِّفراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪you would have turned back‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫أنت ‪ۡ with an inside doer of‬فعلۡماض‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪from them‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ۡجارۡمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡ ِّفراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪running as fast as you can‬‬
‫‪ because it answers the question, “how would you have turned‬نصب ‪This word is in‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫”?‪back from them‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪and you would have been filled‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫أنت ‪ with an inside doer‬فعل ‪This is a passive‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡيقاظاۡ ۡوُهۡ ۡرقودٌۚ ۡونق ِّلُب ۡ‬
‫وت ۡحسُب ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫ال ۡو‬
‫ٱلشم ِّ ِۖ‬
‫ات ۡ‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ٱل‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هَ ه ه‬
‫َ َ َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪because of them‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ۡجارۡمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫يد ۡلَ ِّوۡ‬
‫سطۡ ۡ ِّذراع ۡي ِّۡه ۡ ِّبٱلو ِّص ِّ ٌۚ‬
‫كلُبم ۡب َٰ َ ِّ ۡ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۖ‬
‫ال‬
‫م‬
‫ٱلش‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ات‬
‫ذ‬
‫و‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ات ۡٱل‬
‫م ۡذ َ َ ۡ‬
‫م ۡأ َ ۡي َقاظاۡ ۡو هُهۡ ۡرقهودٌۚ ۡون ه َق ِّلُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َتحسُب ۡ ۡ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫هه‬
‫هه‬
‫َ هه‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ٱطَل ۡعتۡعل ۡ‬
‫ۡي ۡمۡلَول َ ۡيتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡفِّراراۡولَ هم ِّلئتۡ ِّمۡنه ۡمۡرعباۡ‪ۡ٨١‬‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪terror‬‬
‫‪ because it answers the question, “what would you have been filled‬نصب ‪ۡThis is in‬‬
‫”?‪with‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Nahw – Kahf Ayah 19‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َرب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪and that is how‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪N/A‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫م َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َرب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم َٰ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫َطعامٗاَفَليأ ِت‬
‫ك َٰى‬
‫َه ِذ َِهۦَ ِإ ََلَٱلم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ۡرَأ َ ُّيٓاَأَز‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪٩١‬‬
‫َب‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َو ََلَي ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪we sent them‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ is attached‬مهَ ‪, and‬نحن ‪ with the inside doer‬فعلَماضَ ‪ is a‬بعثنَاَ‬
‫ََ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫وا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ك َبعث َََٰنُ ۡم َلِيتَسٓاءل ُ َ‬
‫ك ََٰذلِ َ َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َو َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم َٰ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ظ‬
‫ن‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫َ‬
‫ة‬
‫ين‬
‫د‬
‫م‬
‫ٱل‬
‫َ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ذ‬
‫َه‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪so that they could ask each other‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪. It is in light form‬مه ‪ with the insider doer‬فعلَمضارعَ ‪ is a‬يتَساءلُوا ‪ِ is a light letter, and‬لَ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪.‬ل ‪because of the‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪among themselves‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫مضافَإليه ‪ is an attached pronoun and a‬مهَ ‪ and‬مضافَ ‪ is a‬بْيََ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َۚۡ‬
‫م‬
‫ك ََٰذلِ َ َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َو َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم َٰ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ظ‬
‫ن‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫َ‬
‫ة‬
‫ين‬
‫د‬
‫م‬
‫ٱل‬
‫َ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ذ‬
‫َه‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪a speaker said‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫الَ‬
‫‪ form.‬رفعَ ‪َ is an outside doer in‬ق ِ‬
‫ائلَ ‪, and‬فعلَماضَ ‪َ is a‬ق َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َليتسٓاءلواْ َب ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫ي‬
‫وك َٰذلِ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ َ َ َ ِ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َِ ُ َ ُ َِ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ ََ َ ُ ََ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم َٰ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫َطعامٗاَفَليأ ِت‬
‫ك َٰى‬
‫َه ِذ َِهۦَ ِإ ََلَٱلم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ۡرَأ َ ُّيٓاَأَز‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫َب‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َو ََلَي ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪among them‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫جارَمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪how long did‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪N/A‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ك ََٰذلِ َ َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َو َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪all of you remain here‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ت ‪َ with the insider doer‬فعلَماضَ‬
‫أن ُ َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َليتسٓاءلواْ َب ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫ي‬
‫وك َٰذلِ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ َ َ َ ِ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َِ ُ َ ُ َِ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ ََ َ ُ ََ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم َٰ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫َطعامٗاَفَليأ ِت‬
‫ك َٰى‬
‫َه ِذ َِهۦَ ِإ ََلَٱلم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ۡرَأ َ ُّيٓاَأَز‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫َب‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َو ََلَي ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪they said‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫مه ‪َ with the inside doer‬فعلَماضَ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ََ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪we remained‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫نحن ‪ with the inside doer‬فعلَماض َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫وك َٰ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ََ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ْٓ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ظ‬
‫ن‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫َ‬
‫ة‬
‫ين‬
‫د‬
‫م‬
‫ٱل‬
‫َ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ذ‬
‫َه‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ق‬
‫ر‬
‫و‬
‫َب‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫د‬
‫ح‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ َ ِ ِ‬
‫لَ ِبث ُتَفَٱب َعثُوا َ َ َ ُ ِ َ ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َُ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َِ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪a day or part of a day‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ضَ ”?‪ for. It answers the question “how long did you stay‬نصبَ ‪َ is a detail in‬ي َ‬
‫وما‬
‫‪ is a‬بع‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫مضافَإليه ‪ is a‬ي ْو ٍمَ ‪, and‬مضاف‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪your master‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ربَ‬
‫مضافَإليه ‪ is an attached pronoun and a‬كمَ ‪, and‬مضاف ‪ُ َ is a‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪knows better about how long‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫بَ‬
‫‪. We’ll learn the rest of the grammar later.‬حرفَجر ‪ِ َ is a‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫وك َٰ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ََ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ْٓ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ظ‬
‫ن‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫َ‬
‫ة‬
‫ين‬
‫د‬
‫م‬
‫ٱل‬
‫َ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ذ‬
‫َه‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ق‬
‫ر‬
‫و‬
‫َب‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫د‬
‫ح‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ َ ِ ِ‬
‫لَ ِبث ُتَفَٱب َعثُوا َ َ َ ُ ِ َ ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َُ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َِ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪you stayed‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫أنت ‪َ with the inside doer‬فعلَماض‬
‫َُ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫وك َٰ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ََ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ْٓ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ظ‬
‫ن‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫َ‬
‫ة‬
‫ين‬
‫د‬
‫م‬
‫ٱل‬
‫َ‬
‫َل‬
‫إ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۦ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ذ‬
‫َه‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ق‬
‫ر‬
‫و‬
‫َب‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫د‬
‫ح‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ َ ِ ِ‬
‫لَ ِبث ُتَفَٱب َعثُوا َ َ َ ُ ِ َ ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َُ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َِ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪so, select‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫أنت ‪َ (command) with the inside doer‬فعلَأمرَ‬
‫َُ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪one of you‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪.‬مضافَإليه ‪ is an attached pronoun and a‬كم ‪.‬مضاف ‪ form and a‬نصب ‪َ is a detail in‬أَح َدَ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪with this cash of yours‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫بَ‬
‫َِ‬
‫مضافَ ‪ is an attached pronoun and a‬كم ‪,‬مضاف ‪ and a‬مجرور ‪is a‬‬
‫ورق ‪,‬حرفَجر ‪ِ َ is a‬‬
‫‪.‬إليه‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َرب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫َب‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َو ََلَي ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪to the city‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫َجارَمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪then, he should watch out‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ر ‪َ is a lightest letter, which means “then… should”.‬فَلَ‬
‫‪ with the‬فعلَمضارع ‪ is a‬ينظ ُ ْ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ل ‪. Notice that it is in lightest form because of‬هو ‪inside doer‬‬
‫‪.‬فَ َ‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َرب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫َب‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َو ََلَي ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪which of them‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫أيَ‬
‫’‪ is translated as ‘them‬هاَ ‪.‬مضافَإليه ‪ is an attached pronoun and‬ها ‪ and‬مضافَ ‪ُ َ is a‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪because the feminine singular pronoun is used for non-human plurals‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َليتسٓاءلواْ َب ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫ي‬
‫وك َٰذلِ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ َ َ َ ِ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َِ ُ َ ُ َِ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ ََ َ ُ ََ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم َٰ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫َطعامٗاَفَليأ‬
‫ك َٰى‬
‫َه ِذ َِهۦَ ِإ ََلَٱلم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ۡرَأ َ ُّيٓاَأَز‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫َب‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َو ََلَي ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪purer in terms of food‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪َN/A‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كمَ ِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪then he should bring to you‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َ is a lightest letter, which means “then... should”. The rest is grammar we’ll study‬فَلَ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪later.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َليتسٓاءلواْ َب ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫ي‬
‫وك َٰذلِ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ َ َ َ ِ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َِ ُ َ ُ َِ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ ََ َ ُ ََ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم َٰ‬
‫كمَ ِب ِرزقَ ِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫َطعامٗاَفَليأ ِت‬
‫ك َٰى‬
‫َه ِذ َِهۦَ ِإ ََلَٱلم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ۡرَأ َ ُّيٓاَأَز‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫َب‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َو ََلَي ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪some provision‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫َجارَمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫تم ۡ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َليتسٓاءلواْ َب ۡ‬
‫ض َي ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ۚۡ‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ع‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫م‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ا‬
‫ن‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫وا‬
‫ال‬
‫ق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ب‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓائ‬
‫َق‬
‫ال‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫َن‬
‫ي‬
‫وك َٰذلِ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ َ َ َ ِ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ُ َ َِ ُ َ ُ َِ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ ََ َ ُ ََ َ َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم َٰ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزقَ ِمنه َُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫َطعامٗاَفَليأ ِت‬
‫ك َٰى‬
‫َه ِذ َِهۦَ ِإ ََلَٱلم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ۡرَأ َ ُّيٓاَأَز‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫َب‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َو ََلَي ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪from it‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫َجارَمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َر ُب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫و ََلَيُش ِِع َن َِب‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪and he should be very subtle and cautious‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫َف ‪ is a lightest letter, which means “and... should”.‬ول‬
‫‪ with the‬فعلَمضارعَ ‪ is a‬يت َلط َ‬
‫ََ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ل ‪. It is in lightest form because of the‬هو ‪inside doer‬‬
‫‪.‬و َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ ۡ ۡ ً ۡ ۡ‬
‫و َٰ‬
‫ك َبعثۡ ََٰن ۡم َلِيتسٓاءلوا َب ۡيَن ۡ‬
‫م َ ِبماَ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫وا َرب‬
‫ض َي ۡومۚۡ َ َقال ُ َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫وا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫تمَۡ َقال ُ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ٓائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال ََق‬
‫َۚۡق‬
‫م‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ك َذلِ َ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ۡ ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫لبثۡتَۡف ۡ‬
‫ٱبعث ٓواَأَحدكمَبور ِقك ۡم ََٰه ِذ َِهۦَإ ََلَٱلۡم ِدين ِةَف ۡلينظ ُ ۡ‬
‫كم َِب ِرزق َِمنهَُوليت َلط َفَ‬
‫ت‬
‫أ‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫َف‬
‫ا‬
‫ٗ‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫ع‬
‫َط‬
‫ى‬
‫ك‬
‫ز‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ٓا‬
‫ّي‬
‫أ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َٰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َِ ُ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ك ۡمَأَح ًداَ‪َ٩١‬‬
‫َب‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َو ََلَي ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪and he shouldn’t let other people realize about you people‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪َN/A‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Nahw – Kahf Ayah 20‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫داۡ‪ۡ٠٢‬‬
‫ح ٓوا ِۡإذًاۡأهب ً ۡ‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡو‬
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۡف‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡي‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ۡي‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡع‬
‫وا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ ه ُ ُ ُ‬
‫ُ ُ ُ ِ‬
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
‫ِ ه ه ُ ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫‪those people, no doubt about it‬‬
‫‪, which is‬نصب ‪ and therefore makes the word that comes after it in‬حرفۡنصب ‪ِ is a‬إ َ هنۡ‬
‫‪.‬نصب ‪ is in‬مه ‪why the attached pronoun‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫داۡ‪ۡ٠٢‬‬
‫ح ٓوا ِۡإذًاۡأهب ً ۡ‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡو‬
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۡف‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡي‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ۡي‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡ‬
‫وا‬
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ُ ُ ه ُ ِ ُ ُ ِ ِ َه ِ ِ ه ه ُ ِ ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫‪if they take over‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ون ‪ is not‬يظ ههروا ‪ which is why‬حرف ۡ‪ is a light‬إنۡ‬
‫يظ ههر ۡ‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫مه ‪ with a hidden doer of‬فعلۡمضارع ‪ is a light‬يظ ههرواۡ‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫داۡ‪ۡ٠٢‬‬
‫ح ٓوا ِۡإذًاۡأهب ً ۡ‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡو‬
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۡف‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡي‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ي‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡ‬
‫وا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ِ ه ه ُ ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ُ‬
‫‪upon you‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫جارۡمجرور‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫داۡ‪ۡ٠٢‬‬
‫ح ٓوا ِۡإذًاۡأهب ً ۡ‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡو‬
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۡف‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡي‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ي‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡع‬
‫وا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ه‬
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ِ ه ُ ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ُ‬
‫‪they will stone all of you‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪ is lightest, but we don’t know why‬فعل ‪. This‬مه ‪ with a hidden doer of‬فعلۡمضارع‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
2
yet.
‫ كم‬is an attached pronoun in ‫ نصب‬because it is attached to a ‫فعل‬
ْ
ْ
ۡ٠٢ۡ‫دا‬
ۡ ً ‫ح ٓوا ِۡإذًاۡأهب‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡو‬
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
ۡ
‫ِۡف‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ي‬
ۡ
‫و‬
‫أ‬
ۡ
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ۡي‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡع‬
‫وا‬
ِ
ِ
ِ
ِ
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
َ
ُ ُ ُ ‫ُ ه‬
ِ ُ ُ ُ
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
ُ ُ ‫ِ ه ه‬
‫ه‬
Definition
or
Nahw
N/A
ْ
ْ
ۡ٠٢ۡ‫دا‬
ۡ ً ‫ح ٓوا ِۡإذًاۡأهب‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡو‬
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
ۡ
‫ِف‬
ۡ
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ي‬
ۡ
‫و‬
‫أ‬
ۡ
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ۡي‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡع‬
‫وا‬
ِ
ِ
ِ
ِ
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
َ
ُ ُ ُ ‫ُ ه‬
ِ ُ ُ ُ
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
ُ ُ ‫ِ ه ه‬
‫ه‬
Definition
they will bring all of you back
‫ مضارع‬with a hidden doer of ‫مه‬. This ‫ فعل‬is lightest, but we don’t know why yet.
Nahw
‫ كم‬is an attached pronoun in ‫ نصب‬because it is attached to a ‫فعل‬
ْ
ْ
ۡ٠٢ۡ‫دا‬
ۡ ً ‫ح ٓوا ِۡإذًاۡأهب‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫و‬
ۡ
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
ۡ
‫ِف‬
ۡ
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡي‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
ۡ
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ۡي‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡع‬
‫وا‬
ِ
ِ
ِ
ِ
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
َ
ُ ُ ُ ‫ُ ه‬
ِ ُ ُ ُ
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
ُ ُ ‫ِ ه ه‬
‫ه‬
Definition
into their nation/religion
‫جارۡمجرور‬
Nahw
ً
ۡ َ ‫ ِم‬is also a ‫ مضاف‬and ‫ مه‬is an attached pronoun that is in ‫ جر‬because it is a ‫مضافۡإليه‬
ِ‫ل‬
ْ
ْ
ۡ٠٢ۡ‫دا‬
ۡ ً ‫ح ٓواۡ ِإذًاۡأهب‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫و‬
ۡ
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
ۡ
‫ِۡف‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡي‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
ۡ
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ۡي‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡع‬
‫وا‬
ِ
ِ
ِ
ِ
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
َ
ُ ُ ُ ‫ُ ه‬
ِ ُ ُ ُ
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
ُ ُ ‫ِ ه ه‬
‫ه‬
Definition
and you all will never succeed
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ is light.‬ت ْفلحوا ‪, which is why‬حرف ‪ۡ is a light‬ل ْ‬
‫نۡ‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ِ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫حوا‬
‫أنمت ‪ with a hidden doer of‬فعلۡمضارع ‪ is a‬تُف ِل ُ‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫داۡ‪ۡ٠٢‬‬
‫ح ٓواۡ ِإذًاۡأهب ً ۡ‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡو‬
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۡف‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡي‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ۡي‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡع‬
‫وا‬
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ُ ُ ه ُ ِ ُ ُ ِ ِ َه ِ ِ ه ه ُ ِ ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫‪in that case‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫حرف ‪ۡLight‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫داۡ‪ۡ٠٢‬‬
‫ح ٓوا ِۡإذًاۡ ۡأ هب ً ۡ‬
‫ل‬
‫ف‬
‫ۡت‬
‫ن‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡو‬
‫م‬
‫ِت‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ۡ‬
‫ِۡف‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫يد‬
‫ع‬
‫ۡي‬
‫و‬
‫أ‬
‫ۡ‬
‫م‬
‫وك‬
‫ُج‬
‫ر‬
‫ۡي‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫ۡع‬
‫وا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ه‬
‫ِإ َ هّنُمۡ ِإن هۡيظ هه ُر ه ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ ُ ُ ه ُ ُ ُ ِ َ ِ ه ه ُ ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫‪ever‬‬
‫‪Definition‬‬
‫‪.‬نصب ‪ is in‬اسم ‪This‬‬
‫‪Nahw‬‬
1
Sarf – Kahf Ayah 1
Let’s go through the sarf sagheer of the first ayah of Surah Al-Kahf:
ْ ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ
َ ّ ُ‫( الح ْمدُ ل ّ َِلل‬a
)١(ُ‫كتابُولَ ْمُيجعلُ َلُ لعوجا‬
‫اّليُأَنز َلُع َلُعب لد لهُال‬
‫ل‬
‫ل‬
َ َ َ
َ
َ َ َ َ َ
َ َ
ْ a masdar. I want to find out which family this word belongs
If you take the ‫ ال‬off, you have the word ‫َحد‬,
َ
to, so I first try to see if it matches with any of the masdars of the eight big families:
ْ ُ ُ ُ ُ  )ُ‫تعل ًماُ(تحم ًدا‬
‫َحد‬
ّ ََ
ّ َ َ
َ
ْ ُ ُ ُ ُ ُ
‫َحد‬
َ
ْ
ً ‫لا ْس لتغ َف‬
ُ‫ارا‬
ْ ُ ُ ُ ُ ُ
‫َحد‬
َ
ْ ُُُُ
‫َحد‬
َ
ْ
)‫( لا ْس لتحمادًا‬
َ
ْ ُ ُ ُ ُ ُ
‫َحد‬
َ
ُ‫اه َد ًة‬
‫ج َهادًاُوُم‬
‫ل‬
َ ‫ج‬
َ
)ُ ‫( لَحادًاُوُمحام َد ًة‬
َ َ
َ
ْ
‫لان لق ََل ًبا‬
ْ ُ ُ ُ ُ ُ
‫َحد‬
َ
ْ
)ُ‫ُ( لان لحمادًا‬
َ
ً ‫ت ْع لل‬
ُ‫يما‬
َ
ْ ُ ُ ُ ُ ُ
‫َحد‬
َ
ْ
ُ‫ِتا ًبا‬
‫لاق َل‬
ْ ُ ُ ُ ُ ُ
‫َحد‬
َ
ً ‫(ت ْح لم‬
)ُ‫يدا‬
َ
ْ ‫(ِا‬
)ُ‫ح لتمادًا‬
َ ‫ل‬
ْ
ً ‫لإخب‬
ُ‫ارا‬
َ
ْ
‫لإَحادًا‬
َ
ًُ‫تسائَل‬
َ َ
‫َتحام ًدا‬
َ
Because it does not match any of the 8 big families, it must belong to one of the small families. I will tell
you what family it is (you can’t figure it out on your own yet):
To praise
ُ‫فهوُحا لمد‬
َ
ْ
‫َح ًدا‬
َ
The one who praises
ْ
ُ‫فهوُمحمود‬
َ
To praise
The one that is praised
To praise
ْ
‫َح ًدا‬
َ
ْ ْ
ُ ‫وُالهنيُعنه ََُل َُتحم‬
‫د‬
َ
Don’t praise!
ُ ُ‫ُي َ ْسمع‬
َ
ُ‫ََسلع‬
َ
ْ
ُ‫يحمد‬
َ َ
ُ‫َح َد‬
‫َل‬
He praises
ْ
ُ‫يحمد‬
َ
He praised
He is being praised
He was praised
ْ ْ
ُ ‫األمرُمنهُ لاَح‬
‫د‬
َ
ْ
ْ
ْ
ُ‫وُالظرفُمنهُمح لمدُوُمحمدُوُمحم َدة‬
َ َ
َ َ
َ
‫مصدر‬
ُ‫َح َد‬
‫ل‬
Praise!
The time or place where praise happens
ْ ْ
ْ ْ
ْ
ْ
َ ّ ُ‫( الح ْمدُ ل ّ َِلل‬b
)١(ُ‫كتابُولَ ْمُيجعلُ َلُ لعوجا‬
‫اّليُأَنز َلُع َلُعب لد لهُال‬
‫ل‬
‫ل‬
َ َ َ
َ
َ َ َ َ َ
َ َ
To send down
ْ
ُ‫ب‬
ُ ‫ُيخ ل‬
ْ
ُ‫ب‬
َ َ ‫أَخ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫فعلُماض‬
‫ْ‬
‫أَنز َلُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين لزلُ‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫لإنزاَلُ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪He sent down‬‬
‫‪He sends down‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ينز ُ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫‪The one who sends down To send down‬‬
‫ْ ً‬
‫لإنز ُ‬
‫اَل‬
‫َ‬
‫فهوُمنزلُ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪He was sent down‬‬
‫‪He is being sent down‬‬
‫‪To send down‬‬
‫‪The one that is sent down‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫أن لز َلُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرُمنهُأَن لز ُ‬
‫ل‬
‫!‪Send down‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوُمن لزلُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وُالهنيُعنه ََُلُتن لز ُ‬
‫ل‬
‫!‪Don’t send down‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫وُالظرفُمنهُمنزلُ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪The time or place of sending down‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ (c‬الح ْمدُ ل ّ َِللُ ّ َ‬
‫كتابُولَ ْمُيجعلُ َلُ لعوجاُ(‪ُ)١‬‬
‫اّليُأَنز َلُع َلُعب لد لهُال‬
‫ل‬
‫ل‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫مصدر‬
‫ُ َنصرُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫كتبُ‬
‫ََ َ‬
‫ك لتبُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ُينصرُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يكتبُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يكتبُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرُمنهُاكت ْ ُ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪To write‬‬
‫كتا ًبا‬
‫لَ‬
‫كتا ًبا‬
‫لَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وُالظرفُمنهُمك لتبُمكتبُمكتبةُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ ََ‬
‫ُكا لتبُ‬
‫فهو َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوُمكتوبُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بْ‬
‫وُالهنيُعنه ََُل َُتكت ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪(d‬الح ْمدُ ل ّ َِللُ ّ َ‬
‫كتابُولَ ْمُيجعلُ َلُ لعوجاُ(‪)١‬‬
‫اّليُأَنز َلُع َلُعب لد لهُال‬
‫ل‬
‫ل‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫م ‪Note:‬‬
‫‪), it ends with a sukoon.‬يجعلُ( ’‪ makes the present tense lightest, so instead of ending with ‘u‬لَ ْ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫فَتحُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪ lightest‬فعل مضارع‬
‫جع َلُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ج لع َلُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ُيفتحُ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يجعلُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يجعلُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرُمنهُ لاجع ُ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ُTo make‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫جع ًَلُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫جع ً ُ‬
‫َل‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وُالظرفُمنهُمج لعلُمجعلُمجع َلُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫اعلُ‬
‫فهو‬
‫ُج ل‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوُمجعولُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وُالهنيُعنه ََُل َُتجع ُ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 2‬‬
‫‪Let’s go through the Sarf of Ayah 2 of Surah Al-Kahf:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫الصالحات أ َ ِّ َن لَ ُه أَجرً ا حسنًا (‪)٢‬‬
‫ون‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ع‬
‫ي‬
‫ين‬
‫اّل‬
‫ي‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ؤ‬
‫م‬
‫ال‬
‫ش‬
‫ب‬
‫ي‬
‫و‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫َل‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫يد‬
‫د‬
‫ش‬
‫ا‬
‫س‬
‫‪َ (a‬ق ِّي ًما لينذر بأ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪), it ends with ‘a’. To find out which‬ينذر( ’‪ makes the present tense light, so instead of ending with ‘u‬ل‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين ذ ر‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫‪ light‬فعل مضارع‬
‫‪ isn’t there:‬ل ‪family this word belongs to, assume that‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين ذ ر‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ب يخب ُ(‬
‫يخب )أخ‬
‫ُ ُ َ َ َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يُخب ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين ذ ر‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين َذر‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫األمر منه أ ْنذرْ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫أَخ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أَن َذر‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أُنذر‬
‫َ‬
‫إ ْنذارا ً‬
‫َ‬
‫إ ْنذارا ً‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و الهني عنه ََل تُنذ ْر‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهومنذ رر‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهو من َذ رر‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪To warn‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫و الظرف منه من َذ رر‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫الصالحات أ َ ِّ َن لَ ُه أَجرً ا حسنًا (‪)٢‬‬
‫ون‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ع‬
‫ي‬
‫ين‬
‫اّل‬
‫ي‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ؤ‬
‫م‬
‫ال‬
‫ش‬
‫ب‬
‫ي‬
‫و‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫َل‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫يد‬
‫د‬
‫ش‬
‫ا‬
‫س‬
‫‪َ (b‬ق ِّي ًما لينذر بأ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ش‬
‫يب ِّ‬
‫َُ َ‬
‫‪ light‬فعل مضارع‬
‫ش ‪ still carries over. Originally, it was‬ل ‪The effect of the‬‬
‫‪.‬يب ِّ‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫ش‬
‫يب ِّ‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫يع ِّلم )ع ِّلَم يع ِّلم(‬
‫َُ ُ َ َ َُ ُ‬
‫ع ِّلَم‬
‫َ َ‬
‫يع ِّلم‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫ش‬
‫ب ِّ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ش‬
‫يب ِّ َ‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫ش‬
‫ب ِّ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ش‬
‫يب ِّ‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫األمر منه ب ْ‬
‫ش‬
‫َ ِّ‬
‫‪To congratulate‬‬
‫ت ْبشريا ً‬
‫َ‬
‫ت ْبشريا ً‬
‫َ‬
‫و الظرف منه مب ِّ َ ر‬
‫ش‬
‫َُ‬
‫فهومب ِّ ر‬
‫ش‬
‫َُ‬
‫فهو مب ِّ َ ر‬
‫ش‬
‫َُ‬
‫و الهني عنه ََل تب ْ‬
‫ش‬
‫ُ َ ِّ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪َ (c‬قي ًما لينْذر بأ ً‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫الصالحات أ َ ِّ َن لَ ُه أَجرً ا حسنًا (‪)٢‬‬
‫ون‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ع‬
‫ي‬
‫ين‬
‫اّل‬
‫ي‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ؤ‬
‫م‬
‫ال‬
‫ش‬
‫ب‬
‫ي‬
‫و‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫َل‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫يد‬
‫د‬
‫ش‬
‫ا‬
‫س‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ ُ َ َُ َ ُ‬
‫َ ِّ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪If you go through the families, this word matches up with the akhbara family most closely, even though‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪, we smooth it out to:‬أ َ ْءمن يؤمن إئمانا ‪it sounds a bit different since it starts with a hamza. Instead of‬‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫مؤمنيَ ‪ /‬مؤمنُون‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫أَخ َ َ‬
‫اسم فاعل‬
‫آمن‬
‫َ َ‬
‫أُومن‬
‫َ‬
‫م ْؤم ر‬
‫ن‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ ر‬
‫مخب‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يُخب ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يؤ م ن‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يؤ م ن‬
‫ُ َ ُ‬
‫األمر منه آم ْ‬
‫ن‬
‫‪To believe‬‬
‫إيمانا‬
‫َ‬
‫إيمانا‬
‫َ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫و الظرف منه م ْؤم ر‬
‫ن‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫فهو م ْؤم ر‬
‫ن‬
‫ُ‬
‫فهوم ْؤمنر‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫و الهني عنه َل ت ْؤمنْ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫‪َ (d‬قي ًما لينْذر بأ ً‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫الصالحات أ َ ِّ َن لَ ُه أَجرً ا حسنًا (‪)٢‬‬
‫ون‬
‫ل‬
‫م‬
‫ع‬
‫ي‬
‫ين‬
‫اّل‬
‫ي‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ؤ‬
‫م‬
‫ال‬
‫ش‬
‫ب‬
‫ي‬
‫و‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫َل‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ا‬
‫يد‬
‫د‬
‫ش‬
‫ا‬
‫س‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ ُ َ َُ َ ُ‬
‫َ ِّ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪This word cannot be from one the eight big families, so it must be from one of the six families. I’m telling‬‬
‫‪you which one:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫يعملُون‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ََسع‬
‫َ‬
‫فعل مضارع‬
‫عم َل‬
‫َ‬
‫عم َل‬
‫ُ‬
‫ي َ ْسمع‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يعم ُل‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يعم ُل‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمر منه اعمل‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يعم ُل‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪To do/work‬‬
‫عم ًل‬
‫َ َ‬
‫عملً‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ر‬
‫فهو عامل‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهو مع ُمول‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫و الهني عنه ََل َتعمل‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ر ْ‬
‫و الظرف منه معمل معم ُل معم َل‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ر‬
1
Sarf – Kahf Ayah 3
Sarf of Kahf Ayah 3:
)٣(َ‫ك ِثيََفِي ِهَأَب ًدا‬
ِ ‫َما‬
َ
At first glance, you might think this word belongs to one of the eight big families because it starts with a
meem. The meems we came across in those families were mu’s, not ma’s. So just because the word
starts with a meem, does not guarantee that it is from one of the big families. If you listen closely, you’ll
notice that it actually sounds like an ism faa’il from one of the small families like ‫ح‬
َ ‫ فَا ِت‬or َ‫اصر‬
ِ ‫ن‬:
َ
To remain
ْ
َ‫َنصرَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َينصر‬
َ
َ َ
ْ
َ‫يمكث‬
َ‫ث‬
َ ‫َم‬
َ ‫ك‬
َ
ْ ْ
َ ‫األمرَمنهَاكم‬
‫ث‬
ْ
َ‫كث‬
‫مكثًا‬
ِ ‫فهوَ َما‬
ْ ْ
َ ‫وَالهنيَعنه َََل ََتكم‬
‫ث‬
ْ
ْ
ْ
َ‫كثَة‬
ِ ‫وَالظرفَمنه ََمم‬
َ ‫كث ََمم‬
َ ‫كث ََمم‬
َ‫كث‬
َ ‫ك ِث‬
ِ ‫يَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َما‬
ِ ‫َما‬
‫اسمَفاعل‬
We didn’t do the passive for this word because it simply would not make sense. There are some words
in Arabic that do not have passives, and we will come to learn them later on.
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 4‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 4:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫اللَو ً‬
‫َلاَ(‪)٤‬‬
‫اّلينَقالُواَ َاتخذَ‬
‫‪ (a‬وَيُن ِذرَ َ ِ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أخ ب َ‬
‫‪ light‬فعلَمضارع‬
‫ْ‬
‫أنذرَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أُن ِذرَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ل ‪The effect of the‬‬
‫‪َ is light.‬ين ِذرَ ‪َ ِ still carries over from ayah 3, that’s why‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َTo warn‬‬
‫يخ ِب َُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ارا ً‬
‫فهومن ِذرَ‬
‫ِإنذ َ‬
‫ين ِذ َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫فهوَمنذرَ‬
‫ِإنذ َ‬
‫ارا‬
‫ين ذ َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالهنيَعنهََلَتُن ِذ ْ َ‬
‫ر‬
‫األمرَمنهَأن ِذ ْ َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمنذرَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اللَو ً‬
‫َلاَ(‪)٤‬‬
‫اّلينَقالُواَ َاتخذَ‬
‫‪ (b‬ويُن ِذرَ َ ِ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫‪This is a hard word, but it’s important. I’m giving you the sarf sagheer here:‬‬
‫فعلَماض‬
‫ْ‬
‫نصر َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ََينصرَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫قالَ‬
‫ولَ‬
‫ي ُق ُ‬
‫ِقيلَ‬
‫الَ‬
‫يُق ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَق ُ َ‬
‫ل‬
‫‪To say‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ق ْوَل َ‬
‫ً‬
‫ق ْوَلَ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمقالَمق َ‬
‫ال ُ‬
‫ائ ُلَ‬
‫فهوَق ِ‬
‫فهوَم ُقولَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالهنيَعنهََلَت ُق َ‬
‫ل‬
2
ْ
ً ‫اللَو‬
)٤(َ‫َلا‬
َ‫اّلينَقالُواَ َاتخذ‬
ِ َ َ‫( َويُن ِذر‬c
ُ َ
This is from one of the big families. It begins with ‫ َِا‬, so think about one of the last three families we
ْ
ْ
ْ
ْ
learned (َ‫) َ ِاقَتب َََََ ِانكَس َََََ ِا ْستغفر‬. I don’t see َ‫ ِا ْست‬or ‫ن‬
َ ‫ َ ِا‬in the beginning, so I’m ruling out those families.
ْ
ْ
It’s got an ‫ت‬
َ ‫ ِا‬in the beginning and is closest to َ‫ ِاقَتب‬, so I’ll model my sarf sagheer after that family:
َ
َ
َ‫فهوَم َت ِخذ‬
ُ
‫ِا َِتخاذًا‬
َ‫فهوم َتخذ‬
ُ
ْ
َ ‫وَالهنيَعنهََلَت َت ِخ‬
‫ذ‬
‫ِا َِتخاذًا‬
َ‫وَالظرفَمنهَم َتخذ‬
ُ
ْ
َ‫َتب‬
‫يق‬
ُ ِ
ْ
َ‫ِاقَتب‬
َ‫ذ‬
ُ ‫ي َت ِخ‬
َ‫ِا َتخذ‬
َ‫ذ‬
ُ ‫ي ُ َتخ‬
َ‫ا ُ َ ُت ِخذ‬
ْ
َ‫األمرَمنهَ ِا َت ِخذ‬
‫فعلَماض‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 5‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 5:‬‬
‫م م‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫م م‬
‫‪ (a‬ما لهم به م م‬
‫ن ِع ملم وال آلب م‬
‫ك ِذبا (‪)٥‬‬
‫ن أفواهه إن يقول‬
‫ُبت كلمة تخرج م‬
‫َ َ ُ ِ ِ ِ‬
‫ون ِإال َ‬
‫اِئم َ‬
‫َ ِِ‬
‫ك َُ‬
‫َ ِ َ َ ُ ُ ِ َ َ ِِ ِ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ََسِع‬
‫َ‬
‫مصدر‬
‫ع ِلم‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ع ِلم‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ي َ مسمع‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫م‬
‫يع َلم‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫م‬
‫يع َلم‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫م‬
‫األمر منه ِاع َل مم‬
‫م‬
‫ِعلما‬
‫م‬
‫ِعلما‬
‫‪To know‬‬
‫فهو عالِم‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫فهو معلُوم‬
‫َ‬
‫و الهني عنه ال ت معلمم‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫و الظرف منه مع ِلم مع َلم معم َل‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م م‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫م م‬
‫‪ (b‬ما لهم به م م‬
‫ن ِع ملم وال آلب م‬
‫ك ِذبا (‪)٥‬‬
‫ن أفواهه إن يقول‬
‫ُبت كلمة تخرج م‬
‫َ َ ُ ِ ِ ِ‬
‫ون ِإال َ‬
‫اِئم َ‬
‫َ ِِ‬
‫ك َُ‬
‫َ ِ َ َ ُ ُ ِ َ َ ِِ ِ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعل ماض‬
‫كرم‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫ُب‬
‫َ‬
‫ك َُ‬
‫م‬
‫يكرم‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫م‬
‫ُب‬
‫ك‬
‫َي ُ ُ‬
‫م م‬
‫ُب‬
‫األمر منه اُك ُ‬
‫‪To be big‬‬
‫ك َُبا‬
‫ِ‬
‫ك ِبي‬
‫فهو َ‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫ُب‬
‫و الهني عنه َال َتك ُ‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫ُبة‬
‫و الظرف منه َمك ُِب َمك َُب َمك ََ‬
‫‪family‬كرم ‪Remember that the‬‬
‫كرم ‪does not have a passive. Since this word is from the‬‬
‫‪family, it too will‬‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫‪not have a passive.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫م م‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫م م‬
‫‪ (c‬ما لهم به م م‬
‫ن ِع ملم وال آلب م‬
‫ك ِذبا (‪)٥‬‬
‫ن أفواهه إن يقول‬
‫ُبت كلمة تخرج م‬
‫َ َ ُ ِ ِ ِ‬
‫ون ِإال َ‬
‫اِئم َ‬
‫َ ِِ‬
‫ك َُ‬
‫َ ِ َ َ ُ ُ ِ َ َ ِِ ِ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعل مضارع‬
‫َنصر‬
‫َ َ‬
‫خرج‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫خُ ِرج‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ينصر‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫م‬
‫يخرج‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫م‬
‫يخرج‬
‫ُ َ ُ‬
‫م‬
‫خر م‬
‫ج‬
‫األمر منه ا ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪To go out‬‬
‫خُروجا‬
‫ُ‬
‫خُروجا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ارج‬
‫خ ِ‬
‫فهو َ‬
‫م‬
‫فهو مخروج‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫و الهني عنه ال ت مخر م‬
‫ج‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫و الظرف منه مخ ِرج مخرج مخرجة‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫م م‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫م م‬
‫‪(d‬ما لهم به م م‬
‫ن ِع ملم وال آلباِئ م‬
‫ك ِذبا (‪)٥‬‬
‫اه ِه ِإن يقُول‬
‫ن أَفو‬
‫ك ِلمة َتخرج ِم‬
‫ُبت‬
‫ك‬
‫م‬
‫َ َ ُ ِ ِ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ون ِإال َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ِِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعل مضارع‬
‫َنصر‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ال‬
‫َق َ‬
‫يل‬
‫ِق َ‬
‫م‬
‫ينصر‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫ول‬
‫َي ُق ُ‬
‫ال‬
‫ي ُ َق ُ‬
‫م‬
‫األمر منه قُل‬
‫‪To say‬‬
‫َق موال‬
‫َق موال‬
‫و الظرف منه َم َقال َم َق َ‬
‫ال ُ‬
‫ائ ُل‬
‫فهو َق ِ‬
‫فهو م ُقول‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫و الهني عنه َال َت ُقل‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 6‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 6:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يثَأَس ًفاَ(‪)٦‬‬
‫ار ِهَْ ِإنَلَ ْمَيؤ ِمنُواَ ِِب َذاَالح ِد‬
‫آث‬
‫كَع َلَ‬
‫اخعَ َنفس‬
‫ِ‬
‫كَ َب ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فَ َل َعلَ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بَ‬
‫أَخ َ َ‬
‫فعل َمضارع‬
‫آمنَ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫أُو ِمنَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ ِب َُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يؤ م َ‬
‫ن‬
‫ُ ِ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يؤ م َ‬
‫ن‬
‫ُ َ ُ‬
‫األمرَمنهَآ ِم َْ‬
‫ن‬
‫‪َTo believe‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ِإيم َ‬
‫انا‬
‫َ‬
‫ِإيم َ‬
‫انا‬
‫َ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمؤمنَ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوَمؤ ِمنَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهومؤمنَ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالهنيَعنه َََلَتُؤ ِم َْ‬
‫ن‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 7‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 7:‬‬
‫األرض زينة َلا لن ْبلوهْ أّي ْم أ ْ‬
‫‪ (a‬إنا جع ْلنا ما عل ْ‬
‫حسن عمال (‪)٧‬‬
‫َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َّ‬
‫َّ‬
‫ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َّ ُ َّ َّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َّ َّ َّ َّ‬
‫فَّتح‬
‫َّ َّ‬
‫فعل ماض‬
‫جع َّل‬
‫َّ َّ‬
‫ج ِع َّل‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يفتح‬
‫َّ‬
‫َّ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يجع ُل‬
‫َّ َّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يجع ُل‬
‫ُ َّ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمر منه ِاجعل‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪To make‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫جعال‬
‫َّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫جعال‬
‫َّ‬
‫اعل‬
‫فهو‬
‫ج ِ‬
‫َّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهو مج ُعول‬
‫َّ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫و الهني عنه ََّل َّتجعل‬
‫َّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و الظرف منه مج ِعل مجع ُل مجع َّل‬
‫َّ َّ َّ َّ‬
‫َّ‬
‫األرض زينة َلا لن ْبلوهْ أّي ْم أ ْ‬
‫‪(b‬إنا جع ْلنا ما عل ْ‬
‫حسن عمال (‪)٧‬‬
‫ِ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ‬
‫ِ ِ َّ َّ َّ ِ َّ ُ َّ ُ َّ ُ ُ َّ َّ ُ َّ َّ‬
‫ََّسِع‬
‫َّ‬
‫مصدر‬
‫ع ِم َّل‬
‫َّ‬
‫ع ِم َّل‬
‫ُ‬
‫ي َّ ْسمع‬
‫َّ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يعم ُل‬
‫َّ َّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يعم ُل‬
‫ُ َّ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمر منه ِاعمل‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪To do/work‬‬
‫عمال‬
‫َّ َّ‬
‫عمال‬
‫َّ َّ‬
‫فهو عا ِمل‬
‫َّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهو مع ُمول‬
‫َّ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫و الهني عنه ََّل َّتعمل‬
‫َّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و الظرف منه مع ِمل معم ُل معم َّل‬
‫َّ َّ َّ َّ‬
‫َّ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 8‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 8:‬‬
‫اعلون ما عل هْيا ص ِع ً‬
‫يدا جر ًزا (‪)٨‬‬
‫وإنا لج‬
‫َ َِ َ َ ِ ُ َ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫اعلُون‬
‫ج ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫اعل‬
‫ج ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ in the beginning is just for emphasis, so ignore that:‬ل ‪The‬‬
‫فَتح‬
‫َ َ‬
‫اسم فاعل‬
‫جع َل‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ج ِع َل‬
‫ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫يفتح‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫يجع ُل‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ه‬
‫يجع ُل‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ه ه‬
‫األمر منه ِاجعل‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫جع ًل‬
‫َ‬
‫ج هعلً‬
‫َ‬
‫اعل‬
‫فهو‬
‫ج ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫فهو مج ُعول‬
‫َ‬
‫ه ه‬
‫و الهني عنه ََل َتجعل‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫و الظرف منه مج ِعل مجع ُل مجع َل‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 9‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 9:‬‬
‫كانُواْ ِمنْآيا ِتنَاْعج ًباْ(‪)٩‬‬
‫‪ (a‬أَمْح ِسبتْأ َ َنْأَصحابْالكهفْو‬
‫الر ِق ِيْ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ ِ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعلْماض‬
‫ََسِعْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْيَسمعْ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ح ِسبْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ح ِسبْ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫حسبانًا‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫حسبانًا‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫يحسبْ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫يحسبْ‬
‫ُ َ ُ‬
‫األمرْمنهْ ِاحسبْ‬
‫َ‬
‫اسبْ‬
‫فهو‬
‫ْح ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫فهوْمحسوبْ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫وْالهنيْعنه ََْل َْتحسبْ‬
‫َ‬
‫وْالظرفْمنهْمح ِسبْمحسبْمحسبةْ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫كانُواْ ِمنْآيا ِتنَاْعج ًباْ(‪)٩‬‬
‫‪ (b‬أَمْح ِسبتْأ َ َنْأَصحابْالكهفْو‬
‫الر ِق ِيْ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ ِ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪,‬قالْ ‪The sarf for this word is just like the sarf for‬‬
‫‪:‬ك ْ‬
‫ان ‪َ except that there isn’t a passive for‬‬
‫َ َ‬
‫فعلْماض‬
‫َنصر ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫كانْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْينصرْ‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫ك ْ‬
‫ون‬
‫ي ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫كونًا‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫األمرْمنهْكُنْ‬
‫ائنْ‬
‫ْك ِ‬
‫فهو َ‬
‫كنْ‬
‫وْالهنيْعنه ََْل َْت ُ‬
‫انةْ‬
‫كان َْم َ‬
‫وْالظرفْمنه َْم َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫كانُواْ ِمنْآيا ِتنَاْعج ًباْ(‪)٩‬‬
‫‪ (c‬أَمْح ِسبتْأ َ َنْأَصحابْالكهفْو‬
‫الر ِق ِيْ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ ِ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ََسِع ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫َ‬
‫مصدر‬
‫ع ِجبْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ع ِجبْ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْيَسمعْ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫يعجبْ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫ي عج ب ْ‬
‫ُ َ ُ‬
‫األمرْمنهْ ِاعجبْ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪To be weird‬‬
‫عج ًبا‬
‫َ َ‬
‫اجبْ‬
‫فهو َْع ِ‬
‫عج ًباْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫فهوْمعجوبْ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫وْالهنيْعنه ََْل َْتعجبْ‬
‫َ‬
‫الظرفْمنهْمع ِجبْمعجبْمعجبةْ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ ََ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 10‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 10:‬‬
‫كْرْحةْو َه ِيئْلَنَاْ ِمنْأَم ِر َناْر َشداْ(‪)٠١‬‬
‫كه ِفْفَ َقالواْربناْآتناْمنَْلن‬
‫‪ِ (a‬إذْأ َ َوىْال ِفت َيةْ ِإ َلْال َ‬
‫َ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعلْماض‬
‫َنصر ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ال ْ‬
‫َق َ ْ‬
‫يلْ‬
‫ِق َ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْينصرْ‬
‫َ‬
‫يقولْ‬
‫َ‬
‫ي َقالْ‬
‫َقولْ‬
‫ائلْ‬
‫فهو َْق ِ‬
‫َقولْ‬
‫فهوْمقولْ‬
‫َ‬
‫وْالهنيْعنه َْل َْتقلْ‬
‫األمرْمنهْقلْ‬
‫الْ‬
‫وْالظرفْمنه َْم َقال َْم َق َ‬
‫كْرْحةْو َه ِيئْلَنَاْ ِمنْأَم ِر َناْر َشداْ(‪)٠١‬‬
‫كه ِفْفَ َقالواْربناْآتناْمنَْلن‬
‫‪ِ (b‬إذْأ َ َوىْال ِفت َيةْ ِإ َلْال َ‬
‫َ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ََسِع ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫َ‬
‫مصدر‬
‫حم ْ‬
‫ر ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫حم ْ‬
‫ر ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْيَسمعْ‬
‫َ‬
‫يرحمْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫يرحمْ‬
‫َ‬
‫األمرْمنهْ ِارحمْ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪To show love and‬‬
‫‪mercy‬‬
‫رْحةْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫رْحةْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫حمْ‬
‫فهوْرا ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫فهوْمرحومْ‬
‫َ‬
‫وْالهنيْعنه َْل َْترحمْ‬
‫َ‬
‫حمْمرحمْمر َْحةْ‬
‫وْالظرفْمنه َْمر ِ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫و َه ِيئْلَنَاْ ِمنْأَم ِر َناْر َشداْ(‪ْ)٠١‬‬
‫كْرْحةْ ْ‬
‫كه ِفْفَ َقالواْربناْآتناْمنَْلن‬
‫‪ِ (c‬إذْأ َ َوىْال ِفت َيةْ ِإ َلْال َ‬
‫َ َ َ ِ َ ِ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ع ِلمْ‬
‫َ‬
‫علَم ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َهيَئ ْ‬
‫َ‬
‫أمر‬
‫ه ِيئْ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْيع ِلمْ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُي ِيئْ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُييَئْ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪To furnish,‬‬
‫‪facilitate‬‬
‫ََت ِييئا‬
‫فهوْم َه ِيئْ‬
‫ََت ِييئاْ‬
‫فهوْم َهيَئْ‬
‫األمرْمنهْ َه ِيئْ‬
‫وْالظرفْمنهْم َهيَئْ‬
‫وْالهنيْعنه َْلَْت ِيئْ‬
‫َ‬
1
Sarf – Kahf Ayah 11
Sarf of Kahf Ayah 11:
ْ
ْ
ْ
)١١(َ‫اِن ْمَ هفَالكه هفَ هسنهيَعددًا‬
‫فَضربناَعلَآذ ه ه‬
To hit, strike
َ‫ارب‬
‫فهوَض ه‬
‫ض ْر ًبا‬
ْ
َ‫َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َيض هرب‬
َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ‫ضرب‬
ُ
ْ
َ ‫يض هر‬
‫ب‬
َ َ‫ضرب‬
ُ
ْ
َ ‫يضر‬
‫ب‬
َ‫ض هرب‬
ُ
ُ
ُ
ْ
َ ْ ‫األمرَمنهَ هاض هر‬
‫ب‬
ْ
َ‫فهوَمضروب‬
َ‫ض ْر ًبا‬
ُ
ْ
َ ْ ‫وَالهنيَعنهََلَتض هر‬
‫ب‬
ْ
ْ
ْ
َ‫وَالظرفَمنهَمض هربَمضربَمضربة‬
‫فعلَماض‬
In this ayah, the meaning of this word is not your normal hitting or striking. Rather, Allah struck their
ears, or put something in their ears, meaning that they could not hear anymore.
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 12‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 12:‬‬
‫‪ (a‬ثَّبع ْثناهَّْلن ْعلمَّأيَّالْح ْزب ْيَّأ ْ‬
‫حصىَّلِماَّلم ِبثواَّأمم ًداَّ(‪)٢١‬‬
‫م‬
‫ُم م م م ِ م م م م ُ ِ م ِ م م‬
‫م‬
‫ح َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ‬
‫فمت َّ‬
‫م م‬
‫فعلَّماض‬
‫ث َّ‬
‫بع م َّ‬
‫مم‬
‫ثَّ‬
‫ب ِع م‬
‫ْ‬
‫َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّيفتحَّ‬
‫م م‬
‫ي ْبعثَّ‬
‫م م‬
‫ي ْبعثَّ‬
‫م‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرَّمنهَّ ِابع َّ‬
‫ث‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِبعثم ًةَّبعثًا‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫بعثًاَّ‬
‫م‬
‫‪To appoint, make‬‬
‫‪someone get up‬‬
‫اعثَّ‬
‫فهو مَّب ِ‬
‫فهوَّم ْبعوثَّ‬
‫م‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَّالهنيَّعنه مََّل مَّتبع َّ‬
‫ث‬
‫م‬
‫وَّالظرفَّمنهَّم ْب ِعثَّم ْبعثَّم ْبعثمةَّ‬
‫م م م م‬
‫م‬
‫‪ (b‬ثَّبع ْثناهَّْ َّلن ْعلمَّأيَّالْح ْزب ْيَّأ ْ‬
‫حصىَّلِماَّلم ِبثواَّأمم ًداَّ(‪)٢١‬‬
‫م‬
‫ُم م م م ِ م م م م ُ ِ م ِ م م‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪),‬نعلممَّ( ’‪َّ ِ makes the present tense light, so instead of ending with ‘u‬‬
‫ل‬
‫‪ it ends with ‘a’.‬م‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َّ منع مَّلمَّ‬
‫منع ملمَّ‬
‫م‬
‫معَّ َّ‬
‫ن م ْس َّ‬
‫م‬
‫فعلَّمضارع‬
‫مَسِعَّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّي م ْسمعَّ‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫يع ملمَّ‬
‫ع ِلمَّ‬
‫م‬
‫م م‬
‫ْ‬
‫يع ملمَّ‬
‫ع ِلمَّ‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫مْ‬
‫األمرَّمنهَّ ِاع مل َّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِعل ًما‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِعل ًماَّ‬
‫‪To know‬‬
‫فهوَّعالِمَّ‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوَّمعلومَّ‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫مْ‬
‫وَّالهنيَّعنه مََّل مَّتع مل َّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَّالظرفَّمنهَّمع ِلمَّمع ملمَّمعم ملَّ‬
‫م م‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ (c‬ثَّبع ْثناهَّْلن ْعلمَّأيَّالْح ْزب ْيَّأ ْ‬
‫حصىَّلِماَّلم ِبثواَّأمم ًداَّ(‪َّ)٢١‬‬
‫م‬
‫ُم م م م ِ م م م م ُ ِ م ِ م م‬
‫م‬
‫فعلَّماض‬
‫مَسِعَّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّ َّي م ْسمعَّ‬
‫م‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫يلبثَّ‬
‫لم ِب م َّ‬
‫ث‬
‫م م‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرَّمنهَّ ِالب َّ‬
‫ث‬
‫م‬
‫لم ْبثًا‬
‫‪Stay somewhere‬‬
‫‪for a long time‬‬
‫فهو مََّل ِبثَّ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَّالهنيَّعنه مََّل مَّتلب َّ‬
‫ث‬
‫م‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَّالظرفَّمنهَّمل ِبثَّملبثَّملبثمةَّ‬
‫م‬
‫م م م م‬
‫‪The passive would not make sense for this word, so it does not have one.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 13‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 13:‬‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِب ْمُو ِزد َناهُْه ًدىُ(‪)٣١‬‬
‫ر‬
‫ب‬
‫ُ‬
‫وا‬
‫ن‬
‫آم‬
‫ُ‬
‫ة‬
‫ي‬
‫ت‬
‫ف‬
‫ُ‬
‫م‬
‫ّن‬
‫إ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ق‬
‫ح‬
‫‪َ (a‬نحنُ َنقصُعل ْيكُنبأهُبال‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َ َََ ِ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ ِ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بُ‬
‫أَخ َ َ‬
‫فعلُماض‬
‫آمنُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫أو ِمنُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ ِبُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يؤ ِمنُ‬
‫ِإيم ُ‬
‫انا‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يؤمنُ‬
‫َ‬
‫األمرُمنهُآم ْ‬
‫نُ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِإيم ُ‬
‫انا‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫وُالظرفُمنهُمؤمنُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوُمؤ ِمنُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهومؤمنُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وُالهنيُعنه ََُلُتؤ ِم ُْ‬
‫ن‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و ِزد َناهُْه ًدىُ(‪)٣١‬‬
‫ِب ْمُ ُ‬
‫كُ َنبأَهُْ ِبالح ِقُ ِإ َّن ْمُ ِفتيةُآمنواُ ِبر‬
‫‪َ (b‬نحنُ َنقصُعل ْي‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪This is a hard one that you have to know:‬‬
‫َضربُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫فعلُماض‬
‫َزادُ‬
‫َ‬
‫يدُ‬
‫ِز َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يض ِرب ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ي ِزيدُ‬
‫َ‬
‫يزادُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرُمنهُ ِزدُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِزياد ًةُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ائدُ‬
‫فهوُ َز ِ‬
‫ِزيادةُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫وُالظرفُمنهُمزادُمزادةُ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ُفهوُم ِزيدُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وُالهنيُعنه ََُلُ َت ِز ُد‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 14‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 14:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫نَن ْدعوَم ْ‬
‫األرضَل ْ‬
‫طناَعلَقلوِب ْمَإ ْذَقامواَفقالواَربناَربَالسماواتَو ْ‬
‫نَدو هن ههَ هإَلًاَلقدَقُلناَ هإذًاَشططاَ(‪)٤١‬‬
‫‪ (a‬وَرب‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪َTo tie‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ين ص ر َ‬
‫نصرَ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ً‬
‫ابطَ‬
‫ر ْبطا‬
‫ي ْرب ُ َ‬
‫ط‬
‫ربطَ‬
‫فعلَماض‬
‫فهوَر ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ً‬
‫فهوم ْربوطَ‬
‫ر ْبطا‬
‫ي ْرب ُ َ‬
‫ط‬
‫ر هبطَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَالهنيَعنهََلَت ْرب َ‬
‫ط‬
‫األمرَمنهَاُرب َ‬
‫ط‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَم ْر هبطَم ْربطَم ْربطةَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫نَن ْدعوَم ْ‬
‫األرضَل ْ‬
‫طناَعلَقلوِب ْمَإ ْذَقامواَفقالواَربناَربَالسماواتَو ْ‬
‫نَدو هن ههَ هإَلًاَلقدَقُلناَ هإذًاَشططاَ(‪َ)٤١‬‬
‫‪ (b‬وَرب‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ ه ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫نصرَ‬
‫فعلَماض‬
‫قامَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين ص ر َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ي ُق َ‬
‫وم‬
‫األمرَمنهَق ُ ْمَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫هقيا ًما‬
‫ائمَ‬
‫فهوَق ه‬
‫وَالهنيَعنهََلَت ُق ْمَ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمقامَمقامةَ‬
‫‪There is no passive for this verb.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫نَن ْدعوَم ْ‬
‫األرضَل ْ‬
‫طناَعلَقلوِب ْمَإ ْذَقامواَفَقالواَربناَربَالسماواتَو ْ‬
‫نَدو هن ههَ هإَلًاَلقدَقُلناَ هإذًاَشططاَ(‪)٤١‬‬
‫‪ (c‬ورب‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫نصرَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َينصرَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫فعلَماض‬
‫قالَ‬
‫ولَ‬
‫ي ُق ُ‬
‫هقيلَ‬
‫الَ‬
‫يُق ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَق ُ َ‬
‫ل‬
‫ً‬
‫ق ْوَلَ‬
‫ً‬
‫ق ْوَلَ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمقالَمق َ‬
‫ال ُ‬
‫ائ ُلَ‬
‫فهوَق ه‬
‫فهوَم ُقولَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالهنيَعنهََلَت ُق َ‬
‫ل‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫نَن ْدعوَم ْ‬
‫األرضَل ْ‬
‫طناَعلَقلوِب ْمَإ ْذَقامواَفقالواَربناَربَالسماواتَو ْ‬
‫نَدو هن ههَ هإَلًاَلقدَقُلناَ هإذًاَشططاَ(‪َ)٤١‬‬
‫‪ (d‬ورب‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫هه‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫نصر َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ََينصرَ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫قالَ‬
‫ولَ‬
‫يقُ ُ‬
‫هقيلَ‬
‫الَ‬
‫يُق ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَق ُ َ‬
‫ل‬
‫ً‬
‫ق ْوَلَ‬
‫ائ ُلَ‬
‫فهوَق ه‬
‫ً‬
‫ق ْوَلَ‬
‫فهوَم ُقولَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالهنيَعنهََلَت ُق َ‬
‫ل‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمقالَمق َ‬
‫ال ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعلَماضَ‬
‫هوَقالَ‬
‫هماَقاَلَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫هيَقالتَ‬
‫هماَقالتاَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أنتَقُلتَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أنتماَقُلتُماَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أنمتَقُل ُمتَْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫تَ‬
‫أناَقُل ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫نحنَقُلنا‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫تَ‬
‫أنتَقُل ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ْ‬
‫أنتماَقُلتُماَ‬
‫مهَقالُواَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫هنَقُلنَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أنتنَقُلتُنَ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 15‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫آِل ًة ل ْوال يأتون عل ْ‬
‫ك ِذ ًبا (‪)٥١‬‬
‫ْي ْم ب‬
‫ن اف ََ‬
‫خ ُ‬
‫َه ُؤال ِء َقومُنَا َ‬
‫سلطَ ٍ‬
‫اّللِ َ‬
‫ذوا ِمن دُو ِن ِه ِ َ َ‬
‫ان َب ِ ٍ‬
‫َتى َع ََل َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِي فَ َمن أَظ َل ُم ِم َم ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ات َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعل ماض‬
‫ْ‬
‫َتب‬
‫ِاق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َتب‬
‫يق‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ا ُ ُت ِخ َذ‬
‫ذ‬
‫خ ُ‬
‫ي ُ َت َ‬
‫خ َذ‬
‫ِا َت َ‬
‫ذ‬
‫َي َت ِخ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمر منه ِا َت ِخذ‬
‫خاذًا‬
‫ِا ِت َ‬
‫خاذًا‬
‫ِا ِت َ‬
‫خذ‬
‫و الظرف منه مُ َت َ‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 15:‬‬
‫فهو م َت ِخذ‬
‫ُ‬
‫خذ‬
‫فهومُ َت َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و الهني عنه َال َت َت ِخذ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 16‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 16:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ئِلك ْمِم ْ‬
‫شِلك ْمِربك ْمِم ْ‬
‫نِر ْْحتهِوُيي ْ‬
‫اعتزلتموهِْوماِي ْعبدونِإالِاللِفأوواِإ َلِالك ْه ِفِينْ ْ‬
‫نِأ َ ْم ِركُ ْمِ ِمرفَ ًقاِ(‪)٦١‬‬
‫ُ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪َ (a‬و ِإذِ َ َ ُ ُ ُ َ َ َ ُ ُ َ ِ ّ َ َ َ ُ ِ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ َ ِّ َ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ َ ُّ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعلِماض‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َتبِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ‪To go away and stay away from someone‬‬
‫َتبِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِِيق‬
‫ق‬
‫ِا‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوِمعت ِزلِ‬
‫ِاع ِتز ِ‬
‫اال‬
‫يعت ِز ُِ‬
‫ل‬
‫لِ‬
‫ِاعتز َ ِ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوِمعتزلِ‬
‫ِاع ِتزاالِ‬
‫يعتز ُِ‬
‫ل‬
‫اُعت ُ ِز َلِ‬
‫ُ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وِالهنيِعنه َِال َِتعت ِز ِ‬
‫ل‬
‫األمرِمنهِ ِاعت ِز ِ‬
‫ل‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وِالظرفِمنهِمعتزلِ‬
‫ُ َ َ‬
‫‪ here. We’ll learn about it later.‬و ‪Don’t worry about the extra‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ئِلك ْمِم ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اعتزلتموهِْوماِي ْعبدونِإالِاللِفأوواِإ َلِالك ْه ِفِينْ ْ‬
‫نِأ َ ْم ِركُ ْمِ ِمرفَ ًقاِ(‪)٦١‬‬
‫نِرْح ِت ِهِو‬
‫كمِ ِم‬
‫ك ْمِر ّب‬
‫شِل‬
‫ُ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُي ِ ّي َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪َ ِ (b‬و ِإذِ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َُ‬
‫َنصرِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫فعلِمضارع‬
‫ِعب َد ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ع ِب َدِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين ص ر ِ‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يعب ُِ‬
‫د‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يعب ُِ‬
‫د‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرِمنهِاُعب ِ‬
‫د‬
‫ُ‬
‫ِعباد ًةِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ِعباد ًةِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪To be a slave,‬‬
‫‪worship‬‬
‫ابدِ‬
‫فهو َِع ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوِمعبودِ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وِالهنيِعنه َِال َتعب ِ‬
‫د‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وِالظرفِمنهِمع ِبدِمعبدِمع ِب َدةِ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ئِلك ْمِم ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫شِلك ْ‬
‫اعتزلتموهِْوماِي ْعبدونِإالِاللِفأوواِإ َلِالك ْه ِفِينْ ْ‬
‫نِأ َ ْم ِركُ ْمِ ِمرفَ ًقاِ(‪)٦١‬‬
‫نِرْح ِت ِهِو‬
‫كمِ ِم‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫‪ِ ِ(c‬‬
‫ُ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُي ِ ّي َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ َ ُّ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫و ِإذِ َ َ ُ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫ََ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َُ‬
‫َنصرِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪ lightest‬فعلِمضارع‬
‫شِ‬
‫ِن َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ن ُ ِشِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين ص ر ِ‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين ُ ِ‬
‫ش‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين َ ِ‬
‫ش‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرِمنهِاُن ُ ْ ِ‬
‫ش‬
‫ْ‬
‫شا‬
‫نَ ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫شا ِ‬
‫نَ ً‬
‫‪To spread‬‬
‫اشرِ‬
‫فهو َِن ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫شورِ‬
‫فهو َِمن ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وِالهنيِعنه َِال َِتن ُ ْ ِ‬
‫ش‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫شةِ‬
‫شِمن‬
‫وِالظرفِمنهِمن ِشِمن‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ئِلك ْمِم ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫شِلك ْ‬
‫اعتزلتموهِْوماِي ْعبدونِإالِاللِفأوواِإ َلِالك ْه ِفِينْ ْ‬
‫نِأ َ ْم ِركُ ْمِ ِمرفَ ًقاِ(‪)٦١‬‬
‫نِرْح ِت ِهِو‬
‫كمِ ِم‬
‫ب‬
‫ر‬
‫ِ‬
‫م‬
‫ُ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُي ِ ّي َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ َ ُّ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪َ ِ(d‬و ِإذِ َ َ ُ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ ُ َ‬
‫َّ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ َُ‬
‫ََسِع ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫مصدر‬
‫حم ِ‬
‫ر ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫حم ِ‬
‫ر ِ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِي َ ْسمعِ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫ي ْرحمِ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫ي ْرحمِ‬
‫ُ َ ُ‬
‫األمرِمنهِ ِا ْرح ْ ِ‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫رْح ًةِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ر ْْحةًِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪To show love and‬‬
‫‪mercy‬‬
‫حمِ‬
‫فهوِرا ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫فهوِم ْرحومِ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫وِالهنيِعنه َِال َِت ْرح ْ ِ‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫حمِم ْرحمِم ْر َْحةِ‬
‫وِالظرفِمنه َِم ْر ِ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ئِلك ْمِم ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اعتزلتموهِْوماِي ْعبدونِإالِاللِفأوواِإ َلِالك ْه ِفِينْ ْ‬
‫نِأ َ ْم ِركُ ْمِ ِمرفَ ًقاِ(‪)٦١‬‬
‫نِرْح ِت ِهِ ِ‬
‫و‬
‫كمِ ِم‬
‫ك ْمِر ّب‬
‫شِل‬
‫ُ ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُي ِ ّي َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪َ ِ(e‬و ِإذِ َ َ ُ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ َ َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َُ‬
‫ع ّلَم ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫‪ lightest‬فعلِمضارع‬
‫َه ّيَئ ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ه ِ ّيئِ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِيع ِّلمِ‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫ُيي ِ‬
‫ئ‬
‫ُ َ ِّ ُ‬
‫ُي ّيَئِ‬
‫َُ ُ‬
‫األمرِمنهِهي ْ‬
‫ئِ‬
‫َ ِّ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َتي ً‬
‫يئا‬
‫َ ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َتي ً‬
‫يئاِ‬
‫َ ِ‬
‫وِالظرفِمنهِم َه ّيَئِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪To furnish,‬‬
‫‪facilitate‬‬
‫فهوِم َه ِ ّيئِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫فهوِم َه ّيَئِ‬
‫ُ‬
‫وِالهنيِعنه َِال َُِت ِ ّي ْ ِ‬
‫ئ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 17‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 17:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن آيات الل م ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن‬
‫ط َلعت َتز‬
‫الشمس ِإذَا‬
‫‪ (a‬و َترى‬
‫ك ِم َ ِ َ َِ‬
‫ات ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ي َو ِإذَا ََ‬
‫الش َم ِ‬
‫اور َعن َ‬
‫ات ال َي ِم ِ‬
‫َغ َبت َتق ِرضه ذَ َ‬
‫كه ِف ِه ذَ َ‬
‫ال َوه ِف فَج َوة ِمنه ذَلِ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن ي ض لل ف ل ْ‬
‫َيد الل فهو المهتد وم ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن َت ِج َد َل ولِيًّا م ْر ِش ًّدا (‪)٧١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ ََ‬
‫َ ِ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫فعل ماض‬
‫َنصر‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ط َلع‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ط ِلع‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ينصر‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يطلع‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يط َلع‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمر منه اطل ْع‬
‫‪To rise‬‬
‫طل ًّ‬
‫وعا‬
‫طل ًّ‬
‫وعا‬
‫طالِع‬
‫فهو َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهو مطلوع‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫طلعْ‬
‫و الهني عنه ََل َت‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و الظرف منه مط ِلع مط َلع مط َلعة‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن آيات الل م ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن‬
‫‪(b‬و َترى الشمس إذا طلعت تز‬
‫ك ِم َ ِ َ َِ‬
‫ات ِ‬
‫ي َو ِإذَا ََ‬
‫الش َم ِ‬
‫اور َعن َ‬
‫ات ال َي ِم ِ‬
‫َغ َبت َتق ِرضه ذَ َ‬
‫كه ِف ِه ذَ َ‬
‫ال َوه ِف فَج َوة ِمنه ذَلِ َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن ي ض لل ف ل ْ‬
‫َيد الل فهو المهتد وم ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن َت ِج َد َل ولِيًّا م ْر ِش ًّدا (‪)٧١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ ََ‬
‫َ ِ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫فعل ماض‬
‫َنصر‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ََغب‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َغب‬
‫ِ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ينصر‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يْغب‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يْغب‬
‫َ‬
‫األمر منه ا َْغبْ‬
‫‪To sink, set‬‬
‫َغو ًّبا‬
‫َغر ًّبا‬
‫ارب‬
‫فهو َغ ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهو مْغوب‬
‫َ‬
‫و الهني عنه َل ت ْْغبْ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْغب مْغب مْغبة‬
‫و الظرف منه م‬
‫َ ِ َ َ َ ََ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن آيات الل م ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن ْ‬
‫ت ت ْقرضهْ ذات الشمال وهْ‬
‫َي ِد‬
‫ل‬
‫ذ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫ة‬
‫و‬
‫ج‬
‫ف‬
‫ف‬
‫ب‬
‫َغ‬
‫ا‬
‫ذ‬
‫إ‬
‫و‬
‫ي‬
‫م‬
‫ي‬
‫ن كه ِفه ذات ال‬
‫‪(c‬و َترى الشمس إذا طلعت تزاور ع‬
‫ك ِم َ ِ َ َِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ ََ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ َ َ َ َ ِ َ َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ض لل ف ل ْ‬
‫ن َت ِج َد َل ولِيًّا م ْر ِش ًّدا (‪)٧١‬‬
‫َ‬
‫الل فَه َو المه َت ِد َو َمن ي ِ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعل ماض‬
‫َضرب‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َقرض‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ق ِرض‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يض ِرب‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يق ِرض‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يقرض‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمر منه ِاق ِرض‬
‫َق ْر ًّضا‬
‫َق ْر ًّضا‬
‫ارض‬
‫فهو َق ِ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهو مقروض‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫و الهني عنه ََل َتق ِرض‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫و الظرف منه مق ِرض مقرض مقر َضة‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن آيات الل م ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن‬
‫ط َلعت َتز‬
‫الشمس ِإذَا‬
‫‪(d‬و َترى‬
‫ك ِم َ ِ َ َِ‬
‫ات ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ي َو ِإذَا ََ‬
‫الش َم ِ‬
‫اور َعن َ‬
‫ات ال َي ِم ِ‬
‫َغ َبت َتق ِرضه ذَ َ‬
‫كه ِف ِه ذَ َ‬
‫ال َوه ِف فَج َوة ِمنه ذَلِ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن ي ض لل ف ل ْ‬
‫َيد الل فهو المهتد وم ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ن َت ِج َد َل ولِيًّا م ْر ِش ًّدا (‪)٧١‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ ََ‬
‫َ ِ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ب‬
‫أَخ َ َ‬
‫أ َ ْر َش َد‬
‫أ ْر ِش َد‬
‫ْ‬
‫يخ ِب‬
‫ي ْر ِشد‬
‫ي ْر َشد‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمر منه أ َ ْر ِشد‬
‫ِإ ْر َشادًّا‬
‫ِإ ْر َشادًّا‬
‫و الظرف منه م ْر َشد‬
‫فهو م ْر ِشد‬
‫فهو م ْر َشد‬
‫ْ‬
‫و الهني عنه ََل َت ْر ِشد‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 18‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 18:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫طلعت َعل ْْي ْم َلولِّ ْيت َمْنُ ْمَ‬
‫ب ْم َأ ْيقاظا َو ُهْ َرقُود َونُق ِّلب ْم َذات َاليمي َوذات َ‬
‫‪ (a‬وَتحسَ َ‬
‫الشمال َوكلب ْم َباسط َذراع ْيه َبالوصيد َلو َا ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فر ً‬
‫اراَول ُملئتَمْنُ ْمَرع ًباَ(‪)٨١‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫فعلَمضارع‬
‫َسع َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ََي ْسمعَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يحس َ‬
‫ب‬
‫حسبَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يحس َ‬
‫ب‬
‫حسبَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَاحس َ‬
‫ح ْسبانًا‬
‫ُ‬
‫ح ْسبانًا‬
‫ُ‬
‫فهوَحاسبَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوَمحسوبَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالْنيَعنهََلَتحس ْ َ‬
‫ب‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمحسبَمحسبَمحسبةَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫‪ (b‬وت ْحسب ْم َأ ْيقاظًا َوهْ َرقود َوَنقل َ ْ‬
‫طلعتَعل ْْي ْم َلولِّ ْيت َمْنُ ْمَ‬
‫الشمال َوكلب ْم َباسط َذراع ْيه َبالوصيد َلو َا ِّ‬
‫بُم َذات َاليمي َوذات َ ِّ‬
‫ُ ُ ُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ُ ِّ ُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فر ً‬
‫اراَول ُملئتَمْنُ ْمَرع ًباَ(‪)٨١‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫َع ِّلم َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ََيع ِّلمَ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫فعلَمضارع‬
‫ق ِّلبَ‬
‫ق ُ ِّلبَ‬
‫يق ِّلبَ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫يق ِّلبَ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫األمرَمنهَق ِّل ْ َ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪To turn one way and then the other‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫تقلي ًبا‬
‫ْ‬
‫تقلي ًبا‬
‫فهوَمق ِّلبَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫فهوَمق ِّلبَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫وَالْنيَعنهََلَتُق ِّل ْ َ‬
‫ب‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمق ِّلبَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫طلعت َعل ْْي ْم َلولِّ ْيت َمْنُ ْمَ‬
‫‪ (c‬وتحسب ْم َأ ْيقاظا َو ُهْ َرقُود َونُق ِّلب ْم َذات َاليمي َوذات َ‬
‫الشمال َوكلب ْم َباسط َذراع ْيه َبالوصيد َلو َا ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فر ً‬
‫اراَول ُملئتَمْنُ ْمَرع ًباَ(‪)٨١‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اسمَفاعل‬
‫ْ‬
‫نصرَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َينصرَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يبس ُ َ‬
‫ط‬
‫بسطَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يبس ُ َ‬
‫ط‬
‫بُسطَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَاُبس َ‬
‫ط‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪To stretch‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ب ْسطا‬
‫ً‬
‫ب ْسطا‬
‫فهوَباسطَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوَمبسوطَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَالْنيَعنهََلَتبس َ‬
‫ط‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمبسطَمبسطَمبسطةَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫طلعت َعل ْْي ْم َلولِّ ْيت َمْنُ ْمَ‬
‫‪َ (d‬وتحسب ْم َأ ْيقاظا َو ُهْ َرقُود َونُق ِّلب ْم َذات َاليمي َوذات َ‬
‫الشمال َوكلب ْم َباسط َذراع ْيه َبالوصيد َلو َا ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فر ً‬
‫اراَول ُملئتَمْنُ ْمَرع ًباَ(‪)٨١‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫اقَتب َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َيقَتبَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫فعلَماض‬
‫طلعَ‬
‫ا ِّ‬
‫طُلعَ‬
‫ا ُ ِّ‬
‫يطِّلعَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫يطِّلعَ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫‪To climb up and‬‬
‫‪discover‬‬
‫طَل ًعا‬
‫ا ِّ‬
‫طَل ًعا‬
‫ا ِّ‬
‫طل ْعَ‬
‫األمرَمنهَا ِّ‬
‫فهوَمطِّلعَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫فهوَمطِّلعَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫وَالْنيَعنهََلَتطِّل ْ َع‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَم ِّ‬
‫طلعَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ً‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫طلعت َعل ْْي ْم َلولِّ ْيت َمْنُ ْمَ‬
‫‪َ (e‬وَتحسب ْم َأ ْيقاظا َو ُهْ َرقُود َونُق ِّلب ْم َذات َاليمي َوذات َ‬
‫الشمال َوكلب ْم َباسط َذراع ْيه َبالوصيد َلو َا ِّ‬
‫ِّ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فر ً‬
‫اراَولَ ُملئتَمْنُ ْمَرع ًباَ(‪)٨١‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فتحَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َيفتحَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يم َ‬
‫مل َ‬
‫لُ‬
‫فعلَماضَمبنيَعىلَالمجهول‬
‫ملئَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يم َ‬
‫لُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَا ْم َ‬
‫ل‬
‫‪To fill‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫مل ًئا‬
‫ْ‬
‫مل ًئا‬
‫فهوَمالَئَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوَمملُوؤَ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَالْنيَعنهََلَتم َ‬
‫ل‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمملئَمملَمملةَ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 19‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 19:‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َبما َلبث َ‬
‫م َأعل َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َربُك َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأَ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال َ َق‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫هْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثنَا ُ َ‬
‫‪ (a‬وكذل َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ ِ َ َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪َ)٩١‬‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ال‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫َف‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫ت‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ق‬
‫ز‬
‫ر‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ت‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ ِِ‬
‫َُ َََ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫حَََََََََََََ‬
‫فَت َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫فعلَماض‬
‫ثَ‬
‫بع َ َ‬
‫ََ‬
‫ثَ‬
‫ب ُ ِع َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َيفتحَ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫ي ْبع ُ َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ثَ‬
‫يُب َع ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَ ِا ْبع َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِبعثَ ًةَبعثًا‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بعثًاَ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪To appoint, make‬‬
‫‪someone get up‬‬
‫اعثَ‬
‫فهو ََب ِ‬
‫فهوَم ْب ُعوثَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََتبع َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَم ْب ِعثَم ْبعثَم ْبعثَةَ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َبما َلبث َ‬
‫م َأعل َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َربُك َ‬
‫و َبع َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثن َ‬
‫‪ (b‬وكذل َ‬
‫ال َ َق ِ‬
‫مَ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ ِ َ َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ ُ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪َ)٩١‬‬
‫ك ْمَ ِب ِرزقَ ِمنه َُوليت َلط َفَوالَيُش ِِع َنَ ِب‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ ِت‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ light‬فعلَمضارع‬
‫ائ َلَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫ت َ َس َ‬
‫ائ َل َ‬
‫ت َ َس َ‬
‫وئ َلَ‬
‫ت‬
‫س ِ‬
‫ُُ‬
‫ائ ُلَ‬
‫َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َيت َ َس َ‬
‫ائ ُلَ‬
‫َيت َ َس َ‬
‫ائ ُلَ‬
‫يُت َ َس َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ائ َ‬
‫ل‬
‫األمرَمنهَت َ َس َ‬
‫تَسائ ُ ًلَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ً‬
‫تَسائُلَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ائلَ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمُت َ َس َ‬
‫ائلَ‬
‫فهوَمُت َ َس ِ‬
‫ائلَ‬
‫فهوَمُت َ َس َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ائ َ‬
‫ل‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََتت َ َس َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َبما َلبث َ‬
‫م َأعل َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َربُك َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال َ َق‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثنَ ُ َ‬
‫‪ (c‬وكذل َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ ِ َ َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪)٩١‬‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ال‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫َف‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫ت‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ق‬
‫ز‬
‫ر‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ت‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ ِ‬
‫َُ َََ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫فعلَماض ‪َ,‬اسمَفاعلَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َنصر َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ََينصرَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫الَ‬
‫َق َ‬
‫يلَ‬
‫ِق َ‬
‫ولَ‬
‫َي ُق ُ‬
‫الَ‬
‫ي ُ َق ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَق ُ َ‬
‫ل‬
‫ً‬
‫َق ْوالَ‬
‫ً‬
‫َق ْوالَ‬
‫ائ ُلَ‬
‫فهوَ َق ِ‬
‫فهوَم ُقولَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََت ُق َ‬
‫ل‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَم َقالَم َق َ َ‬
‫ال ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َ ِبما َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َرب‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأَ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال َ َق‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثنَ ُ َ‬
‫‪ (d‬وكذل َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪َ)٩١‬‬
‫ك ْمَ ِب ِرزقَ ِمنه َُوليت َلط َفَوالَيُش ِِع َنَ ِب‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ ِت‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعلَماض‬
‫ََسِعَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َي َ ْسمعَ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يلب ُ َ‬
‫ث‬
‫لَ ِب َ َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَ ِالب َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ‬
‫لَ ْبثًا‬
‫‪Stay somewhere‬‬
‫‪for a long time‬‬
‫فهو ََال ِبثَ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََتلب َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمل ِبثَملبثَملبثَةَ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫ت ْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َبما َلبث َ‬
‫م َأعل َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َربُك َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال َ َق‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثنَ ُ َ‬
‫‪ (e‬وكذل َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ ِ َ َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪َ)٩١‬‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫َ‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ال‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫َف‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫ت‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ق‬
‫ز‬
‫ر‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ت‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِقك ْمَهذهَإلَالمدينةَفلينظ ْرَأّياَأزكىَ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ُ ِ‬
‫َُ َََ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ُ َ َ‬
‫ُ َ ِ ِ ِ َ َ ِ َِ َ َ ُ َُ َ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫فعلَماضَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َنصر َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ََينصرَ‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫الَ‬
‫َق َ‬
‫يلَ‬
‫ِق َ‬
‫ولَ‬
‫َي ُق ُ‬
‫الَ‬
‫ي ُ َق ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَق ُ َ‬
‫ل‬
‫ً‬
‫َق ْوالَ‬
‫ً‬
‫َق ْوالَ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَم َقالَم َق َ َ‬
‫ال ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ائ ُلَ‬
‫فهوَ َق ِ‬
‫فهوَم ُقولَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََت ُق َ‬
‫ل‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َبما َلبث َ‬
‫م َأعل َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َربُك َ‬
‫و َبع َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثن َ‬
‫‪ (f‬وكذل َ‬
‫ال َ َق ِ‬
‫مَ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ ِ َ َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ ُ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪َ)٩١‬‬
‫ك ْمَ ِب ِرزقَ ِمنه َُوليت َلط َفَوالَيُش ِِع َنَ ِب‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ ِت‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ََسِعَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َي َ ْسمعَ‬
‫َ ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫يلب ُ َ‬
‫ث‬
‫لَ ِب َ َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَ ِالب َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ‬
‫فعلَماض‬
‫لَ ْبثًا‬
‫‪Stay somewhere‬‬
‫‪for a long time‬‬
‫فهو ََال ِبثَ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََتلب َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمل ِبثَملبثَملبثَةَ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َ ِبما َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َرب‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال َ َق‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثنَ ُ َ‬
‫‪ (g‬وكذل َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪َ)٩١‬‬
‫ك ْمَ ِب ِرزقَ ِمنه َُوليت َلط َفَوالَيُش ِِع َنَ ِب‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ ِت‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فَتحَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ََيفتحَ‬
‫َ َ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ي ْبع ُ َ‬
‫ث‬
‫ثَ‬
‫َب َع َ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ثَ‬
‫ثَ‬
‫يُب َع ُ‬
‫ب ُ ِع َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَ ِا ْبع َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ‬
‫أمرَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫أنتَ ِا ْبعثَ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫أنتَ ِا ْبع ِثيَ‬
‫ِ َ‬
‫أنتماَ ِا ْبعثَاَ‬
‫َ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَم ْبعثَم ْب ِعثَم ْبعثَةَ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫األمرَ‬
‫أنتماَ ِا ْبعثَاَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫بعثًا‬
‫َ‬
‫ب ْعثاًَ‬
‫َ‬
‫اعثَ‬
‫فهو ََب ِ‬
‫فهوَم ْب ُعوثَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََتبع َ‬
‫ث‬
‫َ‬
‫أنتَ ِا ْبعثُواَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫أنتنَ ِابعثنَ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َبما َلبث َ‬
‫م َأعل َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َربُك َ‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأَ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال َ َق‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثنَ ُ َ‬
‫‪ (h‬وكذل َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ ِ َ َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪َ)٩١‬‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫ن‬
‫ِع‬
‫ش‬
‫ي‬
‫َ‬
‫ال‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫َف‬
‫ط‬
‫ل‬
‫ت‬
‫ي‬
‫ل‬
‫و‬
‫َ‬
‫ه‬
‫َ‬
‫ن‬
‫م‬
‫َ‬
‫ق‬
‫ز‬
‫ر‬
‫ب‬
‫َ‬
‫م‬
‫ك‬
‫ت‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَ َلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ ُ َ َِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ ِِ‬
‫َُ َََ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ lightest‬فعلَمضارعَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫َنصرَ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ََينصرَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ين ظ ُ َ‬
‫ر‬
‫َنظَرَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ظر َ‬
‫ظر َ‬
‫ن ِ‬
‫ين َ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَاُنظ ُ ْ َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ْ‬
‫َنظرً ا‬
‫ْ‬
‫َنظرً اَ‬
‫فهو ََنا ِظرَ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوَمنظُورَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََتنظ ُ ْ َ‬
‫ر‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ظرةَ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنه ََمن ِ‬
‫ظر ََمن َ‬
‫ظر ََمن َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َ ِبما َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َرب‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال َ َق‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثنَ ُ َ‬
‫‪ (i‬وكذل َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪َ)٩١‬‬
‫ك ْمَ َِب ِرزقَ ِمنه َُوليت َلط َفَوالَيُش ِِع َنَ ِب‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ ِت‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫مصدر‬
‫ْ‬
‫َنصر َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َينصرَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫ي ْر ُز َُ‬
‫ق‬
‫ر َز َقَ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫قَ‬
‫ر ِز َقَ‬
‫يُر َز ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَاُر ُز َ‬
‫ق‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِرز ًقا‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِرز ًقاَ‬
‫ازقَ‬
‫فهو ََر ِ‬
‫فهوَم ْر ُزوقَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََتر ُز َ‬
‫ق‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَم ْر ِزقَم ْر َزقَم ْر َز َقةَ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َ ِبما َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫م َأَع َل َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َرب‬
‫و َبع َ َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫مَ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫ال َ َق‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثنَ ُ َ‬
‫‪ (j‬وكذل َ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪َ)٩١‬‬
‫ك ْمَ ِب ِرزقَ ِمنه َُو َليت َلط َفَوالَيُش ِِع َنَ ِب‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ ِت‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪ lightest‬فعلَمضارعَ‬
‫م َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َيتعلَمَ‬
‫َتعلَ َ‬
‫َََ ُ‬
‫َ َ‬
‫َفَ‬
‫َتلَط َ‬
‫فَ‬
‫تُل ُ ِ‬
‫ط َ‬
‫َفَ‬
‫َي َتلَط ُ‬
‫َفَ‬
‫ي ُ َت َلط ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫األمرَمنهَ َت َلط َ‬
‫َف‬
‫َتلَط ُ ًفا‬
‫َت َلط ُ ًفاَ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمت َلط َفَ‬
‫َُ‬
‫‪To be‬‬
‫‪careful/subtle‬‬
‫طفَ‬
‫فهوَمُ َتلَ ِ‬
‫فهوَمت َلط َفَ‬
‫َُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََال ََتت َلط َ‬
‫َف‬
‫َ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ً ْ ْ‬
‫تْ َف ْ‬
‫ابعثُواَ‬
‫م َبما َلبث َ‬
‫م َأعل َ‬
‫ض َي ْومَ َ َقالُوا َربُك َ‬
‫و َبع َ‬
‫تْ َ َقالُوا َلَ ِبثنَا َيوما َأ َ‬
‫م َلَ ِبث ُ َ‬
‫ك َ‬
‫ائلَ َ ِمَنُ َ‬
‫م َ َق َ َ‬
‫اهْ َلِيتَساءلُوا َب ْي ََنُ ْ َ‬
‫ك َبعثن َ‬
‫‪ (k‬وكذل َ‬
‫ال َ َق ِ‬
‫مَ َ‬
‫ُ َ َ ُ ِ َ َِ ُ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َِ َ ََ َ ُ َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ َ َ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ ْ‬
‫ك ْمَأَح ًداَ(‪)٩١‬‬
‫ك ْمَ ِب ِرزقَ ِمنه َُوليت َلط َفَوالَيُش ِِع َنَ ِب‬
‫طعا ًماَفَليأ ِت‬
‫كىَ‬
‫ك ْمَ َه ِذ ِهَ ِإ َلَالم ِدينَ ِةَفَلينظ ُ ْرَأَ ُّياَأَز‬
‫أَح َدكُ ْمَ ِبو ِر ِق‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِع ‪َfor this sarf practice, and look at it as‬نَ ‪Ignore the‬‬
‫‪ :‬يُش ِ َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ب َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َيخ ِ َ‬
‫أَخ َ ََ‬
‫بُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِإشع ً‬
‫فهوَمش ِ َ‬
‫ِع‬
‫ارا‬
‫يُش ِ َ‬
‫ِع‬
‫أَش َِعَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِإشع ً‬
‫فهوَمش َِعَ‬
‫اراَ‬
‫يُش َِعَ‬
‫أُش ِِعَ‬
‫َ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫َ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫ِعْ‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالَنيَعنه ََالَتُش ِ َ‬
‫األمرَمنهَأَش ِ َ‬
‫ِع‬
‫ْ‬
‫وَالظرفَمنهَمش َِعَ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sarf – Kahf Ayah 20‬‬
‫‪Sarf of Kahf Ayah 20:‬‬
‫حواْ ِإذًاْأهب ًداْ(‪)٠٢‬‬
‫‪ِ (a‬إ َ هّنمْ ِإنْيظ ههرواْع هلي‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُجُوكُمْأهوْي ُ ِع ُ‬
‫يدوكُمْ ِفْ ِم َله ِ ِ‬
‫كمْ هير ُ‬
‫ِتمْ هولهنْتُف ِل ُ‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫حْْْْْْْْْْْْْ‬
‫فهت ْ‬
‫ه ه‬
‫‪ lightest‬فعلْمضارع‬
‫ظ ههر ْ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ظ ُ ِهرْ‬
‫ه‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْيفتحْ‬
‫ه ه ُ‬
‫يظ ههرْ‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫يظ ههرْ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ظُه ً‬
‫ورا‬
‫ُ‬
‫اهرْ‬
‫ظ ِ‬
‫فهوْ ه‬
‫ظُه ً‬
‫وراْ‬
‫ُ‬
‫فهوْمظ ُهورْ‬
‫ه‬
‫وْالهنيْعنه هَْل هْتظ ههرْ‬
‫األمرْمنهْ ِاظ ههرْ‬
‫وْالظرفْمنهْمظ ههرْمظ ِهرْمظ ههرةْ‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫حواْ ِإذًاْأهب ًداْ(‪ْ)٠٢‬‬
‫‪ِ (b‬إ َ هّنمْ ِإنْيظ ههرواْع هلي‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُجُوكُمْأهوْي ُ ِع ُ‬
‫يدوكُمْ ِفْ ِم َله ِ ِ‬
‫كمْ هير ُ‬
‫ِتمْ هولهنْتُف ِل ُ‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪ lightest‬فعلْمضارع‬
‫رْْْْْْْْْْْْْ‬
‫هنص ْ‬
‫ه ه‬
‫ْرجمْ‬
‫ه ه ه‬
‫جم ْ‬
‫ر ِ‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْينصرْ‬
‫ه ُ ُ‬
‫يرجمْ‬
‫ه ُ ُ‬
‫يرجمْ‬
‫ُ ه ُ‬
‫األمرْمنهْاُرجمْ‬
‫ُ‬
‫‪To stone to death‬‬
‫رُج ًا‬
‫ه‬
‫رُج ًاْ‬
‫ه‬
‫اجمْ‬
‫فهو هْر ِ‬
‫فهوْمرجومْ‬
‫ه ُ‬
‫وْالهنيْعنه هَْل هْترجمْ‬
‫ُ‬
‫جمْمرجمْمر هُجةْ‬
‫وْالظرفْمنه هْمر ِ‬
‫ه ه ه ه‬
‫حواْ ِإذًاْأهب ًداْ(‪ْ)٠٢‬‬
‫‪ِ (c‬إ َ هّنمْ ِإنْيظ ههرواْع هلي‬
‫ُ‬
‫ُجُوكُمْأهوْي ُ ِع ُ‬
‫يدوكُمْ ِفْ ِم َله ِ ِ‬
‫كمْ هير ُ‬
‫ِتمْ هولهنْتُف ِل ُ‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ه‬
‫ُ‬
‫بْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ‬
‫أهخ ه ه‬
‫‪ light‬فعلْمضارع‬
‫ْأهف هلحْ‬
‫ه‬
‫أُف ِلحْ‬
‫ه‬
‫ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ ْيخ ِ ْ‬
‫بُ‬
‫ُ‬
‫يف ِلحْ‬
‫ُ ُ‬
‫يف هلحْ‬
‫ُ ه‬
‫‪To succeed‬‬
‫ِإف هَل ً‬
‫حا‬
‫ِإف هَل ً‬
‫حا ْ‬
‫األمرْمنهْأهف ِلحْ‬
‫فهوْمف هلحْ‬
‫ُ‬
‫وْالهنيْعنه هَْلْتُف ِلحْ‬
‫وْالظرفْمنهْمفلهحْ‬
‫ُ‬
‫ْ‬
‫فهوْمف ِلحْ‬
‫ُ‬